Home

TransAct Technologies ITHERM 280 User's Manual

1. 0384 Greek tonos 0411 Cyrillic capital letter be 0385 Greek dialvtika tonos 0412 Cyrillic capital letter ve 0386 Greek capital letter alpha with tonos 0413 Cyrillic capital letter ghe 0387 Greek ano teleia 0414 Cyrillic capital letter de 0388 Greek capital letter epsilon with tonos 0415 Cyrillic capital letter ie 0389 Greek capital letter eta with tonos 0416 Cyrillic capital letter zhe 038a Greek capital letter iota with tonos 0417 Cyrillic capital letter ze 038c Greek capital letter omicron with tonos 0418 Cyrillic capital letter i 038e Greek capital letter upsilon with tonos 0419 Cyrillic capital letter short i 038f Greek capital letter omega with tonos 041a Cyrillic capital letter ka 0390 Greek small letter iota with dialytika and tonos 041b Cyrillic capital letter el 0391 Greek capital letter aloha 041c Cyrillic capital letter em 0392 Greek capital letter beta 041d Cyrillic capital letter en 0393 Greek capital letter gamma 041e Cyrillic capital letter o 0394 Greek capital letter delta 041f Cyrillic capital letter pe 0395 Greek capital letter epsilon 0420 Cyrillic capital letter er 0396 Greek capital letter zeta 0421 Cyrillic capital letter es 0397 Greek capital letter eta 0422 Cyrillic capital letter te 0
2. 00e2 Latin small letter a with circumflex accent 0139 Latin capital letter with acute accent 00e3 Latin small letter a with tilde 013a Latin small letter l with acute accent 00e4 Latin small letter a with diaeresis 013b Latin capital letter l with cedilla 00e5 Latin small letter a with ring above 013c Latin small letter with cedilla 00e6 Latin small letter a with e 013d Latin capital letter with hacek 00e7 Latin small letter c with cedilla 013e Latin small letter with hacek 00e8 Latin small letter e with grave accent 013f Latin capital letter l with middle dot 00e9 Latin small letter e with acute accent 0140 Latin small letter with middle dot 00ea Latin small letter e with circumflex accent 0141 Latin capital letter with stroke 00eb Latin small letter e with diaeresis 0142 Latin small letter l with stroke 00ec Latin small letter i with grave accent 0143 Latin capital letter n with acute accent 00ed Latin small letter i with acute accent 0144 Latin small letter n with acute accent 00ee Latin small letter i with circumflex accent 0145 Latin capital letter n with cedilla 00ef Latin small letter i with diaeresis 0146 Latin small letter n with cedilla 00f0 Latin small letter eth 0147 Latin capital letter n with hacek oof
3. 3062 HIRAGANA LETTER DI 30C2 KATAKANA LETTER DI 3063 HIRAGANA LETTER SMALL TU 30C3 KATAKANA LETTER SMALL TU 3064 HIRAGANA LETTER TU 30C4 KATAKANA LETTER TU 3065 HIRAGANA LETTER DU 30C5 KATAKANA LETTER DU 3066 HIRAGANA LETTER TE 30C6 KATAKANA LETTER TE 3067 HIRAGANA LETTER DE 30C7 KATAKANA LETTER DE 3068 HIRAGANA LETTER TO 30C8 KATAKANA LETTER TO 3069 HIRAGANA LETTER DO 30C9 KATAKANA LETTER DO 306A HIRAGANA LETTER NA 30CA KATAKANA LETTER NA 306B HIRAGANA LETTER NI 30CB KATAKANA LETTER NI 306C HIRAGANA LETTER NU 30CC KATAKANA LETTER NU 306D HIRAGANA LETTER NE 30CD KATAKANA LETTER NE 306E HIRAGANA LETTER NO 30CE KATAKANA LETTER NO 306F HIRAGANA LETTER HA 30CF KATAKANA LETTER HA 3070 HIRAGANA LETTER BA 30D0 KATAKANA LETTER BA 3071 HIRAGANA LETTER PA 30D1 KATAKANA LETTER PA 3072 HIRAGANA LETTER HI 30D2 KATAKANA LETTER HI 3073 HIRAGANA LETTER BI 30D3 KATAKANA LETTER BI 3074 HIRAGANA LETTER PI 30D4 KATAKANA LETTER PI 3075 HIRAGANA LETTER HU 30D5 KATAKANA LETTER HU 3076 HIRAGANA LETTER BU 30D6 KATAKANA LETTER BU 3077 HIRAGANA LETTER PU 30D7 KATAKANA LETTER PU 3078 HIRAGANA LETTER HE 30D8 KATAKANA LETTER HE 3079 HIRAGANA LETTER BE 30D9 KATAKANA LETTER BE 307A HIRAGANA LETTER PE 30DA KATAKANA LETTER PE 307B HIRAGANA LETTER HO 30DB KATAKANA LETTER HO 307C HIRAG
4. Unicode Range Use 0x0000 0x007F CO Controls and Basic Latin 0x0000 0x001F CO controls 0x0020 0x007F ASCII 0x0080 OxOOFF C1 Controls and Latin 1 Supplement 0x00A0 OxOOFF Latini 0x0100 0x017F Latin Extended A 0x0180 0x024F Latin Extended B 0x0250 OxO2AF IPA Extensions 0x02B0 Ox02FF Spacing Modifier Letters 0x0300 0x036F Combining Diacritical Marks 0x0370 0x03FF Greek 0x0400 0x04FF Cyrillic 0x0500 0x052F Unassigned zone 0500 052F 0x0530 0x058F Armenian 0x0590 0x05FF Hebrew 0x0600 0x06FF Arabic 0x0700 0x08FF Unassigned 0700 08FF 0x0900 0x097F Devanagari Based on ISCII 1988 0x0980 0x09FF Bengali Based on ISCII 1988 0x0A00 Ox0A7F Gurmukhi Based on ISCII 1988 0x0A80 OxOAFF Gujarati Based on ISCII 1988 0x0B00 0x0B7F Oriya Based on ISCII 1988 0x0B80 OxOBFF Tamil Based on ISCII 1988 0x0C00 OxOC7F Telugu Based on ISCII 1988 0x0C80 OxOCFF Kannada Based on ISCII 1988 0x0D00 0x0D7F Malayalam Based on ISCII 1988 0x0D80 OxODFF Unassigned zone 0D80 ODFF 0x0D80 OxODFF Sinhala Pre Unicode 2 0 0x0E00 OxOE7F Thai Based on TIS 620 2529 0x0E80 OxOEFF Lao Based on TIS 620 2529 OxOFOO OxOF7F Burmese Pre Unicode 2 0 OxOFOO OxOFBF Tibetan OxOF80O OxOFFF Khmer Pre Unicode 2 0 0x1000 0x105F Tibetan Pre Unicode 2 0 0x1060 0x109F Mongolian Pre Unicode 2 0 0x10A0 0x10FF Georgian 0x1100 0x11FF Hangul Jamo 0x1100 Ox11F9 Korean combining alphabet 0x1200 0x137F Ethiopian Post
5. Description ASCII Hex IPCL equivalent Page code Process horizontal graphics data ESC h lt color gt 1BH 68H none 127 lt length gt lt format gt lt data gt Set horizontal graphic mode ESC lt m gt lt 0 gt 1BH 2AH none 128 lt 0 gt User Store Begin named macro record ESC US b 1BH 1FH amp UB 132 lt Name gt lt 0 gt 62H lt Name gt lt 0 gt Save macro data in user store ESC US m 1BH 1FH amp UM 133 lt Name gt lt 0 gt 6DH lt Name gt lt 0 gt End named macro record ESC US e 1BH 1FH amp UG 133 lt Name gt lt 0 gt 65H lt Name gt lt 0 gt Load item from user store ESC US 1BH 1FH amp UL 134 lt Name gt lt 0 gt 6CH lt Name gt lt 0 gt Save user defined characters ESC US c 1BH 1FH amp UC 133 lt Name gt lt 0 gt 63H lt Name gt lt 0 gt Run macro data from user store ESC US r 1BH 1FH amp UR 134 lt Name gt lt 0 gt 72H lt Name gt lt 0 gt Flag item as a start up macro ESC US s 1BH 1FH amp US 134 lt Name gt lt 0 gt 6DH lt Name gt lt 0 gt Delete item from user store ESC US d 1BH 1FH amp UD 134 lt Name gt lt 0 gt 64H lt Name gt lt 0 gt Flush information from user store ESC US f ALL 1BH 1FH amp UF 135 lt 0 gt 66H 00H Transfer user store to extended user store ESC US t ALL 1BH 1FH amp UF 135 lt 0 gt 66H 00H Report on user store ESC US q 1BH 1FH amp UQ 136 lt Name
6. Name Epson IBM Code Page Insertion Point hex 850 26 850 0xD5 Turkey 857 57 857 OXD5 Win Cyrillic 52 1022 0X88 Win Turkish 51 1021 0X80 Win Greek 50 1020 0X80 Win Hebrew 62 1032 0X80 Win Baltic 68 1034 0X80 Table 13 Euro Character Substitution Matrix 28 07764 Rev C Page 103 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide ESC S ASCII Redefine character set ESC S lt L gt lt L gt lt Bc gt lt Tir gt lt TiH gt lt Ta gt lt Tay gt lt Ta gt lt T3H gt L KIM leo Hexadecimal 1BH 5BH 53H Decimal IPCL Description lt 27 gt lt 91 gt lt 83 gt none The ESC f S lt L gt lt Ly gt lt Bc gt lt Tir gt lt Tin gt lt Tar gt lt Tou gt lt Ta gt lt T3H gt lt Ta gt lt TnhH gt command allows an application to replace or redefine the active character set mapping in the printer where lt L gt lt Ly gt defines the total length of the following data lt L gt 256 lt Ly gt 1 2 the total number of characters to be replaced lt Bc gt is the first character in the active map to be replaced lt TiH gt lt T1L gt is the internal address of the replacement character image The mapping of a print pattern to each character address is referred to a code page or character set At any given time the printer character set is comprised of 256 characters Each character is addressed by an 8 bit value generally referred to as a character code For example if you want to
7. 2 e nnnnnnzennnzzni 58 Hex d mp Modeen hess cnet sche Seka at a Get gew ee ta denen nce e fit sj 60 Level ODIAGHOSIIES Ai ed ari ii da b dr l G a rib nst ids d d b Da 61 Boot Loader MIGUEL A at 61 28 07764 Rev C Page 5 Configuring Your iTherm 280 Printer 63 Configuration Mode Overview nn nrnnnnnmnnnn ann n tna 65 Most Frequent Configuration Incompatibilities ecceeeeeeeeee eee eeeeenteeeeeeeeeeteees 65 How to Change Configuration Settings 65 Entering into Configuration Mode e 65 Using COMTI GURL ORVMM OCC cass oc et A a Cate acl A g a wn och ects oi et Cah ta i 66 Remote COnnQUratlO Ms sieb bie stat da dei a 69 Setting p or Color Paper ii a A a Maan eees 69 GUSTOM 01e sr i a a ra ee seieaedels 69 Programming Codes BEB BBR RBBB BERBER RRR RRR RRR eee eee ee ee aa 71 Control Codes Overview LL L is i cagsduacetc Sata cur sndutessesdhacurscdutassscenhcegeeduavevsdecniere 73 N menclat re sad a l cee soe Rauch eas acres betes 73 Standard Emilatio f kisi er Senn ty Semen ty cone treme ee itia i niideti hr rene Te nena 74 PEL COIE S ia d A EA 74 EPOS Emil abo Meee a A a b a G 74 SOA E E res E E as ius dateadeews tay daidvieiat EE E 74 lthaca Microline Emulationi cisie cissdecs sscceescdsssecedscstsea eko asa cds sea ea 74 Application Developrietiti wie ei bis dd e al ae ada ads 74 Ithaca Control Codes and Commands s 2csiveses aie setere tees ead l eel eels 75 PeOS Printe
8. Table 10 Character Pitch This command disables any right side spacing set by the ESC V command In addition when font changes are made the character pitch is maintained Page 94 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes ESC V Set inter character spacing Mode Global ASCII ESC V lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 56H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 86 gt lt n gt IPCL none EPOS ESC SP lt n gt Description The ESC V lt n gt command sets inter character spacing by adding white space between characters The value of lt n gt sets the spacing in 216ths of an inch The printer can only set the spacing in 208ths of an inch and converts 216ths to the nearest 208th of an inch Each font has a basic size and the inter character spacing value is added to the basic size Therefore the affect of this command on characters per inch cpi will depend on the font selected Note 1 The ESC V lt n gt command disables any pitch settings established by pitch set commands that establish a cpi like ESC P lt n gt After a set right side spacing command is issued the pitch will vary with font selection Font selections use the current active right side spacing Note 2 With the inter character spacing command the pitch cannot be set less than the font size Therefore it is not as effective as the pitch command ESC P lt n gt The following table lists the cpi equivalent for several
9. IPCL amp YX17 or amp YX18 EPOS ESC y lt n gt Where n 17 Requests the printer to enter remote OFF 18 Requests the printer to exit remote OFF Description Inquiry ENQ commands are accepted and answered in remote power down mode The printer reactivates if the button is pressed or a power up command is received printer remembers it is in power down mode but does not reactivate the communications link The button must be pushed to return the printer to full operation Note 1 If power is lost after the power down command is issued the Note 2 This command is not available in STAR mode 28 07764 Rev C Page 169 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Documented Extended Control commands The iTherm 280 has a number of Extended Control commands designed to make operation and maintenance of the printer easier for the host application For further details refer to the ITherm Extended Control discussion in Chapter 8 SOH Begin multi drop control ASCII SOH lt n gt Hexadecimal 01H lt n gt Decimal lt 1 gt lt n gt IPCL none Where lt n gt isthe printer address Addresses of A B or C are configurable Description The printer must be addressed in multi drop mode SOH lt n gt is the addressing command If the printer is configured with an address of A it operates when addressed When any other address is sent to the printer it enters print suppress mode An address of
10. Load item from user store ESC US Name lt 0 gt 1BH 1FH 6CH lt 27 gt lt 31 gt lt 108 gt amp UL lt Name gt lt 0 gt GS 0 lt Name gt lt 0 gt is from one to 15 characters and must be null terminated The ESC US lt Name gt lt 0 gt command loads the referenced item into the appropriate structure If the item referenced is a user defined character set it is loaded into the current user character definition which does not affect the active state of user defined characters If it is a macro it is loaded into the macro buffer but it is not inserted into the data stream ESC g lt 0 gt inserts the macro buffer into the data stream If the named item does not exist the command does nothing The terminating lt 0 gt may be replaced with an 8 or redefined See ESC EM T lt n gt or amp UT gt n gt on page 136 Run macro data from user store ESC US r lt Name gt lt 0 gt 1BH 1FH 72H lt 27 gt lt 31 gt lt 114 gt amp UR lt Name gt lt 0 gt GS 0 lt Name gt lt 0 gt is from one to 15 characters and must be null terminated The ESC US r lt Name gt lt 0 gt command loads the referenced macro into the macro buffer The macro buffer is then inserted into the data stream If the named item does not exist or is not a macro nothing happens The terminating lt 0 gt may be replaced with an 8 or redefined See ESC EM T lt n gt or amp UT lt n gt on page 136
11. Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide iTherm Citizen Emulation The iTherm 280 printer uses a subset of the Epson emulation for Citizen iTherm Star Emulation The iTherm 280 printer has Star emulation that will allow the iTherm to replace most Star printers with similar features to the iTherm Star used a real time cash drawer command that uses features patented by Epson If you use the Star real time cash drawer command you must use the added cost licensed firmware iTherm Axiohm Emulation The iTherm 280 printer has an Axiohm emulation that closely matches the A793 and A794 printers The Axiohm command set for the most part is a superset of the Epson emulation Because several of the Axiohm commands make use of features that patented by Epson you must use the added cost licensed firmware to use these commands If you don t need those commands and features using the standard iTherm firmware will result in a lower cost printer Page 238 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Color Graphics 28 07764 Rev C Page 239 This page intentionally left blank Page 240 Rev C 28 07764 ITherm 280 Color Graphics iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Printing Graphics The iTherm 280 Printer has bit image graphic capability and a full PC compatible graphic character set The bit image format is similar to that used on other personal computer printers Three modes of operation are available Single density is the fastest
12. Response ACK lt 9 gt 06H 09H The buffer is empty NAK lt 9 gt 15H 09H The buffer is not empty ENQ lt 10 gt Request printer reset ASCII ENQ lt 10 gt Hexadecimal 05H 0AH Decimal lt 5 gt lt 10 gt Function Reset printer Response Serial Parallel ACK lt 10 gt 06H OAH No response The command was accepted NAK lt 10 gt 15H OAH The command was rejected Description The ENQ lt 10 gt EPOS DLE ENQ lt n gt commands and the INIT pin all have the same effect and are referred to as reset commands To prevent data loss the printer tries to finish printing the buffered data When operator intervention with the printer is required for any reason data loss results The reset operation is saved until the printer goes idle In the case of a slip request command or any command that waits for the operator the printer is idle If the printer is idle and a reset command is received or pending the printer resets and the buffer clears If the host resets an operator intervention operation any remaining buffered data is cleared 28 07764 Rev C Page 173 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide When the printer receives a reset command the printer goes off line and or busy until the reset completes In serial mode the printer may have information in its high speed buffer that was received after the reset command but before the reset was processed If the host application continues to send information to the pri
13. iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Electronic J ournal The iTherm 280 has the capability to store electronic journal data in flash memory There are two ways entries can be made into the electronic journal The first is by selecting the journal station The second is by requesting that print data be placed into the electronic journal Before the electronic journal can be used it must be configured and initialized Configuring the Electronic Journal The iTherm 280 has about 1024K bytes of flash that can be assigned to the electronic journal or to extended user store The 1024K is segmented in 64K segments which may be assigned to either to electronic journal or extended user store That is you can assign 2 segments or 128K to the electronic journal and the remaining segments will be assigned to extended user store When electronic journal is in use you can not reconfigure the configuration of the extended flash memory If you want to reconfigure the flash the electronic journal must be erased To erase the electronic journal you must know the password that was assigned when it was initialized When printers are initially configured by TransAct the extended flash is erased and partitioned but not initialized Before you use the electronic journal you must initialize it CAUTION You can use the extended user store without initializing the electronic journal If any data has been stored in the extended user store
14. iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide ITherm 280 Color Graphics ESC ESC 3 lt 27 gt ESC a lt l gt lt 201 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 187 gt CR LF lt 186 gt ITHACA PRINTERS lt 186 gt CR LF lt 186 gt lt 186 gt CR LF lt 200 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 205 gt lt 188 gt CR LF ESC a lt 0 gt ESC 0 ESC P lt 15 gt CR LF ST 2000 OP 00067 TE 021 0035 CR LF KLEENEX FAM D04 QTY 1 1 68 J CR LF RITZ DO1 QTY 1 2 50 D CR LF CHIPS DOT QTY 1 1 50 D CR LF STORAGE BAG D04 QTY 1 1 50 J CR LF SUB TOTAL 7 18 CR LF SALES TAX 1 50 CR LF Hoes CR LF TOTAL 7 68 CR LF CASH TEND 20 00 CR LF CHANGE DUE 12 23 CR LF CR LF Figure 18 Example Commands for a Sample Receipt Page 242 Rev C 28 07764 ITherm 280 Color Graphics iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide ITHACA PRINTERS CHIPS 09 STORAGE BAG 00 x LisstAaLiLimea Sota most
15. Bar Code Set height 147 Bar Code Set Justification Print Direction 148 Bar Codes 139 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Index Begin Italics 112 Bi directional Printing Beginning 126 Bit Image Mode Selecting 209 Bit Image Command 209 Boot Loader Mode 61 Buffer 306 Carriage Return 82 Cash Drawer 1 Status Inquire 172 Cash drawer Opening 163 Change User Store Terminator 136 Changing Interface Cards 39 Character attributes 107 Character Code Page Setting 101 Character Code table Selecting 196 Character Code Table Selecting 198 Character Commands 193 Character Pitch Setting 94 279 Character Set Redefining 104 Character Spacing Setting 193 Clear Buffer s 225 Code Page Definitions 323 Color Graphics 245 Color Mode Turning on off 198 Commands User store 132 Communication Features 318 Parallel Port 304 Serial Port 309 Communications Interface 30 Configuration Remote 69 Configuration Control Extending 168 Configuration Mode Overview 65 Connecting Communication Cables 42 Connecting Power 41 Control Character Printing 102 Control Codes Overview 73 Control Codes and Commands 75 Control Feature Setting 167 Cover Open Status Inquire 173 Current Requirements 30 Cut Mode Cut paper Selecting 223 Data pass through 318 Display Pass Through 31 316 Display pass through 318 Double Density Graphics Full Speed Printing 124 Double Density Graphics Hal
16. ESC d lt n gt Feed lt n gt lines at current spacing 87 ESC d lt n gt Print and feed lt n gt lines 191 ESC D lt n gt lt n gt lt n3 gt lt n gt 0 Set horizontal tab stops 83 ESC D lt n gt lt n gt NUL Set horizontal tab positions 207 ESC e lt n gt Print and reverse feed lt n gt lines 191 ESC E lt n gt Turn on off emphasized mode 199 ESC E Begin emphasized print 110 ESC F End emphasized print 111 ESC f Select receipt station 115 116 119 120 121 122 ESC g lt 0 gt Process user macro 138 ESC g lt 1 gt Start macro record 130 138 ESC g lt 2 gt Stop macro record 130 138 ESC g lt 3 gt Stop macro record and save 138 ESC G lt n gt Turn on off double strike mode 200 ESC G Begin enhanced print 110 ESC h lt color gt lt length gt lt format gt lt data gt Process color graphics 127 ESC h lt color gt lt length gt lt format gt lt data gt Process horizontal graphics 127 ESC H End enhanced print 110 ESC I lt n gt Set print quality mode 96 ESC i Partial knife cut 223 ESC J lt n gt Fine line feed 85 ESC J lt n gt Fine linefeed 151 152 153 154 ESC J lt n gt Print and feed paper 192 ESC j Print and reverse feed 192 ESC K lt n gt Print and reverse feed lt n gt lines 192 ESC K lt n gt lt n gt Print single density graphics 123 ESC L lt n gt lt n gt Print half speed double densi
17. Flag item as a start up macro ESC US s lt Name gt lt 0 gt 1BH 1FH 73H lt 27 gt lt 31 gt lt 115 gt amp US lt Name gt lt 0 gt GS 0 lt Name gt lt 0 gt is from one to 15 characters and must be null terminated The ESC US s lt Name gt lt 0 gt command flags the referenced item to be processed at startup Only one user character definition and one macro may be flagged to run at startup Note If a character definition is loaded at startup it is automatically made active The terminating lt 0 gt may be replaced with an amp or redefined See ESC EM T lt n gt or amp UT lt n gt on page136 Delete item from user store ESC US d lt Name gt lt 0 gt 1BH 1FH 64H lt 27 gt lt 31 gt lt 100 gt Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes IPCL EPOS Description Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Function ASCII Or Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description 28 07764 amp UD lt Name gt lt 0 gt GS 1 lt Name gt lt 0 gt is from one to 15 characters and must be null terminated The ESC US d lt Name gt lt 0 gt command removes an item from user store and frees up space If the item does not exist the command does nothing The terminating lt 0 gt may be replaced with an 8 or redefined See ESC EM T lt n gt or amp UT gt n gt on page 136 Transfer all items from user store to ex
18. PRINT 1 CHR 255 CHR 255 CHR 255 CHR 255 REM Send 8 bytes of image PRINT 1 CHR 255 CHR 255 CHR 255 CHR 255 REM data Page 232 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Function Print User Defined Bit Image ASCII GS 0 lt Name gt lt 0 gt lt m gt Hexadecimal 1DH 30H lt Name gt OH lt m gt Decimal lt 29 gt lt 48 gt lt Name gt lt 0 gt lt m gt Range lt Name gt a 15 byte maximum length name to identify the image Description GS 0 prints a bit image from storage in the nonvolatile memory pool The name of the bit image can be from one to 15 bytes long and contain any alphanumeric characters as well as spaces GS searches the nonvolatile memory pool for the first occurrence of the image identified by lt Name gt If the image is found it will be printed If the image cannot be found the command will be ignored The following basic example demonstrates how to print the stored bit image named MY IMAGE PRINT 1 CHR 29 CHR 48 REM Enter the GS 0 command PRINT 1 MY IMAGE CHR 0 CHR 0 REM Enter the image name Where lt m gt selects a mode from the table below Decimal Vertical Dot Density Horizontal Dot dpi Density dpi 00 0 Normal 203 203 01 1 Double wide 203 101 02 2 Double high 101 203 03 3 Quadruple 101 101 Function Erase single entrv from nonvolatile memorv EPOS ONLV ASCII GS 1 lt Name gt lt 0 gt Hexadecima
19. RS l command requests that a formatted text directory be returned from the printer Each line is null terminated Erase all files in a partition All ESC RS X lt p gt 1BH 1EH 58H lt 27 gt lt 30 gt lt 88 gt selects the partition 0 System 1 User The ESC RS X command requests that the selected partition be reformatted Reformatting the system partition lt 0 gt is not recommended as it will erase all fonts and render the printer unusable De fragment the file system All ESC RS F 1BH 1EH 46H lt 27 gt lt 30 gt lt 70 gt The ESC RS F command forces the file system to go through the file system and clean up deleted file sectors All sectors flagged for deletion are actually erased and consolidated when this command is issued Note File space is not necessarily freed up by a file delete Sectors may be marked for deletion but still be present but inactive in the file system These sectors take up flash space Each cluster has a fixed number of sectors and if the number of deleted sectors in a cluster exceed a predefined threshold the cluster is de fragmented automatically 28 07764 This command forces all clusters to be de fragmented Rev C Page 287 ITherm 280 File System iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Function Verify files All ASCII ESC RS V Hexadecimal 1BH 1EH 56H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 30 gt lt 86 gt Description The ESC RS V opens and reads the VERIFY CFG file This
20. chapter 10 iTherm 280 Extended Printer Control 28 07764 Rev C Page 289 This page intentionally left blank Page 290 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide I Therm Extended Printer Control The iTherm 280 printer has a number of Extended Control commands that allow an application to better track and maintain the printer These commands are in all emulations The printer maintains a log of printer activity This activity may be returned to the host with the ESC T command This command returns a T followed by four binary bits that make up a 32 bit unsigned integer The description of the command below describes the format in full The printer also contains a number of commands that will force the printer to perform specific functions to help maintain the printer or print information about the printer The functions available are 1 Print Current Configuration 2 Print current log totals functions are performed by these basic commands Do not attempt to use any undocumented version of these commands The extended diagnostics commands may affect the print quality and performance of the printer In some cases the commands may degrade the performance of the print cartridge or mechanism Note Each of these commands follow the ESC or ESCy format Other Function Read and Return Totals ASCII ESC T lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 7EH 54H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 126 gt lt 84 gt lt n gt D
21. command is received a new record is started When journal mode is exited the record is finished closed and the link updated This journal mode is intended to be printed at a later time No printer control codes are allowed in the journal Only CR HT and LF commands are allowed Any other control character will end the journal record Use EOT or NUL to provide the most graceful exit from journal mode The other way to place information in the electronic journal is with carbon copy mode In this mode select information sent to the validation or receipt station is carbon copied into the electronic journal A record is started with the Electronic Journal Begin command and ended with the Electronic Journal End command There is an Electronic Journal Suspend and Electronic Journal Resume which allows some information not to be saved esc P lt 12 esc 1 lt 1 gt esc 0 esc a lt 1 gt ESC lt 4 gt lt 0 gt lt 0 gt lt 0 gt lt 34 gt lt 2 gt ESC c lt 1 gt QUICK MART CR LF ESC lt 4 gt lt 0 gt lt 0 gt lt 0 gt lt 17 gt lt 1 gt 1234 Rti Anytown CT CR LF esc c lt 0 gt esc 1 lt 0 gt 203 123 4567 cr 1f esc P lt 15 gt esc a lt 0 gt CR LF esc 1 lt 3 gt Start journal record Date 0 Time 0 cr lf ST 2000 OP 00067 TE 021 0035 CR LF esc 1 lt 2 gt Suspend the record KLEENEX FAM D04 QTY 1 1 68 J CR L
22. it will be lost if the extended flash is repartitioned CAUTION The printer does not stop if the electronic journal runs out of memory If the printer were to stop there would be no way for the host to print and clear the journal The host system should monitor the Journal with the ENQ lt 25 gt command This command will return the electronic journal status and report how much memory is remaining See page 154 When the free electronic journal space is less than a predetermined amount the journal should be printed or retrieved and then reinitialized Electronic Journal Security Electronic journal security is provided by applying a password to the erase feature of the electronic journal Additionally there is a factory set configuration that disables the ability for the operator to print the journal through the keypad It is possible to assign a blank password to the electronic journal If this is done either through the keypad or by host control the manual print mode will be allowed to erase and reinitialize the journal 9 It must be noted that the iTherm 280 does not maintain the current time or date If a journal entry is to contain the time and or date the host system must transfer this as printable text 19 The amount of free flash depends on the version of code installed and the amount of flash used for enhanced language support 28 07764 Rev C Page 149 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide It is
23. lt m gt Print single user defined bit image 235 GS Ar t m Execute macro 230 GS Delete start up macro definition 231 GS 0 lt Name gt lt 0 gt Print user defined bit image 233 GS 1 lt Name gt lt 0 gt Erase single entry from nonvolatile memory 233 GS 3 Query nonvolatile memory pool information 235 GS 5 Erase all entries from nonvolatile memory pool 233 GS 6 lt Name gt lt 0 gt Save user defined character set 235 GS 7 lt Name gt lt 0 gt Select user defined character set 235 GS f lt n gt Select font for HRI characters 222 GS H lt n gt Select printing position of HRI characters 221 GS h lt n gt Set bar code height 221 GS k lt m gt lt d gt lt d gt NUL Print bar code 220 GS L lt n gt lt n gt Set left margin 207 GS w lt n gt Set bar code width 222 GS W lt n gt lt n gt Set printing area width 207 Home Returning 208 Horizontal Motion Control 83 Horizontal Position Setting 84 Horizontal Tab 83 Horizontal Tab Positions Setting 207 Horizontal tab Stops Setting 83 Horizontal Tab Setting 206 IEEE 1284 buffer Clearing 173 Indicator Lights 56 Indicators Fault 56 Initialize maintenance counter 228 Initialize the Printer 163 224 Ink Cartridges Ordering 341 Inquire Commands 172 Installing Cables 41 Installing New Interface Cards 40 Installing Paper 43 Intercharacter Spacing Setting 95 International Character Set Selecting 10
24. nn 186 Supported TM T90 Commands vis osencscctskitectuar tants nia derdtcantakutedeenticuraciti aos 187 TM T88 TM T90 and ESC POS Command Descriptions s ssseseemensnnznnnznzznnenen 191 Print and Feed CommandS as fsb osadircnes ets neataw sg cearedunens Rene aeaeia teat obra luarv ei enred sue 191 Line Spacing CommandS wees ie iii ise a a e B dies ada le 193 Page 6 Rev C 28 07764 Character COMMANAS e AE E E E E E E E E EE E E E EE 193 Panel Button Commands rete i a 202 Paper Sensor COMMANGS vis crce2c es cevtactadted ee seaenteentaccuiehesettaen tents 203 Print Position COmin ARAB ku sissies occ cats bags seed adele ieee che Sot atic bance dete aa daal aN 205 Bit limage Commands is swar e i aae Re E ciated ec 209 ola is GOMMI A AS sis kee E E Sk Pe A ea 210 Printing Paper Goma A i A A 216 PAGS ModE ertr e e ts ta fi Go a ed e 217 Bar Code Commander ii iebsa ab a a H u a a E 220 Mechanism Control CommandS vec Bee ajk uti Ga G e ae ie hewoet aerate eonineeeeee 223 Miscellaneous Commands ii isa ii isir a ba dicen ei ba ie a res 224 Macro Function Commands sas ia ted a eed dala on a ia tant 230 User defined Images and Graphics Commands nn nnnnnn nn nn nnnn nn 231 Ithaca Specific iTherm 280 Commands s smseeeenenenzzznsnzznznzzzzzzzzznznznznzazzznznzzzzznzni 236 Panel BUMOMGOMManOS tA i a ab EE aie wet eares aero 236 Paper Qut Low Sensor Gommands iiss edecscckeeectcaeeselseekieeettestgesecheteettesceeeseesse
25. B Where ever possible numeric pairs will be encoded from Code stick C In the past FNC1 FNC2 FNC3 and FNC4 have not been accessible to the programmer The EAN 128 barcode requires that FNC1 be made available To provide EAN 128 compatibility the acceptable character range has been expanded by 10 to include the ability to specify FNC1 FNC2 FNC3 and FNC4 In automatic mode values of 130 132 will be accepted however the resulting barcode may be unreadable Page 142 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes 128 Code Value in Value in Decimal Hex FNC3 128 80 FNC2 129 81 Not Valid 130 82 131 83 132 84 FNC4 133 85 FNC1 134 86 Start A 135 87 Start B 136 88 Start C 137 89 Figure 15 Expanded Function coding Note In automatic mode FNC4 is always specified as 133 regardless of what code stick is currently active In most cases the iTherm supreme will generate the most compact barcode for you However if it is desirable to have complete control the programmer should use manual mode 28 07764 Rev C Page 143 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Code 128 Encoding iTherm Manual Code 128 Encoding iTherm
26. Decimal Status 0 Off 00H lt 0 gt Not used fixed to off 1 On 02H lt 2 gt Not used fixed to on 2 Off 00H lt 0 gt No mechanical error On 04H lt 4 gt Mechanical error occurred 3 Off 00H lt 0 gt No auto cutter error On 08H lt 8 gt Auto cutter error occurred 4 On 10H lt 16 gt Not used fixed to on 5 Off 00H lt 0 gt Unrecoverable error occurred On 20H lt 32 gt Recoverable error occurred 6 Off 00H lt 0 gt Not used fixed to off 7 Off 00H lt 0 gt Not used fixed to off Table 38 Error Status lt n gt 3 Bit Off On Hex Decimal Status 0 Off 00H lt 0 gt Not used fixed to off 1 On 02H lt 2 gt Not used fixed to on 2 3 Off 00H lt 0 gt Paper low sensor paper adequate On OCH lt 12 gt Paper low sensor paper low 4 On 10H lt 16 gt Not used fixed to on 5 6 Off 00H lt 0 gt Paper out sensor paper adequate On 60H lt 96 gt Paper out sensor paper not present 7 Off 00H lt 0 gt Not used fixed to off Table 39 Paper Roll Sensor Status lt n gt 4 Function Transmit Peripheral Status ASCII ESC u lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 75H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 117 gt lt n gt Range n 0 Description The ESC r lt n gt command transmits peripheral status has been replaced by the GS r command The iTherm 280 return cash drawer status as specified below Bit Off On Hex Decimal Status The iTherm 280does not allow buffer recovery on unrecoverable errors Following the recovery process will not
27. ESC lt command moves the print head to the home position Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Bit I mage Commands Function ASCII Select Bit Image Mode ESC lt m gt lt nl gt lt nh gt lt dl gt lt dk gt Hexadecimal 1BH 2AH lt m gt lt nl gt lt nh gt lt dl gt lt dk gt Decimal Range Description lt 27 gt lt 42 gt lt m gt lt nl gt lt nh gt lt dl gt lt dk gt lt m gt 0 1 32 33 O0 lt nl lt 255 Osnhs3 Osds255 k nl nh x 256 for lt m gt 0 or 1 k nl nh x 256 3 for lt m gt 32 or 33 ESC lt m gt lt n gt lt n gt lt d gt lt d gt command selects a bit image mode using lt m gt for the number of dots specified by n Nna x 256 in mode 0 or 1 and n Nh X 256 3 in mode 32 or 33 and lt d gt indicates the bit image data Set a bit to one to print a dot or set a bit to zero to not print a dot Use the command to print a predefined picture or logo The modes selectable by lt m gt are listed below Vertical Direction Horizontal Direction Dot Density Number of Dot Density Number of Dots Dots 0 8 dot single density 101 dpi 8 80 dpi 200 1 8 dot double density 101 dpi 8 160 dpi 400 32 24 dot single density 101 dpi 24 120 dpi 300 33 24 dot double density 203 dpi 24 240 dpi 600 Table 27 Print Density Selection 28 07764 Rev C Page 209 Programming Codes iTherm 280 P
28. GS R lt S gt lt Sp gt lt Li gt lt Lp gt Hexadecimal 1BH 1DH 52H lt Sp lt Sp gt lt Li lt Lipp Decimal lt 27 gt lt 29 gt lt 82 gt lt Sj gt lt Sp gt lt Lipa Lipp IPCL amp EQ lt S gt lt L gt Land S are 4 digits ie 00100020 for 20 records starting at 10 EPOS Description This command reports all or part of the electronic journal lt S gt 256 lt S gt specifies the first record to be printed and lt L gt 256 lt L gt specifies the number of records to report If lt L gt 256 lt L gt are 0 all records from the specified start to the end are reported Setting both start and end to 0 will report the complete contents of the journal Note The first record is identified as record 1 The report format will be as follows STX Record number SOH Record Text ETX EOT Page 152 Rev C 2838 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Where Function ASCII Or Hexadecimal Decimal Description or or 28 07764 Set the Electronic Journal Record Header ESC GS F lt String d gt lt 0 gt 1BH 1DH 46H lt 27 gt lt 29 gt lt 70 gt None This command allows the record separator that is printed between records to be changed The default format is r nRecord d r n r represents CR n represents LF d represents the position of the record number Note The d must be present N
29. Note The iTherm 280 does not allow the paper out sensor to be disabled The paper sensor s used to stop printing are selected by using n as follows Bit Off On Hex Decimal Function 0 Off 00 0 Paper roll low sensor disabled On 01 1 Paper roll low sensor enabled 1 Off 00 0 Paper roll low sensor disabled On 02 2 Paper roll low sensor enabled 2 3 Paper roll end sensor enabled alwavs on 4 5 Undefined 6 Off 00 0 Validation sensor disabled On 40 64 Validation sensor enabled 7 Off 00 0 Validation sensor disabled On 80 128 Validation sensor enabled Table 25 Paper Sensor Commands 28 07764 Rev C Page 203 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Function Select Paper Sensor s to Output Paper End Signals ASCII ESC c 3 lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 63H 33H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 99 gt lt 51 gt lt n gt Range Osns255 Description ESC c 3 n selects whether to output paper end signals or not to a parallel interface The default setting is n 15 The paper roll low paper roll end and validation sensors can be selected When the sensors are selected to output signals and anv sensor detects a paper end the paper end signal is output When all sensors are disabled and a paper out is detected status is alwavs a paper present The paper roll low sensor is enabled when either bit 0 or bit 1 or both is on The paper roll end sensor is enabl
30. OBH amp VT 88 Form feed FF OCH amp FF 89 Feed to black dot ESC VT 1BH 0BH None 91 Set top of form ESC 4 1BH 34H amp TF 89 Set form length in lines ESC C lt n gt 1BH 43H amp SL lt m gt 89 lt m gt Select Minimum character Height and ESC P lt w gt lt h gt 1BH 50H none 278 Width in points Select Minimum character Height and ESC p lt w gt lt h gt 1BH 70H none 278 Width in points Begin auto line feed n 0 end n 1 ESC 5 lt n gt 1BH 35H amp CA n 0 90 amp MA n 1 Set form length in inches ESC C NUL lt n gt 1BH 43H amp SI lt m gt 89 lt m gt Page 76 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Description ASCII Hex IPCL equivalent Page code Reverse line feed ESC 1BH 5DH amp LR 90 Character Pitch Set character spacing in points ESC I lt n gt i A 2BH None 276 Set character spacing in 1 4 points ESC i lt n gt A at 2BH None 277 Set character spacing in points with ESC J lt n gt 1BH 2BH None 277 adjustment 4AH Set character spacing in 1 4 points with ESC j lt n gt 1BH 2BH None 278 adjustment 6AH Begin 10 CPI character pitch DC2 12H amp F3 93 Begin 12 CPI character pitch ESC 1BH 3AH amp F2 93 Begin 17 CPI character pitch SI OFH amp F 1 93 Set character pitch ESC P lt n gt 1BH 5BH amp F lt n gt
31. Pin 2 Pin 3 RX Receive Data Pin 3 Pin 2 TX Transmit Data Pin 4 Pin 20 DTR Data Terminal Ready Pin 5 Pin 7 GND Signal Ground Pin 6 Pin 6 DSR Data Set Ready Pin 7 Pin 4 RTS Request to Send Pin 8 Pin 5 CTS Clear to Send Parallel The parallel interface connection is very similar to the serial interface connection It can be a 36 pin Centronics IEEE 1284 B or a 25 Pin female D Shell IEEE 1284 A connector The pin Table 7 Serial interface pin out out of both connectors are shown below 25 pin 36 pin Signal Description Direction Connector Connector Pin 1 Pin 1 STROBE Clock data to printer Host to Printer Pins 2 9 Pins 2 9 DO D7 Data Host to Printer Pin 10 Pin 10 ACK Printer accepted data Printer to Host Pin 11 Pin 11 BUSY Printer busy Printer to Host Pin 12 Pin 12 PE Paper Out Status Printer to Host Pin 13 Pin 13 SLCT Printer selected Printer to Host Pin 14 Pin 14 AUTOFD Auto feed paper Host to Printer Pin 15 Pin 32 FAULT Printer error Printer to Host Pin 16 Pin 31 INIT Initialize printer Host to Printer Pin 17 Pin 36 SLIN Select printer Host to Printer Pin 17 FG Frame ground Printer to Host Pin 18 5V Peripheral logic high Printer to Host Pins 18 25 Pins 16 19 30 GND Ground Page 42 Table 8 Parallel interface pin out Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Setup Procedures USB The USB connector can be one of two types a standard Type
32. R 2 2 R R r R DC3 S 3 3 S S s S DC4 T 4 4 T T t 4T NAK U 5 5 U U u U SYN V 6 6 V V V V ETB w 7 7 W W Ww W CAN X 8 8 X X x X EM Y 9 9 Y Y y Y SUB Z IZ Z Z Z Z ESC A F K P FS B lt MG ML l AQ GS C H M R RS D gt Al A N S US E AJ _ O DEL AT Figure 14 Code 39 full 128 character encoding 28 07764 Rev C Page 141 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Code 128 Code 128 is an alphanumeric bar code It is a high density variable length continuous code which employs multiple element widths Code 128 has three possible start codes The start code defines the code set Code A B or C that will be used to generate the barcode The iTherm 280 allows the code set to be specified or it can be select by the printer based on the information in the data field To specify code set ESC b lt 2 gt lt Code gt information ETX If the first character in the data field lt Code gt is a start code as shown in Figure 15 below the printer will print the complete data field from the selected set Due to space limitations only ten characters can be printed The check digit is generated and printed by the printer Characters are also specified as shown in Figure 15 To have the printer selected code set and automatically generate an optimal barcode the value of Code should be the length ESC b lt 2 gt lt Length gt information If
33. Range Description Select paper sensor s to stop printing ESC p 4 lt n gt 1BH 70H 34H lt n gt lt 27 gt lt 112 gt lt 52 gt lt n gt Osns255 The ESC p 4 lt n gt command selects the sensors that tell the printer to stop printing The default setting occurs when only the Paper Out sensor stops printing When the paper roll near end sensor is enabled and the sensor detects a near end condition during printing the printer completes the current line and then automatically goes off line Replacing a new paper roll restarts the printing When the paper roll near end sensor is disabled and a paper near end condition is detected during printing the paper out LED comes on but the printer continues to print Note The ITherm does not allow the Paper Out sensor to be disabled It is always on lt n gt is defined as follows Bit On Off Hexadecimal Decimal Function 0 1 Off 00H lt 0 gt Paper roll near end sensor disabled On 01H 02H 03H lt 1 gt lt 2 gt lt 3 gt Paper roll near end sensor enabled 7 00H lt 0 gt Undefined Table 14 Paper Sensor Commands ESC p 3 Select paper sensor s to output paper end signals ASCII ESC p 3 lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 70H 33H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 112 gt lt 51 gt lt n gt Range 0 lt n lt 255 Description The ESC p 3 lt n gt command selects the paper sensor that outputs a paper end signal to the parallel interface when a paper
34. a minor error occurred The POWER indicator shows the error by blinking a pattern Cycling the power restarts the printer Blink patterns are defined as follows 1 Blink 1 blink pause 2 Blink 2 blinks pause 3 Blink 3 blinks pause A similar pattern is followed for other blink counts Error indications are as follows Error Indicated Blink Count Unused Configuration Read Configuration Write Software Error Auto Cutter Error Unused User Store Format Error Electronic Journal Format Error Flash Operation Error Internal Memory Error 12 Communication Adapter Error 14 Operating System Error 15 Table 9 Error Blink Codes 00 Ni Od AA Go Poy gt 28 07764 Rev C Page 57 How to Operate the ITherm 280 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Testing the Printer Overview Using Self Test Configuration and Hex Dump Mode Self Test Mode allows you to perform a series of tests to show if the printer is functioning correctly Self Test Mode also allows you to print a summary of how your iTherm 280 is currently configured Use this printout to compare your printer s settings to your system s requirements Specific attention should be given to emulation and communications settings For serial printers the baud rate and other RS 232 interface settings are important If there is a configuration problem you should use Configuration Mode to make any changes necessary Enterin
35. d3 20 dd 1 d5 6 d6 2 d7 8 Description The DLE DC4 lt 8 gt command clears all data stored in the receive buffer and the print buffer Transmits the following three bytes of data Hex Decimal Amount of data Header 37H 55 1 byte Flag 25H 37 1 byte NUL 00H 0 1 byte Enters in standard mode Function Select Peripheral Device Status ASCII ESC lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 3DH lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 61 gt lt n gt Range 1sns3 Description The ESC lt n gt command selects the device to which the host computer sends data based on the value of lt n gt listed below Bit Off On Hex Decimal Function Off 00H lt 0 gt Printer disabled On 01H lt I gt Printer enabled Off 00H lt 0 gt Customer display disabled On 02H lt 2 gt Customer display enabled Undefined Table 48 Peripheral Device Bit Definitions 0 1 2 7 Note Epson Customer display is not supported by the iTherm 280 printer Page 226 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Where lt n gt 28 07764 Real Time Request to Printer DLE ENQ lt n gt 10H 05H lt n gt lt 16 gt lt 5 gt lt n gt lt n gt 0 2 The DLE ENQ lt n gt command responds to a request from the host computer specified by lt n gt as shown below The command is also executed when the printer is
36. e bmfont This section defines and abstracts any bitmap font definitions e Legacy This section defines how the previously defined fonts are used to generate legacy fonts for each emulation The following is an example of the POR INI file Default System Configuration encoding mode UTF8TXT NOTE A code page is only used in ASCII mode To specify a code page use one of the following forms CodePage 437 CPFile CP8959 1 cpm To remap Unicode characters define a UniRemap cpm file UniMapfile UniRemap cpm font Optionally specify the Cache Partitions Fontcache 320 256 64 True Type font hinting may be disabled by setting Nohint to 1 Nohint 0 Specify Linked fonts starting with LinkFontl LinkFontl will be searched first Xou may specify up to 8 fonts in a linked font if Link Fonts are defined they will be Fonto 18 Some but not all features of Open Type fonts are supported Open Type fonts are not recommended 19 Compressed Stroke fonts are supplied by MonoType Inc Page 268 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide ITherm 280 Unicode and Fonts LinkFontl TactMOD ttf LinkFont2 TactWGL ttf LinkFont3 TactGB18030 ccc From 1 to 99 fonts may be defined Fonti TactMOD ttf Font2 TactWGL ttf Font3 TactGB18030 ccc Font4 TactOCR ttf The brush size effects only stroke fonts Brush 100 legacy EmulationMode Font Horizontal Vertica
37. gt lt 0 gt 72H lt Name gt lt 0 gt Return a report on user store ESC US 1BH 1FH amp UQ 136 lt Name gt lt 0 gt 72H lt Name gt lt 0 gt Process user macro ESC g lt 0 gt 1BH 67H amp GP 138 00H Start macro record ESC g lt 1 gt 1BH 67H amp GS 138 01H Stop macro record ESC g lt 2 gt 1BH 67H amp GE 138 02H Stop macro record and save ESC g lt 3 gt a 67H amp GW 138 03 Bar Codes Print bar code ESC b lt n gt 1BH 62H amp 25 n 0 139 n 0 Interleave 2 of 5 IETXI amp 39 n 1 amp 12 n 2 n 1 Code 39 amp UP n 3 n 2 Code 128 amp EA n 4 n 3 UPC A amp UE n 5 ta 2 amp EB n 6 n 4 EAN 13 89493 n 7 n 5 UPC E n 6 EAN 8 n 7 Code 93 n 8 Codabar PDF 417 bar code control ESC EM E lt f gt 1BH 19H none 146 lt V gt 45H Set bar code height ESC EM B lt n gt 1BH 19H amp BH 147 n 0 Restore defaults 42H lt Mi gt lt Ma gt n 1 9 Number of passes 0 11 inch per pass Set bar code width ESC EM W lt n gt 1BH 19H amp BW lt m gt 147 57H Set bar code justification HRI print mode ESC EM J lt n gt 1BH 19H amp BJ lt m gt lt me gt 147 and print direction 4AN Unicode 28 07764 Rev C Page 79 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Description ASCII Hex IPCL equivalent Page code Initiate Unicode UTF 16BE
38. gt none The ESC c lt n gt command selects the print color and should match the color of the paper installed 0 Black 1 Red 2 Green 3 Blue Begin one line double wide print SO OEH lt 14 gt SAMW none The SO command causes subsequent characters to be printed at twice the currently selected character width For example ten cpi becomes five cpi 17 cpi becomes 8 5 cpi etc The SO command remains in effect until A valid line terminator is received CR LF or ESC J lt n gt fine line feed The command is canceled or the maximum number of characters per line is reached and the printer performs an auto print Cancel one line double wide print DC4 14H lt 20 gt amp MN none The DC4 command cancels one line double wide mode set by the SO command and allows single and double wide characters to be printed on the same line Rev C Page 107 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide ESC _ Enable Disable Strike Through ASCII ESC _ lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 5FH 01H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 95 gt lt n gt IPCL amp MO Begin IPCL amp CO End EPOS ESC lt n gt Description The ESC _ lt 1 gt command begins strike through print mode All subsequent text leading spaces and trailing spaces are over scored ESC _ lt 0 gt ends the mode ESC W Multi line double wide and double high mode ASCII ESC W lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 57H lt n gt Decimal
39. inches It is used to change the spacing between characters The default right side character spacing is set to zero lt n gt 0 Right side character spacing can be set in half dot units Function Select Cancel User Defined Character Set ASCII ESC lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 25H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 37 gt lt n gt Range 0 lt n lt 255 Description The ESC lt n gt command selects or cancels the user defined character set When the least significant bit LSB of lt n gt is one the user defined character set is selected When lt n gt is zero the internal character set is selected which is the default setting 28 07764 Rev C Page 193 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Function Define User Defined Characters ASCII ESC amp lt y gt lt c1 gt lt c2 gt x1 d1 d y x x1 kk d1 d y x xk Hexadecimal 1BH 26H y c1 c2 x1 d1 d y x x1 kk d1 d y x xk Decimal lt 27 gt lt 38 gt y c1 c2 x1 d1 d y x x1 xk d1 d y x xk Range y 2 32 lt C lt C2 S 126 0 lt x lt 12 9 x 9 font 0 lt x lt 9 7 x9 font 0 lt d d y xx lt 255 Description The ESC amp lt y gt lt c1 gt lt Co gt Xi di d y X X1 Xk di d y x Xx command defines user defined characters from character code lt c gt to lt C gt lt y gt and lt x gt are the configurations of user defined characters lt y gt specifies the number of bytes
40. lt 20 gt lt 1 gt lt m gt lt t gt Range O lt m lt 8 Ostxs8 Description The DLE DC4 212 lt m gt lt t gt command sends a pulse specified by lt t gt in real time to the connector pin specified by lt m gt as follows lt m gt Connector pin 0 Drawer kick out connector pin 2 1 Drawer kick out pin 5 Note This feature is licensed from Epson and is only available in the Full Epson Emulation of the firmware Problems with this command are frequently caused by not using the correct version of the firmware Contact Transact sales and or technical support for this added cost option Function Execute power off sequence ASCII DLE DC4 lt 2 gt lt a gt lt b gt Hexadecimal 10H 14H lt 2 gt lt a gt lt b gt Decimal lt 16 gt lt 20 gt lt 2 gt lt a gt lt b gt Range a 1 b 8 Description The DLE DC4 229 lt a gt lt b gt command executes the printer power off sequence as follows Stores the values of the maintenance counter Transmits the following power off status Header Status NUL Power off status Hex Decimal Amount of data Header 3BH 59 1 byte Status 30H 48 1 byte NUL 00H 0 1 byte Executes the printer power off Function Clear buffer s ASCII DLE DC4 82 d1 d7 28 07764 Rev C Page 225 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Hexadecimal 10H 14H lt 8 gt d1 d7 Decimal lt 16 gt lt 20 gt 282 d1 d7 Range di 1 d2 3
41. lt 51 gt lt n gt IPCL amp SV lt m1 gt lt m2 gt lt m3 gt EPOS ESC 3 lt n gt Description The ESC 3 lt n gt command sets the default line spacing to n 216 inch Setn 1 to 255 The line feed spacing used by LF is set to values other than 1 8 or 7 72 inch The command takes effect immediately Note In EPOS mode the command performs line feeds in n 144 inch increments 28 07764 Rev C Page 85 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide ESC 0 Set line spacing to 1 8 inch ASCII ESC 0 Hexadecimal 1BH 30H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 48 gt IPCL amp ST EPOS ESC 2 Description The ESC 0 command sets the default line spacing to 1 8 inch 27 216 inch which is the standard eight lines per inch line spacing at initial power up Note In EPOS mode the command sets 1 6 inch spacing or six lines per inch ESC 1 Set line spacing to 21 216 inch or 7 72 inch ASCII ESC 1 Hexadecimal 1BH 31H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 49 gt IPCL amp SG EPOS none Description The ESC 1 command sets the default line spacing to 21 216 inch Use 21 216 inch line spacing for all points addressable APA graphics printing ESC A Set variable line spacing to n 72 inch ASCII ESC A lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 41H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 65 gt lt n gt IPCL none EPOS none Description The ESC A lt n gt command sets the default line spacing to n 72 Setn 1 to 85 Variable line spacing does not tak
42. lt m gt lt ni gt lt n gt lt 27 gt lt 42 gt lt m gt lt ni gt lt Ne gt none The ESC lt m gt lt n gt lt n2s gt command selects one of three graphic modes as specified by lt m gt 0 60 dpi Full speed 8 bit slices 1 120 dpi Half speed 8 bit slices 2 120 dpi Full speed 8 bit slices 3 240 dpi Full speed 8 bit slices 4 80 dpi Full speed 8 bit slices 5 72 dpi Full speed 8 bit slices 6 90 dpi Full speed 8 bit slices 7 144 dpi Full speed 8 bit slices 8 9 Not supported 10 104 x 96 dpi 11 208 x 96 dpi 12 104 x 192 dpi 13 208 x 192 dpi 15 16 Not supported Reassign graphic mode 1 horizontal 1 vertical pass 2 horizontal 1 vertical pass 1 horizontal 2 vertical passes 2 horizontal 2 vertical passes ESC lt m gt lt n gt Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Hexadecimal 1BH 3FH lt m gt lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 63 gt lt m gt lt n gt IPCL none Description The ESC lt m gt lt n gt command reassigns graphic mode lt m gt to resolution lt n gt Possible values for lt m gt are K L Y or Z Resolutions lt n gt are zero to seven as follows Where lt m gt 0 60 dpi Full speed 8 bit slices Default for K 1 120 dpi Half speed 8 bit slices Default for L 2 120 dpi Full speed 8 bit slices Default for Y 3 240 dpi Full speed 8 bit slices Default for Z 4 80 dpi Full speed 8 bit slices 5 72 dpi Full speed 8 bit slices 6 90 dpi Full speed 8 bit slices 7 144 d
43. 002D HVPHEN MINUS 007E TILDE 002E FULL STOP 007F lt CONTROL gt 002F SOLIDUS 00A4 CURRENCY SIGN 0030 DIGIT ZERO 00A7 SECTION SIGN 0031 DIGIT ONE 00A8 DIAERESIS 0032 DIGIT TWO 00BO DEGREE SIGN 0033 DIGIT THREE 00B1 PLUS MINUS SIGN 0034 DIGIT FOUR 00B7 MIDDLE DOT 0035 DIGIT FIVE 00D7 MULTIPLICATION SIGN 0036 DIGIT SIX 00E0 LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH GRAVE 0037 DIGIT SEVEN 00E1 LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH ACUTE 0038 DIGIT EIGHT 00E8 LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH GRAVE 0039 DIGIT NINE 00E9 LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH ACUTE 003A COLON OOEA LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH CIRCUMFLEX 003B SEMICOLON OOEC LATIN SMALL LETTER WITH GRAVE 003C LESS THAN SIGN O0ED LATIN SMALL LETTER WITH ACUTE 003D EQUALS SIGN 00F2 LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH GRAVE 003E GREATER THAN SIGN 00F3 LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH ACUTE 003F QUESTION MARK OOF7 DIVISION SIGN 0040 COMMERCIAL AT OOF9 LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH GRAVE 0041 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A OOFA LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH ACUTE 0042 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER B OOFC LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH DIAERESIS 0043 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER C 0101 LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH MACRON 0044 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER D 0113 LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH MACRON 0045 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E 011B LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH CARON 0046 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER F 012B LATIN SMALL LETTER WITH MACRON 0047 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER G 0144 LATIN SMALL LETTER N WITH ACUTE 0048 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER H 0148 LATIN SMALL LETTER N WITH CARON 0049 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER 014D LATIN SMALL LETTER O WIT
44. 00H lt 0 gt No Auto cutter error On 08H lt 8 gt Auto cutter error occurred 4 Off 00H lt 0 gt Not used fixed to off 5 Off 00H lt 0 gt No unrecoverable error On 20H lt 32 gt Unrecoverable error occurred 6 Off 00H lt 0 gt No temporary abnormality of the print head temperature high temperature On 40H lt 64 gt Temporary abnormality of the print head temperature high temperature occurred 7 Off 00H lt 0 gt Not used fixed to Off Table 30 Automatic Status Back ASB Second Byte Error Information 11 print data will be lost if a mechanical error occurs 28 07764 Rev C The iTherm 280 can not recover from mechanical errors without flushing the input buffer All Page 211 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Bit Off On Hex Decimal Status for Automatic Status Back ASB 0 Off 00H lt 0 gt Journal memory adequate On 01H lt 1 gt Journal memory low Less than 8K 1 Off 00H lt 0 gt Paper low sensor paper adequate On 02H lt 2 gt Paper low sensor paper low 2 Off 00H lt 0 gt Journal memory adequate On 04H lt 4 gt Journal memory exhausted 3 Off 00H lt 0 gt Paper out sensor paper present On 08H lt 8 gt Paper out sensor paper not present 4 Off 00H lt 0 gt Not used fixed to Off 5 6 Undefined 7 Off OOH lt 0 gt Not used fixed to Off Table 31 Automatic Status Back ASB Third Byte Paper Sensor Informa
45. 0426 CVRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER TSE 2190 LEFTWARDS ARROW 0427 CVRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER CHE 2191 UPWARDS ARROW 0428 CVRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER SHA 2192 RIGHTWARDS ARROW 0429 CVRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER SHCHA 2193 DOWNWARDS ARROW 042A CVRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER HARD SIGN 2196 NORTH WEST ARROW 042B CVRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER VERU 2197 NORTH EAST ARROW 042C CVRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER SOFT SIGN 2198 SOUTH EAST ARROW 042D CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER E 2199 SOUTH WEST ARROW 042E CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER YU 2208 ELEMENT OF 042F CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER YA 220F N ARY PRODUCT 0430 CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER A 2211 N ARY SUMMATION 0431 CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER BE 2215 DIVISION SLASH 0432 CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER VE 221A SQUARE ROOT 0433 CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER GHE 221D PROPORTIONAL TO 0434 CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER DE 221E INFINITY 0435 CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER IE 221F RIGHT ANGLE 0436 CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER ZHE 2220 ANGLE 0437 CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER ZE 2223 DIVIDES 0438 CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER 2225 PARALLEL TO 0439 CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER SHORT 2227 LOGICAL AND 043A CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER KA 2228 LOGICAL OR 043B CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER EL 2229 INTERSECTION 043C CVRILLIC SMALL LETTER EM 222A UNION 043D CVRILLIC SMALL LETTER EN 222B INTEGRAL 043E CVRILLIC SMALL LETTER O 222E CONTOUR INTEGRAL 043F CVRILLIC SMALL LETTER PE 2234 THEREFORE 0440 CVRILLIC SMALL LETTER ER 2235 BECAUSE 0441 CVRILLIC SMALL LETTER ES 2236 RATIO 0442 CVRILLIC SMALL LETTER TE 2237 PROPORTION 0443 CVRILLIC
46. 1 Bitmapped internal graphic chr 1 User Character definition cfg 0 configuration ttf 0 true type font CCC 0 compressed stroke font otf 0 Bitmap font definition com 0 code page map omp 1 bitmap graphic file gph 1 raster graphic file ini 0 System information file fcg 0 Field Configuration File upd 0 System Update file SVS 0 Load image sy 0 Compressed load image Note All other file extensions will be placed in Partition 1 user space Function Return Free space for Open File All ASCII ESC RS S Hexadecimal 1BH 1EH 53H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 30 gt lt 83 gt Description The ESC RS S command will return an identifier byte and 4 additional bytes representing a 32 bit value LSB First representing the amount of free space in the partition containing the open file The format is as follows S lt B7 0 gt lt B15 8 gt lt B23 16 gt lt B31 24 gt Function Return Free space for this partition All ASCII ESC RS s lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 1EH 73H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 30 gt lt 115 gt Where n The partition Description The ESC RS s command will return an identifier byte and 4 additional bytes representing a 32 bit value LSB First representing the amount of free space in the partition The format is as follows S lt B7 0 gt lt B15 8 gt lt B23 16 gt lt B31 24 gt Page 284 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide ITherm 280 File System Function Close File command All
47. 133 User Defined Characters Canceling 106 194 User Defined Characters Defining 105 131 194 User Defined Characters Enabling 106 User macros 137 User store 129 User Store Status Inquire 179 User Store Delete item 134 135 User Store Flush Information 132 135 User Store Load item 134 User Store Loading item 131 User Store Removing Item 131 User Store Report 136 User Store Reporting 132 User Defined Memory Commands 231 Using Configuration Mode 66 Using DSR 313 Verify Cash Drawer Interface 40 Vertical Tab 88 Vertical Tab Stops Setting 88 Page 347
48. 163 Enable paper error mode operation ESC p lt n gt 1BH 70H amp PE lt m gt 164 lt m gt Enable dynamic response ESC w lt n gt 1BH 77H none 154 Begin multi drop control SOH lt n gt 01H none 170 Inquire status Refer to command ENQ lt n gt 05H none 172 descriptions Inquire cash drawer 1 status ENQ lt 1 gt 05H01H none 172 Control Periodic Status ESC EM P a 19H none 179 50 Control Periodic Status ESC EM p bu 19H none 179 70 Extended Diagnostics Set control feature commands ESC y lt n gt 1BH 79H amp Y0 9 or 167 amp YX lt m1 gt lt m2 gt lt m3 gt for numbers gt 9 Extended diagnostics ESC lt n gt 1BH 7EH none 168 28 07764 Rev C Page 81 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Low Level Paper Motion Control Print Paper Motion CR Carriage return ASCII CR Hexadecimal ODH Decimal lt 13 gt IPCL amp CR EPOS ODH Description The CR command prints the contents of the print buffer if any and resets the next character print position to the left margin A line feed is not performed unless auto feed is active The print rotation direction and the left margin command define the left margin LF Line feed ASCII LF Hexadecimal OAH Decimal lt 10 gt IPCL amp LF EPOS OAH Description The LF command prints the contents of the buffer if any and advances Page 82 paper one line at the current default line spacing The next character print po
49. 199 ESC G 1BH 47H Turn double strike mode on off 200 ESC M 1BH 4DH Select character font 194 ESC R 1BH 52H Select an international character set 195 ESC V 1BH 56H Turn on off 90 rotation mode 200 ESCt 1BH 74H Select character code table 198 ESC 1BH 7BH Turn upside down printing mode on off 200 GS 1DH 21H Select character size 201 GS B 1DH 42H Turn white black reverse printing mode on off 198 Command Name Page ESC c5 1BH 63H Enable disable panel buttons 202 35H Command Name Page ESC c4 1BH 63H Select paper sensor s to stop printing 203 34H ESC c 3 1BH 63H Select paper sensor s to output paper out 204 33H signals 28 07764 Rev C Page 183 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Supported TM T88 Commands Print Position Commands Status Commands Command Name Page HT 09H Set horizontal tab positions 206 ESC 1BH 24H Set absolute print position 205 ESC D 1BH 44H Set horizontal tab positions 207 ESC 1BH 5CH Set relative print position 205 ESC a 1BH 61H Select justification 206 GSL 1DH 4CH Set left margin 207 GST 1DH 54H Set print position to the beginning of the line 205 GS W 1DH 57H Set printing area width 207 Command Name Page ESC 1BH 2AH Select bit image mode 209 GS v0 1DH 76H 30 Print raster bit image 209 Command Name Page DLE EOT 10H 04H Real time status transmission 213 DLE ENQ 10H 05H Real time st
50. 2105 CARE OF 03C8 GREEK SMALL LETTER PSI 2109 DEGREE FAHRENHEIT 03C9 GREEK SMALL LETTER OMEGA 2116 NUMERO SIGN 0401 CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER IO 2121 TELEPHONE SIGN 0410 CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER A 2160 ROMAN NUMERAL ONE 0411 CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER BE 2161 ROMAN NUMERAL TWO 0412 CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER VE 2162 ROMAN NUMERAL THREE 0413 CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER GHE 2163 ROMAN NUMERAL FOUR 0414 CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER DE 2164 ROMAN NUMERAL FIVE 0415 CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER IE 2165 ROMAN NUMERAL SIX 0416 CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER ZHE 2166 ROMAN NUMERAL SEVEN 0417 CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER ZE 2167 ROMAN NUMERAL EIGHT 0418 CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER 2168 ROMAN NUMERAL NINE 0419 CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER SHORT 2169 ROMAN NUMERAL TEN 041A CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER KA 216A ROMAN NUMERAL ELEVEN 041B CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER EL 216B ROMAN NUMERAL TWELVE 041C CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER EM 2170 SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL ONE 041D CYRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER EN 2171 SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL TWO 041E CVRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER O 2172 SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL THREE 041F CVRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER PE 2173 SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL FOUR 0420 CVRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER ER 2174 SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL FIVE 0421 CVRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER ES 2175 SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL SIX 0422 CVRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER TE 2176 SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL SEVEN 0423 CVRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER U 2177 SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL EIGHT 0424 CVRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER EF 2178 SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL NINE 0425 CVRILLIC CAPITAL LETTER HA 2179 SMALL ROMAN NUMERAL TEN
51. 3H OFBH 1020 Windows Greek 3 252 3H OFCH 1021 Latin 5 Windows Turkey 3 253 3H OFDH 1022 Windows Cyrillic 3 254 3H OFEH 1024 Hungarian CWI 4 0 4H 000H 1026 ISO Latin 4 8859 4 4 2 4H 002H 1027 Ukrainian 4 3 4H 003H 1028 Roman 8 4 4 4H 004H 1029 ISO Latin 6 8859 10 4 5 4H 005H 1030 Hebrew NC 862 4 6 4H 006H 1031 Hebrew OC 4 7 4H 007H 1032 Windows Hebrew 4 8 4H 008H 1033 KBL Lithuanian 4 9 4H 009H 1034 Windows Baltic 4 10 4H 00AH 1035 Cyrillic Latvian 4 11 4H 00BH 1072 Bulgarian 4 48 4H 030H Table 21 Character Code Pages 28 07764 Rev C Page 197 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Function Print Control Character ASCII ESC lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 5EH lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 94 gt lt n gt Range 0 lt n lt 255 Description The ESC lt n gt command allows characters from zero to 31 codes to be printed During normal operation characters from zero to 31 are control characters Control code translation is turned off for the following character Function Insert Euro Character ASCII GS lt n gt Hexadecimal 1DH 23H lt n gt Decimal lt 29 gt lt 35 gt lt n gt Description The GS lt n gt command allows an application to replace any character in the currently active character set with the Euro character The character to be replaced is defined by lt n gt For example if the currently active character set is code page 850 multilingual and the OD5H character is to be the
52. 46H amp CM 111 Set print style See command description ESC 1BH 5BH amp DH 109 40H amp SH Select superscript ESC S lt 0 gt ao amp SP 111 Select subscript ESC S lt 1 gt L add amp SB 111 End superscript or subscript ESC T 1BH 54H amp SE 111 Begin italics ESC G nN amp MI 112 End italics ESC H 1BH 25H amp CI 112 48H Rotated Print Page Mode Select page mode ESC t lt n gt 1BH 74H amp PM lt m gt 114 Set page mode page position ESC o lt n gt 1BH 6FH 122 Exit page mode FF OCH amp FF 122 APA Graphics Print single density graphics ESC K lt ni gt lt n2 gt 1BH 4BH none 123 lt n gt 0 255 lt NnNo gt 0 3 len lt n gt 256 lt no gt Print half speed double density graphics ESC L lt m gt lt n2 gt 1BH 4CH none 123 Print full speed double density graphics ESC Y lt m gt lt n2 gt 1BH 59H none 123 Print quad density graphics ESC Z lt n gt lt n2 gt 1BH 5AH none 124 Select bidirectional or unidirectional print ESC U lt n gt 1BH 55H amp GU n 1 125 n 0 Bidirectional amp GB n 0 n 1 Unidirectional Print graphics in mode lt m gt ESC lt m gt lt ni gt 1BH 2AH none 124 lt No gt Reassign graphic mode ESC lt m gt lt n gt 1BH 3FH none 124 Two Color Graphics Page 78 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Program ming Codes
53. A USB driver is not needed if the application uses any of the other forms of communication such as serial parallel or Ethernet and does not use USB 28 07764 Rev C Page 49 Setup Procedures iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Ethernet Virtual Serial driver A VSerial driver is a low level device driver which appears to Windows and your application as a serial com port However all of the data sent to and received from the serial com port actually comes from the Ethernet printer Window s Operating System Virtual Serial Link Ethernet User nee Virtual Printer Application i Driver Driver With Print Server Figure 8 Ethernet Virtual Serial Driver When to use the Ethernet Virtual Serial driver An Ethernet Virtual Serial Driver is needed whenever data is to be sent to or received from the printer using the Ethernet interface but needs to appear to the application as a serial port When not to use the Ethernet Virtual Serial driver An Ethernet Virtual Serial driver is not needed if the application is able to directly interact with an Ethernet printer using TCP IP Protocol Page 50 Rev C 28 07764 Setup Procedures iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide POSPrinter ActiveX Control POSPrinter OCX This is not a driver but rather a software component that provides a connection from an application to a port driver This allows an application to communicate directly with a printer This approach allows an applicat
54. ASCII ESC RS C Hexadecimal 1BH 1EH 43H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 30 gt lt 67 gt Description The ESC RS C command will close the currently open file Function Close All Files command All ASCII ESC RS K Hexadecimal 1BH 1EH 4BH Decimal lt 27 gt lt 30 gt lt 75 gt Description The ESC RS K command will close the font system and close all currently open files Internal fonts will be reopened automatically if used Function Delete File command All ASCII ESC RS D lt Filename gt lt 0 gt Hexadecimal 1BH 1EH 44H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 30 gt lt 68 gt FileName File name from 1 to 30 characters including a three character extension null terminated Description The ESC RS D command will select and delete a file Note Some of the system files are protected and can not be deleted Function Set Clear File Attributes command All ASCII ESC RS A lt Attbs gt lt space gt lt Filename gt lt 0 gt Hexadecimal 1BH 1EH 41H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 30 gt lt 64 gt Attbs File attributes to modify FileName File name from 1 to 30 characters including a three character extension Each file has several attributes associated to it They include S R and H Attribute Syntax Name Use S S or S System This is a system file R R or R Read Only This file cannot be erased or modified H H or H Hidden This file is hidden and not displayed in the directory listing NOTE Attributes can be combined
55. B or C The printer does not accept any print information unless it is addressed Multi drop configuration is only available in serial mode as parallel printers cannot be connected together Page 318 Rev C 28 07764 Communications iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Off line Active A configuration flag that prevents the printer from going off line in most cases is available Off line mode allows the application to query the printer for status rather than assume a Status from the control signals The feature allows the host application to query the printer at all times except when there is no power a full input buffer or a hard failure For example when the printer s cover is open the printer stops printing but still accepts data and inquiries The inquire cover status command returns Cover open Hard failures result when there is no power or a printer fault occurs If the printer is off line either the input buffer is full or a hard fault has occurred The host application should not allow the input buffer to fill 28 07764 Rev C Page 319 Communications iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Recovery from Mechanical Errors The Ithaca Inquire commands and the Epson DLE ENQ and DLE EOT commands allow most printer error status to be read and in some cases recovery attempted Paper jams and auto cutter faults can be recovered however any data not previously printed will be lost If the application is to support erro
56. B connector as in commonly used in the PC industry or a POS Powered USB connector In the case of the powered USB connector there are a number of different versions Make sure you are using a 24 volt DC version and the 24 volt supply meets the requirements of the iTherm 280 printer and any cash drawer that is connected to the printer A powered USB interface is a special order option There are several standards for the power interface Make sure that you inform TransAct is aware of what interface you require and that that interface connector is supported by the iTherm 280 Verify the Firmware Configuration An example receipt is Included in the box your printer shipped in that will show how the printer was configured before it shipped from our Ithaca facility Compare this information to your system requirements Pay attention to the emulation and the communications link If they are wrong the printer may appear inoperative If the configuration is not correct refer to the section on changing the iTherm 280 configuration If there are a number of printers to be installed and you want the identical configuration in each you can use the universal configuration program to record the configuration on one printer and replicate it over a group The configuration program is available from Transact technical support Installing Paper It is easy to install paper in the iTherm 280 1 Open the paper cover by grasping the green cover relea
57. DOUBLE VERTICAL 2510 BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT DOWN AND LEFT 2552 BOX DRAWINGS DOWN SINGLE AND RIGHT DOUBLE 2511 BOX DRAWINGS DOWN LIGHT AND LEFT HEAVV 5 G G G g 2553 BOX DRAWINGS DOWN DOUBLE AND RIGHT SINGLE 28 07764 Rev C Page 333 Appendix iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide 2554 BOX DRAWINGS DOUBLE DOWN AND RIGHT 2FF2 IDEOGRAPHIC DESCRIPTION CHARACTER LEFT TO 2555 BOX DRAWINGS DOWN SINGLE AND LEFT DOUBLE MIDDLE AND RIGHT 2556 BOX DRAWINGS DOWN DOUBLE AND LEFT SINGLE 2FF3 IDEOGRAPHIC DESCRIPTION CHARACTER ABOVE 2557 BOX DRAWINGS DOUBLE DOWN AND LEFT TO MIDDLE AND BELOW 2558 BOX DRAWINGS UP SINGLE AND RIGHT DOUBLE 2FF4 IDEOGRAPHIC DESCRIPTION CHARACTER FULL 2559 BOX DRAWINGS UP DOUBLE AND RIGHT SINGLE SURROUND 255A BOX DRAWINGS DOUBLE UP AND RIGHT 2FF5 IDEOGRAPHIC DESCRIPTION CHARACTER 255B BOX DRAWINGS UP SINGLE AND LEFT DOUBLE SURROUND FROM ABOVE 255C BOX DRAWINGS UP DOUBLE AND LEFT SINGLE 2FF6 IDEOGRAPNIC DESCRIPTION CHARACTER 255D BOX DRAWINGS DO
58. ESC e Description The ESC e lt n gt command prints the contents of the buffer if any and performs lt n gt reverse line feeds at the current line spacing The command does not change the default line spacing value The next character print position is reset to the left margin Note The IPCL command prints from 00 to 99 lines For example if you wish to feed 12 lines the IPCL command would be as follows amp FL12 28 07764 Rev C Page 87 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide VT ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description ESC B ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description ESC R ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Page 88 Vertical tab VT OBH lt 11 gt SANT VT The printer sets a line counter to the top of the form at reset and when a set top of form command is issued By setting vertical tab stops various form positions can be reached with a VT operation Set vertical tab stops ESC B lt ny gt lt n gt lt ng gt lt ni gt 0 1BH 42H lt n gt lt n gt lt n3 gt lt nj gt OOH lt 27 gt lt 66 gt lt N1 gt lt N2 gt lt N3 gt lt N gt lt 0 gt none ESC B lt ny gt lt n gt lt ng gt lt N gt 0 The ESC B lt n gt lt n gt lt N3 gt lt n gt 0 command sets tab stops at line positions specified by lt n gt The end of the setting is specified by a lt 0 gt All previously set tabs will be cl
59. Mon Et dats 11 DD SA se mee 12 TOPER 13 OOF aaie 14 HOO ott ek 15 OOS ses 16 SOD L B ea E vasti f s isfaja TOS sb Sag Chana tates EY BR Ebon ad 20 a3 00 0 0 ie des xe 21 0100 05 ieia 22 28 000 02 a8 Oo Aes At aa ZA kk eres N 0003 U 0022 QUOTATION MARK OL ad nave D2S G a Akis g estas a 04 A006 SOO dud 5 Page 266 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide ITherm 280 Unicode and Fonts 05 1010 00 16 SA 06 0 0 DD a 1c 07 11010000 10 SA QO kaz g 4058 OOS oa Mee Sea wisi LO Tie ta rate BE pM eae Bice LAN cae ge a hte DSO ase ek eyelets TA WA eee ES DO ik ied LO sodi tati Sas EI L sej te eda ik kI sl MOL a Galerie ded 20o kt ea kite Zl sett ath S Zi AD ete ee ES BO E snide tered 24 Nits de tag zi N 0004 U 0023 NUMBER SIGN Oe DEE nearer renee 02 l wires e OS apearen 043 Gekas 00 05 O0 06 00 00 07 EOR 0 O 08 00 0000 09 0000000 10 0000000 11 0000 00 12 8005 00 d 13 DD PO LO la 14 00 0000 15 0000000 16 0000000 17 0000 00 18 00 00 19 Fiero 0 Oss OC renner 20 2 00 0 00 dwa 21 fe ie fe estes 22 PERE ahs sd STs 23 wile dls Sone cesta is ZA ase ant at ws The characters must be in sequential order and must be assigned Unicode character codes N 0001 is a Sequence number in hex and is not used in controlling character generation or order U 0021 is the Unicode address in hex and the characters must be in ascending Uni
60. PRAW NGS DOWN CIGLTAND HORIZONTAL 2481 PARENTHESIZED NUMBER FOURTEEN BOX DRAWINGS DOWN HEAVY AND HORIZONTAL 2482 PARENTHESIZED NUMBER FIFTEEN 2530 AGE GSDQ GRIZO 2463 PARENTHESIZED NUMBER SIXTEEN BOX DRAWINGS RIGHT LIGHT AND LEFT DOWN 2484 PARENTHESIZED NUMBER SEVENTEEN 2531 HEAVY 2485 PARENTHESIZED NUMBER EIGHTEEN BOX DRAWINGS LEFT LIGHT AND RIGHT DOWN 2486 PARENTHESIZED NUMBER NINETEEN 2532 HEAVY 2487 PARENTHESIZED NUMBER TWENTY 2533 BOX DRAWINGS HEAVY DOWN AND HORIZONTAL 2488 DIGIT ONE PUH so 2534 BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT UP AND HORIZONTAL 2489 DIGIT TWO FULL STOP 2535 BOX DRAWINGS LEFT HEAVY AND RIGHT UP LIGHT 248A DIGIT THREE FULL STOP 2536 BOX DRAWINGS RIGHT HEAVY AND LEFT UP LIGHT 248B DIGIT FOUR FULL STOP 2537 BOX DRAWINGS UP LIGHT AND HORIZONTAL HEAVY 248C DIGIT FIVE FULL STOP 2538 BOX DRAWINGS UP HEAVY AND HORIZONTAL LIGHT 248D DIGIT SIX FULL STOP 2539 BOX DRAWINGS RIGHT LIGHT AND LEFT UP HEAVY 248E DIGIT SEVEN FULL STOP 253A BOX DRAWINGS LEFT LIGHT AND RIGHT UP HEAVY 248F DIGIT EIGHT FULL STOP 253B BOX DRAWINGS HEAVY UP AND HORIZONTAL 2490 DIGIT NINE FULL STOP 253C BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL 2491 NUMBER TEN FULL STOP 253D BOX DRAWINGS LEFT HEAVV AND RIGHT VERTICAL 2492 NUMBER ELEVEN FULL STOP LIGHT 2493 NUMBER TWELVE FULL STOP MA BOX DRAWINGS RIGHT HEAVV AND LEFT VERTICAL 2494 NUMBER THIRTEEN FULL STOP LIGHT 2495 NUMBER FOURTEEN FULL STOP 2539F BOX DRAWINGS VERTICAL LIGHT AND HORIZONTAL 2496 NUMBER FIFTEEN FULL STOP HEAVY 2497
61. PROLONGED SOUND MARK 30A1 KATAKANA LETTER SMALL A 30FD KATAKANA ITERATION MARK 30A2 KATAKANA LETTER A 30FE KATAKANA VOICED ITERATION MARK 30A3 KATAKANA LETTER SMALLI 3105 BOPOMOFO LETTER B 30A4 KATAKANA LETTER 3106 BOPOMOFO LETTER P 30A5 KATAKANA LETTER SMALL U 3107 BOPOMOFO LETTER M 30A6 KATAKANA LETTER U 3108 BOPOMOFO LETTER F 30A7 KATAKANA LETTER SMALL E 3109 BOPOMOFO LETTER D 30A8 KATAKANA LETTER E 310A BOPOMOFO LETTER T 30A9 KATAKANA LETTER SMALL O 310B BOPOMOFO LETTER N 30AA KATAKANA LETTER O 310C BOPOMOFO LETTER L 30AB KATAKANA LETTER KA 310D BOPOMOFO LETTER G 30AC KATAKANA LETTER GA 310E BOPOMOFO LETTER K 30AD KATAKANA LETTER KI 310F BOPOMOFO LETTER H 30AE KATAKANA LETTER GI 3110 BOPOMOFO LETTER J 30AF KATAKANA LE R KU 3111 BOPOMOFO LETTER Q 30B0 KATAKANA LETTER GU 3112 BOPOMOFO LETTER X 30B1 KATAKANA LETTER KE 3113 BOPOMOFO LETTER ZH 30B2 KATAKANA LETTER GE 3114 BOPOMOFO LETTER CH 30B3 KATAKANA LETTER KO 3115 BOPOMOFO LETTER SH 30B4 KATAKANA LETTER GO 3116 BOPOMOFO LETTER R 30B5 KATAKANA LETTER SA 3117 BOPOMOFO LETTER Z 30B6 KATAKANA LETTER ZA 3118 BOPOMOFO LETTER C 30B7 KATAKANA LETTER SI 3119 BOPOMOFO LETTER S 30B8 KATAKANA LETTER ZI 311A BOPOMOFO LETTERA 30B9 KATAKANA LETTER SU 311B BOPOMOFO LETTER O 30BA KATAKANA LETTER ZU 311C BOPOMOFO LETTER E 30BB KATAKANA LETTER SE 311D BOPOMOFO LETTER EH 30BC KATAKANA LETTER ZE 311E BOPOMOFO LETTER AI 30BD KATAKANA LETTER SO 311F BOPOMOFO LETTER El 30BE KATAKANA
62. Tear off Position The paper tear off is positioned 1 inch from the last line of print Page 28 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Specifications and Requirements Receipt Printing Auto Cutter Position A receipt auto cutter is a standard feature with all iTherm 280 Printers Cutter type Rotary Media width 3 13 02 inches 79 5 5 mm Media thickness range 0 0025 to 0 0035 inch Cut to line of print 0 70 inch Cutter life 1 000 000 cuts Partial Cut tab 125 inches 0625 inches right edge of receipt Cut time Less than 350 milliseconds Buzzer A buzzer is provided as a standard feature It is triggered upon command from the host terminal to make a sound loud enough to be heard under noisy conditions It will produce a sound pressure level of at least 90 dBA 1 foot from the front of the printer Cover Interlock A paper cover interlock switch is provided as a standard feature When the paper cover is open the printer is off line and will not print Display Pass Through The display pass through feature allows a pole display to be interconnected with the printer The printer is connected to a host system with a special serial cable The host sends serial data to the printer and the printer sends serial data to the pole display The printer does not provide power to the display During normal printer operation no data is passed to the display In pass through mode all received data is passed on to the di
63. UTF 16 is selected all data sent to the printer must be 16 bits All commands and command parameters are also 16 bit however only values between 0 and 255 are valid Note that 24 bit encoding is not supported UTF 16BE uses the big endian method of sending the two bytes This method sends the high byte first and then the low byte It is not required to send the byte order mark OxFEFF for the correct byte order to be initialized However to prevent loss of byte order synchronization you should periodically send the byte order mark to resynchronize the printer with your application If 17 The Version 3 0 Unicode standard defines a 24 bit addressing method that is not supported by the Epic 430 The Epic 430 is limited to a 16 bit address value Values greater than 65535 will be truncated to 16 bits Page 262 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide ITherm 280 Unicode and Fonts UTF 16BE is selected all data sent to the printer must be 16 bits All commands and command parameters are also 16 bit however only values between 0 and 255 are valid UTF 16LE uses the little endian method of sending the two bytes This method sends the low byte first and then the high byte It is not required to send the byte order mark OxFEFF for the correct byte order to be initialized However to prevent loss of byte order synchronization you should periodically send the byte order mark to resynchronize the printer with your application If U
64. Where k bits k 76543210 XXXX Italic control 0 0000 No change 1 0001 Italics On 2 0010 Italics Off Where n bits n 76543210 Onnn Height multiplier Maximum 4 0 0000 No change XXXX Line spacing 0 0000 No change Where m bits m 76543210 Onnn Width multiplier Maximum 4 0 0000 No change Note The maximum height and width multiplier is four 28 07764 Rev C Page 109 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide ESC Begin underline ASCII ESC lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 2DH 01H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 45 gt lt n gt IPCL amp MU Begin IPCL amp CU End EPOS ESC lt n gt Description The ESC lt 1 gt command begins underline print mode All subsequent text leading spaces and trailing spaces are underlined ESC lt 0 gt ends the mode Note In EPOS mode ESC l lt n gt performs a similar function however near letter quality NLQ is not available ESC G Begin enhanced print ASCII ESC G Hexadecimal 1BH 47H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 71 gt IPCL amp ME EPOS ESC G lt 1 gt Description All subsequent text is printed in enhanced print mode two passes with a vertical offset Enhanced printing provides a deeper resolution of each character and may enhance multiple part forms printing ESC H End enhanced print mode ASCII ESC H Hexadecimal 1BH 48H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 72 gt IPCL amp CE EPOS ESC G lt 0 gt Description The ESC H c
65. Who Should Read This Guide This document provides information and programming specifications for operators who will integrate the iTherm 280 printer into their kitchen operations What Is Included in This Guide This Programmer s Guide includes information on the features and programming interface of the iTherm 280 printer It provides the following information to support your programming and implementation efforts Warranty and technical support information Specifications and functionality description Programming information including documentation of low level and high level command interfaces as well as sample scripts to guide your own implementation efforts We want you to have a trouble free implementation with your Ithaca printer For any issues not covered in this guide quality technical support is available on line at www transact tech com or by telephone at 607 257 8901 or 877 7ithaca Consult the following pages for more details about our support services Warranty Options All iTherm 280 printers come with a standard 24 month standard warranty covering both parts and labor that starts upon shipment from the factory An optional extended warranty covering both parts and labor for an additional 12 months may be purchased separately For more information concerning the warranty options please contact the Sales Department at TransAct s Ithaca facility You are responsible for insuring any product returned for se
66. a dad a a 262 Uni ode EnCOGING id kt 262 Bitmap FOUTS csi cis cscs deed p e e deans fee 265 File system and the POR INI file 268 FONE sizesana Spacing tieu ae e a a alik 273 Font Size and Spacing command interactions ss nn 274 Legacy Printer Features that Have Changed sss 280 Dynamic code page definition rnn 280 28 07764 Rev C Page 7 File System BEB RBBB BBR BERR RRR RRR RRR RRR RRR Ree eRe eee eee eee 281 File System Interface tii A sists e At Kron dia 283 Fil System command S kisi ib u o f A d i aa 283 iTherm 280 Extended Printer Control 289 COMMUNICATIONS Lunnannnnnannnannnnnunununnnununununnu 207 Protocol and Print Buffers 0s eee eeennnnnnnn ann n rna ra nn rn nri ra tan rnnn nn rnnanrnnznzznzzzzana 299 MVS Bytes cdc a a a a a doe S a tin Seto eras et 302 WSB SUPPON xiii spa een deeded eh dadi d d Hh a inte ae Id t tad inr 302 A eer Pa A 303 Print Server Features Standard Ethernet Connection ss eeeesennnzennnnzzzznnzzi 303 suppornted PIGiOCOlS sz i tA i a d aida dates 303 User interfa e onti juratieti said accede re accede niaawescie seaylanbearielwaciypeneauerielesckes 303 10 ji a l ios eee a ae teks ote os nde a ac Oe tld hae aca fee He er 303 Parallel POM siz ia A a d Ea pa ap 304 Parallel Port Prot6 oli ii i A ete a eet Le ts oe 304 Printer Buffer Sizes iii i i ek tie eh eatin ania ke 305 Parallel Port Inquire and IEEE 1284 nn 305 Paralle
67. and return to standard mode 89 CAN 18H Cancel print data in page mode 162 ESC FF 1BH OCH Print data in page mode 220 ESC L 1BH 4CH Select Page mode 218 ESC S 1BH 53H Switches from page mode to standard 218 mode ESC T 1BH 54H Select print direction in page mode 218 ESC W 1BH 57H Set printing area in page mode 218 GS 1DH 24H Set absolute vertical print position in page 220 mode GS 1DH 5CH Set relative vertical print position in page 220 mode 28 07764 Rev C Page 189 Programming Codes Supported TM T90 Commands User defined Memory Commands iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Command Name Page GS lt Name gt 1DH 2DH Define user defined bit image 231 lt Name gt GS 0 lt Name gt 1DH 30H Print user defined bit image 233 lt m gt lt Name gt GS 1 lt Name gt 1DH 31H Erase single entry from nonvolatile 233 lt Name gt memory GS 1DH 2AH Define single user defined bit image 234 GS 1DH 2FH Print single user defined bit image 235 GS 3 1DH 33H Query nonvolatile memory pool 235 information GS 5 1DH 35H Erase all entries from nonvolatile 233 memory GS 6 1DH 36H Save user defined character set 235 GS 7 1DH 37H Select user defined character set 235 Extended Electronic Journal Commands Electronic J ournal Commands Command Name Page ESC GS I 1BH 1DH 49H Electronic journal initialize and set 151 lt Password gt lt 0 gt password
68. and the command is enabled when the printer returns to standard mode Turn ON OFF Uni Directional Printing Mode ESC U lt n gt 1BH 55H lt n gt lt 27 gt lt 85 gt lt n gt Osns255 The ESC U lt n gt command turns on off unidirectional printing mode When the least significant bit LSB of lt n gt 1 unidirectional printing is turned on When LSB 0 unidirectional printing is turned off and i directional printing is turned on Unidirectional printing can be turned on when printing double high characters to ensure that the top and bottom of the characters are aligned lt n gt 0 is the default setting Rev C Page 207 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Page 208 Set Left Margin ESC lt n gt 1BH 6CH lt n gt lt 27 gt lt 108 gt lt n gt Osns255 The ESC 1 lt n gt command sets the left margin using lt n gt The left margin is set to lt n gt characters from the beginning of the line Set Right Margin ESC Q lt n gt 1BH 51H lt n gt lt 29 gt lt 81 gt lt n gt 0 lt n lt 255 The ESC Q lt n gt command sets the right margin using lt n gt The right margin is set to lt n gt characters from the beginning of the line Return Home ESC lt 1BH 3CH lt 27 gt lt 60 gt The
69. and validation paper are available Both bits 0 and 1 indicate paper roll and if either of them is available the paper roll is selected as the print sheet The commands that need to select paper types for setting are ESC 2 ESC 3 GS L and GS W The value of n is used as follows Bit Off On Hex Decimal Function 0 Off 00 0 Not Used On 01 1 Not Used 1 Off 00 0 Paper roll disabled On 02 2 Paper roll enabled 2 Undefined 3 Off 00 0 Validation paper disabled On 08 8 Validation paper enabled 4 7 Undefined Function Select Paper Tvpe for Command Settings ASCII ESC f lt ti gt lt te gt Hexadecimal 1BH 66H lt t gt lt t2 gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 116 gt lt t gt lt te gt Range Ostis 15 O lt t2 lt 64 Description ESC f t1 t2 sets the time that the printer waits for validation paper to be inserted to ti x 1 minutes and the time from detection of the validation to the start of printing to t x 0 1 seconds When t1 0 the validation waiting time is not set and the printer continues waiting for a validation to be inserted The default validation waiting time is not set and the start operation time is set to 10 seconds t 0 t2 10 This setting alone however does not cause the printer to immediately start waiting for a validation to be inserted The setting becomes effective when validation paper is used DLE ENQ is used to cancel the validation waiting state Pa
70. be omitted The NUL must be present The intention of the command is to aid in macro development The terminating lt 0 gt may be replaced with an amp or redefined See ESC EM T lt n gt or amp UT lt n gt on page 136 Note The report is also printed as part of the configuration report Function Redefine User Store Termination Character ASCII ESC EM T lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 19H 54H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 25 gt lt 84 gt lt n gt IPCL amp UT lt n gt EPOS None Description This command allows the terminator used to signal the end of the name field in User Store commands to be modified The value of lt n gt is used in addition to the lt 0 gt for the terminator The value of n may be from 0 to 255 The default value for the second terminator is amp If this command redefines the terminator to something other than amp the amp will no longer function Example If amp UT were sent to the printer the user store command to run macro Demo would be amp amp URDemo Page 136 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes User Macros The user macro feature works by inserting the macro data buffer into the printer data stream when the print user store data command is encountered Macros can be any data normally sent to the printer including graphics Note user store maintenance and inquire commands may not be included in the macro definitions The printer stores ma
71. best characters with a brush size of about 100 Note The default value for the Brush stroke may be set in the POR INI file ESC P Set character pitch Legacy mode command PcOS ASCII ESC P lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 5BH 50H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 91 gt lt 80 gt lt n gt IPCL 8MFI amp F2 amp F3 amp F4 amp F5 amp F6 amp F7 EPOS ESC SP lt n gt Description The ESC P lt n gt command sets character per inch print pitch to lt n gt The printer resolution limits the exact print pitch The following table lists the exact pitch for various values on lt n gt Resulting IPCL Resulting IPCL Characters Characters per Inch per Inch 1 1 00 16 16 00 2 2 00 17 17 33 amp F1 3 3 01 18 17 33 4 4 00 19 18 91 5 4 95 20 20 8 amp F5 6 5 94 21 20 8 7 6 93 22 23 11 8 8 00 amp F7 23 23 11 9 9 04 24 23 11 amp F4 10 9 90 amp F3 25 23 11 11 10 95 26 26 12 12 23 amp F2 27 26 13 13 00 28 26 14 13 87 29 29 71 15 14 86 amp FE 30 29 71 Table 51 Character Pitch 28 07764 Rev C Page 279 ITherm 280 Unicode and Fonts iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide This command disables any right side spacing set by the ESC V command It enforces this spacing on the current font selection even if the character is too large for the spacing In addition when font changes are made the chara
72. bitmap file that may be loaded into the printer as a bitmap bft font file The input to the program is a text file in a predefined format consisting of a font description and then character definitions consisting of the character ID and then the character definition The format is as follows Note lines preceded with characters are comments 11 by 24 font with a base line at 22 F X is not used in Thermal Products W 11 H 24 B 22 F 0 N 0000 U 0000 NULL Ole opene eaa eed Q2L saae eee ee OS L les ved EA QAL se O5 eaaa Be wes OG samene di OF ES IA 10 iI ot Ta OO sr Seale Se wats DOn seesaw gate drdi l Ah mm OANA OFRWNE Lh N Ko N H N pa NO N N Ww N A N 0001 U 0020 SPACE OL o rfe ied ed 28 07764 Rev C Page 265 ITherm 280 Unicode and Fonts iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide VI Agira Wisse a 0A gia wy aa aie Qos weak Seti aa VOT kazi a Sika OTM AG MaMa Seat wo aicg 08H iaae ea e aaa Di sa as OM aaia g a g EI ER eek miri L2 NA ir KW PSS sil Naaa DA sett g WO ee geeks ceed TGs adits Stern ee wed Tiny awa kie oid ik ROSE ORE eee LYT ST esha eevee 20S eg g ete a rez ME gn takta AR adios ZS A EN i OO octantelg N 0002 U 0021 EXCLAMINATION MARK Olo Gagi Tee a g O26 Bet aE ave 03 i DON kl ia 04 8800 5 3 ot ae 05 sng OOM ddur 06 stay OO ss asa 07 vare DO aa 08 PEA O OE at she 09 Er O OESE E 10 GWU
73. character from amp to x x may range from 21H to 255H Note The amp used to flag the end of the Name string is not valid in PCOS Ithaca emulation mode You should use lt 0 gt or define the terminator with the amp UTx command The extended Escape sequences are ESC US and ESC FS The ESC US commands are the same as the PcOS emulation The ESC FS commands are not intended to be used by the customer They provide the universal graphics support Because graphics would be very difficult to generate and are not supported by any graphics drives other than PJColor How to use IPCL commands in text strings If your software allows you to pass text strings to the printer you should be able to use the universal graphics commands Most POS software allows user customization of the text message printed at the beginning and the end of the receipt To use the Universal IPCL commands simply place them in a text string like the following example note that your results may vary depending on the operation system software and the ability to pass ASCII Characters Load and store named graphic image e First you must create the graphic image using the PJColor Color Image Converter and save the image to a file See the section Generate a file to store graphics into a printer above Page 250 Rev C 28 07764 I Therm 280 Color Graphics iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide e Send the following text strings to the printer usi
74. characters like Hex C1 instead of Hex 41 A itis set for 8 bit data and the host is set for 7 bit In most cases the print problem can be traced to the host and printer being configured differently Page 60 Rev C 28 07764 How to Operate the Therm 280 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Level O Diagnostics Level 0 diagnostics always and only run at power up e g power being applied These diagnostics perform the following tasks Cold Power On 1 Basic System Integrity Vector Integrity RAM Test Flash Boot Loader Integrity Flash Firmware Integrity NOTE If the firmware is corrupted the printer will remain in boot load Start Normal Firmware Verify Configuration Integrity Interface Card Configuration User store Integrity Start Kernel Verify Multitasking Start Tasks DO IN 9 01 BON o Once the kernel is running the following tests must pass to allow operation However if anv test fails except the knife home test the remaining tests will generate recoverable faults and normal operation will start as soon as the fault is cleared These tests are also run when operation is resumed from OFF 11 Cover Closed Check 12 Knife Home if installed 13 Paper Present 14 Place Printer On line Start Normal Operation The first phase of testing consists of step 1 5 and determines that the boot loader is accurate and the printer firmware is correct Tests 1 through 4 produce non recoverable errors if thev fail in which ca
75. circumflex accent 00d0 Latin capital letter eth 005f underline 00d1 Latin capital letter n with tilde 0060 grave accent 00d2 Latin capital letter o with grave accent 0061 Latin small letter a 00d3 Latin capital letter o with acute accent 0062 Latin small letter b 00d4 Latin capital letter o with circumflex accent 0063 Latin small letter c 00d5 Latin capital letter o with tilde 0064 Latin small letter d 00d6 Latin capital letter o with diaeresis 0065 Latin small letter e 00d7 multiplication sign 0066 Latin small letter f 00d8 Latin capital letter o with oblique stroke 0067 Latin small letter g 00d9 Latin capital letter u with grave accent 0068 Latin small letter h 00da Latin capital letter u with acute accent 0069 Latin small letter i 00db Latin capital letter u with circumflex accent 006a Latin small letter j 00dc Latin capital letter u with diaeresis 006b Latin small letter k 00dd Latin capital letter y with acute accent 006c Latin small letter 00de Latin capital letter thorn 006d Latin small letter m OOdf Latin small letter sharp s 006e Latin small letter n 00e0 Latin small letter a with grave accent 006f Latin small letter o 00e1 Latin small letter a with acute accent 28 07764 Rev C Page 327 Appendix iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide
76. commands sent after a disable to be answered In addition inquires sent after an enable may not be answered See additional notes 3 and 4 on the next Note 3 ESC y lt 6 gt and lt 7 gt enable and disable the inquire process page Note 4 The printer has a resident OCR MA font It is defined and mapped per ANSI X3 111 1986 Once mapped into a code page it can be removed by issuing an ESC y lt 12 gt command or a code page select command Note 5 In EPOS mode the ESC y command is active ESC Extended Configuration and Control ASCII ESC lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 7EH lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 126 gt lt n gt IPCL none EPOS ESC lt n gt Description The ESC lt n gt commands are extended diagnostics commands They must all be preceded with an enabling command These commands in general are not intended to be used by the end user Page 168 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Remote Power Control The iTherm 280 Printer has a remote power control command that instructs it to enter OFF mode When the command is issued the printer performs print cartridge maintenance and enters OFF mode Unlike pushing the button remote power mode leaves the communications active All commands except the exit power down command are ignored ESC y Remote Power Control ASCII ESC y lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 79H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 121 gt lt n gt
77. defined If lt y gt 3 only the 16 x 24 NLQ font can be defined If lt y gt 2 and the NLQ font is active the large draft user defined font will be loaded If lt y gt 3 and a draft font is active the NLQ user defined font will be loaded Rev C Page 105 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide ESC ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL Description ESC gt ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range IPCL Description Page 106 Cancel user defined characters ESC 1BH 24H lt 27 gt lt 36 gt none The ESC command removes all user defined characters from the printers memory After the user defined characters are canceled the internal character set is printed Enable user defined characters ESC gt lt n gt 1BH 3EH lt n gt lt 27 gt lt 62 gt lt n gt lt 0 gt lt 1 gt 0 or 1 1 Enables the characters 0 Disables the characters none The ESC gt lt n gt command enables or disables the user defined characters The internal character set is printed Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Character Attributes ESC c ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Where lt n gt SO ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description DC4 ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description 28 07764 Select color ESC c lt n gt 1BH 63H lt n gt lt 27 gt lt 99 gt lt n gt amp CL lt m
78. emulation note that the printout that was printed at the beginning of the configuration process may be incorrect for the new emulation and the configurable features may be different If you are using this print out as a configuration guide and you are changing the emulation you may wish to save the new emulation and then re enter Configuration Mode to change other options This will print all the available features for the new emulation 28 07764 Rev C Page 65 Configuring Your I Therm 280 Printer iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Using Configuration Mode The Feed button is used to select and change configuration setting By pressing and releasing the Feed button the parameter to be changed can be selected By pressing and holding the Feed button the value of the selected parameter will change The following chart lists some of the potential parameters and their options Parameter Definition Options Default Emulation Mode Printers command set Ithaca PCOS Epson TM Ithaca PcOS TXX ESC POS Microline Ithaca M50 Model Type of Epson Printer TM T85 TM T881I TM TM T88Il T88lll TM T90 Paper Colors Black Dot Eo This option allows the 10 to 40 24 Custom Black or Custom Color paper Black energy to be set Red Dot Eo This option allows the 10 to 40 12 Custom Color paper Color energy to be set Color This option selects the Monochrome Red None secondary paper color Gre
79. encoding ESC H bad 2BH none 271 48 Initiate Unicode UTF 16LE encoding ESC L ica 2BH none 271 4 Initiate Unicode UTF 8 encoding MBCS ESC M nae 2BH none 271 Initiate Unicode UTF 8 Text only encoding ESC T 1BH 2BH none 272 MBCS 54H Initiate normal 8 bit ASCII character ESC A 1BH 2BH none 272 encoding 41H File System Commands Open File ESC RS O lt Mod gt 1BH 1EH none 283 FileName lt 0 gt 4FH Return Free Space for Open File ESC RS S Ah 1EH none 284 Return Free Space for Partition ESC RS s an 1EH none 284 73 Return Last File Command Status ESC RS at 1EH none 286 Close File ESC RS C 1BH 1EH none 285 43H Close All Files ESC RS K 1BH 1EH none 285 4BH Open File IESCJIRSI O 1BH 1EH none 283 FileName lt 0 gt 4FH Set Clear File Attributes ESC RS A lt Atb gt 1BH 1EH none 285 FileName lt 0 gt 41H Write File Data IESCJIRSI W lt Li gt 1BH 1EH none 286 lt Ly gt lt data gt 57H Read File Data ESC RS R lt Li gt 1BH 1EH none 287 lt Ly gt 52H File Directory File ESC RS Tal 1EH none 287 49 Delete all Files in partition IESCJIRSI E lt p gt bid 1EH none 287 De fragment File svstem ESC RS F ia 1EH none 287 Electronic Journal Electronic journal initialize and set ESC GS 1BH 1DH amp EI t51 password lt Password gt lt 0 gt 49H Electronic journal erase the electronic ESC GS E 1BH 1DH amp EC 151 journal lt Password gt lt 0 gt 45H Print the electronic journal ESC GS P lt
80. executing it The macro definition is executed upon power up using the parameters specified by the GS r t m command If the printer is powered up into self test mode the macro definition will not be executed A saved macro definition can be deleted with the GS _ command Bit Off On Hexl Decimal Function 0 Off 00 0 Macro executes r times continuously with the interval specified by t On 01 1 FEED Button controlled operation with time interval t 1 4 Undefined On 20 32 Value given by r is ignored and macro is run infinitely 6 On 40 64 Save start up macro definition to flash memory without executing 7 Undefined Page 230 Table 49 Macro Control Bit Definitions Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Function Delete Start Up Macro Definition ASCII GS Hexadecimal 1DH 5FH Decimal lt 29 gt lt 95 gt Description The GS command deletes a start up macro definition previously created by the GS command If a start up macro was not previously defined the command will be ignored User defined I mages and Graphics Commands Function Define user defined bit image ASCII GS lt Name gt lt 0 gt x y d d x xy x8 Hexadecimal 1DH 2DH lt Name gt lt 0 gt x y d d x xy x 8 Decimal lt 29 gt lt 45 gt lt Name gt lt 0 gt x y di d x xy x 8 Range 1 lt x lt 255 1 lt y lt 255 Osds255 lt Name gt a 15 bvte maximum length name to identify the image De
81. extension and the default should be nibble mode The iTherm 280 Printer supports the EPOS real time status commands DLE ENQ and DLE EOT and are preprocessed by the printer The printer supports all the response bit fields as defined by the TM T88 and TM T90 Printers See the descriptions below The iTherm 280 Printer looks at and evaluates all commands as they are received and does not respond to DLE ENQ or DLE EOT commands that happen to be embedded in graphics or other commands Refer to the buffer and preprocessor descriptions in later sections Page 182 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Supported TM T88 Commands Command Name Page LF OAH Print and line feed 191 CR ODH Print and carriage return 191 ESC d 1BH 64H Print and feed lt n gt lines 191 ESC J 1BH 4AH Print and feed paper lt n gt vertical units 192 Command Name Page ESC 2 1BH 32H Select default line spacing 1 6 Ipi 193 ESC 3 1BH 33H Set line spacing 193 Character Commands Command Name Page ESC SP 1BH 20H Set right side character spacing 193 ESC 1BH 21H Select print mode s 199 ESC 1BH 25H Select cancel user defined character sets 193 ESC amp 1BH 26H Define user defined characters 194 ESC 1BH 2DH Turn underline mode on off 199 ESC 1BH 3FH Cancel user defined characters 194 ESC E 1BH 45H Turn emphasized mode on off
82. file contains a list of all files that are to be validated in the printer and the expected CRC of the file If all the files verify this command will return VG followed by it s 2 byte CRC If any of the files do not verify the command will return VB followed by it s 2 byte CRC For example the file might look like this Por ini OxO6FF Only the Por ini file will be checked in this example An additional and optional feature of this command is that it can verify the CRC of the operating firmware By adding Firmware as a file name this command will recalculate the Firmware CRC and compare it to the master value If the recalculation does not match the master value this command will return a failed response The file would be as follows to add the Firmware check By using the master value this file need not be updated if the firmware is updated Por ini OxO6FF Firmware By knowing the CRC of the Verify cfg file the host application can verify that all the other files are correct and optionally the firmware without knowing anything about the other files of firmware Note The typical printer is not shipped with a Verify cfg file Note This command is not performed as a condition of normal operation It is up to the host application to refuse to use the printer if this command returns a fail to verify status Note if the Verify cfg file is not present the verify command will return VB and a 0 CRC Page 288 Rev C 28 07764
83. gt 1BH 07H lt n gt lt n gt lt n3 gt lt 27 gt lt 7 gt lt Ni gt lt N2 gt lt N3 gt None None The ESC BEL lt n gt lt n2 gt lt n gt command alters the way the audio alert sounds The default is a single sound lasting the period of time defined by the audio alert setting Where ESC p 5 ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Where lt n gt Page 164 The ESC BEL lt n gt lt n gt lt n gt command allows the sound to be altered lt n1 gt is the number of alert cycles lt n2 gt _ is the on time of the alert cycle in ten Ms intervals lt n3 gt _ is the off time of the alert cycle in ten Ms intervals Enable disable paper feed ESC p 5 lt n gt 1BH 70H 35H lt n gt lt 27 gt lt 112 gt lt 53 gt lt n gt Osnxs255 The ESC p 5 lt n gt command enables or disables the FEED button When the least significant bit LSB of lt n gt one the FEED button is disabled when it is zero the button is enabled To prevent problems caused by accidentally pressing the FEED button use the command to disable it The FEED button is temporarily enabled regardless of how the command is set during the wait time set by the GS z 0 command for paper insertion and during the recovery confirmation time Bit 0 1 the FEED button is disabled Bit 0 0 the button is enabled Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes ESC p 4 ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal
84. gt IPCL None EPOS None Description This command activates the periodic status back feature It will automatically return an ENQ lt 20 gt status See page Error Bookmark 28 07764 Rev C Page 179 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Where not defined on a periodic bases The value of n is the period in 100 MS intervals This command is saved through power cycles Once set it need not be set again however you can set it the same value repeatedly as it is only saved if it is changed In general it should not be changed on a regular bases n Interval in 100 MS increments IE 20 2 Seconds Setting the value to 0 disables the feature Note Periodic status back can also be activated with the ESC EM p command however it is not save during a power cycle Page 180 ESC EM p lt n gt Activate Periodic Status Back ASCII ESC EM p lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 19H 70H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 25 gt lt 112 gt lt n gt IPCL None EPOS None Description This command temporarily disables and enables the periodic status back feature if previously activated with the ESC EM P command Where n 0 disables PSB and n non zero Enables PSB at the interval defined by the ESC EM P command If not previously activated with the ESC EM P command this command will activate it but not save the value through a power cycle Where n Interval in 100 MS increments IE 20 2 Seconds Setting the value to
85. gt lt 84 gt IPCL amp SE EPOS none Description The ESC T command ends superscript or subscript 2838 07764 Rev C Page 111 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide ESC G__sCBegin italics ASCII ESC G Hexadecimal 1BH 25H 47H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 37 gt lt 71 gt IPCL amp MI EPOS ESC 4 Description The ESC G command begins italic print mode Note Italics are not available in all print modes ESC H_ End italics ASCII ESC H Hexadecimal 1BH 25H 48H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 37 gt lt 72 gt IPCL amp CI EPOS ESC 5 Description The ESC H command ends italic print mode Page 112 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Page Mode The iTherm 280i supports two operational modes standard and page mode In standard mode as a line of text is received it is buffered and printed when the line feed is received In page mode the printer waits for a complete page a number of lines to be received before printing the complete page The advantage of page mode is that text and or graphics can be placed anywhere on the page in any order and in any of 4 orientations How to use page mode Page mode requires two phases to operate correctly 1 Page definition a Define the master page size either just before or just after entering page mode b Optionally define a sub page The master page defines the maximum page size all sub pages must be smaller
86. gt command selects print modes using lt n gt as follows The default character font is 7 x 9 The defaults for the other print modes are set to lt n gt 1 Bit Off On Hexadecimal Decimal Function 0 Off 00H lt 0 gt Select 9 x 9 character font On 01H lt 1 gt Select 7 x 9 character font 1 2 Undefined Off 00H lt 0 gt Emphasized mode is not selected On 08H lt 8 gt Emphasized mode is selected 4 Off 00H lt 0 gt Double height mode is not selected On 10H lt 16 gt Double height mode is selected 5 Off 00H lt 0 gt Double wide mode is not selected On 20H lt 32 gt Double wide mode is selected 6 Undefined 7 Off 00H lt 0 gt Underline mode is not selected On 80H lt 128 gt Underline mode is selected Table 23 Print Modes Function Turn ON OFF Underline Mode ASCII ESC lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 2DH lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 45 gt lt n gt Range lt n gt 0 1 48 49 Description The ESC lt n gt command turns on or off underline mode When lt n gt 1 or 49 underline mode is turned on and when lt n gt 0 or 48 underline mode is turned off The default setting is lt n gt 0 Function Turn ON OFF Emphasized Mode ASCII ESC E lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 45H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 69 gt lt n gt Range Osns255 Description The ESC E lt n gt command turns on or off emphasized mode When the least significan
87. however each needs to have the or as a prefix To allow these attributes to be set and cleared the ESC RS JA command can be used The format is as follows JESCJIRSJA R S FileName lt 0 gt This command will remove the Read only and System attributes form File name Function Return the last file command status All 28 07764 Rev C Page 285 ITherm 280 File System iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide ASCII ESC RS Hexadecimal 1BH 1EH 3FH Decimal lt 27 gt lt 30 gt lt 63 gt The ESC RS Command requests the file system to return the status of the last file operation This command returns an identifier byte followed by 2 bytes indicating the status results of the last file command The format will be as follows lt Status gt lt Details gt or 3F 47 or 42 lt Details gt Where Status G for success and B for Failure Detail Detailed status as a binary byte with bit definitions as follows Bit Hex Decimal Function 0 01 1 File Open 1 02 2 File in Write Mode 2 04 4 The Read response is shorter than requested and EOF has been encountered 3 08 8 The file is already open 4 10 16 The file system has no space for the preceding operation Could be out of Flash or out of Buffer space 5 20 32 A write operation has been attempted to a read only file 6 40 64 File requested was not found 8 80 128 An error has occurred Other bits may be set th
88. i G i BIZI tajl ee RE fhe CBE tee WITE l THANK YOU FOR SHOPPING MITH US Figure 19 Sample Receipt When printing line graphics the data path to the printer must be eight bits Seven bit serial protocols do not access the extended characters The extended characters require that the form be reverse fed Consequently printing line graphics on the receipt may be less than acceptable 28 07764 Rev C Page 243 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide ITherm 280 Color Graphics APA Graphics The printer is capable of all points addressable APA or horizontal graphics Generating a graphic image by hand is time consuming and tedious It is recommended that a graphic package be used to create a graphic image The following procedure will help with the setup Procedure for APA graphics 1 2 Generate the graphic image in the program of your choice APA graphics only support monochrome images Make sure the paper size chosen fits the printer 3 inches wide with 0 25 inch margins If the paper size cannot be set print a portion of the page Print the graphic to a file using a generic IBM graphic 9 pin driver The standard IBM resolutions are 240 x 216 dpi 120 x 72 dpi and 60 x 72 dpi The iTherm 280 Printer supports all three resolutions For good resolution with reasonable speed use 120 x 72 dpi Print the graphic image to a file Edit the resulting file to remove any unwanted form control and insert the iTherm 28
89. in the vertical direction lt x gt specifies the number of bytes in the horizontal direction Character codes ranging from ASCII code 20H 32 to 7EH 126 can be defined by lt c gt and lt c gt Up to 19 user defined characters can be defined Data lt d gt specifies a bit printed to one and not printed to zero At the default user defined characters are not defined and the internal character set is printed Once the user defined characters have been defined they are available until ESC or ESC is executed the user defined characters are redefined the power is turned off or the printer is reset Function Cancel User Defined Characters ASCII ESC lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 3FH lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 63 gt lt n gt Range 32 lt n lt 126 Description The ESC lt n gt command cancels the user defined characters defined for character code lt n gt After the user defined characters are canceled the internal character set is printed Function Select Character Font ASCII ESC M lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 4DH lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 77 gt lt n gt Range 0 1 48 49 Description The ESC M lt n gt command selects one byte character font lt n gt Function 0 48 Page 0 PC437 U S A and Standard Europe 1 49 Page 1 PC850 Multilingual Page 194 Table 19 Select Character Font Table Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Function Select
90. interface 4 Reinstall the cash drawer socket into the frame Re Install the interface card 1 Slide the interface card into the printer Make sure the interface card sits flush with the printer The retaining screws should also line up with the mounting holes 2 Install the retaining screws 3 Connect the communications interface card and any cash drawer cables 4 Turn over the printer and reconnect the power Page 40 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Setup Procedures Installing Cables Three cables are required to be connected to the printer 1 Power 2 Communications 3 Cash Drawer Connecting power The iTherm 280 Printer is generally supplied with a built in power supply As an option the printer is available without a power supply Internal Supply The internal supply connects to an outside power source with a standard two wire power cord 28 07764 Rev C Page 41 Setup Procedures iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide External Supply If an external supply is used a 3 pin mini DIN plug is provided for the external 24 Volt supply Earth Ground 24 Volt Supply Ground 24 V dc Figure 4 3 pin mini DIN plug Connecting Communications Cables The iTherm 280 has a number of different communications interfaces Serial The serial interface connector is either a 9 pin or 25 pin mail D shell interface The pin out is shown below 9 pin 25 pin Signal Description
91. lt 1 gt Inquire Cash Drawer 1 status ASCII ENQ lt 1 gt Hexadecimal 05H 01H Decimal lt 5 gt lt 1 gt Function Cash Drawer 1 Status Response ACK lt 1 gt 06H 01H Cash Drawer 1 is closed NAK lt 1 gt 15H 01H Cash Drawer 1 is open Cash drawer status is defined as open circuit being drawer closed ENQ lt 3 gt Inquire receipt paper low status ASCII ENQ 432 Hexadecimal 05H 03H Decimal lt 5 gt lt 3 gt Function Receipt paper low Response ACK lt 3 gt 06H 03H Receipt paper is present NAK lt 3 gt 15H 03H Receipt paper is low Page 172 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes ENQ lt 4 gt Inquire receipt paper out status ASCII IENQI lt 4 gt Hexadecimal 05H 04H Decimal lt 5 gt lt 4 gt Function Receipt paper exhausted Response ACK lt 4 gt 06H 04H Receipt paper is present NAK lt 4 gt 15H 04H Receipt paper is exhausted ENQ lt 8 gt Inquire cover open status ASCII IENQI lt 8 gt Hexadecimal 05H 08H Decimal lt 5 gt lt 8 gt Function Cover open closed status Response ACK lt 8 gt 06H 08H The cover is closed NAK lt 8 gt 15H 08H The cover is open ENQ lt 9 gt Is the buffer empty Clear the IEEE 1284 buffer ASCII IENQI lt 9 gt Hexadecimal 05H 09H Decimal lt 5 gt lt 9 gt Function The ENQ lt 9 gt command allows the host to know when the print buffer is empty If IEEE 1284 is active the command also clears the response buffer
92. lt Name gt amp Description The amp UB lt Name gt amp command initializes the universal graphic buffer structure and redirects the following data to the universal graphic buffer It uses the lt Name gt field as a reference If the name already exists in the flash user store the command is ignored The command must be followed by the End name universal graphic record command with the same name If the data that follows is larger than the universal graphic buffer about 16K the universal graphic definition is terminated without saving any data amp UG lt Name gt amp End named universal graphic record IPCL amp UG lt Name gt amp Description The amp UG lt Name gt amp command ends the universal graphic record operation and saves the universal graphic to flash It uses the lt Name gt field to verify the command end and must match the Begin named universal graphic record command If the name already exists in the flash user store or the universal graphic memory is exceeded the command is invalid and the lt Name gt field prints amp UR lt Name gt amp Run universal graphic data from user store IPCL amp UR lt Name gt amp Description The amp UR lt Name gt amp command loads the referenced universal graphic into the universal graphic buffer The universal graphic buffer is then inserted into the data stream If the named item does not exist or is not a universal graphic the iTherm
93. mode It makes a single unidirectional 60 dpi print pass Full speed double density mode makes two passes with a half dot offset Full speed double density mode is half the speed of single density mode but it prints at 120 dpi Half speed double density mode is half the speed of full speed double density however the print quality is enhanced Character Graphics Character graphics is the term for joining individual characters together to produce a mosaic of characters that form a graphic image The simplest method uses an or any other character to form an image For example ITHACA might be formed as follows kKkK kkk kul ki Xixk ki kul kud kul kud kul KAKKKK KAR KKK kul kud kud kul kul kKkK kul kud kud KkK kud Figure 17 Example of Character Graphics The extended character set of the printer supports line graphic characters that can be combined to form windows and other shapes For the shapes to join from line to line the spacing must be set properly All characters are in a nine dot high character cell The dots are 1 60 inch apart Therefore the line spacing should be 10 60 or 1 6 inch The set fine line space command can be used to set the line spacing If possible the spacing should be reduced slightly to overlap the rows which prevents any white spacing from appearing between the lines The following example illustrates the use of extended character graphics 28 07764 Rev C Page 241
94. perform functions like self testing clearing errors and printer configuration They are BUTTON This is the standby or power down button located on front face of the printer s cabinet FEED Located on bottom portion of printer s keypad Button The iTherm 280 has been designed to remain connected to a power source at all times The button on the iTherm 280 Printer does not completely remove power from the printer Because of this the button is used to alternately switch the printer between OFF and ON modes The button does not disconnect power to the printer The printer is truly off only when the AC power supply is disconnected You will notice that none of the indicator lights will be on when the printer is in OFF When the printer enters ON mode the green power indicator light will be activated The operational state of the iTherm 280 can be determined by looking at the Power Indicator Light LED When the button is pressed or the power down command is received the iTherm 280 Printer enters an OFF low power mode The printer is not completely off but is in Standby mode Standby mode is remembered even if the power is removed Whenever power is turned back on the printer starts performs Level 0 diagnostics and re enters Standby mode FEED Button The FEED button feeds paper through the printer By pressing the FEED button momentarily the paper will be fed one line at a time Pressing and holding the FEED but
95. restore the data buffers Page 214 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes 0 Off 00H lt 0 gt Pin 3 is Low On 03H 3 Pin 3 is High 1 7 Off OOH lt 0 gt Not used fixed to Off Table 40 Peripheral Status lt n gt 0 48 Function Transmit Paper Sensor Status ASCII ESC v Hexadecimal 1BH 76H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 118 gt Description The ESC v command has been replaced by the GS r command The ESC v command transmits paper status has been replaced by the GS r command The iTherm 280 return paper status as specified below If the Electronic Journal is enabled Journal Low and Out are supported by this command Electronic J ournal Disabled Bit offon Decimal Electronic J ournal Enabled Bit offon 0 1 Off lt 0 gt Receipt Paper present On 02H lt 2 gt Receipt Paper Low or not present 2 3 Off 00 lt 0 gt Cover is closed On 04H lt 4 gt Cover is open 4 Off 00 lt 0 gt Not used fixed Off 5 Off 00 lt 0 gt Slip is present On 04H lt 4 gt Slip is not present 6 ON 20H lt 64 gt Fixed On 7 Off 00 lt 0 gt Not used fixed Off Decimal Status 0 Off 00H lt 0 gt Journal Space adequate gt 8K On 01H lt 1 gt Journal Space Low lt 8K 1 Off 00 lt 0 gt Receipt Paper present On 02H lt 2 gt Receipt Paper Low or not present 2 Of
96. scalable like true type fonts only the normal 2X 3X and so on scaling is available TransAct Technologies can upon request and signing an NDA provide tools to allow the customer to develop there own bitmap fonts These fonts must be in Unicode order but only need support the specific characters needed in the font NOTE When loaded and made available the legacy select font commands should select the bitmap font by adding 100 to the font ID For example to use BMFonto select font 100 in the Legacy font definition Note Only the font ID is used from the legacy font definition if a bitmap font is selected 28 07764 Rev C Page 269 ITherm 280 Unicode and Fonts iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Legacy font definitions define the Size spacing font quality and spot size to be used to generate a legacy font For example the PcOS esc l 02 font select command will select PcOS1 font Note that the font select and the Font ID are offset by one The font size is defined in 1 8 point units This gives a lot of control of the size Because the Therm 280 printer prints discreet dots that are relative large from a font point view changes in character size will appear to jump That is small changes in size will not appear to alter the character and them an 1 8 point change will make a dramatic change If you wish to change the font and or the character size select a size in the middle of the step Even though small changes don t appear to have an e
97. sent Mode 0 Mode 0 provides a reverse channel for information from the printer Normal responses to inquire commands are placed in the IEEE 1284 reverse channel buffer The Mode 0 reverse channel request begins returning information to the host The host mav terminate the transmission at any time If the link is terminated between nibbles the last nibble is retransmitted on the next request If a complete byte is transmitted it is deleted from the IEEE 1284 reverse channel buffer An inquire command can clear the reverse channel buffer before placing its response in the buffer The IEEE 1284 buffer is limited to 1000 characters If the buffer is not emptied by reverse channel requests the buffer overflows The buffer is a first in first out FIFO buffer and the last data placed in the buffer is lost Time outs IEEE 1284 specifies time outs for various phases of the protocol The iTherm 280 printer treats time outs as minimums The printer time outs at the specified period only if it is idle during the complete phase Active State The IEEE 1284 reverse channel may be activated at any time as long as the printer is not busy with data If the printer is off line or the cover is open the reverse channel may Page 306 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Communications be activated If the printer is placed back on line while the reverse channel is active the printer will not exit the reverse channel mode Inquire R
98. signal a serious problem with the system In most cases this error will also generate a Watch Dog reset A power cycle will generally recover normal printer operation An ESD event or a firmware bug generally causes these errors The printer maintains an error log this log contains additional information about the fault and is printed during manual configuration The information in this log should be reported to Transact to identify the exact cause of the fault USERSTORE FORMAT ERROR Power up or User Store Write Operations The User Store data in FLASH has an invalid format Pressing the Power Button will erase the user store and reformat it This can be caused by a firmware update FLASH WRITE ERROR Power up or User Store Write Operation The Program Flash has failed There is no recovery from this error COM ADAPTER ERROR Power up only The communications interface card is not supported by the firmware or is missing There is no recovery Page 320 Rev C 28 07764 Communications iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programmer s Notes When the serial port is used it is important that the output lines from the printer not be shorted or back driven If the signals are not to be used they should be left open Pins 3 4 and 7 of the 9 pin connector are outputs from the printer If any one of these signals is grounded or back driven the other two outputs will be degraded The best time to configure the printer by the host with remote co
99. the first value being the ASCII ID and the second value being the Unicode address The file should be something like this 0x00 0x0000 NULL 0x01 0x0001 START OF HEADING 0x02 0x0002 START OF TEXT 0x03 0x0003 END OF TEXT or Language USA Code Page 437 0x00 0x0000 0 NULL 0x01 Ox263A 9786 WHITE SMILE 0x02 0x263B 9787 BLACK SMILE 0x03 0x2665 9829 BLACK HEART SUIT 0x04 0x2666 9830 BLACK DIAMOND SUIT 0x05 0x2663 9827 BLACK CLUB SUIT r 0 NULL 9786 WHITE SMILE 9787 BLACK SMILE 9829 BLACK HEART SUIT 9830 BLACK DIAMOND SUIT 9827 BLACK CLUB SUIT arwWwnN O o Page 98 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes or SYMBOL SET WE name Windows 3 1 Latin 2 pcl char E symbols 32 0x0020 Space Code Prntabl Thin Space 33 0x0021 Exclamation 34 0x0022 Neutral Double Quote 5 0x0023 Number 36 0x0024 Dollar or Language USA Code Page 437 0x00 0x0000 0 NULL 0x01 0x263A 9786 WHITE SMILE 0x02 0x263B 9787 BLACK SMILE 0x03 0x2665 9829 BLACK HART SUIT 0x04 0x2666 9830 BLACK DIAMOND SUIT 0x05 0x2663 9827 BLACK CLUB SUIT or Language USA Code Page 437 0x00 0x0000 0 NULL 0x01 0x263A 9786 WHITE SMILE 0x02 0x263B 9787 BLACK SMILE 0x03 0x2665 9829 BLACK HART SUIT 0x04 0x2666 9830 BLACK DIAMOND SUIT 0x05 0x2663 9827 BLACK CLUB SUIT Numbers beginning with Ox are treated as h
100. to 5 V Logic zero Driver 0 V to 0 4 V Receiver 0 V to 0 8 V Current requirements Logic one Source 0 25 ma at 2 4 V Logic zero Sink 16 ma Line termination Data and control Strobe Page 30 3 3k ohm to 5 V 1 2k ohm to 5 V Rev C 2838 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Specifications and Requirements RS 232 Serial Interface Serial Port Features The serial port features are as follows Baud Rates 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19 2K 38 4K and 57 6K Bit Patterns 8 bit no parity 8 bit odd 8 bit even 7 bit no parity 7 bit odd 7 bit even Flow Control DTR and XON XOFF Description Pin 1 Pin 8 Not Connected Pin2 Pin 3 RX Receive Data Pin 3 Pin 2 TX Transmit Data Pin 4 Pin 20 DTR Data Terminal Readv Pin 5 Pin 7 GND Signal Ground Pin 6 Pin 6 DSR Data Set Ready Pin 7 Pin 4 RTS Request to Send Pin 8 Pin 5 CTS Clear to Send Pin 9 Pin 11 Not Connected Table 5 Serial Interface Pin outs Signal Voltage and Current levels The serial interface meets EIA RS232 interface specifications Voltage Levels Max 15 Volts Min 3 Volts Mark Off 3 to 15 Volts Space On 3 to 15 Volts Because both the host and printer are DTE s Data Terminal Equipment they use the same serial port pin outs If the cable that is used to connect the host to the printer is a pin to pin inter connect it will not work Therefore a null modem or turn around cable must be used to intercon
101. to the parallel interface Changing Interface Cards The interface card on the iTherm 280 Printer can be changed in the field In most cases interface cards are interchangeable without altering the printer firmware However you may have to load new firmware and or a new boot loader before you change the interface cards Check with Technical Support for firmware compatibility between interface cards before ordering Removing the Old Interface Card Turn over the printer taking care not to allow the cover to open or the paper to fall Disconnect the current communications and cash drawer cables If equipped unsnap the power supply retainer and slide out the power supply Disconnect the power supply from the interface card Remove the interface retaining screw Slide the interface card sideways towards the power supply pocket and remove it DOB O 28 07764 Rev C Page 39 Setup Procedures iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Cash Drawer Configuration Verify the Cash Drawer Interface The printer is shipped from the factory with a cash drawer interface label on the bottom of the printer You should always verify that the cash drawer you are using matches the printers cash drawer interface label If there is no cash drawer label you should remove the communications interface card and verify the setting See Configuring the Cash Drawer Interface on page 40 There are many vendors of cash drawers If you are unsure what the cash drawer
102. values of lt n gt The following table lists the cpi equivalent for several values of lt n gt lt n gt Small Draft cpi Large Draft cpi NLQ cpi 0 17 33 14 86 13 1 16 13 9 12 24 2 14 86 13 11 6 3 13 9 12 24 10 9 4 13 11 6 10 4 5 12 24 10 9 9 90 28 07764 Table 11 Inter character Spacing Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Character Font ESC Begin 12 x 12 draft print mode ASCII ESC H lt 0 gt Hexadecimal 1BH 23H 00H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 35 gt lt 0 gt IPCL amp QT EPOS ESC lt n gt Description The ESC lt 0 gt command begins 12 x 12 draft print mode Draft print is provided to maintain compatibility with other Ithaca products ESC I Set print quality mode ASCII ESC lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 49H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 73 gt lt n gt IPCL amp WQT 12 x 12 draft mode amp QU 12 x 14 large draft mode amp QL 24 x 16 near letter quality NLQ mode amp QS 24 x 16 near letter quality NLQ mode EPOS ESC x lt n gt and or ESC lt n gt Description The ESC lt n gt e g capital i command begins draft large draft or near letter quality print mode Where n 0 12 x 12 draft 1 12x 14 large draft 2 24x 16 near letter quality NLQ 3 24 x 16 near letter quality NLQ 4 7 repeats 0 3 Draft print modes are high speed print modes intended to provide quality print with minimal ink usage The
103. were in effect the 128 parameter would be UTF encoded to ESC W 194 128 With UTF 8 Text only mode this command is simply ESC W 128 Note This command also applies to graphic data being sent to the printer The graphic data is a command and not text It is not UTF 8 encoded Function Initiate Normal 8 bit ASCII Character Encoding All ASCII ESC A Hexadecimal 1BH 2BH 41H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 43 gt lt 65 gt Description The ESC A command will put the printer into normal character encoding mode of operation One byte one character In this mode international characters must be selected by selecting the appropriate code page for translation Page 272 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide ITherm 280 Unicode and Fonts Font Size and Spacing The font typically defines the character size and line spacing The typical font is proportional spaced That is the spacing between characters varies This is not always the most desirable mode of operation To give the programmer some additional control over character spacing and line height the Accutherm Supreme provides a width and height override command The following table converts dots to CPI Characters Per Inch points and 1 points and is useful in calculating point size settings a CPI 1 72 1 288 es s o o oe o 6e 29 2412 947 28 07764 Rev C Page 273 ITherm 280 Unicode and Fonts iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Font Size and Spacing co
104. width in points All ASCII ESC P lt w gt lt h gt Hexadecimal 1BH 2BH 50H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 43 gt lt 80 gt Range w 0 4 72 h 4 72 The ESC P command will set the minimum character width or height based on w for the width and h for height where w and h are in points defined as 1 72 of an inch increments If the character width is set to zero the height will be used for the width and proportional spacing will be used NOTE The set pitch command will take precedence unless this command selects 0 width Function Set minimum character height and width in 1 4 points All ASCII ESC p lt w gt lt h gt Hexadecimal 1BH 2BH 70H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 43 gt lt 112 gt Range w 0 16 255 h 16 255 The ESC p command will set the minimum character width or height based on w for the width and h where w and h are in 1 4 points or 1 288 of an inch increments This approximates setting characters by dot If the character width is set to zero the height will be used for the width and proportional spacing will be used NOTE The set pitch command will take precedence unless this command selects 0 width Function Set Character spacing in points All ASCII ESC lt d gt Hexadecimal 1BH 2BH 49H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 43 gt lt 73 gt Range d 0 4 72 The ESC command will set the character spacing in points where one point is defined as 1 72 of an in
105. will be signaled when 1024 bytes remain Inquire commands are preprocessed which means they are found in the input data stream and acted upon as they are received The status returned is valid as of the time the command is received This is termed real time status even though inquire commands are preprocessed and still placed in the buffer Real time status assures that data is not lost when the inquire sequence is part of another command However the buffer may also be filled by inquire commands if the printer is waiting for some activity 28 07764 Rev C Page 301 Communications iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide USB USB stands for Universal Serial Bus It was originally conceived in the early 90 s and Officially recognized by Compaq Intel Microsoft and NEC The development of USB has been slow however with the release of Windows 95 SR2 development accelerated Windows 2000 now fully supports USB as do Windows 98 SE and Windows Me A technical discussion of USB is beyond the scope of this document If you would like more information about USB visit the USB web site at www usb org USB Support POS printers are different from typical Windows printers in several ways Microsoft has recognized these differences and has been working with the USB Device Working Group to generate a set of standards that would abstract all point of sale devices at the application level At this time a workable standard for POS is years away So while Microso
106. with an ESC y lt 8 gt Function Print Current Print Setup Values ASCII ESC y lt 20 gt or ESC lt 20 gt Hexadecimal 1BH 79H 14H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 121 gt lt 20 gt Description This command forces the printer to print the current setup values Note This command must be preceded with an ESC y lt 8 gt Function Set Electronic Journal Print Configuration Control ASCII ESC j lt n gt Hex 1BH 7EH 6AH Decimal lt 2 7 gt lt 126 gt lt 105 gt Description This command reconfigures the electronic journal print mode record separator and manual printing modes Where n 76543210 Bit values XO Manual Electronic Journal Print mode is Enabled X1 Manual Electronic Journal Print mode is Disabled OX A Record separation line is printed that may contain a record number 1X No Record separation line is printed Note Both parameters must be set at the same time by this command Note The record separation configuration may be set in manual configuration mode This command will reset the configuration to the value specified here Page 294 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide ITherm Extended Printer Control Notes This command performs a configuration update and should not be done on a regular basis Notes This command must be preceded with an ESC y lt 8 gt to enable it 28 07764 Rev C Page 295 Communications 28 07764 R
107. with breve 015a Latin capital letter s with acute accent 0104 Latin capital letter a with ogonek 015b Latin small letter s with acute accent 0105 Latin small letter a with ogonek 015c Latin capital letter s with circumflex 0106 Latin capital letter c with acute accent 015d Latin small letter s with circumflex 0107 Latin small letter c with acute accent 015e Latin capital letter s with cedilla 0108 Latin capital letter c with circumflex 015f Latin small letter s with cedilla 0109 Latin small letter c with circumflex 0160 Latin capital letter s with hacek 010a Latin capital letter c with dot above 0161 Latin small letter s with hacek 010b Latin small letter c with dot above 0162 Latin capital letter t with cedilla 010c Latin capital letter c with caron 0163 Latin small letter t with cedilla 010d Latin small letter c with caron 0164 Latin capital letter t with hacek 010e Latin capital letter d with hacek 0165 Latin small letter t with hacek 010f Latin small letter d with hacek 0166 Latin capital letter t with stroke 0110 Latin capital letter d with stroke 0167 Latin small letter t with stroke 0111 Latin small letter d with stroke 0168 Latin capital letter u with tilde 0112 Latin capital letter e with macron 0169 Latin small letter u with tilde 0113 Latin small letter e with macron 016a Latin capital letter u with macron 0114 Latin capital letter e with breve 016b Latin small letter u with macron 0115 Latin small letter e with breve 016c Latin ca
108. zeros The printer prints an EAN 8 bar code that is about 130 the size of the nominal standard which provides optimal readability EAN 14 EAN 14 It is a high density fixed length numeric continuous code which employs multiple element widths EAN 14 is a subset of Code 128 that encodes FNC1 and 14 digit pairs If fewer than 14 digits are sent leading zeros will be added to complete the code Code 93 Code 93 is a variable length alphanumeric bar code The complete data field is printed by the printer Due to space limitations only 10 characters can be printed Codabar Codabar is a variable length format primarily used for numeric symbols It offers 16 data characters including the numeric digits zero through nine and and Four unique start stop characters designated A B C and D are also available Due to space limitations only 12 characters can be printed 28 07764 Rev C Page 145 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Note 1 A CR may also be used in place of the ETX to end the bar code data field Note 2 Only information that is usable in a particular bar code will be printed PDF 417 PDF 417 is a two dimensional barcode that will encode the full ASCII character set As it encodes the full set including control characters the length of the following data must be provided to the printer The form of the command is as follows ESC b lt 9 gt lt nL gt lt nH gt lt d1 gt
109. 0 form control Make the resulting file available to your application so it can be sent to the printer when required Page 244 Rev C 28 07764 I Therm 280 Color Graphics iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Color Graphics The iTherm 280 is a two color printer as rather than a full color printer A full color printer forms the various colors of an image by mixing inks of different colors on the paper The amount of each color determines the hue Typically the paper is white and no ink produces a white Mixing yellow and cyan produces a red and mixing cyan magenta and yellow in equal amounts produces a black or gray If the printer has a forth cartridge it will be black and conserves the color cartridges ink The iTherm 280 is a two color printer It has white the paper and two predefined colors Typically one of the colors is black and the other is a highlight color The high light color is primarily used in text printing to highlight a line and typically is red When the iTherm 280 generates graphics both colors are used to generate the image Because the program that generates the graphic image data should not need to be aware of the colors available in the printer three color planes are sent to the printer The printer is aware of what colors the cartridges are that will generate the image The printer will converts the full color image information into a two color image If the iTherm 280 printer is configured with a black c
110. 0 gt GS lt Name gt lt 0 gt is from one to 15 characters and must be null terminated The ESC US m lt Name gt lt 0 gt command saves the current macro buffer structure into the flash user store area It uses the lt Name gt field as a reference name If the name already exists in the flash user store the command does not store the data The terminating lt 0 gt may be replaced with an amp or redefined See ESC EM T lt n gt or amp UT lt n gt on page 136 Save user defined characters ESC US c lt Name gt lt 0 gt 1BH 1FH 63H lt 27 gt lt 31 gt lt 99 gt amp UC lt Name gt lt 0 gt GS 6 lt Name gt lt 0 gt is from one to 15 characters and must be null terminated The ESC US c lt Name gt lt 0 gt command saves the current user defined character structure in the flash user save storage area It uses the lt Name gt field as a reference If the name already exists in the flash user store the command will not store the data The terminating lt 0 gt may be replaced with an 8 or redefined See ESC EM T lt n gt or amp UT lt n gt on page 136 Rev C Page 133 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Page 134
111. 02H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 103 gt lt 2 gt IPCL amp GE EPOS ESC g lt 2 gt Description The ESC g lt 2 gt command stops recording user store data information The buffer is not saved into the nonvolatile memory ESC g lt 3 gt Stop macro record and save ASCII ESC g 32 Hexadecimal 1BH 67H 03H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 103 gt lt 3 gt IPCL amp GW EPOS ESC g lt 3 gt Description The ESC g 32 command stops recording graphic save information The buffer is saved into the user store nonvolatile memory under the name ESCg3_Save Note The ESC g lt 3 gt command is supplied for compatibility with the Series 80PLUS and 90PLUS printers Page 138 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Bar Codes The iTherm 280 Printer supports the ability to print bar codes The printer offers a number of formats as defined below The host does not need to form the graphic image for these bar codes The host need only send the printer the information to be bar coded and a graphic is generated by the printer In some cases a check character is required by the format In most cases the printer generates the check character and inserts it correctly in the format The printer uses internal graphic modes to form bar code images and the images are adjusted for ink bleed In general the bar codes generated by sending graphic data to the printer are not as readable as the bar codes the printer generate
112. 04 Define user defined characters ESC lt y gt lt ci gt 1BH 3DH none 105 lt Co gt Enable user defined characters ESC gt lt n gt 1BH 3EH none 106 Cancel user defined characters ESC 1BH 24H none 106 28 07764 Rev C Page 77 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Description ASCII Hex IPCL equivalent Page code Print control character ESC lt n gt 1BH 5EH amp CC lt m gt 102 lt MmM2 gt lt M3 gt Print Unicode character ESC lt n_ gt lt ny gt 1BH 22H amp PU lt mi gt 102 lt Me2 gt lt M3 gt lt M4 gt lt Mm4 gt Character Attributes Select color ESC c lt n gt 1BH 63H amp CL lt m gt 107 Begin one line double wide print SO OEH amp MW 107 Cancel one line double wide print DC4 14H amp MN 107 Multi line double wide double high mode ESC W lt n gt 1BH 57H amp FS n 0 108 n 0 Standard mode ee h 1 n 1 Double wide SEH a n 2 Double high 3 Both Enable disable Strike Through ESC _ lt n gt 1BH 5FH amp CO n 0 108 n 0 End amp MO n 1 n 1 Begin Begin underline mode ESC lt n gt 1BH 2DH amp CU n 0 110 n 0 End amp MU n 1 n 1 Begin Begin enhanced print ESC G 1BH 47H amp ME 110 End enhanced print ESC H 1BH 48H amp CE 110 Begin emphasized print ESC E 1BH 45H amp MM 110 End emphasized print ESC F 1BH
113. 040e Cyrillic capital letter short u 1e85 Latin small letter w with diaeresis 040f Cyrillic capital letter dzhe 1ef2 Latin capital letter v with grave 0410 Cyrillic capital letter a 1ef3 Latin small letter v with grave 28 07764 Rev C Page 329 Appendix iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide 2013 en dash 2524 box drawings light vertical and left 2014 em dash 252c box drawings light down and horizontal 2015 horizontal bar 2534 box drawings light up and horizontal 2017 double low line 253c box drawings light vertical and horizontal 2018 left single quotation mark 2550 box drawings double horizontal 2019 right single quotation mark 2551 box drawings double vertical 201a single low 9 quotation mark 2552 box drawings down single and right double 201b single high reversed 9 quotation mark 2553 box drawings down double and right single 201c left double quotation mark 2554 box drawings double down and right 201d right double quotation mark 2555 box drawings down single and left double 201e double low 9 quotation mark 2556 box drawings down double and left single 2020 dagger 2557 box drawings double down and left 2021 double dagger 2558 box drawings up single and right double 2022 bullet 2559
114. 1 102 195 270 271 272 276 277 278 279 283 284 285 286 287 288 Page 346 International Character Sets 195 IPCL Codes 74 Ithaca Specific iTherm 280 Commands 236 Justification Selecting 206 Justification Setting 84 LED indicator error 56 paper 56 power 56 Level 0 diagnostics 61 Line feed 82 Line Feed Button 55 Line Feed Performing 85 Line Feed Reverse 90 Line Spacing Commands 193 Line Spacing Enabling 87 Line Spacing Feeding Lines 87 Line Spacing Select Default 193 Line Spacing Set at 2 1 2 16 inch and 7 72 inch 86 Line Spacing Set 1 8 inch 86 Line Spacing Set n 216 inch 85 Line Spacing Setting 193 Line Spacing Variable Setting 86 Machanical Error Status Inquire 174 Macro Data Run from user Store 134 Macro Data Saving 130 Macro Data Saving in user Store 133 Macro Record Beginning 130 Macro Record Ending 133 Macro Record Ending name 130 Macro Record Start 138 Macro Record Starting 130 132 Macro Record Stop 138 Macro Record Stop and Save 138 Macro Record Stopping 130 Macro Flag on Startup 134 Macro Function Commands 230 Mechanism Control Commands 223 Microline Emulation 74 Miscellaneous Commands 224 Multidrop configuration 318 Multi Drop Control Beginning 170 Multiline Mode 108 OFF Button 55 Off line active 319 One Line Double Wide Print Beginning 107 One Line Double Wide Print Canceling 107 Output Paper end Signals Selecting Paper
115. 1 Latin small letter n with tilde 0148 Latin small letter n with hacek oof2 Latin small letter o with grave accent 0149 Latin small letter n preceded by apostrophe 00f3 Latin small letter o with acute accent 014a Latin capital letter eng 00f4 Latin small letter o with circumflex accent 014b Latin small letter eng 00f5 Latin small letter o with tilde 014c Latin capital letter o with macron 00f6 Latin small letter o with diaeresis 014d Latin small letter o with macron 00f7 division sign 014e Latin capital letter o with breve 00f8 Latin small letter o with oblique stroke 014f Latin small letter o with breve 00f9 Latin small letter u with grave accent 0150 Latin capital letter o with double acute accent 00fa Latin small letter u with acute accent 0151 Latin small letter o with double acute accent OOfb Latin small letter u with circumflex accent 0152 Latin capital ligature o with e oofc Latin small letter u with diaeresis 0153 Latin small ligature o with e O0fd Latin small letter y with acute accent 0154 Latin capital letter r with acute accent QOfe Latin small letter thorn 0155 Latin small letter r with acute accent OOff Latin small letter y with diaeresis 0156 Latin capital letter r with cedilla 0100 Latin capital letter a with macron 0157 Latin small letter r with cedilla 0101 Latin small letter a with macron 0158 Latin capital letter r with hacek 0102 Latin capital letter a with breve 0159 Latin small letter r with hacek 0103 Latin small letter a
116. 1 digits 4 EAN 13 Numeric 0 9 only 12 digits 5 UPC E Numeric 0 9 only 11 digits 6 EAN 8 Numeric 0 9 only 7 digits 7 Code 93 26 letters 10 digits 0 9 and 7 special characters 8 Codabar 10 digits 0 9 4 start stop characters A B C and D and 6 special characters 9 PDF 417 2D alpha Numeric See notes below 12 EAN 14 Numeric 0 9 only 14 digits 28 07764 Rev C Page 139 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Note You may print barcodes in page mode If you rotate these barcodes 90 or 180 you can get significantly longer barcodes Interleaved 2 of 5 Interleaved 2 of 5 is a high density self checking continuous numeric bar code It is mainly used where fixed length numeric fields are required The data field must be an even number of characters If an odd data field is sent to the iTherm 280 printer it will be zero padded Due to space limitations only 16 characters can be printed Page 140 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Code 39 Code 39 is an alphanumeric bar code It is a discrete self checking variable length code The printer prints the complete data field The number of characters that can be printed depends on the bar width scaling If the bar code scale is set to 2 17 characters may be printed per line There are two modes of operation for the Code 39 barcodes The first is in a variable length format In this mode all characters sent to the printer will
117. 1 for 270 Rotation Direction B 2 for 180 Rotation Direction C x x X x 3 for 90 Rotation Direction D Receipt or Inserted Form Initial entry MET eet location A gt gt gt gt gt lt lt lt lt lt q B gt gt gt gt gt lt lt lt lt lt 9 Note 1 This command saves the current right and left margin and sets them to the maximum values for the orientation currently defined Note 2 During page mode definition almost all printer commands are active The following table lists the exceptions Command Active Action Cash drawer Yes Immediate action commands Bell command Yes Immediate action Auto cut commands Delayed The printer will perform a feed to cut and then operate the auto cutter after the page is printed The cut command may be anywhere in the definition If the page is printed twice the Auto cut command must be reissued after the first print to generate additional cuts Electronic journal No This command is like a station select and is not active You 28 07764 Rev C Page 115 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide station select cannot store page mode images in the electronic journal A page mode command in journal station mode will exit journal mode Electronic journal Yes You can make journal entries as part of a page description entries They are saved as text and not part of the pa
118. 12 x 12 draft font is the most efficient The 12 x 14 large draft font produces a larger more readable character but with added ink usage NLQ print mode is a two pass half speed font It provides what is generally regarded as near letter quality print at reduced speed with greater ink usage Note 1 In EPOS mode ESC x lt n gt is similar to ESC lt n gt ESC lt n gt performs a similar function however NLQ is not available Note 2 NLQ fonts cannot be rotated 90 or 270 Note 3 Switching from draft to NLQ modes causes the printer to print all previously received information Consequently auto center and right justify do not print mixed draft and NLQ font as expected Page 96 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes ESC P ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL amp RF n 1 amp RN n 0 EPOS Description Where n 28 07764 Begin rotated font Right to left entry ESC P lt n gt 1BH 50H lt n gt lt 27 gt lt 80 gt lt n gt amp RI n 2 ESC V lt n gt The ESC P lt n gt command sets the print font to a rotated 90 or 270 font n 0 Normal n 1 Rotate 90 Single pass 12 x 12 draft n 2 Rotate 270 Single pass 12 x 12 draft n 5 Rotate 90 Two pass 12 x 12 draft or 12 x 14 large draft n 6 Rotate 270 Two pass 12 x 12 draft or 12 x 14 large draft n 8 Enter Text right to left n 9 Enter Text right to left and Rotate 90 Single pass 12
119. 1BH 79H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 121 gt lt n gt IPCL amp YX17 or amp YX18 EPOS ESC y lt n gt Where n 17 Requests the printer to enter remote OFF 18 Requests the printer to exit remote OFF Page 316 Rev C 28 07764 Communications iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Description Inquiry ENQ commands are accepted and answered in remote power down mode The printer reactivates if the button is pressed or a power up command is received Note If power is lost after the power down command is issued the printer remembers it is in power down mode but does not reactivate the communications link The button must be pushed to return the printer to full operation Note This command is not available in STAR mode Remote Printer Reset Reset in Serial Mode It is possible to generate a software printer reset in serial mode The ENQ lt 10 gt command requests that the printer reset This is not a hardware reset The reset completely initializes the hardware and software but the printer does not recover froma loss of software control Note If the printer mode was changed by the ESC y lt 2 gt or lt 3 gt command a soft reset will not return to the power on default The command flow is as follows e The ENQ lt 10 gt is acknowledged During cleanup and initialization the printer is placed off line Before the printer initializes it tries to clean up its input buffer and other internal processes The pri
120. 208 x 192 dpi 2 horizontal 2 vertical passes 14 15 16 Not supported Note 1 Only modes 10 thorough 13 should be selected for horizontal graphics Example Command Comment ESC lt 10 gt lt 0 gt lt 0 gt Set resolution to 100x96 dpi ESC h lt 1 gt lt 9 gt lt 0 gt lt eight data bytes gt Send 8 bytes red pixels ESC h lt 2 gt lt 9 gt lt 0 gt lt eight databytes gt Send 8 bytes green pixels ESC h lt 3 gt lt 9 gt lt 0 gt lt eight data bytes gt Send 8 bytes blue pixels LF Send line feed to force print of any buffered data not yet printed have been transmitted to the printer If less than 12 dot rows have been sent they are not printed until the line is terminated i e a line feed command is sent To make graphics faster to send and smaller to store several algorithms are included with the graphic command to compress the data O Note 2 Graphic data is committed to paper when more than 12 dot rows Page 128 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Graphics Compression Although the printer compression algorithms are documented it is recommended that our Windows printer driver be used to generate a graphic image Our Windows printer driver selects the best compression method to use on a scan line by scan line basis The print driver can be directed to print to file creating a prn file When creating a prn file it is recommended that the Start End Doc settings be clear
121. 215c vulgar fraction three eighths 2588 full block 215d vulgar fraction five eighths 258c left half block 215e vulgar fraction seven eighths 2590 right half block 2190 leftwards arrow 2591 light shade 2191 upwards arrow 2592 medium shade 2192 rightwards arrow 2593 dark shade 2193 downwards arrow 25a0 black square 2194 left right arrow 25a1 white square 2195 up down arrow 25aa black small square 21a8 up down arrow with base 25ab white small square 2202 partial differential 25ac black rectangle 2206 increment 25b2 black up pointing triangle 220f n ary product 25ba black right pointing pointer 2211 n ary summation 25bc black down pointing triangle 2212 minus sign 25c4 black left pointing pointer 2215 division slash 25ca lozenge 2219 bullet operator 25cb white circle 221a square root 25cf black circle 221e infinitv 25d8 inverse bullet 221f right angle 25d9 inverse white circle 2229 intersection 25e6 white bullet 222b integral 263a white smiling face 2248 almost equal to 263b black smiling face 2260 not equal to 263c white sun with ravs 2261 identical to 2640 female sign 2264 less than or equal to 2642 male sign 2265 greater than or equal to 2660 black spade suit 2302 house 2663 black club suit 2310 reversed not sign 2665 black heart suit 2320 top half integral 2666 black diamond suit 2321 bottom half integral 266a eighth note 2500 box drawings light horizontal 266b Beamed eighth notes 2502 box drawings light vertical f001 fi ligature 250c box draw
122. 280 Unicode and Fonts iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Stroke based characters With stroke based characters the points stored are along the center line Less than half the points are needed to render stroke based characters This improves character generation performance and uses less space This type of character generation is fast and efficient and is ideally suited for Asian fonts Character Definition True Type and Stroke fonts are designed as a complete font with character cell size and character position in the cell based on the overall font design Typical the characters are defined as vectors and stored as coordinates on a character cell grid The grid is in an arbitrary design unit and may be up to 4096 units on a side In most systems character sizes is specified as a point size where the point size refers to the character height The character width is typically variable and designed to produce the optimal appearance The font rendering system must take the requested point size and generate a character based on the original design units and produce a character that is the correct size and position for the printer In most font designs the vertical point size includes white space between lines The font designer defines the height of the character cell in design units for all characters then defines a character origin that will be used for all the characters in the font The designer then defines individual character sizes bas
123. 280 ignores the command amp US lt Name gt amp Flag item as a start up universal graphic IPCL amp US lt Name gt amp Description The amp US lt Name gt amp command flags the referenced item to be processed at startup Only one user character definition and one universal graphic may be flagged to run at startup amp UD lt Name gt amp Delete item from user store IPCL amp UD lt Name gt amp Description The amp UD lt Name gt amp command removes an item from user store and frees up space If the item does not exist the iTherm 280 ignores the command amp UFALL amp Flush information from user store IPCL amp UFALL amp Description The amp UFALL amp command clears all entries in user store and frees the data space It must have the name ALL in uppercase attached Page 252 Rev C 28 07764 ITherm 280 Color Graphics SUQ IPCL Description amp UT lt n gt IPCL Description Example amp CL IPCL Description Where n 8UA IPCL Description Where m 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Report on user store amp VUQ amp The amp UQ amp command prints a status report The intention of the command is to aid in universal graphic development Redefine User Store Termination Character amp UT lt n gt This command allows the terminator used to signal the end of the name field in User Store commands to be modified The value of lt n gt is used for th
124. 28594 ISO8859 4 Baltic 4 111 178 6FH B2H 28595 ISO8859 5 Cyrillic 111 179 6FH B3H 28597 ISO8859 7 Greek 111 181 6FH B5H 28599 ISO8859 9 Turkish 111 183 6FH B7H 28605 ISO8859 15 Latin 9 111 189 6FH BDH Note The ESC Select international character set command uses Code Pages 64 81 and represent old DOS code page maps They are provided to support of legacy applications They are not recommended for new applications 28 07764 Rev C Page 323 Appendix iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Appendix B ASCII Code Table Hex Decimal ASCII Hex Decimal ASCII Hex Decimal ASCII Hex Decimal ASCII x Q fo JO S 13 O IN D JO W MH e O gt m IN lt lt S lt coio IO D O JZ JZ rake nr olmo Jo W gt Phe FS IN s x g i lt c Je o n Ke Page 324 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Appendix Appendix C Unicode Character Addresses Note This information is based on the Unicode 3 0 Standard For specific character locations see the Unicode standard Note The Accutherm Supterme does not contain all possible Unicode characters The default character sets are defined by the WGL4 and GB18030 standards
125. 3 51 ROM version ID 2H or 2D Table 46 Printer ID Bit Off On Hex Decimal Function 0 Off 00H lt 0 gt No two byte character code 1 Off 00H lt 0 gt Not Auto cutter equipped On 02H lt 2 gt Auto cutter equipped 2 3 Undefined 4 Off 00H lt 0 gt Not used fixed to off 5 6 Undefined 7 Off 00H lt 0 gt Not used fixed to off Table 47 Type ID lt n gt 2 or 50 Function Generate Pulse ja The Epson Tvpe ID and ROM version are based on the Epson TM 88 documentation and a sample printer This value can be reconfigured to anv 8 bit value Page 224 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes ASCII ESC p lt m gt lt ti gt lt te gt Hexadecimal 1BH 70H lt m gt lt t gt lt te gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 112 gt lt m gt lt t gt lt te gt Range lt m gt 0 1 48 49 0 lt t1 lt 255 0 lt t2 lt 255 Description The ESC p lt m gt lt t gt lt t gt command sends a pulse on time lt t gt x 2 msec to the specified connector pin When lt m gt 1 or 48 the pulse is sent to drawer kick out connector pin 2 When lt m gt 0 or 48 the pulse is sent to drawer kick out connector pin 2 when lt m gt 1 or 49 the pulse is sent to drawer kick out connector pin 5 Function Generate Pulse in real time ASCII DLE DC4 lt 1 gt lt m gt lt t gt Hexadecimal 10H 14H lt 1 gt lt m gt lt t gt Decimal lt 16 gt
126. 32 SC S Co 126 Osxs12 12x 12 font O0 lt x lt 14 12 x 14 font O lt x lt 16 24 x 16 font 0 lt d d y xx lt 255 none The ESC lt y gt lt C1 gt lt Ca gt lt x1 gt lt di gt d y xX X1 KXk gt lt di gt d y x Xx command defines user defined characters from character code lt c gt to lt C2 gt lt y gt and lt x gt are the configurations of a user defined character lt y gt specifies the number of bytes in the vertical direction lt x gt specifies the number of bytes in the horizontal direction Character code ranges from 32 20H to 126 7EH can be defined by lt c gt and lt c gt Up to 32 user defined characters can be defined Data lt d gt specifies a bit printed to one and not printed to zero At the default user defined characters are not defined and the internal character set is printed Once the user defined characters have been defined they are available until ESC is executed the user defined characters are redefined the power is turned off or the printer is reset Each internal font draft large draft and NLQ has its own 32 character storage area If possible the currently selected font will be used to select which user defined font is defined If the font being defined is not suitable for the currently selected mode a suitable font will be temporarily selected for the definition If lt y gt 2 the 12 x 12 draft font or the 12 x 14 large draft font can be
127. 3226 PARENTHESIZED IDEOGRAPH SEVEN FE4F WAVY LOW LINE 3227 PARENTHESIZED IDEOGRAPH EIGHT FESO SMALL COMMA 3228 PARENTHESIZED IDEOGRAPH NINE FES1 SMALL IDEOGRAPHIC COMMA 3229 PARENTHESIZED IDEOGRAPH TEN FES2 SMALL FULL STOP 3231 PARENTHESIZED IDEOGRAPH STOCK FES4 SMALL SEMICOLON 32A3 CIRCLED IDEOGRAPH CORRECT FESS SMALL COLON 338E SQUARE MG FE56 SMALL QUESTION MARK 338F SQUARE KG FE57 SMALL EXCLAMATION MARK 339C SQUARE MM FE59 SMALL LEFT PARENTHESIS 339D SQUARE CM FESA SMALL RIGHT PARENTHESIS 339E SQUARE KM FESB SMALL LEFT CURLV BRACKET 33A1 SQUARE M SQUARED FE5C SMALL RIGHT CURLY BRACKET 33C4 SQUARE CC FESD SMALL LEFT TORTOISE SHELL BRACKET 33CE SQUARE KM CAPITAL FESE SMALL RIGHT TORTOISE SHELL BRACKET 33D1 SQUARE LN FESF SMALL NUMBER SIGN 33D2 SQUARE LOG FE60 SMALL AMPERSAND 33D5 SQUARE MIL FE61 SMALL ASTERISK 3400 4DB5 CJK UNIFIED IDEOGRAPH EXTENSION A FE62 SMALL PLUS SIGN 4E00 9FA5 CJK UNIFIED IDEOGRAPH FE63 SMALL HVPHEN MINUS E78D E796 PRIVATE USE AREA FE64 SMALL LESS THAN SIGN E7C7 E7C8 PRIVATE USE AREA FE65 SMALL GREATER THAN SIGN E815 E864 PRIVATE USE AREA FE66 SMALL EQUALS SIGN F92C CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH F92C FE68 SMALL REVERSE SOLIDUS F979 CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH F979 FE69 SMALL DOLLAR SIGN F995 CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH F995 FE6A SMALL PERCENT SIGN F9E7 CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH F9E7 FE6B SMALL COMMERCIAL AT FOF1 CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH F9F1 FFO1 FULLWIDTH EXCLAMATION MARK FAOC CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH FAOC FFO2 FULLW
128. 398 Greek capital letter theta 0423 Cyrillic capital letter u 0399 Greek capital letter iota 0424 Cyrillic capital letter ef 039a Greek capital letter kappa 0425 Cyrillic capital letter ha 039b Greek capital letter lamda 0426 Cyrillic capital letter tse 039c Greek capital letter mu 0427 Cyrillic capital letter che 039d Greek capital letter nu 0428 Cyrillic capital letter sha 039e Greek capital letter xi 0429 Cyrillic capital letter shcha 039f Greek capital letter omicron 042a Cyrillic capital letter hard sign 03a0 Greek capital letter pi 042b Cyrillic capital letter yeru 03a1 Greek capital letter rho 042c Cyrillic capital letter soft sign 03a3 Greek capital letter sigma 042d Cyrillic capital letter e 03a4 Greek capital letter tau 042e Cyrillic capital letter vu 03a5 Greek capital letter upsilon 042f Cyrillic capital letter ya 03a6 Greek capital letter phi 0430 Cyrillic small letter a 03a7 Greek capital letter chi 0431 Cyrillic small letter be 03a8 Greek capital letter psi 0432 Cyrillic small letter ve 03a9 Greek capital letter omega 0433 Cyrillic small letter ghe 03aa Greek capital letter iota with dialvtika 0434 Cyrillic small letter de 03ab Greek capital letter upsilon with dialvtika 0435 Cyrillic small letter ie 03ac Greek small letter alpha with tonos 0436 Cyrillic small letter zhe 03ad Greek small letter epsilon with tonos 0437 Cyrillic small letter ze 03ae Greek small letter eta with tonos 0438 Cyrillic small letter i 03af Greek s
129. 4H 69 Swedish 0 69 0H 045H 70 Danish 0 70 0H 046H 71 Norwegian 0 71 0H 047H 72 Dutch 0 72 0H 048H 73 ltalian 0 73 0H 049H 74 French Canadian 0 74 0H 04AH 75 Spanish 0 75 0H 04BH 76 Swedish II 0 76 0H 04CH 77 Swedish III 0 77 0H 04DH 78 Swedish IV 0 78 0H 04EH 79 Turkish 0 79 0H 04FH 80 Swiss 0 80 0H 050H 81 Swiss ll 0 81 0H 051H 91 Welsh 0 91 0H 05BH 93 Arabic 0 93 0H 05DH 437 USA 1 181 1H OB5H 774 Baltic 774 3 6 3H 006H 850 Multilingual 3 82 3H 052H 852 East Europe Latin Il 852 3 84 3H 054H 855 Cyrillic 1 855 3 87 3H 057H 857 Turkey 857 3 89 3H 059H 858 Multilingual Euro 3 90 3H 05AH 860 Portugal 3 92 3H 05CH 861 Icelandic 861 3 93 3H 05DH 862 Hebrew NC 862 3 94 3H 05EH 863 Canada French 3 95 3H 05FH 865 Norway 3 97 3H 061H Page 196 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Code Page Country Decimal lt n gt n gt Hex lt n gt lt n gt 866 Cyrillic Il 866 3 98 3H 062H 869 Greek 869 3 101 3H 065H 895 Kamenicky MJK 3 127 3H 07FH 1008 Greek 437 3 240 3H OFOH 1009 Greek 928 3 241 3H 0F1H 1011 Greek 437 CYPRUS 3 243 3H 0F3H 1012 Turkey 3 244 3H 0F4H 1013 Cyrillic Il 866 3 245 3H 0F5H 1014 Polska Mazovia 3 246 3H 0F6H 1015 ISO Latin 2 3 247 3H 0F7H 1016 Serbo Croatic 3 248 3H 0F8H 1017 Serbo Croatic II 3 249 3H 0F9H 1018 ECMA 94 3 250 3H OFAH 1019 Windows East Europe 3 251
130. 7 37 69 45 ESC 91 91 123 7B F F 38 38 70 46 FS 92 92 124 7C G G 39 39 71 47 GS 93 93 125 7D H H 40 40 72 48 RS 94 94 126 7E l l 41 41 73 49 US DEL 95 95 127 7F J J 42 42 74 4A FNC3 FNC3 96 96 128 80 K K 43 43 75 4B FNC2 FNC2 97 97 129 81 L L 44 44 76 4C Shift Shift 98 98 130 82 M M 45 45 77 4D Code Code 99 99 131 83 N N 46 46 78 4E C C O O 47 47 79 4F Code FNC4 Code 100 132 84 P P 48 48 80 50 B B Q Q 49 49 81 51 FNC4 Code Code 101 133 85 R R 50 50 82 52 A A S S 51 51 83 53 FNC1 102 134 86 T T 52 52 84 54 Start Code A 103 135 87 U U 53 53 85 55 Start Code B 104 136 88 Start Code C 105 137 89 Stop Figure 16 Code 128 encoding values Page 144 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes UPC A UPC A is a fixed length numeric continuous code that employs four element widths The printer supports Universal Product Code Version A E EAN 8 and EAN 13 Version A encodes 11 digits Typically the UPC A format starts with a number system digit five digit manufacturer s code five digit product code and a check digit The printer makes no assumptions about any of the codes except the check digit The printer prints an UPC bar code with the 11 digits sent to it and generates the check digit If fewer than 11 digits are sent the remaining digits will be zeros The printer prints an UPC that is about 130 the size of the UPC nominal standard which provides optimal readability UPC E UPC E is a zero suppress
131. 73 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Standard Emulation The standard control codes for the iTherm 280 Printer are extensions and subsets of the PcOS IBM emulation provided on other Ithaca products In some cases an application designed for a Series 50 Printer with IBM code sets will function with a iTherm 280 Printer I PCL Codes Ithaca Printer Control Language IPCL codes are part of PCOS and designed to control a printer without using control characters i e characters less than 20H Only the standard PcOS emulation supports IPCL In rare cases an IPCL code will interfere with the text that is to be printed The IPCL translator can be disabled with an ESC y lt 4 gt command EPOS Emulation ESC POS is referred to here as EPOS The iTherm 280 Printer supports two Epson emulations One emulation is for the TM T88 and the other is an enhanced TM T90 emulation Specific EPSON compatibility features such as its Automated Status Back ASB feature are available as an option from TransAct Technologies Command codes pertaining to these features are documented as licensed within the command description It is intended that the standard Ithaca PcOS emulation be used for new applications Not all features of iTherm 280 Printers are supported by EPOS specifically the ability to print color horizontal graphics is not supported Axiohm The printer contains an Axiohm A793 emulation that wi
132. 764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Setup Procedures Verifying the Configuration Before you install an iTherm 280 Printer into your system you should verify that the printer is configured as required by your system There are four parts to this verification process Verify that the communications interface card is the correct one Verify that the cash drawer interface is configured correctly Verify that the power connection is correct Verify that the firmware in the printer is configured correctly PON Verify the Communications I nterface Card There are several basic types of interface cards and each has variations Make sure your printer has the correct interface card Parallel Interface e Centronics 36 pin interface e 25 pin D shell Serial Interface e 9 pin D shell interface e 25 pin D shell interface USB Interface e Standard 4 pin Ethernet 10 Base T Adapter e Standard Ethernet port connector 802 11b Wireless Interface e Wireless interface pre installed within printer unit It is easy to distinguish most of the interface cards other than the 25 pin serial and 25 pin parallel interface cards To determine what interface is installed refer to the configuration receipt shipped with the printer or enter configuration mode and look at the verification printout If a serial interface card is installed the printout will refer to the RS 232 serial interface If the parallel interface card is installed the printout will refer
133. 7H lt Name gt 0H Decimal lt 29 gt lt 55 gt lt Name gt lt 0 gt Range lt Name gt a 15 byte maximum alphanumeric name to identify the image Description GS 7 lt Name gt lt 0 gt selects a previously saved user defined character set If the character set does not exist the command is ignored Function Query Nonvolatile Memory Pool Information ASCII GS 3 Hexadecimal 1DH 33H Decimal lt 29 gt lt 51 gt Description The GS 3 command prints a summary of the user store usage It is intended to help with the generation and maintenance of user store Note 1 The report is printed as part of the configuration report 28 07764 Rev C Page 235 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Ithaca Specific iTherm 280 Commands The iTherm 280 has a number of extended control commands designed to make operation and maintenance of the printer easier for the host application refer to the iTherm 280 extended control discussion on page 170 Panel Button Commands Function Enable Disable Paper Feed ASCII ESC p 5 lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 70H 35H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 112 gt lt 53 gt lt n gt Range 0 lt n lt 255 Description The ESC c 5 lt n gt command enables or disables the FEED Button Where lt n gt BitO 1 the FEED Button is disabled Bit 0 0 the button is enabled Paper Out Low Sensor Commands Function Paper Low Sensor ASCII ESC p 4 lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 70H 34H lt
134. 94 50H Set inter character spacing ESC V lt n gt 1BH 56H none 95 Begin 24 CPI character pitch ESC SI 1BH 0FH amp FA 93 Select Minimum character Height and ESC p lt w gt lt h gt 1BH 70H none 278 Width in points Set left right print margins ESC X lt ni gt lt no gt 1BH 58H none 161 n Left margin nz Right margin Character Font Select font ESC 3 lt ID gt 1BH 2BH none 270 31H Select font by name ESC N 1BH 2BH none 271 Filename lt 0 gt 4EH Define Stacked Font ESC S lt ID gt 1BH 2BH none 270 sIDa2 53H Set stroke font Brush Size ESC B lt w gt 4 af 2BH none 279 Select Minimum character Height and ESC P lt w gt lt h gt 1BH 50H none 278 Width in points Select Minimum character Height and ESC p lt w gt lt h gt 1BH 70H none 278 Width in points Begin 12 x 12 draft print ESC lt 0 gt A amp QT 96 Set print quality mode ESC lt n gt 1BH 49H amp QT n 0 96 n 0 Draft 12 x 12 one n 1 Large draft 12 x 14 2 OS in 3 n 2 NLQ 24 x 16 n 3 NLQ 24 x 16 n 4 7 Repeats 0 3 Begin rotated font See command ESC P lt n gt 1BH 50H a 97 description N Select character code page ESC T lt n gt lt n gt 1BH 5BH amp CP lt m gt 101 54H lt M2 gt lt M3 gt lt M4 gt Insert Euro character ESC C lt n gt i a amp EU 102 Print control character ESC lt n gt 1BH 5EH amp CC lt m gt 102 lt m gt lt M3 gt Redefine character set ESC S l ieee 1
135. ALL LETTER G 0x22 0x0022 QUOTATION MARK 0x68 0x0068 LATIN SMALL LETTER H 0x23 0x0023 NUMBER SIGN 0x69 0x0069 LATIN SMALL LETTER 0x24 0x0024 DOLLAR SIGN Ox6A_ 0x006A LATIN SMALL LETTER J 0x25 0x0025 PERCENT SIGN 0x6B_ 0x006B LATIN SMALL LETTER K 0x26 0x0026 AMPERSAND Ox6C 0x006C LATIN SMALL LETTER L 0x27 0x0027 APOSTROPHE Ox6D 0x006D LATIN SMALL LETTER M 0x28 0x0028 LEFT PARENTHESIS Ox6E Ox006E LATIN SMALL LETTER N 0x29 0x0029 RIGHT PARENTHESIS Ox6F Ox006F LATIN SMALL LETTER O Ox2A 0x002A ASTERISK 0x70 0x0070 LATIN SMALL LETTER P 0x2B 0x002B PLUS SIGN 0x71 0x0071 LATIN SMALL LETTER Q Ox2C_ 0x002C COMMA 0x72 0x0072 LATIN SMALL LETTER R 0x2D 0x002D HYPHEN MINUS 0x73 0x0073 LATIN SMALL LETTER S Ox2E 0x002E FULL STOP 0x74 0x0074 LATIN SMALL LETTER T Ox2F 0x002F SOLIDUS 0x75 0x0075 LATIN SMALL LETTER U 0x30 0x0030 DIGIT ZERO 0x76 0x0076 LATIN SMALL LETTER V 0x31 0x0031 DIGIT ONE 0x77 0x0077 LATIN SMALL LETTER W 0x32 0x0032 DIGIT TWO 0x78 0x0078 LATIN SMALL LETTER X 0x33 0x0033 DIGIT THREE 0x79 0x0079 LATIN SMALL LETTER Y 0x34 0x0034 DIGIT FOUR Ox7A_ 0x007A LATIN SMALL LETTER Z 0x35 0x0035 DIGIT FIVE 0x7B 0x007B LEFT CURLY BRACKET 0x36 0x0036 DIGIT SIX 0x7C J 0x007C VERTICAL LINE 0x37 0x0037 DIGIT SEVEN 0x7D 0x007D RIGHT CURLY BRACKET 0x38 0x0038 DIGIT EIGHT Ox7E 0x007E TILDE 0x39 0x0039 DIGIT NINE Ox7F 0x007F DELETE Ox3A_ 0x003A COLON 0x80 Ox20AC EURO SIGN 0x3B J 0x003B SEMICOLON 0x81 0x0000 0x3C_ 0x003C LESS THAN SIG
136. ANA LETTER BO 30DC KATAKANA LETTER BO 307D HIRAGANA LETTER PO 30DD KATAKANA LETTER PO 307E HIRAGANA LETTER MA 30DE KATAKANA LETTER MA 307F HIRAGANA LETTER MI 30DF KATAKANA LETTER MI 3080 HIRAGANA LETTER MU 30E0 KATAKANA LETTER MU 3081 HIRAGANA LETTER ME 30E1 KATAKANA LETTER ME 3082 HIRAGANA LETTER MO 30E2 KATAKANA LETTER MO 3083 HIRAGANA LETTER SMALL YA 30E3 KATAKANA LETTER SMALL YA 3084 HIRAGANA LETTER YA 30E4 KATAKANA LETTER YA 3085 HIRAGANA LETTER SMALL YU 30E5 KATAKANA LETTER SMALL YU 3086 HIRAGANA LETTER YU 30E6 KATAKANA LETTER YU 3087 HIRAGANA LETTER SMALL YO 30E7 KATAKANA LETTER SMALL YO 3088 HIRAGANA LETTER YO 30E8 KATAKANA LETTER YO 3089 HIRAGANA LETTER RA 30E9 KATAKANA LETTER RA 308A HIRAGANA LETTER RI 30EA KATAKANA LETTER RI 308B HIRAGANA LETTER RU 30EB KATAKANA LETTER RU 308C HIRAGANA LETTER RE 30EC KATAKANA LETTER RE 308D HIRAGANA LETTER RO 30ED KATAKANA LETTER RO 308E HIRAGANA LETTER SMALL WA 30EE KATAKANA LETTER SMALL WA 308F HIRAGANA LETTER WA 30EF KATAKANA LETTER WA 3090 HIRAGANA LETTER WI 30FO KATAKANA LETTER WI 3091 HIRAGANA LETTER WE 30F1 KATAKANA LETTER WE 3092 HIRAGANA LETTER WO 30F2 KATAKANA LETTER WO 3093 HIRAGANA LETTER N 30F3 KATAKANA LETTER N 309B KATAKANA HIRAGANA VOICED SOUND MARK 30F4 KATAKANA LETTER VU 309C KATAKANA HIRAGANA SEMI VOICED SOUND MARK 30F5 KATAKANA LETTER SMALL KA 309D HIRAGANA ITERATION MARK 30F6 KATAKANA LETTER SMALL KE 309E HIRAGANA VOICED ITERATION MARK 30FC KATAKANA HIRAGANA
137. C Page 341 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Index Index BEL Audio alert 163 164 BEL Sound buzzer 223 BS Insert back space 83 BS Set back space 206 CAN Clear print buffer 162 CR Print and carriage return 191 CR Set carriage return 82 DC2 Begin 10 cpi 93 DC4 End one line double wide print 107 DLE DC4 lt 1 gt lt m gt lt t gt Generate pulse in real time 225 DLE DC4 lt 2 gt lt a gt lt b gt Executes the printer power off sequence 225 DLE DC4 lt 8 gt d1 d7 Clear Buffer s 225 DLE ENQ lt n gt Real time request to printer 227 DLE EOT lt n gt Transmit real time status 213 IENQI lt 1 gt Inquire Cash Drawer 1 status 172 ENQ lt 10 gt Request printer reset 173 IENQI lt 11 gt Request printer power cycle status 174 ENQ lt 14 gt Inquire mechanical error status 174 ENQ lt 15 gt Inquire printer state 175 ENQ lt 20 gt Inquire all printer status 176 IENQI lt 21 gt Inquire printer ID 177 ENQ lt 22 gt Inquire Error Status 178 ENQ lt 23 gt Inquire user store status 179 ENQ lt 3 gt Inquire receipt paper low status 172 ENQ lt 4 gt Inquire receipt paper out status 173 ENQ lt 8 gt Inquire cover open status 173 ENQ lt 9 gt Inquire buffer status 173 ENQ lt n gt Inquire printer status 172 ESC lt 1 gt Begin underline 108 110 ESC lt n gt Turn on off underline mode 199 ESC lt n
138. CL none Description The ESC L lt ni gt lt n gt command prints lt n gt 256 lt n gt bytes of double density graphics 120 dpi at half speed allowing full and half dots to be printed ESC Y Print full speed double density graphics 120h x 72v dpi 28 07764 Rev C Page 123 Programming Codes ASCII iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide ESC Y lt n gt lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 59H lt n gt lt n gt Decimal IPCL Description ESC Z ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL Description lt 27 gt lt 89 gt lt ni gt lt N2 gt none The ESC Y lt n gt lt n gt command prints lt n gt 256 lt n gt bytes of double density graphics 120 dpi at full speed with no consecutive dots The mode is generally used to print 120h by 144v dpi resolutions in two passes Print quad density graphics 240h x 72v dpi ESC Z lt n gt lt n gt 1BH 5AH lt n gt lt n gt lt 27 gt lt 90 gt lt N gt lt N2 gt none The ESC Z lt n gt lt n2 gt command prints lt n gt 256 lt n gt bytes of quad density graphics 240 dpi at half speed with no consecutive dots The mode is generally used to print 240h by 144v dpi resolutions in two passes Extended APA Graphics ESC ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL Description Where lt m gt ESC ASCII Page 124 Print graphics in mode lt m gt 60h 120h 240h x 72v dpi ESC lt m gt lt n gt lt n gt 1BH 2AH
139. E E E RE teh ace 321 Appendix A Internal Code Pages ssennnnnn 323 Appendix B ASCII Code Table 55 324 Appendix C Unicode Character Addresses 325 Appendix D WGL4 0 Character Addresses 327 Appendix E GB18030 Character Addresses 331 Appendix F Windows 1252 Latin L 338 Appendix G Ordering Supplies ssennnnnnunenz S41 Page 8 Rev C 28 07764 Index iii iii iii iii BA Figures Figure 1 Receipt Printing Tear off Position 28 Figure 2 Cash Drawer Pin Definitions sc fsscen cts cieteets abet e eaten dint eetaes 33 Figure 3 Cash Drawer Selecti iti sicccigcees dengectaes benvsdeslei sed oes capa enday veces hens Dee ekeev eden ieee 40 Figure 4 3 pin mini DIN IOs ste ost cate e b a Af le aaetie nate anaes 42 Figure 5 Windows Print DrIVAr iii ai e 47 Figure 6 OPOS or UPOS A a AL 48 Fi lire 7 WISE Drive ta li e a A 49 Figure 8 Ethernet Virtual Serial Driver nr 50 Fi lre SO POSING OGM tista qa dab ba f a d th dua d da ta 51 Figure 10 Page Mode Entry Orientations 114 Figure 11 Page mode set printable area 117 Figure 12 Default Page mode printed area 118 Figure 13 Defined Page mode printed area 119 Figure 14 Code 39 full 128 character encoding ss 141 Figure 15 Expanded Function COOING xxii Set b va car sbaities so in evcodeed ny vee iaeed 143 Figure 16 Code 128 encoding values 144 Figure 17 Example of Character Graphics nanna 241 Figure 18 Example Commands for a Samp
140. ESC GS JE 1BH 1DH 45H Electronic journal erase the electronic 151 lt Password gt lt 0 gt journal ESC GS P lt S gt 1BH 1DH 50H Print the electronic journal 152 lt Sp gt lt Lia Lo ESC GS R lt Sp 1BH 1DH 52H Report the electronic journal 152 Sh gt lt Lia L gt Page 190 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes TM T88 TM T90 and ESC POSTU Command Descriptions The TM T90 and EPOS emulation s are grouped together The TM T90 emulation is a subset of the EPOS emulation The EPOS only commands are noted Print and Feed Commands Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description 28 07764 Print and Line Feed LF OAH lt 10 gt The LF command prints the data in the print buffer and feeds one line The amount of paper fed per line is based on the value set using the line spacing command The default setting is 1 6 inch Print and Carriage Return CR ODH lt 13 gt When auto line feed is enabled CR functions in the same way as LF When auto line feed is disabled CR prints the data in the print buffer and does not feed the paper Print and Feed lt n gt Lines ESC d lt n gt 1BH 64H lt n gt lt 27 gt lt 100 gt lt n gt Osns255 The ESC d lt n gt command prints the data
141. Euro character 1DH 23H replaces the character at OD5H with the Euro symbol Function Turn Color Mode ON OFF ASCII ESC r lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 72H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 114 gt lt n gt Range lt n gt 0 1 48 49 Description The ESC r lt n gt command turns on or off color mode When lt n gt 1 or 49 color mode is turned on and when lt n gt 0 or 48 color mode is turned off The default setting is lt n gt 0 Function Select Character Code Table ASCII ESC t lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 74H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 116 gt lt n gt Range 0 lt n lt 5 lt n gt 254 255 Description The ESC t lt n gt command selects a page lt n gt from the character code table as follows The alphanumeric characters 20H to 7FH are the same for each page The graphic characters 80H to FFH are different for each page The default setting is page 0 lt n gt Character Code Table 0 Page 0 PC437 U S A and Standard Europe 1 Page 1 PC850 Multilingual 2 Page 2 PC850 Multilingual 3 Page 3 PC860 Portuguese 4 Page 4 PC863 Canadian French 5 Page 5 PC865 Nordic 255 Page 255 Space page Page 198 Table 22 Character Code Table Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Function Select Print Mode s ASCII ESC lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 21H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 33 gt lt n gt Range 0 lt n lt 255 Description The ESC l lt n
142. F RITZ D01 QTY 1 2 50 D CR LF CHIPS DOL QTY 1 1 50 D CR LF STORAGE BAG D04 QTY 1 1 50 J CR LF esc lt l1 gt Resume the record SUB TOTAL 8 68 CR LF SALES TAX 1 50 CR LF Tee CR LF TOTAL 10 18 CR LF CASH TEND 20 00 CR LF ESC c lt 1 gt CHANGE DUE 9 82 CR LF ESC c lt 0 gt esc 1 lt 0 gt End the record esc a lt 1 gt LF LF ESC lt 4 gt lt 0 gt lt 0 gt lt 0 gt lt 34 gt lt 2 gt THANK YOU CR LF ESC lt 4 gt lt 0 gt lt 0 gt lt 0 gt lt 17 gt lt 1 gt FOR SHOPPING WITH US cr 1f esc a lt 0 gt esc d lt 15 gt esc v 28 07764 Rev C Page 157 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide The resulting journal entry would then only contain Date 0 Time 0 ST 2000 OP 00067 TE 021 0035 SUB TOTAL 8 68 SALES TAX 1 50 TOTAL 10 18 CASH TEND 20 00 CHANGE DUE 9 82 In carbon copv mode anv printer control commands in the record data will be added to the journal record As the records are printed those commands will be used to format the print Some care should be taken to assure that only format control command that you intend to be printed later get in the journal before the record is closed up to 16 bvtes of information mav be lost The O Note Information is gathered in packets or 16 bytes If power is lost link list will be repaired with data loss when power is next applied Page 158 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Gui
143. Guide Programming Codes Supported TM T90 Commands Bar Code Commands Command Name Page GSH 1DH 48H Select printing position of HRI characters 222 GS f 1DH 66H Select font HRI characters 222 GS h 1DH 68H Set bar code height 221 GS k 1DH 6BH Print bar code 220 GS w 1DH 77H Set bar code width 220 Command Name Page GS V 1DH 56H Select cut mode and cut paper 223 ESC 1BH 69H Set partial knife cut 223 ESC m 1BH 69H Set partial knife cut 194 BEL 07H Sound buzzer 223 ESC BEL 1BH 07H Sound buzzer 223 Command Name Page DLE DC4 lt 1 gt 10H 14H 01H Generate pulse in real time 225 DLE DC4 lt 2 gt 10H 14H 02H Execute power off sequence 225 DLE DC4 lt 8 gt 10H 14H 08H Clear buffers 225 ESC 1BH 3DH Select peripheral device status 226 ESC 1BH 40H Initialize printer 224 ESC p 1BH 70H Generate pulse 225 GS A 1DH 28H 41H Enter test mode 228 GS 1DH 49H Transmit printer ID 224 GS P 1DH 50H Set horizontal and vertical motion units 224 GS b 1DH 62H Turns smoothing mode on off 201 GS c 1DH 63H Print counter 228 GS g 0 1DH 67H 30H Initialize maintenance counter 228 GS g2 1DH 67H 32H Transmit maintenance counter value 229 Command Name Page GS 1DH 3AH Start end macro definition 230 GS rtm 1DH 5EH Execute macro 230 GS _ 1DH 5FH Delete start up macro definition 231 Page Mode Commands Command Name Page FF OCH Print
144. H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 43 gt lt 83 gt Description The ESC S command defines but does not select a stacked or linked font set This command will define a linked list of previously loaded and aliased fonts into a linked font stack The font ID is the same ID as in the select font command Up to 8 fonts may be linked The last entry must be 0 If the font does not exist it will not be made part of the link Note You must select font 0 to activate the linked font Note You can not use bitmap fonts as part of a linked font Page 270 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide ITherm 280 Unicode and Fonts Function Select Font by name All ASCII ESC N lt FileName gt lt 0 gt Hexadecimal 1BH 2BH 31H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 43 gt lt 51 gt Description The ESC N command selects the font for printing by file name This command is used to select a previously loaded font by its file name If the selected font does not exist the previous font will remain in effect Note This command may be undesirable because it embeds in the application a file name that you may wish to change in the future By using the Alias ID the font name may change but the application will remain constant Note This command may be used to load and select a bitmap font If a bitmap font is selected with this command it will define bitmap font 7 and select it Once loaded it may be reselected by selecting font 107 Function Initiate Unicode
145. H 07H lt 27 gt lt 07 gt The ESC BEL command sounds the internal buzzer if equipped Rev C Page 223 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Miscellaneous Commands Function Set Horizontal and Vertical Motion Units ASCII GS P xv Hexadecimal 1DH 50H x y Decimal lt 29 gt lt 80 gt x y Range 0 lt x lt 255 Default x 180 y 360 Description The GS P x y command sets the horizontal and vertical motion units to 1 x inches and 1 y inches respectively When x and y are set to zero the default setting of each value is used Note This feature is licensed from Epson and is only available in the Full Epson Emulation of the firmware Problems with this command are frequently caused by not using the correct version of the firmware Contact Transact sales and or technical support for this added cost option Function Initialize the Printer ASCII ESC Hexadecimal 1BH 40H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 64 gt Description The ESC command initializes the printer All settings including character font and line spacing are canceled Function Transmit Printer ID ASCII GS lt n gt Hexadecimal 1DH 49H lt n gt Decimal lt 29 gt lt 73 gt lt n gt Range 1sns3 49 lt n lt 51 Description The GS lt n gt command transmits the printer ID specified by lt n gt below Each printer ID consists of one byte of data lt gt Printer ID Hex ID 1 49 Printer model ID ODH 2 50 Type ID 20H or 32D
146. H MACRON 004A LATIN CAPITAL LETTER J 016B LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH MACRON 004B LATIN CAPITAL LETTER K 01CE LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH CARON 004C LATIN CAPITAL LETTER L 01D0 LATIN SMALL LETTER WITH CARON 004D LATIN CAPITAL LETTER M 01D2 LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH CARON 004E LATIN CAPITAL LETTER N 01D4 LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH CARON 004F LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O 01D6 LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH DIAERESIS AND 0050 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER P MACRON 0051 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Q 01D8 LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH DIAERESIS AND 0052 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER R ACUTE 0053 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER S 01DA LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH DIAERESIS AND 0054 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER T CARON 0055 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U 01DC LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH DIAERESIS AND 0056 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER V GRAVE 0057 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER W 0251 LATIN SMALL LETTER ALPHA 0058 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER X 0261 LATIN SMALL LETTER SCRIPT G 0059 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Y 02C7 CARON MANDARIN CHINESE THIRD TONE 005A LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Z 02C9 MODIFIER LETTER MACRON MANDARIN CHINESE 0088 LEFT SQUARE BRACKET TODIFIER LETTER ACUTE ACCENT MANDARIN 005C REVERSE SOLIDUS 005D RIGHT SQUARE BRACKET a CHINESE SECOND TONE MODIFIER LETTER GRAVE ACCENT MANDARIN 005E CIRCUMFLEX ACCENT 02CB 005F OW LINE CHINESE FOURTH TONE 02D9 DOT ABOVE MANDARIN CHINESE LIGHT TONE 0060 GRAVE ACCENT T 0391 GREEK CAPITAL LETTER ALPHA 0061 LATIN SMALL LETTER A T 0392 GREEK CAPITAL LETTER BETA 0062 LATIN SMALL LETTER B T 0393 GREE
147. H gt lt 0bH gt lt 51H gt Where lt 03H gt lt d5H gt means use the previously transmitted scan line data but change byte 3 to a d5H and change byte 11 ObH to a 51H Same as previous Compression In same as previous compression the command does not contain any graphics data The command specifies that the printer is to use the previous scan line data for the current scan line ESC h lt 1 gt lt 1 gt lt 255 gt User Store Graphic Save The iTherm 280 Printer maintains a 16K 16384 bytes section of flash memory and up to 192K of extended flash memory to save user information The information can be either macros or user defined characters These groups of data are indexed by name and may be called up at any time after they are stored See the sections on Macros and User defined Characters for definitions of these functions To allow the host application to maintain these groups of data a series of user store maintenance commands are available As referenced earlier in this manual the user can define a limited number of custom characters and define a macro These character macro definitions 28 07764 Rev C Page 129 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide can also be saved in user store However only one character definition and one macro can be active at any time One macro and one user defined character definition can be flagged to load and run at startup If a flag is set the printer will automatically pro
148. IAERESIS 0xA6 0x00A6 BROKEN BAR OxE5 Ox00E5 LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH RING OxA7_ 0x00A7 SECTION SIGN ABOVE OxA8 0x00A8 DIAERESIS OxE6 Ox00E6 LATIN SMALL LETTER AE 0xA9 0x00A9 COPYRIGHT SIGN OxE7 Ox00E7 LATIN SMALL LETTER C WITH CEDILLA OxAA Ox00AA FEMININE ORDINAL INDICATOR OxE8 Ox00E8 LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH GRAVE OxAB 0x00AB LEFT POINTING DOUBLE ANGLE OxE9 Ox00E9 LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH ACUTE QUOTATION MARK OxEA Ox00EA LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH OxAC 0x00AC NOT SIGN CIRCUMFLEX 0xAD 0x00AD SOFT HYPHEN 0xEB 0x00EB LATIN SMALL LETTER E WITH DIAERESIS OxAE Ox00AE REGISTERED SIGN OxEC Ox00EC LATIN SMALL LETTER WITH GRAVE OxAF Ox00AF MACRON OxED 0Ox00ED LATIN SMALL LETTER WITH ACUTE 0xBO 0x00BO DEGREE SIGN OxEE Ox00EE LATIN SMALL LETTER WITH CIRCUMFLEX 0xB1 0x00B1 PLUS MINUS SIGN OxEF Ox00EF LATIN SMALL LETTER WITH DIAERESIS 0xB2 0x00B2 SUPERSCRIPT TWO OxFO 0x00F0 LATIN SMALL LETTER ETH 0xB3 0x00B3 SUPERSCRIPT THREE OxF1 Ox00F1 LATIN SMALL LETTER N WITH TILDE 0xB4 0x00B4 ACUTE ACCENT OxF2 Ox00F2 LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH GRAVE 0xB5 0x00B5 MICRO SIGN OxF3 Ox00F3 LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH ACUTE 0xB6 0x00B6 PILCROW SIGN OxF4 Ox00F4 LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH 0xB7 0x00B7 MIDDLE DOT CIRCUMFLEX 0xB8 0x00B8 CEDILLA OxF5 Ox00F5 LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH TILDE 0xB9 0x00B9 SUPERSGRIPT ONE OxF6 0x00F6 LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH DIAERESIS OxBA 0x00BA MASCULINE ORDINAL INDICATOR OxF7 0x00F7 DIVISION SIGN 0xBB 0x00BB RIGHT POINTING DOUBLE ANGLE
149. IDTH QUOTATION MARK FAOD CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH FAOD FFO3 FULLWIDTH NUMBER SIGN FAOE CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH FAOE FFO4 FULLWIDTH DOLLAR SIGN FAOF CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH FAOF FFOS FULLWIDTH PERCENT SIGN FA11 CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH FA11 FFO6 FULLWIDTH AMPERSAND FA13 CJK COMPATIBILITV IDEOGRAPH FA13 FFO7 FULLWIDTH APOSTROPHE FA14 CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH FA14 FFO8 FULLWIDTH LEFT PARENTHESIS FA18 CJK COMPATIBILITV IDEOGRAPH FA18 FFO9 FULLWIDTH RIGHT PARENTHESIS FAIF CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH FA1F FFOA FULLWIDTH ASTERISK FA20 CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH FA20 FFOB FULLWIDTH PLUS SIGN FA21 CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH FA21 FFOC FULLWIDTH COMMA FA23 CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH FA23 FFOD FULLWIDTH HYPHEN MINUS FA24 CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH FA24 FFOE FULLWIDTH FULL STOP FA27 CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH FA27 FFOF FULLWIDTH SOLIDUS FA28 CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH FA28 FF10 FULLWIDTH DIGIT ZERO FA29 CJK COMPATIBILITY IDEOGRAPH FA29 FFT FULLWIDTH DIGIT ONE FE30 PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL TWO DOT FF12 FULLWIDTH DIGIT TWO LEADER FF13 FULLWIDTH DIGIT THREE FE31 PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL EM DASH FF14 FULLWIDTH DIGIT FOUR FE33 PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL LOW LINE FF15 FULLWIDTH DIGIT FIVE FE34 PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL WAVY LOW FF16 FULLWIDTH DIGIT SIX LINE FF17 FULLWIDTH DIGIT SEVEN FE35 PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL LEFT FF18 FULLWIDTH DIGIT EIGHT PARENTHESIS FF19 FULLWIDTH DIGIT NINE FE36 PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL
150. K CAPITAL LETTER GAMMA 0063 LATIN SMALL LETTER C 0394 GREEK CAPITAL LETTER DELTA 0064 LATIN SMALL LETTER D 0395 GREEK CAPITAL LETTER EPSILON 0065 LATIN SMALL LETTER E 0396 GREEK CAPITAL LETTER ZETA 0066 LATIN SMALL LETTER F T T 0397 GREEK CAPITAL LETTER ETA 0067 LATIN SMALL LETTER G 0398 GREEK CAPITAL LETTER THETA 0068 LATIN SMALL LETTER H 0399 GREEK CAPITAL LETTER IOTA 0069 LATIN SMALL LETTER 039A GREEK CAPITAL LETTER KAPPA 006A LATIN SMALL LETTER J 039B GREEK CAPITAL LETTER LAMDA 006B LATIN SMALL LETTER K T T 039C GREEK CAPITAL LETTER MU 006C LATIN SMALL LETTER L 039D GREEK CAPITAL LETTER NU 006D LATIN SMALL LETTER M 006E ATIN SMALL LETTER N 039E GREEK CAPITAL LETTER XI L 5 006F LATIN SMALL LETTER O 039F GREEK CAPITAL LETTER OMICRON 28 07764 Rev C Page 331 Appendix iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide 03A0 GREEK CAPITAL LETTER PI 0445 CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER HA O3A1 GREEK CAPITAL LETTER RHO 0446 CVRILLIC SMALL LETTER TSE 03A3 GREEK CAPITAL LETTER SIGMA 0447 CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER CHE 03A4 GREEK CAPITAL LETTER TAU 0448 CYRIL
151. K or NAK is always followed by the command ID that requested it This makes the design of the host application easier because the response can be identified and always follows the same format The host sends an inquire to the printer asking for the form The printer receives sensor status the request and preprocesses it The printer responds with an ACK lt id gt or NAK lt id gt indicating the form sensor status The host receives the response and decodes it Flow Chart 3 Inquire Flow The host sends an ENQ lt id gt form sensor status request to the printer The printer responds with an ACK lt id gt indicating that the request was identified status true Inquire commands affect the printer s performance Communication is a high priority for the printer Inquire commands take processing time away from the print tasks It is possible to ask for so much status that the printer slows In serial mode it is important that the response to an inquiry is received by the host before another command is issued When an inquiry is received by the printer it is buffered in a high speed processing queue When the printer has time it empties the queue and processes the inquiries The printer responds to the command as soon as the second byte of the command is taken from the high speed buffer If the host is looking for a form to be inserted it should not send status requests as fast as it can The host will receive a res
152. LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O Ox0A 0x000A LINE FEED 0x50 0x0050 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER P 0x0B_ 0x000B VERTICAL TABULATION 0x51 0x0051 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Q OxOC 0x000C FORM FEED 0x52 0x0052 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER R OxOD 0x000D CARRIAGE RETURN 0x53 0x0053 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER S OxOE 0x000E SHIFT OUT 0x54 0x0054 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER T Ox0F 0x000F SHIFT IN 0x55 0x0055 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U 0x10 0x0010 DATA LINK ESCAPE 0x56 0x0056 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER V 0x11 0x0011 DEVICE CONTROL ONE 0x57 0x0057 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER W 0x12 0x0012 DEVICE CONTROL TWO 0x58 0x0058 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER X 0x13 0x0013 DEVICE CONTROL THREE 0x59 0x0059 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Y 0x14 0x0014 DEVICE CONTROL FOUR Ox5A 0x005A LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Z 0x15 0x0015 NEGATIVE ACKNOWLEDGE 0x5B 0x005B LEFT SQUARE BRACKET 0x16 0x0016 SYNCHRONOUS IDLE Ox5C 0x005C REVERSE SOLIDUS 0x17 0x0017 END OF TRANSMISSION BLOCK 0x5D 0x005D RIGHT SQUARE BRACKET 0x18 0x0018 CANCEL Ox5E 0x005E CIRCUMFLEX ACCENT 0x19 0x0019 END OF MEDIUM Ox5F 0x005F LOW LINE Ox1A_ 0x001A SUBSTITUTE 0x60 0x0060 GRAVE ACCENT 0x1B_ 0x001B ESCAPE 0x61 0x0061 LATIN SMALL LETTER A OxiC 0x001C FILE SEPARATOR 0x62 0x0062 LATIN SMALL LETTER B 0x1D 0x001D GROUP SEPARATOR 0x63 0x0063 LATIN SMALL LETTER C 0x1E 0x001E RECORD SEPARATOR 0x64 0x0064 LATIN SMALL LETTER D 0x1F 0x001F UNIT SEPARATOR 0x65 0x0065 LATIN SMALL LETTER E 0x20 0x0020 SPACE 0x66 0x0066 LATIN SMALL LETTER F 0x21 0x0021 EXCLAMATION MARK 0x67 0x0067 LATIN SM
153. LENTICULAR BRACKET 256E BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT ARC DOWN AND LEFT 3012 POSTAL MARK 256F BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT ARC UP AND LEFT 3013 GETA MARK 2570 BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT ARC UP AND RIGHT 3014 LEFT TORTOISE SHELL BRACKET pan BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT DIAGONAL UPPER RIGHT TO 3015 RIGHT TORTOISE SHELL BRACKET LOWER LEFT 3016 LEFT WHITE LENTICULAR BRACKET 2572 BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT DIAGONAL UPPER LEFT TO 3017 RIGHT WHITE LENTICULAR BRACKET LOWER RIGHT 301D REVERSED DOUBLE PRIME QUOTATION MARK 2573 BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT DIAGONAL CROSS 301E DOUBLE PRIME QUOTATION MARK 2581 LOWER ONE EIGHTH BLOCK 3021 HANGZHOU NUMERAL ONE 2582 LOWER ONE QUARTER BLOCK 3022 HANGZHOU NUMERAL TWO 2583 LOWER THREE EIGHTHS BLOCK 3023 HANGZHOU NUMERAL THREE 2584 LOWER HALF BLOCK 3024 HANGZHOU NUMERAL FOUR 2585 LOWER FIVE EIGHTHS BLOCK 3025 HANGZHOU NUMERAL FIVE 2586 LOWER THREE QUARTERS BLOCK 3026 HANGZHOU NUMERAL SIX 2587 LOWER SEVEN EIGHTHS BLOCK 3027 HANGZHOU NUMERAL SEVEN 2588 FULL BLOCK 3028 HANGZHOU NUMERAL EIGHT 2589 LEFT SEVEN EIGHTHS BLOCK 3029 HANGZHOU NUMERAL NINE 258A LEFT THREE QUARTERS BLOGK 303E IDEOGRAPHIC VARIATION INDICATOR 258B LEFT FIVE EIGHTHS BLOCK 3041 HIRAGANA LETTER SMALL A 258C LEFT HALF BLOCK 3042 HIRAGANA LETTER A 258D LEFT THREE EIGHTHS BLOCK 3043 HIRAGANA LETTER SMALLI 258E LEFT ONE QUARTER BLOCK 3044 HIRAGANA LETTERI 258F LEFT ONE EIGHTH BLOCK 3045 HIRAGANA LETTER SMALL U 2593 DARK SHADE 3046 HIRAGANA LETTER U 2594 UPPER ONE EIGHTH BLOCK 3047 HIRAGANA LETTER SMALL E 2595 RIGH
154. LETTER ZO 3120 BOPOMOFO LETTER AU 30BF KATAKANA LETTER TA 3121 BOPOMOFO LETTER OU 30C0 KATAKANA LETTER DA 3122 BOPOMOFO LETTER AN 30C1 KATAKANA LETTER TI 3123 BOPOMOFO LETTER EN 28 07764 Rev C Page 335 Appendix iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide 3124 BOPOMOFO LETTER ANG FEA2 PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL RIGHT 3125 BOPOMOFO LETTER ENG CORNER BRACKET 3126 BOPOMOFO LETTER ER FE43 PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL LEFT WHITE 3127 BOPOMOFO LETTER CORNER BRACKET 3128 BOPOMOFO LETTER U FE44 PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL RIGHT WHITE 3129 BOPOMOFO LETTER IU CORNER BRACKET 3220 PARENTHESIZED IDEOGRAPH ONE FE49 DASHED OVERLINE 3221 PARENTHESIZED IDEOGRAPH TWO FE4A CENTRELINE OVERLINE 3222 PARENTHESIZED IDEOGRAPH THREE FE4B WAVY OVERLINE 3223 PARENTHESIZED IDEOGRAPH FOUR FEAC DOUBLE WAVV OVERLINE 3224 PARENTHESIZED IDEOGRAPH FIVE FEAD DASHED LOW LINE 3225 PARENTHESIZED IDEOGRAPH SIX FE4E CENTRELINE LOW LINE
155. LIC SMALL LETTER SHA 03A5 GREEK CAPITAL LETTER UPSILON 0449 CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER SHCHA 03A6 GREEK CAPITAL LETTER PHI 044A CVRILLIC SMALL LETTER HARD SIGN 03A7 GREEK CAPITAL LETTER CHI 044B CVRILLIC SMALL LETTER VERU 03A8 GREEK CAPITAL LETTER PSI 044C CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER SOFT SIGN 03A9 GREEK CAPITAL LETTER OMEGA 044D CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER E 03B1 GREEK SMALL LETTER ALPHA 044E CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER YU 03B2 GREEK SMALL LETTER BETA 044F CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER YA 03B3 GREEK SMALL LETTER GAMMA 0451 CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER IO 03B4 GREEK SMALL LETTER DELTA 2010 HYPHEN 03B5 GREEK SMALL LETTER EPSILON 2013 EN DASH 03B6 GREEK SMALL LETTER ZETA 2014 EM DASH 03B7 GREEK SMALL LETTER ETA 2015 HORIZONTAL BAR 03B8 GREEK SMALL LETTER THETA 2016 DOUBLE VERTICAL LINE 03B9 GREEK SMALL LETTER IOTA 2018 LEFT SINGLE QUOTATION MARK 03BA GREEK SMALL LETTER KAPPA 2019 RIGHT SINGLE QUOTATION MARK 03BB GREEK SMALL LETTER LAMDA 201C LEFT DOUBLE QUOTATION MARK 03BC GREEK SMALL LETTER MU 201D RIGHT DOUBLE QUOTATION MARK 03BD GREEK SMALL LETTER NU 2025 TWO DOT LEADER 03BE GREEK SMALL LETTER XI 2026 HORIZONTAL ELLIPSIS 03BF GREEK SMALL LETTER OMICRON 2030 PER MILLE SIGN 0300 GREEK SMALL LETTER PI 2032 PRIME 03C1 GREEK SMALL LETTER RHO 2033 DOUBLE PRIME 03C3 GREEK SMALL LETTER SIGMA 2035 REVERSED PRIME 03C4 GREEK SMALL LETTER TAU 203B REFERENCE MARK 03C5 GREEK SMALL LETTER UPSILON 20AC EURO SIGN 03C6 GREEK SMALL LETTER PHI 2103 DEGREE CELSIUS 03C7 GREEK SMALL LETTER CHI
156. Manual Encoding Encoding Code Stick Code Decimal Hex Code Stick Code Decimal Hex Code Code Code 128 Value Value Code Code Code 128 Value Value A B C Value A B C Value Space Space 00 00 32 20 V V 54 54 86 56 l 01 01 33 21 W W 55 55 87 57 02 02 34 22 X X 56 56 88 58 03 03 35 23 Y Y 57 57 89 59 04 04 36 24 Z Z 58 58 90 5A 05 05 37 25 59 59 91 5B amp amp 06 06 38 26 60 60 92 5C A 07 07 39 27 61 61 93 5D 08 08 40 28 y A 62 62 94 5E 09 09 41 29 63 63 95 5F ki 10 10 42 2A NUL 64 64 96 60 11 11 43 2B SOH a 65 65 97 61 d l 12 12 44 2C STX b 66 66 98 62 13 13 45 2D ETH c 67 67 99 63 14 14 46 2E EOT d 68 68 100 64 15 15 47 2F ENQ e 69 69 101 65 0 0 16 16 48 30 ACK f 70 70 102 66 1 1 17 17 49 31 BEL g 71 71 103 67 2 2 18 18 50 32 BS h 72 72 104 68 3 3 19 19 51 33 HT i 73 73 105 69 4 4 20 20 52 34 LF j 74 74 106 6A 5 5 21 21 53 35 VT k 75 75 107 6B 6 6 22 22 54 36 FF l 76 76 108 6C 7 7 23 23 55 37 CR m 77 77 109 6D 8 8 24 24 56 38 SO n 78 78 110 6E 9 9 25 25 57 39 SI o 79 79 111 6F 26 26 58 3A DLE p 80 80 112 70 27 27 59 3B DC1 q 81 81 113 71 lt lt 28 28 60 3C DC2 r 82 82 114 72 29 29 61 3D DC3 s 83 83 115 73 gt gt 30 30 62 3E DC4 t 84 84 116 74 2 2 31 31 63 3F NAK u 85 85 117 75 32 32 64 40 SYN v 86 86 118 76 A A 33 33 65 41 ETB w 87 87 119 77 B B 34 34 66 42 CAN X 88 88 120 78 C C 35 35 67 43 EM y 89 89 121 79 D D 36 36 68 44 SUB Zz 90 90 122 7A E E 3
157. N 0x82 0x201A SINGLE LOW 9 QUOTATION MARK 0x3D 0x003D EQUALS SIGN 0x83 0x0192 LATIN SMALL LETTER F WITH HOOK 0x3E 0x003E GREATER THAN SIGN 0x84 0x201E DOUBLE LOW 9 QUOTATION MARK Ox3F 0x003F QUESTION MARK 0x85 0x2026 HORIZONTAL ELLIPSIS 0x40 0x0040 COMMERCIAL AT 0x86 0x2020 DAGGER 0x41 0x0041 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A 0x87 0x2021 DOUBLE DAGGER 0x42 0x0042 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER B 0x88 0x02C6 MODIFIER LETTER CIRCUMFLEX ACCENT 0x43 0x0043 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER C 0x89 0x2030 PER MILLE SIGN 0x44 0x0044 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER D Ox8A 0x0160 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER S WITH CARON Page 338 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Appendix 0x8B 0x2039 SINGLE LEFT POINTING ANGLE OxCD 0x00CD LATIN CAPITAL LETTER WITH ACUTE QUOTATION MARK OxCE Ox00CE LATIN CAPITAL LETTER WITH 0x8C 0x0152 LATIN CAPITAL LIGATURE OE CIRCUMFLEX 0x8D 0x0000 OxCF Ox00CF LATIN CAPITAL LETTER WITH DIAERESIS Ox8E 0x017D LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Z WITH CARON 0xDO 0x00D0 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER ETH Ox8F 0x0000 OxD1 0x00D1 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER N WITH TILDE 0x90 0x0000 OxD2 0x00D2 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH GRAVE 0x91 0
158. NUMBER SIXTEEN FULL STOP DEAD BOX DRAWINGS UP HEAVY AND DOWN 2498 NUMBER SEVENTEEN FULL STOP HORIZONTAL LIGHT 2499 NUMBER EIGHTEEN FULL STOP 354 BOX DRAWINGS DOWN HEAVY AND UP 249A NUMBER NINETEEN FULL STOP HORIZONTAL LIGHT 249B NUMBER TWENTY FULL STOP 2542 BOX DRAWINGS VERTICAL HEAVY AND 2500 BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT HORIZONTAL HORIZONTAL LIGHT 2501 BOX DRAWINGS HEAVY HORIZONTAL 2543 BOX DRAWINGS LEFT UP HEAVY AND RIGHT DOWN 2502 BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT VERTICAL LIGH 2503 BOX DRAWINGS HEAVY VERTICAL TA BOX DRAWINGS RIGHT UP HEAVV AND LEFT DOWN 2504 BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT TRIPLE DASH HORIZONTAL LIGH 2505 BOX DRAWINGS HEAVV TRIPLE DASH HORIZONTAL 2545 ae ee LEFT DOWN HEAVY AND RIGHT UP 2506 BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT TRIPLE DASH VERTICAL 2507 BOX DRAWINGS HEAVY TRIPLE DASH VERTICAL 2546 als RIGHT DOWN HEAVX AND LEETUP 2508 BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT QUADRUPLE DASH BOX DRAWINGS DOWN LIGHT AND UP HORIZONTAL HORIZONTAL 2547 MEANY 2509 BOX DRAWINGS PEAVY QUADRUPLE DASH BOX DRAWINGS UP LIGHT AND DOWN HORIZONTAL HORIZONTAL 2548 HEAVY 250A BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT QUADRUPLE DARBH BOX DRAWINGS RIGHT LIGHT AND LEFT VERTICAL VERTICAL 2549 HEAVY 250B BOX DRAWINGS FIEAM ODADRUREE DASH BOX DRAWINGS LEFT LIGHT AND RIGHT VERTICAL VERTICAL 254A BER 250C BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT DOWN AND RIGHT 250D BOX DRAWINGS DOWN LIGHT AND RIGHT HEAVY 254B HORIZONTA NI HEAVY VERTIGALAND 250E BOX DRAWINGS DOWN HEAVV AND RIGHT LIGHT 3BB0 BOX DRAWINGS DOUBLE HORIZONTAL 250F BOX DRAWINGS HEAVY DOWN AND RIGHT 2551 BOX DRAWINGS
159. O disables the feature Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes ESC POS Codes The EPOS codes that are supported by the iTherm 280 Printer are listed in this section TransAct Technologies Inc has no control over how Epson extends or changes these control codes and can make no guarantees as to the operation of our printer when it replaces an Epson printer The TM T90 and EPOS emulation s are intended to make it as easy as possible to replace an Epson printer with an iTherm 280 Printer The iTherm 280 Printer provides two Epson emulations The first emulation is as close as possible to the TM T90 Printer and tries to make the iTherm 280 Printer a drop in replacement However when the iTherm 280 Printer is in Epson TM T90 emulation mode it is subject to the same limitations as a TM T90 Printer The second Epson emulation is EPOS mode It extends and enhances the TM T90 emulation to remove some of the restrictions and give access to some of the iTherm 280 Printer features not addressed by the TM T90 It is intended that the standard Ithaca PCOS emulation be used for new applications The following section lists all TM T90 and EPOS commands that are processed They are as close as possible to Epson s definitions The user must remember that the iTherm 280 EPOS emulation unlike the TM T90 emulation is not designed as a drop in replacement for an Epson printer The iTherm 280 Printer is desi
160. OxF8 Ox00F8 LATIN SMALL LETTER O WITH STROKE QUOTATION MARK OxF9 Ox00F9 LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH GRAVE OxBC 0x00BC VULGAR FRACTION ONE QUARTER OxFA Ox00FA LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH ACUTE OxBD 0x00BD VULGAR FRACTION ONE HALF OxFB Ox00FB LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH OxBE_ 0x00BE VULGAR FRACTION THREE QUARTERS CIRCUMFLEX OxBF 0x00BF INVERTED QUESTION MARK OxFC Ox00FC LATIN SMALL LETTER U WITH DIAERESIS OxCO 0x00C0 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH GRAVE OxFD 0x00FD LATIN SMALL LETTER Y WITH ACUTE OxC1 0x00C1 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH ACUTE OxFE 0x00FE LATIN SMALL LETTER THORN 0xC2 0x00C2 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH OxFF 0x00FF LATIN SMALL LETTER Y WITH DIAERESIS CIRCUMFLEX 0xC3 0x00C3 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH TILDE OxC4 0x00C4 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH DIAERESIS 0xC5 0x00C5 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER A WITH RING ABOVE OxC6 0x00C6 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER AE 0xC7 0x00C7 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER C WITH CEDILLA 0xC8 0x00C8 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH GRAVE OxC9 0x00C9 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH ACUTE OxCA Ox00CA LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH CIRCUMFLEX OxCB 0x00CB LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E WITH DIAERESIS OxCC 0x00CC LATIN CAPITAL LETTER WITH GRAVE 28 07764 Rev C Page 339 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Appendix Appendix G Ordering Supplies ITherm supplies can be ordered easily direct from the TransAct website www transact tech com or our telephone number within the US toll free 877 7ithaca other inquires 607 257 8901 When callin
161. Page 221 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Decimal lt 29 gt lt 72 gt lt n gt Range O lt n lt 3 48 lt n lt 51 Description The GS H lt n gt command selects the printing position of HRI Human Readable Interpretation characters when printing a bar code lt n gt selects the printing position as follows Printing position Not printed Above bar code Below bar code Both above and below the bar code Table 43 Printing Position of HRI Characters Function Select Font for HRI Characters ASCII GS f lt n gt Hexadecimal 1DH 66H lt n gt Decimal lt 29 gt lt 102 gt lt n gt Range lt n gt 0 1 48 49 Description The GS f lt n gt command selects a font for the HRI Human Readable Interpretation characters used when printing a bar code lt n gt selects a font from the following table lt n gt Font 0 48 Font A 14 x 12 1 49 Font B 12 x 12 Table 44 Font for Human Readable Interpretation HRI Characters Function Set Bar Code Width ASCII GS w lt n gt Hexadecimal 1DH 77H lt n gt Decimal lt 29 gt lt 119 gt lt n gt Range 2 lt n lt 6 Description The GS w lt n gt command sets the size of the bar code as follows N Multi level bar code Binary level bar code Module width mm Thin element width mm Thick element width mm 0 250 0 250 0 626 0 375 0 375 1 001 0 500 0 500 1 251 0 626 0 626 1 627 16 0 751 0 751 2 002 Table 45 Horizontal si
162. Parallel Port Inquire and IEEE 1284 The iTherm 280 printer supports the IEEE 1284 bidirectional parallel peripheral interface standard The IEEE 1284 standard provides for a bidirectional link on the parallel port The iTherm 280 Printer only supports Modes 0 and 4 which provide a nibble mode reverse channel for printer identification and status inquire commands It is 28 07764 Rev C Page 305 Communications iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide beyond the scope of this guide to describe the IEEE 1284 protocol The complete specification is available from the Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers Inc at www ieee org IEEE 1284 Response Buffer The iTherm 280 printer has a 256 byte buffer that contains information to be returned by the IEEE 1284 reverse link Information is placed in the buffer in the same format as RS 232 serial information is returned Inquire commands sent to the printer in IEEE 1284 mode place responses to the commands in the IEEE 1284 reverse channel buffer The buffer is then transmitted to the host when it requests the reverse channel Mode 4 Mode 4 allows the printer to return identification information to the host system The iTherm 280 printer returns xx yy length of following data 2 bytes with MSB first MANUFACTURER TransAct Technologies COMMAND SET IPCL MODEL 1000 COMMENT Rev X xx ACTIVE COMMAND SET IPCL When a Mode 4 request is made the IEEE 1284 buffer is cleared before the ID is
163. RIGHT FFIA FULLWIDTH COLON PARENTHESIS FFIB FULLWIDTH SEMICOLON FE37 PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL LEFT CURLY FFIC FULLWIDTH LESS THAN SIGN BRACKET _ a FFID FULLWIDTH EQUALS SIGN FE38 PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL RIGHT CURLY FFIE FULLWIDTH GREATER THAN SIGN BRACKET _ FFIF FULLWIDTH QUESTION MARK FE39 PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL LEFT FF20 FULLWIDTH COMMERCIAL AT TORTOISE SHELL BRACKET FF21 FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITALLETTERA FE3A PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL RIGHT FF22 FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER B TORTOISE SHELE B AGKET FF23 FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER C FE3B PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL LEFT BLACK FF24 FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER D LENTICULAR BRACKET FF25 FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E FE3C PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL RIGHT BLACK FFO6 FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER F LENTICULAR BRACKET FF27 FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER G FE3D ROn E ines each VERTICAL TEDL FF28 FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER H TATI z FF29 FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER FESE HT ATR FORM RON VERTICALHIGH FF2A FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER J PEE PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL LEFT ANGLE Eres FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER K BRACKET FF2C FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER L FE40 PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL RIGHT ANGLE FF2D FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER M BRACKET FF2E FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER N FE41 PRESENTATION FORM FOR VERTICAL LEFT FF2F FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O CORNER BRACKET FF30 FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER P FF31 FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LET
164. Request to Send RTS or both for flow control If only DTR is selected for flow control RTS will indicate the cover is open or the printer has faulted The following discussion assumes the DTR is being used for flow control The Ready Busy protocol generally uses the DTR signal to indicate to the host computer that the printer is not ready to accept data The host should stop sending data to the printer as soon as possible Because the host may not notice the DTR signal until it has transmitted several bytes of data to the printer the printer continues to except up to 2557 bytes of data after it indicates that it is not ready Figure 26 Serial Port Flow Control Using DTR illustrates how the Ready Busy protocol works and Figure 27 XON XOFF Serial Port Flow Control illustrates how the XON XOFF protocol works Communications Printer Control Port Software Serial Data In Data Serial Inquire Data Out Response Not Used for Flow Control Buffer Buffer Getting Full 40 8K DTR Buffer Getting Empty RTS Select Key RTS Request to Send DTR Data Terminal Ready Figure 26 Serial Port Flow Control Using DTR 1 The buffer always signals it is full before it overflows The size of the reserve depends on the buffer size selected It is always at least 255 bytes 28 07764 Rev C Page 309 Communications iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Communications Printer Control Port Serial Data In Data Inqui
165. S gt 1BH 1DH amp EP 152 lt Sn gt lt L gt lt L gt 50H Report the electronic journal ESC GS R lt S gt lt 1BH 1DH amp EQ 152 Sn gt lt Li gt lt Lh gt 52H Electronic journal begin entry ESCJI lt 3 gt 1BH 6CH amp EB Electronic journal suspend entry IESCJI lt 2 gt 1BH 6CH amp ES 160 Electronic journal resume entry ESC I lt 1 gt 1BH 6CH amp ER 160 Electronic journal end entry ESC I lt 0 gt 1BH 6CH amp EE 160 Electronic journal mode begin ESC 1BH 7BH None 159 journal station Miscellaneous Commands Disable paper out sensor ESC 8 1BH 38H amp PF 161 Enable paper out sensor ESC 9 1BH 39H amp PO 161 Page 80 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Description ASCII Hex IPCL equivalent Page code Set left right margins ESC X lt n gt lt ng gt 1BH 58H none 161 ni Left margin n2 Right margin Clear print buffer CAN 18H amp RP 162 Query marker ESC q lt n gt 1BH 71H none 162 Open cash drawer ESC x lt n gt 1BH 78H amp D1 n 1 163 n 1 Cash Drawer 1 amp D2 n 2 n 2 Cash Drawer 2 Perform Auto Cut ESC v 1BH 76H amp FC 163 Audio alert BEL 07H amp BL 164 Configure audio alert ESC BEL lt ni gt 1BH 07H none 164 lt Ne gt lt N3 gt Print suppress ESC lt lt n gt 1BH 3CH amp PT lt n gt 166 and data pass through Initialize printer ESC 1BH 40H none
166. SC K lt n gt command prints the data in the print buffer and feeds the paper lt n gt x 1 144 inches in the reverse direction Consequently the printer can feed the paper in half dot units in the reverse direction The command is used to temporarily feed a specific length without changing the line spacing set by other commands Print and Reverse Feed ESC j 1BH 6AH lt 27 gt lt 106 gt 0 lt n lt 48 The ESC j command prints the data in the print buffer and feeds the paper one line in reverse Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Line Spacing Commands Function Select Default Line Spacing ASCII ESC 2 Hexadecimal 1BH 32H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 50 gt Description The ESC 2 command sets the line spacing to 1 6 inch which is equivalent to 12 dots Function Set Line Spacing ASCII ESC 3 lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 33H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 51 gt lt n gt Range 0 lt n lt 255 Description The ESC 3 lt n gt command sets the line spacing to lt n gt x 1 144 inches The default setting of the paper feed amount is 1 6 inch lt n gt 24 The line spacing can be set in half dot units Character Commands Function Set Right Side Character Spacing ASCII ESC SP lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 20H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 32 gt lt n gt Range 0 lt n lt 255 Description The ESC SP lt n gt sets the right side character spacing in lt n gt x 1 160
167. SC Y lt n gt lt n gt Print full speed double density graphics 124 ESC Z lt n gt lt n gt Print quad density graphics 124 FF Set form feed 89 91 GS lt n gt lt n gt Set relative vertical print position in page mode 220 GS a lt n gt Enable disable Automatic Status Back 210 GS b lt n gt Turns smoothing on off 201 GS c Print counter 228 GS g 0 Initialize maintenance counter 228 GS g 2 Transmits maintenance counter 229 GS I lt n gt Transmit printer ID 224 GS P x y Set horizontal and vertical motion units 224 GS r lt n gt Transmit status 212 GS Start end macro definition 230 GS V lt m gt lt n gt Select cut mode and cut paper 223 HT Set horizontal tab 83 206 LF Print and line feed 191 LF Set line feed 82 SI Begin 17 cpi 93 SO Begin one line double wide print 107 SOH lt n gt Begin multi drop control 170 VT Set vertical tab 88 10 CPI Character Pitch Beginning 93 12 CPI Character Pitch Beginning 93 12 x 12 Draft Print Mode Beginning 96 17 CPI Character Pitch Beginning 93 24 CPI Character Pitch Beginning 93 APA Graphics Printing 124 Appendix A Ordering Supplies 341 Application Development 74 Audio Alert Configuring 164 Auido alert 164 Auto cut Performing 163 Auto Line Feed Beginning 90 Automatic Status back Enable Disable 210 Back Space 83 Bar Code Commands 220 Bar Code Print 139 146 179 180
168. SC q lt n gt command returns a status to the host when it is processed Response SOH lt n gt The ESC q lt n gt command may be placed in the print data and when processed by the printer will return a progress status marker The value of lt n gt can be any 8 bit value It is returned to the host unaltered The intent is for it to be a sequence number The command can be used to track the print progress of the printer or verify that data has been printed printer to print all previous data If a normal line terminator like a CR is not supplied right justify and auto center do not function correctly All data is left justified ESC q does not perform a CR or LF function Note The ESC q lt n gt command is a line terminator that causes the Page 162 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes ESC x Open cash drawer ASCII ESC x lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 78H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 120 gt lt n gt IPCL amp D1 Cash Drawer 1 amp D2 Cash Drawer 2 EPOS ESC p Description The ESC x lt n gt command charges the cash drawer lt n gt for 150 ms Where lt n gt lt 1 gt 01H or 1 31H for Cash Drawer 1 lt 2 gt 02H or 2 32H for Cash Drawer 2 The time period that drawer is activated can be changed in the configuration menu Activation time ranges from 25 ms to 250 ms Note 1 Cash drawer open commands are processed as part of print data They are not i
169. SMALL LETTER U 223D REVERSED TILDE LAZY S 0444 CYRILLIC SMALL LETTER EF 2248 ALMOST EQUAL TO Page 332 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Appendix 224C ALL EQUAL TO 2512 BOX DRAWINGS DOWN HEAVY AND LEFT LIGHT 2252 APPROXIMATELY EQUAL TO OR THE IMAGE OF 2513 BOX DRAWINGS HEAVY DOWN AND LEFT 2260 NOT EQUAL TO 2514 BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT UP AND RIGHT 2261 IDENTICAL TO 2515 BOX DRAWINGS UP LIGHT AND RIGHT HEAVV 2264 LESS THAN OR EQUAL TO 2516 BOX DRAWINGS UP HEAVV AND RIGHT LIGHT 2265 GREATER THAN OR EQUAL TO 2517 BOX DRAWINGS HEAVV UP AND RIGHT 2266 LESS THAN OVER EQUAL TO 2518 BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT UP AND LEFT 2267 GREATER THAN OVER EQUAL TO 2519 BOX DRAWINGS UP LIGHT AND LEFT HEAVV 226E NOT LESS THAN 251A BOX DRAWINGS UP HEAVY AND LEFT LIGHT 226F NOT GREATER THAN 251B BOX DRAWINGS HEAVY UP AND LEFT 2295 CIRCLED PLUS 251C BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT VERTICAL AND RIGHT 2299 CIRCLED DOT OPERATOR PET BOX DRAWINGS VERTICAL LIGHT AND RIGHT 22A5
170. Sensors 165 204 Panel Button Commands 202 paper Feed Enable Disable 164 202 Paper Feed Enable Disable 236 Paper Low Sensor 236 Paper Motion 82 Paper Out Sensor disable 161 Paper Out Sensor enabling 161 Paper Out Status Inquire 173 Paper Sensor Commands 203 Paper Sensors Selecting to Stop Printing 165 203 Parallel Interface Connector 42 Parallel port timing 304 PcOS Control Codes 75 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Index PcOS Quick Reference Chart 76 Peripheral Devise Status Selecting 226 Plug and Play parallel 307 Serial 313 Power Control Remote 169 316 Power Cycle Status Inquire 174 Power cycle recovery 318 Print and Carriage Return 191 Print and Feed Lines 191 Print and Feed Paper 192 Print and Line Feed 191 Print and Reverse Feed Lines 191 192 Print Buffer Flow 311 Print Buffer Size 313 Print buffer control 162 Print buffers 299 Print counter 228 Print Current Configuration 294 Print Current totals 294 Print margins setting 161 Print Modes Selecting 199 Print Position Commands 205 Print Quality Mode Setting 96 Print Style Setting 109 Print Supress Data Pass Through Enabling 166 Printer Care 55 Printer ID Inquire 177 Printer Reset Requesting 173 Printer State Inquire 175 Printer Status 171 Printer Status Inquire 172 176 Process User Macro 138 Programmer s Notes 321 Programming Considerations 137 Quad Density Graphics Print
171. Set Print to beginning of print line 205 EPOS Sound Buzzer 223 EPOS Startup Macro Definition Deleting 231 EPOS Unidirectional Printing Mode On Off 207 EPOS User Defined Bit Image Define 234 EPOS User Defined Bit Image Defining 231 EPOS User Defined Bit Image Printing 233 235 EPOS User Defined Character Set Saving 235 EPOS User Defined Character Set Selecting 235 EPOS Print and Reverse Feed 192 Error Status Inquire 178 ESC T lt n gt lt n gt Select character code table 196 Euro Character Inserting 103 Executes power off sequence 225 Extended APA Graphics 124 Extended Diagnostics Hex Dump 60 Firmware Configuration 43 Flow control Data Terminal Ready DTR 309 Ready Busy 309 XON XOFF 309 Form Feed 89 91 Form Length Setting Inches 89 Form Length Setting Lines 89 Forming characters 257 Generate Pulse 225 Generate Pulse in real time 225 Graphic Mode 123 Page 345 Index iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Graphic Data Processing 127 Graphic Mode Reassigning 124 Graphic mode Set Horizontal 128 Graphic save 129 Graphics all points addressable APA 244 Character 241 color 127 horizontal 127 Horizontal 244 printing 241 GS lt Name gt lt 0 gt x y d d x x y x 8 Define user defined bit image 231 GS lt n gt Set character size 201 GS H lt n gt Insert Euro character 198 GS x y d d x x y x 8 Define single user defined bit image 234 GS
172. Set bar code justification and HRI modes 148 ESC SI Begin 24 cpi 93 ESC US 1 lt Name gt lt 0 gt Load item process 131 ESC US b lt Name gt lt 0 gt Begin named macro record 130 132 ESC US c lt Name gt lt 0 gt Save user defined characters 131 133 ESC US d lt Name gt lt 0 gt Delete item from user store 134 135 ESC US e lt Name gt lt 0 gt End name macro record 133 ESC US e lt Name gt lt 0 gt Remove item from user store 131 ESC US e lt Name gt lt 0 gt Stop name macro record 130 ESC US f ALL lt 0 gt Flush user store 132 135 ESC US lt Name gt lt 0 gt Load macro character 134 ESC US m lt Name gt lt 0 gt Save macro data 133 ESC US m lt Name gt Save macro data 130 ESC US q lt Name gt lt 0 gt Query user store 136 ESC US r lt Name gt lt 0 gt Run macro data 134 ESC US s lt Name gt lt 0 gt Flag as a start up macro 131 ESC US s lt Name gt lt 0 gt Flag start up macro 134 ESC Reverse line feed 90 ESC lt n gt Print control character 102 198 ESC lt n gt Turn on off upside down print mode 200 ESC Electronic Journal Begin 159 ESC lt lt n gt Enable data pass through 166 ESC lt lt n gt Enable print suppress 166 ESC lt Return home 208 ESC lt n gt lt n gt lt n gt Set horizontal position 84 ESC lt n gt Select peripheral d
173. T ONE EIGHTH BLOCK 3048 HIRAGANA LETTER E 25A0 BLACK SQUARE 3049 HIRAGANA LETTER SMALL O 25A1 WHITE SQUARE 304A HIRAGANA LETTER O 25B2 BLACK UP POINTING TRIANGLE 304B HIRAGANA LETTER KA 25B3 WHITE UP POINTING TRIANGLE 304C HIRAGANA LETTER GA 25BC BLACK DOWN POINTING TRIANGLE 304D HIRAGANA LETTER KI 25BD WHITE DOWN POINTING TRIANGLE 304E HIRAGANA LETTER GI 25C6 BLACK DIAMOND 304F HIRAGANA LETTER KU 25C7 WHITE DIAMOND 3050 HIRAGANA LETTER GU 25CB WHITE CIRCLE 3051 HIRAGANA LETTER KE 25CE BULLSEYE 3052 HIRAGANA LETTER GE 25CF BLACK CIRCLE 3053 HIRAGANA LETTER KO 25E2 BLACK LOWER RIGHT TRIANGLE 3054 HIRAGANA LETTER GO 25E3 BLACK LOWER LEFT TRIANGLE 3055 HIRAGANA LETTER SA 25E4 BLACK UPPER LEFT TRIANGLE 3056 HIRAGANA LETTER ZA 25E5 BLACK UPPER RIGHT TRIANGLE 3057 HIRAGANA LETTER SI 2605 BLACK STAR 3058 HIRAGANA LETTER ZI 2606 WHITE STAR 3059 HIRAGANA LETTER SU 2609 SUN 305A HIRAGANA LETTER ZU 2640 FEMALE SIGN 305B HIRAGANA LETTER SE 2642 MALE SIGN 305C HIRAGANA LETTER ZE 2FFO IDEOGRAPHIC DESCRIPTION CHARACTER LEFT TO 305D HIRAGANA LETTER SO RIGHT 305E HIRAGANA LETTER ZO OFFA IU BETA DESCRIPTION CHARACTER ABOVE 305F HIRAGANA LETTER TA 3060 HIRAGANA LETTER DA 3061 HIRAGANA LETTER TI Page 334 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Appendix
174. TER Q Page 336 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Appendix FF32 FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER R FF4C FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER L FF33 FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER S FF4D FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER M FF34 FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER T FF4E FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER N FF35 FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U FFAF FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL FF36 FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER V FF50 FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL FF37 FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER W FFS1 FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL FF38 FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER X FF52 FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL FF39 FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Y FF53 FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL FF3A FULLWIDTH LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Z FF54 FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL FF3B FULLWIDTH LEFT SQUARE BRACKET FF55 FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL FF3C FULLWIDTH REVERSE SOLIDUS FF56 FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL FF3D FULLWIDTH RIGHT SQUARE BRACKET FF57 FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL FF3E FULLWIDTH CIRCUMFLEX ACCENT FF58 FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL FF3F FULLWIDTH LOW LINE FF59 FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER Y FF40 FULLWIDTH GRAVE ACCENT FFSA FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER Z FF41 FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LET FF5B FULLWIDTH LEFT CURLY BRACKET FF42 FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LET FFSC FULLWIDTH VERTICAL LINE FF43 FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL LETTER C FF5D FULLWIDTH RIGHT CURLY BRACKET FF44 FULLWIDTH LA
175. TF 16LE is selected all data sent to the printer must be 16 bits All commands and command parameters are also 16 bit however only values between 0 and 255 are valid UTF 8 uses a Multiple Byte Character Sequence MBCS to identify the desired Unicode character This encoding method is less straightforward but preserves some of the 8 bit character of ASCII encoding This method uses unique bit sequences at the MSBs of a byte to determine its location and meaning within the MBCS encoding See the table below for more information If UTF 8 is selected all data sent to the printer must be encoded All command parameters over 127 must be encoded in UTF 8 UTF 8TXT uses a Multiple Byte Character Sequence MBCS to identify the desired Unicode character This encoding method is identical to UTF 8 except command parameters over 127 are not UTF 8 encoded They must be sent unmodified as 8 bit values Note Extended UTF encoding past 65534 is not supported in UTF 16 or UTF 8 Only Unicode addresses from 0 to 65534 are supported by the ITherm 280 Printer Scalar Value 3rd Byte OO0000000xxxxxxx OXXXXXXX O0000yyyyyxxxxxx 110yyyyy 10xxxxxx ZZZZYYYYYYXXXXXX 1110zzzz 10yyyyyy 10xxxxxx NOTE 4 bvte encoding is not supported UTF 8TXT is probably the easiest mode to use It allows normal 8 bit commands and graphics while still supporting the full Unicode character encoding range Tvpicallv ITherm 280 Printers are shipped set to this
176. TIN SMALL FFSE FULLWIDTH TILDE FF45 FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL FFEO FULLWIDTH CENT SIGN FF46 FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL FFE1 FULLWIDTH POUND SIGN FF47 FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL FFE2 FULLWIDTH NOT SIGN FF48 FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL FFE3 FULLWIDTH MACRON FF49 FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL FFE4 FULLWIDTH BROKEN BAR FF4A FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL FFES FULLWIDTH YEN SIGN FF4B FULLWIDTH LATIN SMALL 28 07764 Rev C Page 337 Appendix iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Appendix F Windows 1252 Latin 1 Windows 1252 Latin 1 to Unicode translation ASCII Unicode Character 0x45 0x0045 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER E 0x00 0x0000 NULL 0x46 0x0046 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER F 0x01 0x0001 START OF HEADING 0x47 0x0047 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER G 0x02 0x0002 START OF TEXT 0x48 0x0048 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER H 0x03 0x0003 END OF TEXT 0x49 0x0049 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER 0x04 0x0004 END OF TRANSMISSION Ox4A 0x004A LATIN CAPITAL LETTER J 0x05 0x0005 ENQUIRY 0x4B 0x004B LATIN CAPITAL LETTER K 0x06 0x0006 ACKNOWLEDGE 0x4C 0x004C LATIN CAPITAL LETTER L 0x07 0x0007 BELL 0x4D 0x004D LATIN CAPITAL LETTER M 0x08 0x0008 BACKSPACE 0x4E 0x004E LATIN CAPITAL LETTER N 0x09 0x0009 HORIZONTAL TABULATION 0x4F 0x004F
177. UBLE UP AND LEFT DECORAPHIC DESCRIPTION CHARACTER 255E BOX DRAWINGS VERTICAL SINGLE AND RIGHT 2FF7 SURROUND EROM LEET IDEOGRAPHIC DESCRIPTION CHARACTER 255F BOX DRAW NGS VERTICAL DOUBLE AND RIGHT 2FF8 SURROUND FROM UPPER LEFT 2560 BOX DRAWINGS DOUBLE VERTICAL AND RIGHT 2FF9 IDEOGRAPHIC DESCRIPTION CHARACTER BOX DRAWINGS VERTICAL SINGLE AND LEFT SURROUND FROM UPPER RIGHT 2561 DOUBLE OFFA la Besar ION CHARACTER URROUND FROM LOWER LEFT 2562 STAT ee ee Seen IDEOGRAPHIC DESCRIPTION CHARACTER 2563 BOX DRAWINGS DOUBLE VERTICAL AND LEFT ma ORLAR HG SPACE Seel BOX DRAW NGS DOWN SINGLE AND HORIZONTAL 2004 IDEOGRAPHIG COMMA BOX DRAWINGS DOWN DOUBLE AND HORIZONTAL 3002 IDEOGRAPHIC FULL STOP 2565 SINGLE 3003 DITTO MARK 2566 BOX DRAWINGS DOUBLE DOWN AND HORIZONTAL 3005 IDEOGRAPHIC ITERATION MARK BOX DRAWINGS UP SINGLE AND HORIZONTAL 3006 IDEOGRAPHIC CLOSING MARK a DOUBLE 3007 IDEOGRAPHIC NUMBER ZERO 2568 BOX DRAWINGS UP DOUBLE AND HORIZONTAL 3008 LEFT ANGLE BRACKET SINGLE 3009 RIGHT ANGLE BRACKET 2569 BOX DRAWINGS DOUBLE UP AND HORIZONTAL 300A LEFT DOUBLE ANGLE BRACKET 256A BOX DRAWINGS VERTICAL SINGLE AND 300B RIGHT DOUBLE ANGLE BRACKET HORIZONTAL DOUBLE 300C LEFT CORNER BRACKET 256B BOX DRAWINGS VERTICAL DOUBLE AND 300D RIGHT CORNER BRACKET HORIZONTAL SINGLE 300E LEFT WHITE CORNER BRACKET 2560 BOX DRAWINGS DOUBLE VERTICAL AND 300F RIGHT WHITE CORNER BRACKET HORIZONTAL 3010 LEFT BLACK LENTICULAR BRACKET 256D BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT ARC DOWN AND RIGHT 3011 RIGHT BLACK
178. UP TACK HEAVV 22BF RIGHT TRIANGLE 251E BOX DRAWINGS UP HEAVV AND RIGHT DOWN 2312 ARG LIGHT 2460 CIRCLED DIGIT ONE 251F BOX DRAW NGS DOWN HEAVY AND RIGHT UP 2461 CIRCLED DIGIT TWO LIGH 2462 CIRCLED DIGIT THREE 2520 BOX DRAWINGS VERTICAL HEAVY AND RIGHT 2463 CIRCLED DIGIT FOUR LIGH 2464 CIRCLED DIGIT FIVE 2521 BOX DRAWINGS DOWN LIGHT AND RIGHT UP 2465 CIRCLED DIGIT SIX HEAVY 2466 CIRCLED DIGIT SEVEN 2522 BOX DRAWINGS UP LIGHT AND RIGHT DOWN 2467 CIRCLED DIGIT EIGHT HEAVY 2468 CIRCLED DIGIT NINE 2523 BOX DRAWINGS HEAVY VERTICAL AND RIGHT 2469 CIRCLED NUMBER TEN 2524 BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT VERTICAL AND LEFT 2474 PARENTHESIZED DIGIT ONE 2525 BOX DRAWINGS VERTICAL LIGHT AND LEFT HEAVY 2475 PARENTHESIZED DIGIT TWO 2526 BOX DRAWINGS UP HEAVV AND LEFT DOWN LIGHT AIR PARENTHESIZED DIGIT THREE 2527 BOX DRAWINGS DOWN HEAVY AND LEFT UP LIGHT 2477 PARENTHESIZED DIGIT FOUR 2528 BOX DRAWINGS VERTICAL HEAVY AND LEFT LIGHT 2478 PARENTHESIZED DIGIT FIVE 2529 BOX DRAWINGS DOWN LIGHT AND LEFT UP HEAVY ii 252A BOX DRAWINGS UP LIGHT AND LEFT DOWN HEAVV 2479 PARENTHESIZED DIGIT SIX 247A PARENTHESIZED DIGIT SEVEN 252B BOX DRAWINGS HEAVY VERTICAL AND LEFT 247B PARENTHESIZED DIGIT EIGHT 252C BOX DRAWINGS LIGHT DOWN AND HORIZONTAL 247C PARENTHESIZED DIGIT NINE 252D oe ee LEFT HEAVXAND RIGHT DOWN 247D PARENTHESIZED NUMBER TEN 247E PARENTHESIZED NUMBER ELEVEN 252E Het RAWINGS RIGHT HEAVVAND LEFT DOWN 247F PARENTHESIZED NUMBER TWELVE 2480 PARENTHESIZED NUMBER THIRTEEN 252F POX
179. UTF 16BE Encoding All ASCII ESC H Hexadecimal 1BH 2BH 48H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 43 gt lt 72 gt Description The ESC H command will put the printer into UTF 16BE character encoding mode of operation If you wish to access characters above 255 you must select a Unicode encoding such as UTF 16BE UTF 16 is the most straightforward way to access characters above 255 sending two 8 bit bytes that form a 16 bit address to access the desired character UTF 16BE uses the big endian method of sending the two bytes This method sends the high byte first and then the low byte Note Once selected all information sent to the printer must then use this encoding even for non print commands Function Initiate Unicode UTF 16LE Encoding All ASCII ESC L Hexadecimal 1BH 2BH 4CH Decimal lt 27 gt lt 43 gt lt 76 gt Description The ESC L command will put the printer into UTF 16LE character encoding mode of operation If you wish to access characters above 255 You must select a Unicode encoding such as UTF 16LE UTF 16 is the most straightforward way to access characters above 255 sending two 8 bit bytes that form a 16 bit address to access the desired character UTF 16LE uses the little endian method of sending the two bytes This method sends the low byte first and then the high byte Note Once selected all information sent to the printer must then use this encoding even for non print commands Function Initiate Unic
180. Under Settings Select the iTherm 280 printer Then select the emulation that machines the printer 3 Select the resolution you would like to have the printer use to print the graphics Low resolutions are faster high resolutions produce better graphics 4 Load the graphics Image you wish to print 5 Select the communications port and configuration 6 Adjust the image to produce the effect you would like The lower graphic window displays an approximation of the printed image 7 When you are satisfied with the graphic press the Print to a File button PJColor will ask what file you would like to receive the print data 8 This file can be sent to the printer and the graphic will be printed 15 The PJColor program has been enhanced to provide several ways to create color Logos and Coupons and make them available to the iTherm 280 printer Page 248 Rev C 28 07764 I Therm 280 Color Graphics iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Store Graphics in the printer PJColor can store a graphic in the iTherm 280 Printer or generate a file that will store a graphic in the printer To Store a graphic in the printer 8 9 Start PUColor Under Settings Select the iTherm 280 printer Then select the emulation that you will be setting the printer to Select the resolution you would like to have the printer use to print the graphics Low resolutions are faster high resolutions produce better graphics Select the communications
181. Unicode 2 0 0x13A0 0x13FF Cherokee Post Unicode 2 0 0x1400 0x167F Canadian Syllabics Post Unicode 2 0 0x16A0 0x1 DFF Unassigned zone 16A0 1DFF 0x1E00 Ox1EFF Latin Extended Additional 0x1F00 Ox1FFF Greek Extended 0x2000 Ox206F General Punctuation 28 07764 Rev C Page 325 Appendix iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide 0x2070 Ox209F Superscripts and Subscripts Ox20A0 Ox20CF Currencv Svmbols 0x20D0 Ox20FF Combining Diacritical Marks for Symbols 0x2100 0x214F Letter like Symbols 0x2150 0x218F Number Forms 0x2190 Ox21FF Arrows 0x2200 Ox22FF Mathematical Operators 0x2300 Ox23FF Miscellaneous Technical 0x2400 0x243F Control Pictures 0x2440 Ox245F Optical Character Recognition 0x2460 Ox24FF Enclosed Alphanumerics 0x2500 0x257F Box Drawing 0x2580 Ox259F Block Elements 0x25A0 Ox25FF Geometric Shapes 0x2600 Ox26FF Miscellaneous Symbols 0x2700 0x27BF Dingbats 0x27C0 0x27FF Unassigned zone 27C0 27FF 0x2800 Ox28FF Braille Pattern Symbols Post Unicode 2 0 0x2900 Ox2FFF Unassigned zone 2900 2FFF 0x3000 0x303F CJK Symbols and Punctuation 0x3040 Ox309F Hiragana 0x30A0 Ox30FF Katakana 0x3100 0x312F Bopomofo 0x3130 0x318F Hangul Compatibility Jamo Based on KSC 5601 0x3190 0x319F Kanbun 0x31A0 Ox31FF Unassigned zone 31A0 31FF 0x3200 Ox32FF Enclosed CJK Letters and Months 0x3300 Ox33FF CJK Compatibi
182. Z is n universal address that activates the printer Page 170 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Printer Status Status Inquire The iTherm 280 Printer is designed for use as part of an automated system where the host computer makes every attempt to correct problems with the printer In addition the host application requires that it be able to obtain more information from the printer than is typical of normal computer printers For example a normal computer printer does not have cash drawers such additional features require that the standard printer protocol be extended to deal with the added features of a point of sale POS printer All inquire commands are processed as they are received preprocessed or real time and require a response from the printer Consequently parallel IEEE 1284 bidirectional communications USB or bidirectional serial operation is required The iTherm 280 Printer looks at and evaluates all commands as they are received and does not respond to inquire commands that happen to be embedded in graphics or other commands Refer to the buffer and preprocessor descriptions in later sections In all cases inquire commands are responded to by an acknowledged ACK or a not acknowledged NAK and then the command ID which allows the host application to make multiple requests and receive identifiable responses If the printer is configured for serial or USB operation the status
183. a If Bit 1 is set the data is passed through the printer and sent out on the serial port Note 1 The pass through command is preprocessed It is processed as soon as it is received The printer may continue to print while previously received data is processed The printer must be on line and ready to activate the command Note 2 Pass through should only be used with serial printers If the printer is configured for parallel operation the data is still pass through on the IEEE 1284 port In most cases this is not useful Note 3 When Ithaca Series 50 Printer compatibility is being used these commands do not function Series 50 Printer pass through must be used Note 4 Multi drop is not operational during suppress and pass through If a multi drop address is present in the pass through data it is not processed Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes ESC y ASCII Set control feature commands ESC y lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 79H lt n gt Decimal IPCL EPOS Where n Description 28 07764 lt 27 gt lt 121 gt lt n gt amp YO 9 or amp YX lt m gt lt M gt lt Mm gt for numbers greater than nine ESC y lt n gt 0 Reinitializes the printer and forces Citizen mode Reinitializes the printer and forces Star mode 2 Reinitializes the printer and forces iTherm 280 mode 3 Reinitializes the printer and forces extended EPOS mode 4 Disables IPCL command
184. a dika u ga ata 14 Technical and Sales support xiii edit g beeel tendon raat eeeeeelaee 15 On line Technical Support si i ssiseironietu vespvendtccese base bb e b se d evenness 15 Telephone Technical Support ii ej p g 15 Return Materials Authorization and Return Policies en 16 Service PrOOHA ST i a a tati 16 Sales SUPPO ta e a et A aa 16 ContactInformatlo Ma is i Sta e a Ea EA 16 iTherm 280 Specifications and Requirements iTherm 280 Specifications and Requirements s seseseenenenznznsnsnzzzznzzzzznzeneznzazezezaznz 21 iTherm 280 Thermal Printer Models 2 ss nnenennnnnn rna nr nnn mnn nn n ara nr rna nn ra tan nnnnan za 21 Standard Feat itesi 4 di asa dana ia tab ra a a d 21 Optional Feat re Siriene ni hie Ma de be 23 General Specifications issir iri ke deckinghs REE EEEE echoes 24 PrinHAGKSPE ITIGA HOMSA a A taa doe eee ee oe Ida AN 24 Physical Characteristics ec ce is ts a a aaa 24 DiMENSIONS A a EEN 24 NVC IGP bf seas ett ed u a da dda DA ob Ad di at dada dat ab din o t ada en 25 Electrical GharacteriSti s wissen ii ia a a 26 Internal AG Powered ss ii i a g A a A a g A 26 External Powered DO iii ia a i ng can a a a eh 26 Thermal aala a o MERASA AEE a a ea 26 Media Specificati hS saree ab AT A rt d A E ES 27 Receipt PAD GR ise bi ta ata tl sane aO EE AEE T 27 PZ ZO b Nt Cah Da kl Bab ant 29 Gover Intenock 223 E A ii it hee E nie ean eine te 29 Display Pass Through 22sec ese ie eaaS
185. an International Character Set ASCII ESC R lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 52H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 82 gt lt n gt Range O lt n lt 74 Default lt n gt 0 Description The ESC R lt n gt command selects an international character set lt n gt from the following table International Character Sets Country Epson ID Country Epson ID ASCI reek 487 JI B l italian yriic tS 45 Japanese CT Bd reek 869 47 Norwegian CT Windows EastEurope 49 Polska Mazovia 22 Ukrainian 6 amp 6 Serbo Croaticl 24 Windows Baltic 68 Serbo Croaticli 25 Cyrilic Latvian 69 Table 20 International Character Sets Hebrew NC 862 Hebrew OC 61 Swedish Il ISO Latin 4 8859 4 28 07764 Rev C Page 195 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Function Select Character Code Table ASCII ESC T lt n gt lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 5BH 54H lt n gt lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 91 gt lt 84 gt lt Np gt lt N gt Default lt np gt 1 lt N gt 181 Code Page 437 Description The ESC T lt n gt lt n gt command selects a code page lt n gt from the character code table Code Page Country Decimal lt nh gt lt nl gt Hex lt nh gt lt nl gt 64 USA Slashed 0 64 0H 040H 65 USA Unslashed 0 0 65 0H 041H 66 British 0 66 0H 042H 67 German 0 67 0H 043H 68 French 0 68 0H 04
186. and contained within the master page Master and sub page definitions are always done base on the 0 degree orientation not the current rotation c Optionally set an orientation This may be 0 90 180 or 270 degrees d Optionally set the entry position This is based on the current sub page and the current rotation e Enter text or graphics f Go to step b to define additional sub pages or step c to change the orientation 2 Print the page Page Definition The ESC t command will start page definition and define the initial orientation An ESC t command during page definition will change the orientation and reset the entry location back to the top left corner of that orientation 28 07764 Rev C Page 113 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide 1 1 Receipt or Inserted Form _ Initial entry location l A gt gt gt gt gt 1 l l l l ie i A Ae i LOA la lt lt lt lt lt QO 1 1 1 1 1 l Figure 10 Page Mode Entrv Orientations The ESC u command wet the maximum page dimensions Note that these dimensions are always based on 0 degree rotation Enter text and or graphics as required Auto cutter and page mode You may embed an auto cutter command with in a page definition The auto cut command may be placed anywhere in the page definition however it will be processed after the page is printed To prevent the cut from occurring in the page it will
187. are selected using one of two methods The first is a fixed level Page 146 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes V Level Code Word 48 Level 0 2 49 Level 1 50 Level 2 8 51 Level 3 16 52 Level 4 32 53 Level 5 64 54 Level 6 128 55 Level 7 256 56 Level 8 512 The second way is to determine correction level based on the amount of data in the barcode This Cf v 0 1 Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description 28 07764 is determined by calculating a correction ration based on the formula Len Cf Level Code Word 0 3 Level 1 4 4 10 Level 2 8 11 20 Level 3 16 21 45 Level 4 32 46 100 Level 5 64 101 200 Level 6 128 201 400 Level 7 256 401 Up Level 8 512 Set bar code height ESC EM B lt n gt 1BH 19H 42H lt n gt lt 27 gt lt 25 gt lt 66 gt lt n gt amp BH lt m gt GS h lt n gt The ESC EM B lt n gt command sets the bar code height where lt n gt 24 is the number dots The default is n 4 and results in a barcode that is about 0 47 inches high Set bar code width ESC EM W lt n gt 1BH 19H 57H lt n gt lt 27 gt lt 25 gt lt 87 gt lt n gt amp BW lt m gt GS w lt n gt The ESC EM w lt n gt command sets the minimum bar width The value ma
188. arily intended to be used in Unicode based systems However to provide legacy support the printer supports 8 bit and double byte ASCII encoding with code pages When not using Unicode or double byte encoding the printer is restricted to the 8 bit ASCII character set To support international languages the characters that are assigned to each of the 256 possible locations can be remapped to any character in the Unicode standard Typically the first 32 characters are reserved for control characters The next 72 are typically fixed to alpha numeric and punctuation The upper 128 characters are typically redefined to characters that support the specific language or country These mappings are generally referred to as codepages The iTherm 280 provides several legacy commands to select a country code or codepage maps However they all simply select an ASCII to Unicode translation map Several predefined mappings to provide legacy support are internal to the printer but the majority of the maps are placed in the printer s file system This allows any preexisting codepage mapping to be defined as well as the ability to define custom mappings unique to your application Codepage description files The format of the codepage description file is somewhat flexible The basic format is that each line will specify an ASCII character ID and the Unicode character that is to appear in that ASCII ID location The file format is one character per line with
189. at give additional detail This bit determines the G or B status in the previous byte Function Write File command All ASCII ESC RS W lt L gt lt Ly gt lt data gt Hexadecimal 1BH 1EH 57H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 30 gt lt 87 gt Description The ESC RS W command sends data to the printer to be stored in the file The lt LL gt lt LH gt parameters specify the length of data that will follow where the length is LH 256 LL The data is treated as binary data with no translations Page 286 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide ITherm 280 File System Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Read File command All ESC RS R lt Li gt lt Ly gt 1BH 1EH 52H lt 27 gt lt 30 gt lt 82 gt The ESC RS R command requests that data be read from the file and returned to the host The lt LL gt lt LH gt parameters specify the length of data that should be returned where LH 256 Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal lt p gt Description Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description LL specifies the number of returned bytes The data is treated as binary data with no translations If there is not enough data in the file to make up the requested length only the available data is returned Generate and return a file directory report All ESC RS 1BH 1EH 49H lt 27 gt lt 30 gt lt 73 gt The ESC
190. ating Range VAC VAC 100 240 90 264 47 63 45 1A 120VAC 1 4A 120VAC 05 A 240VAC 7 A 240VAC Table 1 Standard Power Input Requirements External Powered DC Optionally the iTherm 280 Printer can be operated with 24 volt DC power supplied from a host terminal or external supply Connection to this printer version is made via a three pin Hosiden type connector Supply Supply Frequency Hz Idle Current amps Voltage Voltage Current Rating Range amps VDC VDC 24 2 0 A Cash Drawer Fire 5 10 3 5 A Printing maximum for lt 1 minute 4 8 A Peak lt 167 msec Table 2 Power Input Requirements with the 24 volt DC Power The iTherm 280 can be configured to operate with various power supplies If a DC power supply with less capability is used the printer must be configured for reduced power and the printer will print slower Thermal Print Head Thermal Print Head Overview Number of heat elements 640 Heat element pitch 0 125 mm 8 dots mm Print width 80 mm 0 2 mm Pulse Life 100 million pulses Abrasion Life 100 km Vertical dot pitch 0 264 mm 0 0104 inch or 96 DPI Operating Temperature 5 45 degrees C Humidity 10 90 RH non condensing Operation Precautions e Do not print without paper e Clean the head with ethyl alcohol after power is removed from the printer This will remove foreign particles or paper dust which may degrade print quality e Be s
191. atus request to printer 213 GS a 1DH 61H Enable disable Automatic Status Back ASB 210 GS r 1DH 72H Transmit status 212 Command Name Page GS H 1DH 48H Select printing position of HRI characters 222 GS f 1DH 66H Select font HRI characters 222 GS h 1DH 68H Set bar code height 221 GS k 1DH 6BH Print bar code 220 GS w 1DH 77H Set bar code width 220 Mechanism Control Commands Command Name Page GS V 1DH 56H Select cut mode and cut paper 223 Page 184 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Supported TM T88 Commands Miscellaneous Commands Programming Codes Command Name Page DLE DC4 lt 1 gt 10H 14H 01H Generate pulse in real time 225 DLE DC4 lt 2 gt 10H 14H 02H Execute power off sequence 225 DLE DC4 lt 8 gt 10H 14H 08H Clear buffers 225 ESC 1BH 3DH Select peripheral device status 226 ESC 1BH 40H Initialize printer 224 ESC p 1BH 70H Generate pulse 225 GS A 1DH 28H 41 Enter Test Mode 228 H GS 1DH 49H Transmit printer ID 224 GS P 1DH 50H Set horizontal and vertical motion units 224 GS b 1DH 62H Turns smoothing mode on off 201 GS c 1DH 63H Print counter 228 GS g 0 1DH 67H 30 Initialize maintenance counter 228 H GS g2 1DH 67H 32 Transmit maintenance counter value 229 H Macro Function Commands Command Name Page GS 1DH 3AH Start end macro definition 230 GS rtm 1DH 5EH Execute macro 230 Co
192. be preceded with a feed that will place the end of the page about 0 125 inches above the auto cut position Mechanism commands in page mode In general mechanism commands received during page mode will be processed if the result will not affect the printed result Stopping page mode definition The following operations will stop a page mode definition 1 ESC Printer initialize command 2 Real time reset request ENQ lt 10 gt 3 Turning the printer off Printing the page The FF command starts the printing process Printing starts at the current paper position The complete page definition is printed excluding any blank information at the bottom of the page If the FF command is used to print the page the memory used to store the page image is not maintained and is released to be used by other functions Function Select page mode Page 114 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes ASCII ESC t lt x gt or ESC SUB t Hexadecimal 1BH 74H lt x gt or 1BH 1AH 74H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 116 gt lt x gt or lt 27 gt lt 26 gt lt 116 gt IPCL amp Y PM lt xi gt EPOS ESC L Description This command activates page mode and sets the orientation This command may also be issued during page definition When issued in page mode it resets the orientation and entry position but does not cause the currently defined image to be erased or printed Where 0 for standard orientation Direction A
193. be printed up to the termination character Only 0 9 A Z period and space may be printed and Characters may be used as escape characters for full 128 character support If illegal characters are passed to the printer they are converted to legal codes For example a would be converted to A In full 128 character mode the printer will encode the full 128 character set In this mode the first character received must be the length IE ESC k lt 1 gt lt n gt where n specifies the number of characters to follow The characters following n characters may be from Oto 127 Values greater than 127 are converted to printable characters by removing the 8 bit The following table specifies the Code 39 character set ASCII Code ASCII Code ASCII Code ASCII Code NUL MU SP Space YN l AW SOH A A A A a A STX B i B B B b B ETH C C C C c HC EOT D D D D d D ENQ E E E E e E ACK F amp F F F f F BEL G l G G G g 4G BS H H H H h H HT l A i l LF J if J J J j J VT K IK K K k K FF L A L L L l L CR M M M m M SO N l N N n N Sl O O O O o O DLE P 0 0 P P p P DC1 Q 1 1 Q Q q Q DC2
194. box drawings up double and right single 2026 horizontal ellipsis 255a box drawings double up and righ 2030 per mille sign 255b box drawings up single and left double 2032 prime 255c box drawings up double and left single 2033 double prime 255d box drawings double up and left 2039 single left pointing angle quotation mark 255e box drawings vertical single and right double 203a single right pointing angle quotation mark 255f box drawings vertical double and right single 203c double exclamation mark 2560 box drawings double vertical and right 203e overline 2561 box drawings vertical single and left double 2044 fraction slash 2562 box drawings vertical double and left single 207f superscript Latin small letter n 2563 box drawings double vertical and left 20a3 french franc sign 2564 box drawings down single and horizontal double 20a4 lira sign 2565 box drawings down double and horizontal single 20a7 peseta sign 2566 box drawings double down and horizontal 20ac euro currency symbol 2567 box drawings up single and horizontal double 2105 care of 2568 box drawings up double and horizontal single 2113 script small 2569 box drawings double up and horizontal 2116 numero sign 256a box drawings vertical single and horizontal double 2122 trademark sign 256b box drawings vertical double and horizontal single 2126 ohm sign 256c box drawings double vertical and horizontal 212e estimated symbol 2580 upper half block 215b vulgar fraction one eighth 2584 lower half block
195. buffer using the ESC command where it remains indefinitely Otherwise the image remains in the RAM buffer where it is available until ESC or ESC amp is executed the power is turned off or the printer is reset A representation of the format of a downloaded bit image is depicted below Column one Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Function Print single user defined bit image ASCII GS lt m gt Hexadecimal 1DH 2FH lt m gt Decimal lt 29 gt lt 47 gt lt m gt Description The GS lt m gt command prints a downloaded or stored bit image using the mode specified by lt m gt lt m gt selects a mode from the table below Decimal Horizontal Dot Density dpi 00 0 Normal 203 203 01 1 Double wide 203 101 02 2 Double high 101 203 03 3 Quadruple 101 101 Table 50 User defined Bit image Resolutions Function Save User Defined Character Set ASCII GS 6 lt Name gt lt 0 gt Hexadecimal 1DH 36H lt Name gt 0H Decimal lt 29 gt lt 54 gt lt Name gt lt 0 gt Range lt Name gt a 15 byte maximum alphanumeric name to identify the image Description GS 6 lt Name gt lt 0 gt saves the current character set created by the ESC amp command to the nonvolatile memory pool If no character set has been defined the command stores an empty definition structure Function Select User Defined Character Set ASCII GS 7 lt Name gt lt 0 gt Hexadecimal 1DH 3
196. cess the macro and or load the user defined character set at initialization Because user store is intended to be loaded only a few times and then printed as part of normal operation the programmer must take some care during the definition phase The programmer must assume the responsibility to assure the 16K buffer size is not exceeded User store can save macros and user defined character sets When the basic user store is full it can be moved to extended user store Individual items in the extended user store can not be erased The entire extended user store must be erased all at once You may place two items in user store with the same name and the last defined item will be used Defining Macros Macros can be defined two ways The first is by using the begin and end named macro commands These commands start the recording process and automatically save the macro when it is complete The macro data is not processed as it is sent to the printer Function Begin named macro record ASCII ESC US b lt Name gt lt 0 gt Then send the data to be recorded The printer does not process the data The terminating lt O gt may be replaced with an amp or redefined See ESC EM T lt n gt or amp UT lt n gt on page 136 Function End name macro record ASCII ESC US e lt Name gt lt 0 gt The second way to define macros is to use ESC g commands to define the macro and then the save macro data command to save the data The t
197. ch This command will force mono space printing It will override any character spacing set by the set character height and width commands defined above This spacing will be enforced until deactivated by setting the value to 0 or if the set character height and width commands use a 0 for the width indicating proportional spacing should be used This command differs from the ESC J command in that all characters are centered on the fixed cell size It the character is too big for the cell it may overlap the previous and next character The character size is not adjusted to fit the cell If d 0 variable spacing is selected Page 276 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide ITherm 280 Unicode and Fonts NOTE If the current character size is too large for the selected spacing the characters will overlap Variable spacing is recommended Function Set Character spacing in 1 4 points All ASCII ESC i lt d gt Hexadecimal 1BH 2BH 69H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 43 gt lt 105 gt Range d 0 16 255 The ESC 4 i command will set the character spacing in points where 1 4 point is defined as 1 288 of an inch This command will force mono space printing It will override any character spacing set by the set character height and width commands defined above This spacing will be enforced until deactivated by setting the value to 0 or if the set character height and width commands use a 0 for the width indicating proportional spac
198. ch operation that deals with small and large fixed pitch character the printer has a pseudo fixed pitch flag that will increase the spacing in multiples of the requested spacing until it fits The following table lists the commands and how they interact Command Zero Character Character Cell Width Pseudo Fixed width height pitch flag ESC P Width 0 Same as From From Font No effect ESC p Height command Page 274 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide ESC P ESC p Width Not Zero From Command ITherm 280 Unicode and Fonts Based on set character spacing command Will be used if previously set and character spacing is not being defined by the font ESC ESC Value 0 No effect No effect From Font Set Off but has no effect ESC ESC Value Not zero No effect No effect From Command Set Off ESC Value 0 No effect No effect From Font Set On but has no effect ESC l I l i l I l i ESC J lj l J ESC j Value Not zero No effect No effect A multiple of the value defined by the command Set On ESC I lt n gt 28 07764 From POR INI definition From POR INI definition Rev C As defined bv command Will be used if previously set Page 275 ITherm 280 Unicode and Fonts iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Function Set minimum character height and
199. characters per inch Page 66 Rev C 28 07764 Configuring Your I Therm 280 Printer iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Smoothing Flag for whether scaled Enabled Disabled Enabled characters smoothed Paper Width Width of the paper 80 or 58 mm paper and 80 mm and 576 dots installed print zone from 608 to 256 dots Bar Code Width Default barcode line 1 to 8 3 width 10CPI DC2 ESC v nINIT ENQ lt 10 gt Carriage Return This option defines how CR and LF characters are used Normal Ignore LF Ignore CR Add LF to CR Add CR to LF Add to Both Use CR as Print Ithaca Emulation Normal Epson Emulation Ignore CR Axiohm Emulation Use CR as Print Off Line Option This option defines what conditions place the printer off line Normal Cover open paper out and buffer full Buffer full only Normal Line Spacing How many lines per inch are printed by default 6 7 5 or 8 lines per inch Ithaca Emulation 8 Most others 6 Input Buffer This option specifies how large the input buffer is 40 Characters 256 Characters 1024 Characters 2048 Characters 4096 Characters 8192 Characters One Line 8192 Characters Print Energy Control Paper This option will select a paper type by brand name Generic Black Generic Color Custom Black Custom Color Optima POS Kanzaki P 320 Kanzaki P 350 Kanzaki P 320RB Kanzaki P 320GB Kanzak
200. code address order 28 07764 Rev C Page 267 ITherm 280 Unicode and Fonts iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide File system and the POR INI file The ITherm 280 Printer supports a file system to support TransAct Technologies fonts and allow the user to load and link custom fonts The POSFile tool provides a Windows interface to the printer and will allow fonts and configuration files to be loaded into the printer This tool can read and write the POR INI file however the TransAct supplied fonts can not be read or deleted from the printer TrueType and Compressed Stroke Fonts are supported by the ITherm 280 Printer User defined TrueType fonts many be defined and loaded into the printer however once in the printer they can not be extracted This protects the copyrights on the font The PORIINI file is used to control how fonts are encoded named identified and linked as well as allowing how the font to be printed is controlled In addition the POR INI file defines how each legacy font is defined and printed The POR INI file is divided into sections e encoding This section defines how the printer encodes the character set It may be ASCII with code page or Unicode If ASCII is selected the default code page is selected and or defined in this section e font This section defines how the scalable fonts are named and generated You can control the font cache size and partitions the Hinting link fonts and font abstractions
201. code pages available are Code page 932 936 949 and 950 Multi bvte code page available are GB18030 2000 These code pages require an appropriate Unicode font be loaded that support all the characters in the requested code page Due to the large number of characters in these code pages These files are not supported in a customer definable ASCII form like the Code page descriptions files described above They are compiled and compressed into a 2 or 3 file code description set One file is like the Code page description file in that it may be referenced just like the normal code page description files The other two files are double byte and multi byte decode files and are referenced in the master code page description These files not distributed with the standard printer but are available from Transact upon request Code page selection In ASCII mode the iTherm 280 Printer supports over 40 different international character sets by default In IBM and EPOS printers there are two ways of selecting a character set One way substitute s international characters in the upper 128 characters of a standard character set The substitution technique supports a few different countries However as more and more countries were added too many characters were being replaced and it became a problem for the application to match the characters displayed and printed To solve this problem a second method of selecting a character set was developed c
202. color black Black Black Brightness 85 85 87 Activation Temp Initial 74 5 C Initial 73 5 C Initial 77 2 C Optimum 104 8 5 C Smoothness bekk 325 sec Ave 325 sec Ave 200 bekk Table 3 Paper Grades Monochrome Thermal Paper Grades color Paper Kanzaki P 320 RB Kanzaki P 320 BB Appleton Dual RB Appleton Dual BB Manufacturer Basis Weight 14 6 lbs 14 6 lbs 15 6 lbs 15 6 Ibs Caliper 00227 mils 00227 mils 00235 mils 00235 mils Brightness 87 87 89 5 87 8 Image color Red Black Blue Black Red Black Blue Black Thermal Initial Red 80 5 C Initial Blue 74 5 C Initial Red 77 8 5 C Initial Blue 69 4 5 C Response Initial B 98 5 C Initial B 90 5 C Initial B 77 8 5 C Initial B 69 4 5 C Effective Red 87 5 C Effective Blue 80 5 C Optimum Red 90 5 5 C Optimum Blue 82 5 C Effective B 116 5 C Effective B 120 5 C Optimum B 103 3 5 C Optimum B 118 5 C Optimum Red 100 5 C Optimum Blue 90 5 C Optimum B 130 5 C Optimum B 130 5 C Smoothness 500 sec ave 500 sec ave 250 sec min 250 sec min bekk Paper Usage Precautions e The life of the thermal head when two color paper is used is reduced to half of the life when single color thermal paper is used 28 07764 Table 8 Paper Grades Color Rev C Page 27 Specifications a
203. connected to the serial port on the personal computer the power supplied through the DTR line also raises DSR high For Plug and Play compatibility RTS flow control is used at the printer because DSR must stay high as long as the device is attached to the serial port 28 07764 Rev C Page 313 Communications iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Serial Device Identification The serial device must report its identification to the system using an identification string at 1200 baud The identification string consists of 18 fields that identify the device class of the device and other compatible devices Only five of the fields are required by all serial devices all others are optional The identification string used by the iTherm 280 Printer follows 028H Start of ASCII response 0 1 PnP Rev IPRO210 Unique ID IPR plus revision level PRINTER Printer M280 PcOS Model SC 19200 N 8 1 Serial Configuration Baud Parity Bits Stop Bits xxH Check sum 029H End PnP Note The model field may be altered to generate PnP ID s other than M280 PcOS by special order When the identification is complete the printer returns to the baud rate specified in the configuration Page 314 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Communications Serial Port Inquire The serial port inquire is more straightforward than parallel mode The serial acknowledged ACK or not acknowledged NAK responses follow a uniform format the AC
204. cro data in a RAM based storage buffer as it is received and processed The storage buffer may then be saved to a flash based user store or inserted into the print data stream If a macro is recalled from user store it is expanded into the macro buffer and replaces whatever is currently there Programming Considerations The flash nonvolatile memory has a limited number of write cycle operations Consequently the number of saves should be limited The buffer should not be saved on a transaction by transaction basis but rather a maximum of once per day The buffer is initially about 16K bytes long All commands and print data are placed in the buffer and must be included in the size limits The printer does not indicate when the buffer is full The application must make sure that the buffer is not overfilled The printer simply stops saving information when it is full As the buffer fills the input data is printed normally The effect of the macro start command is to clear the buffer and to start to save the input data The macro stop command stops saving data and initializes internal pointers for the next print To store the data in the nonvolatile flash it must be named and saved by one of the user store save commands When the macro buffer is inserted into the data stream configuration commands like font or pitch changes remain in effect after the macro is processed Illegal commands are placed in the buffer and take up space Horizo
205. ct s remote configuration software TransAct Technologies offers the use of a remote CONFIG program as a fast easy way for system integrators to configure or reconfigure your iTherm 280 printer To obtain more information or the latest version of the CONFIG program call our Sales Department or Technical Support Most Frequent Configuration ncompatibilities Parallel Printer Emulation Carriage Return Options Serial Printer Emulation RS 232 Serial Interface baud rate Carriage Return Options How to Change Configuration Settings Entering into Configuration Mode 1 Place the printer in standby by pressing the button 2 Press and hold the Feed button while pressing and releasing the button 3 When the error indicator blinks indicating a stuck key release the Feed key and enter Self Test Mode 4 Press and hold the Feed button until the next test is printed Then release the Feed button 5 Repeat step 4 until Test Configuration is printed 6 Press and release the Feed button briefly The current configuration will then be printed 7 You are now in Configuration Mode After you enter Configuration Mode the printer will print the current configuration the current totals and the error logs if any Save this printout as a guide to changing the configuration and in case you wish to return the printer to the previous configuration Each emulation can have different configurable features If you are changing the
206. cter pitch is maintained Legacy Printer Features that Have Changed Because this product employs outline and stroke font character generation support for several legacy features are changed from standard iThem 280 version Dynamic code page definition Dynamic code page definition is still supported when in ASCII mode however Unicode is now used for the source character locations Page 280 Rev C 28 07764 File System 28 07764 Rev C Page 281 This page intentionally left blank Page 282 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide ITherm 280 File System File System Interface The ITherm 280 provides a file system to support fonts configuration information user graphics and macros There are a number of commands that are provided to support the file system In general files need to be opened for read or write read or written and then closed There is a command that will delete a file and print or return a file directory TransAct Technologies provides a Windows based tool that will interact with the ITherm 280 and provide a drag and drop interface to the file system The file system in the ITherm 280 is partitioned into two sections one for internal system use by the printer and one for user information The system partition is referred to as partition 0 It is reserved for fonts configurations and code page files This partition can not be deleted or completely erased The second partition is for all ot
207. ctors with 24V sink drivers Driver voltage 24 volts Refer to power supply specification Driver current 1 amp maximum with current limit Pulse duration 250 msec maximum Drawer status Open close drawer status provided to printer Cash Drawer Pin Assignments Ithaca Epson Star pint CD2 pin1 Not l pin 1 A Connected pin2 CD1 Sense pin2 CD1 pin 2 pin 3 Ground pin3 CD1 Sense pin 3 D DNE 24V pin 4 CD Drive 24V pin 4 CD Drive 24V pin 4 CD Drive 24V pin5 CDl pin 5 CD2 pin 5 CD2 pin 6 Not Connected pin6 Ground pin6 CD1 Sense Figure 2 Cash Drawer Pin Definitions The cash drawer can be configured for one of three configurations Ithaca Epson or Star The Main Controller PCB has three 3 six pin headers one each configuration The cash drawer harness is identical and is plugged into the appropriate header at time of factory build The header position defines the configuration of the cash drawer This design allows for changing the cash drawer in the field by a trained technician Refer to the markups on the board when determining where the harness should be installed to work in the three different configurations 28 07764 Rev C Page 33 Specifications and Requirements iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Ithaca Epson Star Pin Number Signal Name Direction Signal Name Direction Signal Name Direction 1 Frame Drawer kick Output Sink Frame ground out dr
208. d lt n gt x 1 144 192 inches ESC j 1BH 6AH Print and reverse feed 192 Line Spacing Command Command Name Page ESC 2 1BH 32H Select default line spacing 1 6 Ipi 193 ESC 3 1BH 33H Set line spacing 193 Character Commands Command Name Page ESC SP 1BH 20H Set right side character spacing 193 ESC 1BH 21H Select print mode s 199 ESC 1BH 25H Select cancel user defined character sets 193 ESC amp 1BH 26H Define user defined characters 194 ESC 1BH 2DH Turn underline mode on off 199 ESC 4 1BH 34H Set italics mode 201 ESC 5 1BH 35H Reset italics mode 201 ESC 1BH 3FH Cancel user defined characters 194 ESC E 1BH 45H Turn emphasized mode on off 199 ESC G 1BH 47H Turn on off double strike mode 200 ESC M 1BH 4DH Select character font 194 ESC R 1BH 52H Select an international character set 195 ESC V 1BH 56H Turn on off 90 rotation mode 200 ESC T 1BH 5BH 54H _ Select character code table 196 ESC 1BH 5EH Print control character 198 ESC r 1BH 72H Select color 198 ESC t 1BH 74H Select character code table 198 ESC 1BH 7BH Turn on off upside down printing mode 200 GS 1DH 21H Set character size 201 GS 1DH 23H Insert euro character 198 GS B 1DH 42H Turn white black reverse printing mode 198 on off Command Name Page ESCc5 1BH 63H 35H_ Enable disable panel buttons 202 Table 18 Supported EPOS Commands 28 07764 Rev C Page 187 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Supported TM T90 Commands Paper Sensor Co
209. d for vertical spacing and adjusting it so that horizontal passes touch as expected The requested horizontal resolution is converted by data scaling Because the vertical dpi of the printer is always greater the resulting APA graphics printed on the iTherm 280 Printer are slightly smaller than the same graphic printed on an impact printer All of this is done transparently to the application however loss of resolution may result in some modes If desired the ESC lt m gt command can be used to select the native resolution Note 1 If the iTherm 280 Printer is used with programs that convert text to graphics the printer is slower than if the printer is sent ASCII text The iTherm 280 Printer is supported by a Windows print driver that allows applications to select supported fonts Note 2 Generally the horizontal graphic commands provide faster print than the APA graphic commands Standard APA Graphics ESC K Print single density graphics 60h x 72v dpi ASCII ESC K lt ni gt lt n2 gt Hexadecimal 1BH 4BH lt n gt lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 75 gt lt ny gt lt N2 gt IPCL none Description The ESC K lt ni gt lt n gt command prints lt n gt 256 lt n gt bytes of single density graphics 60 dpi ESC L Print half speed double density graphics 120h x 72v dpi ASCII ESC L lt n gt lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 4CH lt n gt lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 76 gt lt N gt lt N2 gt IP
210. de Programming Codes Feed to Black Dot An option for the iTherm 280 is a black dot sensor This command is supported by a feed to black dot command Note This is a special order option and requires an additional sensor and modified firmware It is not possible to field retrofit a standard iTherm 280 with a black dot sensor Function Feed to Black Dot ASCII ESC VT lt n gt Hexadecimal IBH OBH cn Decimal lt 2 7 gt lt 11 gt lt n gt IPCL None EPOS GS VT lt n gt Where n lt n gt is the number of inches to feed while looking for the black marker Description The ESC VT command performs feeds the paper until the black dot is positioned as configured The iTherm keeps track of the location of the black dot and will feed paper until the black dot is positioned as configured There are three configurable Black Dot parameters The Dot Width and the Offset may be adjusted to operate with a specific paper The Calibration is preset and should not be changed Function Adjusting the width and offset of the Black Dot ASCII ESC Wninhm Hexadecimal 1B 7E 57 nl nh m Decimal 27 126 87 nl nh m Where n The offset adjustment of the Black dot in n 203 inches where n nl 256 nh Default is 304 or 1 5 inches Values greater than 368 will set n to 368 m The Width of the black dot in m 203 inches The default is 76 or 0 375 inches Values less than 51 will be ignored The offset adjustment is the position of the black
211. de Programming Codes Journal mode Journal mode is a station select command All data sent to the printer following the journal mode select command is stored in the EJ as a single record Any control commands sent to the electronic journal will end the journal entry An EOT NUL or any printer command will end journal mode Typically an EOT CAN or station select will be used to end the journal mode Function Electronic Journal Mode Begin ASCII ESCH Hexadecimal 1BH 7BH Decimal lt 27 gt lt 123 gt IPCL None EPOS Description The function enters journal mode When in journal mode commands are parsed and any command that is not appropriate is removed causes journal mode to exit or is saved The following commands are ignored ESC BEL ESC EM ESC ESC 4 ESC 8 ESC 9 ESC ESC C ESC v The following commands cause the journal to stop and will be processed again after the journal information is saved ESC FS ESC FF ESC GS ESC US ESC ESC ESC ESC ESC ESC gt ESC K ESC L ESC Y ESC Z ESC f ESC j ESC k IESCJI ESC m ESC o ESC t ESC u ESC y ESC ESC The following commands are processed and not placed in the journal ESC q ESC w ESC x BEL All other commands are placed in the journal and will be processed when the journal is printed The EOT 4 or 4H and CAN 24 or 14H will cause the journal to stop and will not be processed again In typical operation a stati
212. decimal 1BH 77H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 119 gt lt n gt IPCL none EPOS GS a lt n gt Where n Defines the features that cause dynamic responses Where Bit 0 Cash Drawer 0 ACK NAK lt 1 gt 1 Cash Drawer 1 ACK NAK lt 2 gt 2 Paper low status ACK NAK lt 3 gt 3 Paper out status ACK NAK lt 4 gt 4 Electronic Journal Low Out ACK NAK lt 25 gt lt low gt lt high gt 5 Validation Form present ACK NAK lt 7 gt 6 Mechanical Error Status ACK NAK lt 14 gt 7 Cover status ACK NAK lt 8 gt Description Dynamic status can be used to allow the host to sense status changes without sending repeated inquire commands The operation of the dynamic response varies depending on the configuration of the printer If the printer is configured for serial or USB operation the status is automatically returned to the host If the printer is configured for parallel IEEE 1284 operation the HOST must initiate a reverse channel request to return the status Note For mechanical error status to function the Buffer Full Only off line option should be selected Note The electronic journal status follows the format of the ENQ lt 25 gt response and reports the amount of electronic journal memory remaining Page 154 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Printing Reporting and Resetting the Electronic Journal The electronic journal may be printed on the receipt or reported to the host The printed report will p
213. des An example would be ESC which would represent a 1BH or 27 decimal lt gt Encloses an 8 bit value in decimal format The value is from zero to 255 An example is lt 2 gt which represents 02H or 2 decimal lt n gt Indicates a variable parameter The variable parameter lt n gt can have a value from zero to 255 The meaning of lt n gt is described and defined in the description of the command lt ny gt lt N2 gt Indicates that there are two parameters lt n gt and lt n gt where both can have values from zero to 255 lt m gt lt m gt Is an Ithaca Printer Control Language IPCL parameter consisting of two digits where lt m gt and lt mz gt are ASCII characters from zero to nine The parameter is combined to form a value from zero to 99 If cms is included the parameter is combined to be from zero to 999 If two values are specified there must be two bytes added to the IPCL code That is if the command specifies lt m gt lt m gt and the desired value is five it must be specified as 05 x All other characters in control strings represent ASCII characters For example ESC 1 represents 1BH followed by 31H In many cases applications require that control sequences be specified in hexadecimal or decimal codes In most cases commands are specified in ASCII hexadecimal and decimal The ASCII Code Table in Appendix B page 324 lists ASCII hexadecimal and decimal equivalents 28 07764 Rev C Page
214. dicate to the host that no more data should be sent 28 07764 Rev C Page 311 Communications iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Flow Chart 2 illustrates how the print control software takes data from the buffer and controls flow At the top of the chart the print control software asks for data If there is no data in the buffer a no data flag is returned The print software must then wait for data If there is data in the buffer it is read and the pointers are updated The buffer is then checked to see how much information is left If the buffer is below a low watermark about 100 bytes left the communication driver is notified and DTR is reasserted When XON XOFF flow control is used the flow is similar to DTR flow except that DTR is not used and XON XOFF control characters are transmitted back to the host on the serial link The XON XOFF advantage is that only three wires are required to interconnect to a printer The disadvantage is that a serial port receiver driver must be written for the host The print controller needs data to print ora command to decode Loop through idle task and then look for more data Is there any data in the buffer Yes Acquire data from the buffer Move buffer pointers to the next data byte Is the buffer below the low watermark No Return data to print controller Flow Chart 2 Print Controller Using Data Return to print controller with no data a
215. disabled When the printer stops printing due to a paper end condition lt n gt 0 is only effective when the printer is waiting for on line recovery from the time the paper roll is inserted to the time the printer goes on line The on line recovery wait time is confirmed by the printer status of ASB or the DLE EOT command lt n gt 2 is only effective when a recoverable error occurs The printer can recover from an error without turning off the power Whether an error occurs or not can be confirmed by the ASB status or the error status of the DLE EOT command 0 Recovers to on line 2 Recovers from an error after clearing the receive and print buffers Note This feature is licensed from Epson and is only available in the Full Epson Emulation of the firmware Problems with this command are frequently caused by not using the correct version of the firmware Contact Transact sales and or technical support for this added cost option Rev C Page 227 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Function Enter Test Mode ASCII GS A lt 2 gt lt 0 gt lt n gt lt m gt Hexadecimal 1DH 28H 41H lt 2 gt lt 0 gt lt n gt lt m gt Decimal lt 29 gt lt 40 gt lt 65 gt lt 2 gt lt 0 gt lt n gt lt m gt Description This command places the printer into test mode based on the parameters lt n gt and lt m gt Where lt n gt may be O 1 2 48 49 or 50 It is intended to select the print station The iTherm 280 w
216. dot in relation to the cut point If n 0 the cut point will be in the center of the black dot If the value of n 304 the cut point will be 1 5 inches above the black dot Note This command may be issued as part of an application If the values in the configuration match the requested values no operation occurs 28 07764 Rev C Page 91 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide 0 8 20 to first line of print n 203 n 8 Cut to Center of black dot m 203 m 8 Dot Width Back of Ticket Dimensions in Inches mm Note This command interacts with the Feed to Black Dot command If the Black Dot paper Option is set the black dot position specified by this command will be used for the Cover Close operation Page 92 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Character Pitch Character pitch commands that set specific characters per inch cpi disable any right side spacing set by the ESC V lt n gt command In addition when font changes are made the character pitch is maintained DC2 Begin 10 cpi character pitch ASCII DC2 Hexadecimal 12H Decimal lt 18 gt IPCL amp F3 EPOS ESC SP lt n gt Description The DC2 command sets 9 905 characters per inch print pitch ESC Begin 12 cpi character pitch ASCII ESC Hexadecimal 1BH 3AH Decimal lt 27 gt lt 58 gt IPCL amp F2 EPOS ESC SP lt n gt Description The ESC command sets 12 235 charact
217. e 229 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Macro Function Commands Function Start End Macro Definition ASCII GS Hexadecimal 1DH 3AH Decimal lt 29 gt lt 58 gt Description The GS command starts or ends macro definition Macro definition starts when the command is received during normal operation and ends when it is received during the macro definition The macro definition can contain up to 2048 bytes If the definition exceeds 2048 bytes the excess data will not be stored Function Execute Macro ASCII GS rtm Hexadecimal 1DH 5EHrtm Decimal lt 29 gt lt 94 gt rtm Range Osrs255 0 lt t lt 255 m See below Description The GS r t m command executes a macro definition The r specifies the number of times to execute the macro When Bit 1 of m is set r is ignored and the macro is executed infinitely t specifies the waiting time for executing the macro it is t x 100 msec for every macro execution m specifies macro executing mode When the LSB of m 0 the macro executes r times continuously with the interval specified by t When the LSB of m 1 the printer remains idle and waits for the FEED Button to be pressed after waiting for the period specified by t After the button is pressed the printer executes the macro once The printer repeats the operation r times When Bit 5 of m is set the current macro definition is saved into the printers nonvolatile flash memory as a start up macro without
218. e a named graphic into the printer an print it by changing the text name to match the stored graphic For example if your receipt has a name like Joe s Market you can save a graphic in the printer named Joe s and then change the Joe s Market to amp URJoe s amp When the iTherm 280 finds amp URJoe s amp it is replaced with the stored graphic Some applications allow a graphic file to be sent to the printer In this case PUColor can generate the graphic file and then your application can send it to the printer This file will support two color print PJColor also has a feature that will allow you to generate a file that will define the graphic to be stored into the printer You can then use this file to setup any number of printers with the same graphic If you are using a windows print driver other than the Transact iTherm 280 driver to support your printer you will not be able to send color graphics to the printer through the print driver The print driver will not support universal color graphics You can however store the graphic in the printer and use IPCL commands to print the stored graphic You must select a printer resident font for this to work The following is a short summary and how to description of these features Print File Graphics PJColor can generate a print file that may be sent to the printer in any emulation and produce a two color print graphic To generate a print file 1 Start PUColor 2
219. e data that follows is larger than the macro buffer about 16K the macro definition is terminated without saving any data The terminating lt 0 gt may be replaced with an amp or redefined See ESC EM T lt n gt or amp UT lt n gt on page 136 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description 28 07764 End named macro record ESC US e lt Name gt lt 0 gt 1BH 1FH 65H lt 27 gt lt 31 gt lt 101 gt amp UG lt Name gt lt 0 gt none The ESC US e lt Name gt lt 0 gt command ends the macro record operation and saves the macro to flash It uses the lt Name gt field to verify the command end and must match the Begin named macro record command If the name already exists in the flash user store or the macro memory is exceeded the command is valid and the lt Name gt field prints If there is not enough room in the flash user store for the macro the save is not performed but the macro buffer is valid The terminating lt 0 gt may be replaced with an amp or redefined See ESC EM T lt n gt or amp UT lt n gt on page 136 Save macro data in user store ESC US m lt Name gt lt 0 gt 1BH 1FH 6DH lt 27 gt lt 31 gt lt 109 gt amp UM lt Name gt lt
220. e effect for all following entries Erase Complete Journal If the electronic journal is not password protected this option will erase the complete journal and reinitialize it Printing part of the journal e Print Last 20 Records Print First Record Skip 10 Records Back 10 Records Print Remaining Journal e Print Last Record These commands will allow part of the journal to be printed For example if the last 10 journal entries are to be printed select print last record then back 10 and then print remaining journal Security The security of the journal is up to the user If the journal is host controlled it should be password protected and if manual printing is not desirable the printer should be configured so as to disable manual printing The TransAct printer configuration utility will allow set and clear this feature When iTherm 280 printers leave the factory the electronic journal is erased and is not initialized Page 156 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Electronic Journal Entries There are two ways to place information in the electronic journal The first is by selecting journal mode The second is by requesting that validation or receipt information is copied into the electronic journal If you select journal mode information sent to the printer is not printed but stored in the flash memory The information is stored as records in a linked list Whenever a journal mode begin
221. e effect until enabled by the ESC 2 command The command is provided to maintain backward compatibility with the Ithaca Series 50 OKIDATA IBM and other printers It can also be used to print on preprinted forms Page 86 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes ESC 2 Enable ESC A lt n gt variable line spacing ASCII ESC 2 Hexadecimal 1BH 32H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 50 gt IPCL none EPOS none Description The ESC 2 command is a companion to the ESC A lt n gt command and puts the specified line spacing into effect It remains in effect until another line spacing command is issued ESC d Feed lt n gt lines at the current spacing ASCII ESC d lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 64H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 100 gt lt n gt IPCL amp FL lt m1 gt lt m2 gt EPOS ESC d Description The ESC d lt n gt command prints the contents of the buffer if any and performs lt n gt line feeds at the current line spacing The command does not change the default line spacing value The next character print position is reset to the left margin Note The IPCL command prints from 00 to 99 lines For example if you wish to feed 12 lines the IPCL command would be as follows amp FL12 Function Reverse feed lt n gt lines at the current spacing ASCII ESC e lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 65H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 101 gt lt n gt IPCL amp FB lt m1 gt lt m2 gt EPOS
222. e iTherm 280 Printer responds to the inquiry if IEEE 1284 is active If the Windows PnP configuration flag is set in the printer IEEE 1284 will be active for all parallel port modes For example PnP in parallel mode forces IEEE 1284 For PnP to work the host must have an IEEE 1284 compatible port adapter and the cable used to connect to the printer must support all of the interface signals The Plug and Play response follows Device ID string Manufacturer TransAct CMD M280CL IPCL CLS PRINTER MDL M280 PcOS DES Ithaca M280 REV x xx OPTS 9xyz PnP ID LPTENUM Ithaca Perph M280_P4D21 Device Description Ithaca M280 Device Class Printer OPTS Field Description OPTS 6XYZ 28 07764 Rev C Page 307 Communications iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide where X is a model definition X will be 3 if the printer is in the native iTherm 280 emulation 5 indicates that the printer is in some other emulation Y and Z are bit fields that designate the options attached to the printer po Bit Y ZI Bito Color Support active O _ D Boc Jo E o S Bits 4 5 Bits 6 7 o s Oo l Page 308 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Communications Serial Port Serial Port Protocol The serial port supports two flow control standards XON XOFF and Ready Busy sometimes called Data Terminal Ready DTR or hardware handshake When Ready Busy flow control is selected the printer can be configured to use DTR
223. e is always 1 Transmit printer status 2 Transmit off line status 3 Transmit error status 4 Transmit paper roll sensor status Table 35 Values for the Status Function lt n gt Bit Off On Hexl Decimal Status 0 Off 00H lt 0 gt Not used fixed to off 1 On 02H lt 2 gt Not used fixed to on 2 Off 00H lt 0 gt Drawer kick out connector pin 3 low On 04H lt 4 gt Drawer kick out connector pin 3 high 3 Off 00H lt 0 gt On line On 08H lt 8 gt Off line 4 On 10H lt 16 gt Not used fixed to on 5 Undefined 6 Undefined 7 Off 00H lt 0 gt Not used fixed to off Table 36 Printer Status lt n gt 1 28 07764 Rev C Page 213 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide il Off On Hexl Decimal Status Off 00H lt 0 gt Not used fixed to off i On 02H lt 2 gt Not used fixed to on 2 Undefined 3 Off 00H lt 0 gt Paper is not being fed by the FEED Button On 08H lt 8 gt Paper is being fed by the FEED Button 4 On 10H lt 16 gt Not used fixed to on 5 Off OOH lt 0 gt No paper out stop On 20H lt 32 gt Printing stops due to paper out 6 Off 00H lt 0 gt No error On 40H lt 64 gt Error occurs 7 Off 00H lt 0 gt Not used fixed to off Table 37 Off line Status lt n gt 2 Bit Off On Hex
224. e position is greater than the new page length the command also sets the current position as the top of form ESC C NUL Set form length in inches ASCII ESC C NUL lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 43H lt 0 gt lt n gt Decimal IPCL EPOS Description 2838 07764 lt 27 gt lt 67 gt lt 0 gt lt n gt amp SI lt mM gt lt M2 gt none The ESC C NUL lt n gt command sets the form length to lt n gt inches If the current page position is greater than the new page length the command also sets the current position as the top of form If zero inches are specified the form feed and vertical tab commands are ignored Rev C Page 89 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide ESC 5 Begin auto line feed ASCII ESC 5 lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 35H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 53 gt lt n gt IPCL amp MA Begin IPCL amp CA End EPOS none Description The ESC 5 lt 1 gt command sets auto line feed mode ESC 5 lt 0 gt command ends auto line feed mode Note The begin and end auto line feed command overrides the configuration setting ESC Reverse line feed ASCII ESC Hexadecimal 1BH 5DH Decimal lt 27 gt lt 93 gt IPCL amp LR EPOS none Description The ESC command performs a reverse line feed at the current line spacing Note The iTherm 280 Printer can tolerate no more than 1 2 inch of reverse feed Page 90 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Gui
225. e print out are instructions on how to use configuration mode Please read these instructions carefully as they are not the same as Self Test You may exit configuration mode at any time without affecting the printer configuration by pressing the power button TEST Configuration The content of the configurable features will alter based on the hardware installed There will be at least three groups of options 1 Emulation 2 Communications 3 General Options Under emulation the instruction set or emulation of the printer may be changed Available options will depend on the model of printer however Ithaca PcOS is always available Other options may be Epson TM88 TM90 Microline and Ithaca M50 Under Communications the way the printer deals with the communications port can be adjusted The printer will only show communications options that deal with the communications adapter installed Under General Options all other configurable features of the printer can be adjusted The default language paper options electronic Journal features and print defaults may be set Details of all printer options and features will de discussed later in this manual Factory Test The printer is equipped with several factory test modes These test options are only used for factory burn in and testing TEST Burn in TEST Rolling ASCII 28 07764 Rev C Page 59 How to Operate the ITherm 280 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Hex dump Mode Hex dum
226. e roll is free from defects The print head has two heating elements per dot position A print element is not considered bad unless both elements are missing If the head test shows that there is an inconsistency in the drive roll it may be debris or a void If debris is indicated cleaning the drive roll should correct the problem If this does not correct the problem contact TransAct s Ithaca Facility s Technical Support Department Page 58 Rev C 28 07764 How to Operate the ITherm 280 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Maintaining the Electronic Journal The iTherm 280 has an electronic journal option It is possible to configure the printer with a journal station This selection allows the information saved in the electronic journal to be printed and maintained by the operator Operation of this mode will be described later in the manual under Electronic Journal Operation It the Electronic Journal is unintentionally initialized it may be deactivated by this option as well If the Electronic Journal is password protected the manual Electronic Journal option will be disabled Configuring Options The configuration option allows the configuration of the printer to be printed and if necessary changed When configuration mode is entered the current configuration the Current User store status and the current totals are printed If any printer errors have occurred a hardware and software error log may also be printed At the end of th
227. e terminator The value of n may be from 0 to 255 If amp UT were sent to the printer the User Store command to run universal graphic Demo would be amp URDemo Set Print Color amp CL lt n gt This command allows various colors to be selected on printer emulations that do not support color text 0 Print with the Left cartridge Typically Black 1 2 3 Print with the Right cartridge Typically Red Blue or Green Cycle Auto Cutter amp YUA lt m gt lt M2 gt lt M3 gt This command feeds m 96 inches of paper and cycles the auto cutter m m 100 m 10 m3 Rev C Page 253 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide ITherm 280 Color Graphics iTherm 280 Coupon Cut Logo Feature The iTherm 280 printer has a feature that will allow a coupon and or logo graphic to printed as part of the existing auto cutter command To activate this feature it must first be configured Configuration consists of specifying in what order the Coupon Cut Logo is processed and optionally how much paper is to be feed after the new cut operation Once configured the Coupon and or logo must be defined and loaded into the printer The Universal Graphics feature should be used to define and load the graphic The Coupon is named Coupon and the Logo is named Logo They may be saved in any resolution and of any size They also need not be all graphics The existing application cut command will be replaced by the Coupon Cut Logo opera
228. eared If n is less than nn then the command is in error and all of the following information is printed In other words tab stops must be entered sequentially in order to be accepted A total of 64 tab stops can be specified The power on default is a vertical tab on every line Reset horizontal and vertical tab stops ESC R 1BH 52H lt 27 gt lt 82 gt amp HV none The ESC R command resets horizontal and vertical tab stops to power up configuration The power up horizontal default is every eight spaces i e 9 17 25 etc The vertical default is every line Rev C 2838 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes FF ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description w ESC 4 ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description ESC C ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Form feed IFF OCH lt 12 gt amp FF none The FF command performs a form feed to the top of the form Note The form feed command can be disabled Set the form length to zero Set top of form ESC 4 1BH 34H lt 27 gt lt 52 gt amp TF ESC L The ESC 4 command sets the top of form to the current position Set form length in lines ESC C lt n gt 1BH 43H lt n gt lt 27 gt lt 67 gt lt n gt 8MSL lt mM gt lt M2 gt ESC C lt n gt The ESC C lt n gt command sets the form length to lt n gt lines at the current line spacing If the current pag
229. ed in the Start End Doc tab of the printer properties page After the prn file is created it can be read and sent to the printer by the host application Bit wise RLE In bit wise RLE compression the Most Significant Bit MSB compression of each data byte denotes if the compressed data represents one or zero bits Bits zero through six indicate how many bits are represented as a one or zero A 34 Hex 34H represents 34H bits set to zero A 97H represents 17H bits set to one ESC h lt 1 gt lt 5 gt lt 1 gt lt 34H gt lt 97H gt lt 8fH gt lt O9H gt Byte wise RLE In byte wise RLE compression data is represented in byte Compression pairs The first byte is a count and the second is the graphics data The graphics data byte is repeated the number of times represented by the count byte ESC h lt 1 gt lt 5 gt lt 8 gt lt 09H gt lt ffH gt lt 02H gt lt 55H gt Where lt 09H gt lt ffH gt means repeat ffH nine times and lt 02H gt lt 55H gt means repeat 55H two times Difference Compression In difference compression data is represented in byte pairs In compression the first byte is an index into the byte stream as it would exist if sent in an uncompressed format The second byte is the data that is different in the new scan line data Think of compression mode as The scan line is the same as the previous except for the byte at a specific position ESC h lt 1 gt lt 5 gt lt 254 gt lt 03H gt lt d5
230. ed on how the font is supposed to look and all the characters that are to be included Characters are then positioned in the cell based on this origin All characters in the font are then based on the same rules The white space between lines in defined to be above the character The information available at print time is listed above The complete cell is not provided only the escapement black width and depth and the x and y offsets to the origin are available The printer cannot arbitrarily shorten the cell height that was defined by the font designer even though the provided character may fit in a smaller space Using these rules may result in characters that at first appear too small with excessive white space between lines however this is how the font was designed The printer must allow the minimum line spacing based on the Page 258 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide ITherm 280 Unicode and Fonts point selection and not on the actual character height of any given characters Second guessing the font designer can have very bad results when character are encountered that use the full cell Asian fonts require slightly different rules for character placement and are not as one would expect The Asian ideographs are positioned on center of mass rather than on a baseline The Latin data in Asian typefaces must be built on the same rules As a result when Latin characters are scaled the expected baselines do not line up As
231. ed when either 2 or 3 or both bits is on The validation sensor is enabled when either 6 or 7 or both bits are on This command is enabled only with a parallel interface and is ignored with a serial interface The paper sensor s used to output paper end signals are selected by using nas follows Decimal Function 0 Off 00 0 Paper roll low sensor disabled On 01 1 Paper roll low sensor enabled 1 Off 00 0 Paper roll low sensor disabled On 04 2 Paper roll low sensor enabled 2 Off 00 0 Paper roll end sensor disabled On 04 4 Paper roll end sensor enabled 3 Off 00 0 Paper roll end sensor disabled On 08 8 Paper roll end sensor enabled 4 5 Undefined 6 Off 00 0 Validation sensor disabled On 40 64 Validation sensor enabled 7 Off 00 0 Validation sensor disabled On 80 128 Validation sensor enabled Table 26 Paper Sensor Commands Note The electronic journal will not stop the printer Bits 0 1 2 and 3 all control the receipt station Page 204 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Print Position Commands Function Set Print Position to the beginning of print line ASCII GS T lt n gt Hexadecimal 1DH 54H lt n gt lt n gt Decimal lt 29 gt lt 84 gt lt N gt lt Np gt Range Osnxsi 48 lt n lt 49 Description The GS T lt n gt command sets the print position to the beginning of the print line lt n gt Function 0 48 Sets the
232. ee Ye eect ers i renen 29 Communications Interface me E A 30 Parallel Interfa e Ai dese Bec tes dei a a ara a 30 RS 232 Serial INtera e L xi 3 ees eats enh Ne ok hace NA a ENA vk dade RA 31 WSBiINt6 aCe i tan 31 Page 4 Rev C 28 07764 Ethernet 10 Base T adapter eeeeeecccceeeeeeeeeeeeneeaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaaaaeeeeeeeeesenssaaaees 32 802 11b Wireless Interface cece ia scat eco c ete eat l 32 Gast DAW Santee kie sea de eta sant a E EEEE 33 interface Des riptoti vies sidi ala kiku seda ib alfu base bad atte u stone an Nona eto d AE 33 Cash Drawer Pin Assignments Lu ii easienereeeredonaciebereerede 33 Vertical Wall Mount Kit ODOM ih gael ot a acted es da 35 Setup Procedures BEBE B RBBB RRR RRR RRR RRR RRR eee eee eee eee eee eee 37 Verifying the Configuration sc sects cats e ff inert sealer ees ie ciao d dos A 39 Verify the Communications Interface Card nn 39 Changing Interface Cards issibni we se l p nessuaeeelseeeteanidese 39 Removing the Old Interface Card 39 Cash Drawer Configuration nr 40 Configuring the Cash Drawer Interface nn 40 Installing Cables tf a i at a t a a aea a eea aeei SE 41 Connecting POWE rasian en b d taa EEN 41 Connecting Communications Cables 42 Verify the Firmware Configuration nn 43 InStalliNGuRapencscccciis eet een ca ata can A eats 43 Printer Drivers and Printer Controls nr 44 Definitions for terms you will see in this guide 44 Getting Started Qu
233. elects one of 19 international character sets The ESC command does not allow all of the possible character sets to be selected it is provided for compatibility with older programs only The second is ESC T which selects any code page In EPOS mode the ESC R command has been expanded to select any code page ESC Select international character set ASCII ESC lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 21H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 33 gt lt n gt IPCL amp CS lt n gt EPOS ESC R lt n gt Description The ESC lt n gt command selects international character set lt n gt In standard mode the value of lt n gt is as follows Language Language 64 ASCII slashed zero 73 T Italian 65 A ASCII unslashed zero 74 J French Canadian 66 B British 75 K Spanish 67 C German 76 U Swedish II 68 D French 77 M Swedish III 69 E Swedish 78 N Swedish IV 70 F Danish 79 O Turkish 7l G Norwegian 80 P Swiss 72 H Dutch 81 Q Swiss ll Table 12 Language Table ID s ESC T Select character code page ASCII ESC T lt np gt lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 5BH 54H lt np gt lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 91 gt lt 84 gt lt np gt lt n gt IPCL amp CP lt m gt lt M2 gt lt M3 gt lt M4 gt EPOS ESC t lt n gt Description The ESC T lt n gt lt n gt command selects character code page lt np gt lt n gt The iTher
234. en or Blue Density Adjust This is a fine adjustment 50 to 50 0 for the print density Baud Rate Serial Communications 300 600 1200 2400 19200 Bit rate 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 115200 Mode Number of bits parity 7 bit or 8 bit 8 Bit No parity 1 Stop and stop bits Even Odd No Parity bit 1 or 2 Stop Bits Handshaking Flow control options Ready Busy Ready Busy Xon Xoff None Receive Error What happens when an Prints 2 Prints 2 error is detected Ignores the data Windows PnP Flag for Windows Plug Enabled Enabled and Plav active Disabled DTR RTS Signal What RS232 signals are DTR RTS or Both DTR Both DTR and RTS used for flow control and RST CTS DSR Signal How CTS and DSR used None Not used None Not used Multidrop Mode Flag for multidrop active Off A B or C Address Off Busy to ACK Relationship of Busy to ACK while Busy ACK in Busy ACK on the IEEE1284 ACK in Busy interface ACK after Busy Select Deselect Command used for DC3 DC1 DC3 DC1 printer select and DC1 DC3 deselect Microline and M50 only Code Page or What character set is See appendix 0 or 437 Language Set used for a default Zero Is the zero slashed un slashed or defined by the language set Slashed Un Slashed Follow Language set Defined by the language set Font Sets the size of the 9x24 10x24 13x24 or 12 x 24 default font 15x24 CPI Sets the default Value mav be form 10to 1 15 characters per inch 24
235. end is detected The default setting is when all sensors are enabled lt n gt 15 It is possible to select multiple sensors to output signals If any of the sensors detect a paper end the paper end signal is output The command is only available with a parallel interface The paper end sensor is an option If the sensor is not equipped the settings of bits 0 and 1 of the command are not effective 28 07764 Rev C Page 165 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Bit On Off Hexadecimal Decimal Function 0 Off 00H lt 0 gt Paper roll near end sensor disabled On 01H lt 1 gt Paper roll near end sensor enabled 1 Off 00H lt 0 gt Paper roll near end sensor disabled On 02H lt 2 gt Paper roll near end sensor enabled 2 Off OOH lt 0 gt Paper roll end sensor disabled On 04H lt 4 gt Paper roll end sensor enabled 3 Off 00H lt 0 gt Paper roll end sensor disabled On 08H lt 8 gt Paper roll end sensor enabled 4 7 Undefined Table 15 Paper Sensor Commands ESC lt Enable print suppress and data pass through ASCII ESC lt lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 3CH lt n gt Description Where Page 166 lt 27 gt lt 60 gt lt n gt amp PT lt n gt ESC lt n gt The ESC lt lt n gt command provides print suppress and data pass through features Bit 0 Printer select Bit 1 Pass through On Bits 2 7 Undefined If Bit O is clear the printer stops processing dat
236. ent and generates the desired print from a full color image 28 07764 Rev C Page 245 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide ITherm 280 Color Graphics Procedure for color horizontal graphics There are many ways to generate graphics for the iTherm 280 printer The easiest is to use the PJColor program See the next section The other way is to use the Ithaca windows driver and capture the output to a file To generate an image using the windows print driver 1 2 Generate the graphic image in the program of your choice Use colors consistent with the two colors installed in the printer Make sure the paper size you pick fits the printer 3 inches wide with 0 25 inch margins The iTherm 280 print driver should be installed even if the printer is not connected Set up the print driver to print the graphic to a file using whatever resolution is required Print the graphic image to a file Later when you want to print the graphic simply copy the file to the printer with your application You may also copy the graphic to the graphic save buffer and then request the printer to retrieve and print it without re sending the graphic data Optionally process the color image with the Ithaca color image processor in the PJColor program The program can print the image or generate a printable file 14 Ithaca Color Image Processor is patent pending Page 246 Rev C 28 07764 I Therm 280 Color Graphics iTherm 280 Programme
237. erminating lt O gt may be replaced with an amp or redefined See ESC EM T lt n gt or amp UT lt n gt on page 136 Function Start macro record ASCII ESC g lt 1 gt Then send the data to be recorded The data is processed and printed Function Stop macro record ASCII ESC g lt 2 gt Then save the macro Function Save macro data ASCII ESC US m lt Name gt lt 0 gt Saving User defined Characters To save user defined characters first define the character set Page 130 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Function ASCII Function ASCII Function ASCII Function ASCII Function ASCII 28 07764 Define user defined characters ESC lt y gt lt C gt lt Ca gt x1 d d y Xxa kK dy d y x xk Second save the definition in the nonvolatile flash memory with the appropriate command Save the definition Note the Save user defined characters command saves all three character definitions Save user defined characters ESC US c lt Name gt lt 0 gt Third load the character set or load and run the macro To restore the character definitions issue a load item command with the name of the character set to be loaded The terminating lt O gt may be replaced with an amp or redefined See ESC EM T lt n gt or amp UT lt n gt on page 136 Load item from user store ESC US lt Name gt lt 0 gt If the item referenced is a use
238. ers per inch print pitch SI Begin 17 cpi character pitch ASCII SI Hexadecimal OFH Decimal lt 15 gt IPCL amp F 1 EPOS ESC SP lt n gt Description The SI command sets 17 333 characters per inch print pitch ESC SI Begin 24 cpi character pitch ASCII ESC SI Hexadecimal 1BHOFH Decimal lt 27 gt lt 15 gt IPCL amp F4 EPOS ESC SP lt n gt Description The ESC SP command sets 23 111 characters per inch print pitch 28 07764 Rev C Page 93 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide ESC P Set character pitch ASCII ESC P lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 5BH 50H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 91 gt lt 80 gt lt n gt IPCL 8MFI 8MF2 8MFZ amp F4 amp F5 amp FE amp R F7 EPOS ESC SP lt n gt Description The ESC P lt n gt command sets character per inch print pitch to lt n gt The printer resolution limits the exact print pitch The following table lists the exact pitch for various values on lt n gt lt n gt Resulting IPCL lt n gt Resulting IPCL Characters Characters per Inch per Inch 1 1 00 16 16 00 2 2 00 17 17 33 amp F1 3 3 01 18 17 33 4 4 00 19 18 91 5 4 95 20 20 8 amp F5 6 5 94 21 20 8 7 6 93 22 23 11 8 8 00 amp F7 23 23 11 9 9 04 24 23 11 amp F4 10 9 90 amp F3 25 23 11 11 10 95 26 26 12 12 23 amp F2 27 26 13 13 00 28 26 14 13 87 29 29 71 15 14 86 amp FE 30 29 71
239. es not have time to print 28 07764 Rev C Page 171 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide IEEE 1284 Mode Inquire In parallel IEEE 1284 mode status information can be returned to the host through the IEEE 1284 reverse channel After the host makes an inquire request it activates IEEE 1284 mode 0 reverse channel and waits for a response from the printer The response to the inquire is identical to serial mode in format The printer always accepts IEEE 1284 reverse channel requests but does not accept inquire commands when off line It is possible to obtain status when off line by placing the printer in dynamic response mode before the printer goes off line The IEEE 1284 reverse channel responds to status changes even when the printer is off line In general the printer should be configured for Buffer Full Only off line operation if inquire commands are used This prevents the printer from using flow control for anything but buffer full The programmer must take on the responsibility for assuring that inquire commands are used to maintain status of the printer Inquire Commands ENQ Inquire printer status ASCII ENG lt n gt Hexadecimal 05H lt n gt Decimal lt 5 gt lt n gt IPCL none EPOS GS r or DLE ENQ or DLE EOT Description The ENQ lt n gt command inquires about the printer s status and returns a result Note When the printer is off line inquires may not be accepted ENQ
240. es rts 236 iTherm Citizen Emulation 213 iii i 238 iTherm Star EmMUIatOn had eae aA Sota eek oe l te Bed eee at ok te 238 iTherm AROMA ONiak a dei ec i a a a 238 iTherm 280 Color Graphics serrennanzannnn 239 Printing G APNIOS Li i i E 241 Character Grapnics isien bess a b pv B e b 241 ARA Graphi Seea oat oh ee Sn oes a euler Seen a on ah aa dachae 244 iTherm 280 Universal Color Graphics cccccccccsesssssesesesesesesescscssssesssssstscacetstetnenenens 247 Print File Grapii si ii tat iri b rs i A A E 248 Store Graphics in the PRIM Ix issena e DB eetcenecedvecbreenrsee 249 How universal graphics IS ONE sisa si a rnn 250 How to use IPCL commands in text Strings nn 250 AUT 0 ie 251 Universal Color Command Descriptions nn 252 iTherm 280 Coupon Cut Logo Feature sse ssseseenenenennznznznznznnznznnnn nn nn nanna nanna nn 254 Unicode and Fonts ussannannannnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnun LDD Unicode and Fonts ssannnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnunnnunnnnnuu 207 Pi L A E E E EA MEA dante E Se KAT ada MIET DARA emm ed IA 257 Character GOne ration ss fis iii Ana eu d e da a Ja 257 Ghera iet DS TION i i i irfid sa a B Ba Sa Bali 258 internal FONTS ia s ie tetas d g ed aa 260 G ara ter Cache iss aere E eE E aeons Ree REER 260 SIOA OINI A ATA A E S 261 Stacked or Linked fonts 42 204 canes cedukadacedn hae codeade conneee 261 FONT SIO FACS kr tii fa at e ei de a te 261 Unicode src i a i eb a a a a
241. escription This command returns the current statistics for parameter n The value returned will be T lt n gt with the next 4 bytes being an unsigned integer For example ESC T lt 1 gt Request cover open count Returns T lt 1 gt lt 0 gt lt 0 gt lt 1 gt lt 100 gt or 256 100 or 356 cover opens Values ofn Request Black Dots Red Dots Pink Dots Cover Opens Paper Outs Line Feeds Characters Printed Cash Drawer1 Cash Drawer2 Standby Cycles OMAN OAR WN O 20 The Star emulation does not allow the use of ESC y commands for extended diagnostics The ESC y commands are not available 28 07764 Rev C Page 291 ITherm Extended Printer Control 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Page 292 Power Up Resets Watchdog Resets Base Flash Erases Ext Flash Erases Auto Cutter Cycles Init Requests Error Vectors Auto Cutter Faults Power On Time Min System Active Time Min Over Temperature Cutter Re Home Rev C iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide I Therm Extended Printer Control Function ASCII Hex Decimal Description 28 07764 Set Secondary Paper Color ESC R lt c gt or ESC L lt c gt 1BH 7EH 52H or 1BH 7EH 4CH lt 27 gt lt 126 gt lt 82 gt or lt 27 gt lt 126 gt lt 76 gt This command reconfigures the secondary paper colors This command should only be use when the colors of the installed paper are changed This con
242. ese commands work if the Width is defined as zero If the width is defined as zero this is used as a flag to the printer to generate characters as defined by the font and use the character width returned by the font In effect the vertical point size passed to the font rendering engine is the same as the horizontal value The added effect of the width being passed as zero is that any enforced horizontal spacing is disables IE the effect of the ESC I ESC i ESC J and ESC j commands are disabled If the width is not zero the ESC ESC i ESC J and ESC j remain in effect and only the resulting character size is changed the horizontal spacing is not changed The legacy ESC lt n gt select the print mode effectively issues a set minimum character height and width command followed by a set character spacing command without effecting the pseudo fixed spacing flag The pseudo fixed spacing flag is a further complication required for dealing with fonts that are not truly fixed pitch In some cases a fixed pitch font will have more that one character size depending on what the character is used for This generally only affects Asian fonts where the ideograms are generally twice as wide as Latin characters In fixed spacing mode the printer will put the rendered character at whatever spacing is requested even if they don t fit If the character is too big it will overlap the previous and next character To allow a fixed pit
243. esponses In general inquire commands place two byte responses in the IEEE 1284 reverse channel buffer The two bytes are the same as the serial mode responses In IEEE 1284 mode the printer remains busy until the inquire command is processed assuring responses in real time To receive the response the host must ask for it It is possible for the host to make a number of requests and wait for the responses however the status returned is valid at the time the request was made It is also possible for the dynamic response mode to be activated and the reverse channel mode to be opened The reverse channel then changes from reverse idle to reverse data available as the status changes The application must be careful in dynamic response mode that the dynamic responses are not left active when the reverse channel is closed If the dynamic responses are active when the reverse channel closes the output buffer overflows If data is in the buffer wnen dynamic responses are activated it will not be replaced by the current status If dynamic response is off and a buffer clear command is issued followed by activation of dynamic responses the buffer will contain fresh data If the buffer clear command is issued after the dynamic response is activated the buffer will be cleared and any unread responses will be lost Parallel Port Plug and Play Microsoft Windows implements Plug and Play PnP by doing a special parallel IEEE 1284 inquire during boot Th
244. estions to ASK 116 ida ei pea Reaves Da v ees deeiee emer 45 Do you want to use USB and simulate a communication port nn 45 Do you want to use an Ethernet interface and simulate a communication port 45 Are you using OPOS UnifiedPOS UPOS L 46 Do you want to print from a Windows application 2 46 Wind ws Printer DIIVOR ase nich ae be a 47 PC Hardware iii ie ca sessed ds tied sa nena hada eee ra dda l Hae a 47 rt cP tat BB ica dele Bac ee nc De nea chicos a SR yooh ee ace Re echt 47 RO AN ane ane eine EE Renee rd Pe OAC aA Sire PE PIA ed ee COREE ETE Vee SUPP ETE 48 Bo ELAN macon I ata es Ae a nt GS shel ea arta 48 USB ORV a iri rr e Ta ta 49 Ethernet Virtual Serial driver iisse e skuda sndba ata abra aa a ta t a d aa qe 50 POSPrinter ActiveX Control POSPrinter OCX nn 51 PG FIA A A SE tat 51 Where to get more information nn 52 How to Operate the iTherm 280 Printer a How to Operate the iTherm 280 Printer s ssssseenmnnnnznnnnnznznsnznzznzzzzzzznzzznzezezazazzzz X BUON i a l a a a 55 FEED BU ON i ue alacant E athlete Sethian 55 Indicator Lights EE Dy A set at 56 Power Indicator LED xii o rs te che tet re tlie eet tae a tae a 56 Error Indicator LED Sessantotto e etaa 56 Paper Indicator LED zrenie eia Ot a eens oleae a i pade aa reati 56 Fault ljdiCator Ssp E E E R E Ea 56 Testing the Printer Overview rna rna n mnn tn 58 Using Self Test Configuration and Hex Dump Mode
245. etter h 00ba masculine ordinal indicator 0049 Latin capital letter i 00bb right guillemet 004a Latin capital letter j 00bc vulgar fraction one quarter 004b Latin capital letter k 00bd vulgar fraction one hal 004c Latin capital letter 00be vulgar fraction three quarters 004d Latin capital letter m OObf inverted question mark 004e Latin capital letter n 00c0 Latin capital letter a with grave accent 004f Latin capital letter o 00c1 Latin capital letter a with acute accent 0050 Latin capital letter p 00c2 Latin capital letter a with circumflex accent 0051 Latin capital letter q 00c3 Latin capital letter a with tilde 0052 Latin capital letter r 00c4 Latin capital letter a with diaeresis 0053 Latin capital letter s 00c5 Latin capital letter a with ring above 0054 Latin capital letter t 00c6 Latin capital letter a with e 0055 Latin capital letter u 00c7 Latin capital letter c with cedilla 0056 Latin capital letter v 00c8 Latin capital letter e with grave accent 0057 Latin capital letter w 00c9 Latin capital letter e with acute accent 0058 Latin capital letter x 00ca Latin capital letter e with circumflex accent 0059 Latin capital letter y 00cb Latin capital letter e with diaeresis 005a Latin capital letter z 00cc Latin capital letter i with grave accent 005b eft square bracket 00cd Latin capital letter i with acute accent 005c backslash 00ce Latin capital letter i with circumflex accent 005d right square bracket O0cf Latin capital letter i with diaeresis 005e
246. ev C Page 297 This page intentionally left blank Page 298 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Communications Protocol and Print Buffers The following figure illustrates the communication flow from host computer to printer and from printer to cash drawer Host Host computer Host to printer link Printer CT Printer to cash drawer Figure 21 Typical POS System For the host to printer communication link the iTherm 280 printer supports serial or parallel communications The serial and parallel ports both follow standards developed for the personal computer environment 28 07764 Rev C Page 299 Communications iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Data to printer Host computer Printer Status and flow control back Figure 22 Host to Printer Link In most cases the host computer is capable of sending information to the printer much faster than the printer can print it To prevent information from being lost a flow control mechanism is provided The mechanism is called the flow control protocol The goal of the flow control protocol is to exchange as much information as possible as fast as possible without losing any data The iTherm 280 printer supports three flow control protocols two in serial mode and one in parallel From the printer s point of view four basic functions are required of communications All four are common to all three flow control protocols There must be a communicatio
247. ever TransAct Technologies provides a support tool that will allow the user to load their own font directly from Windows and change the way fonts are printed It is also possible for the host application to load fonts into the printer The printer can contain up to 99 unique and selectable fonts Any font may be selected at any time In addition up to 8 fonts may be linked or stacked together Some standard character size 28 07764 Rev C Page 261 ITherm 280 Unicode and Fonts iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide and character pitch commands are supported as legacy commands The appearance of the print using those commands has been optimized using the TransAct WGL4 font If you elect to use your own font or the GB18030 font you may wish to use the scalable font control commands to select the character size and spacing rather than the legacy commands TransAct Technologies provides a basic WGL4 font with the printer This may be supplemented or replaced with a GB18030 Chinese font upon request The printer will accept TrueType and compressed stroke fonts as defined by Monotype If required the customer may supplement the TransAct supplied fonts with their own custom fonts rights to that font Do not download a font to the printer if you do not have the right to use the font as a downloaded printer font Unicode As computer systems started to address more and more international environments the classic ASCII standard with code pages became u
248. evice status 226 ESC lt y gt lt c gt lt c gt Define user defined characters 105 ESC y ci c2 Define user defined characters 131 ESC gt lt n gt Enable user defined characters 106 ESC 0 Set line spacing to 27 216 inch 86 ESC 1 lt n gt Set left margin 208 ESC 1 Set line spacing to 7 72 inch 86 ESC 2 Enable variable line spacing 87 ESC 2 Select default line spacing 193 ESC 3 lt n gt Set line spacing 193 ESC 3 lt n gt Set line spacing to n 216 inch 85 ESC 4 Begin italics 201 ESC 4 Set top of form 89 ESC 5 lt 01 gt Begin auto line feed 90 ESC 5 End italics 201 ESC 8 Disable paper out sensor 161 ESC 9 Enable paper out sensor 161 ESC a lt n gt Select justification 206 Page 343 Index iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide ESC a lt n gt Set justification 84 ESC A lt n gt Set variable line spacing to n 72 inch 86 ESC b lt n gt Print bar code 139 146 179 180 ESC B lt n gt lt n gt lt n gt 0 Set vertical tab stops 88 ESC Begin 12 cpi 93 ESC BEL Sound buzzer 223 ESC C NUL lt n gt Set form length in inches 89 ESC c lt n gt Select color 107 ESC C lt n gt Set form length in lines 89 ESC c 3 lt n gt Select paper sensor s to output paper end signals 204 236 ESC c 4 lt n gt Select paper sensor s to stop printing 203 236 ESC c 5 lt n gt Enable disable paper feed 202 236
249. exadecimal all other as decimal Any line beginning with a non numeric value is ignored Any information after the Unicode value is ignored Not all of the ASCII ID s need to be present however only ID s present will be affected There are two ways to select a codepage file The first is by using the standard code page select command If this command is used the file name is critical it must follow the format of Cpxvz CPM The xyz is the code page number that is being selected in the command For example CP850 CPM would be referred to as 850 If the legacy commands are to be used to select file based code page mapping the selection mode must be selected in the printer s configuration The second form is by name This command is free form and will select any file present which will then be to use it as a code page definition If the file is not a code page file you will get unexpected results If the file does not exist the command is ignored Any extension may be used for a codepage map however it is best to use the CPM extension with a descriptive filename recommended For example ISO8859 1 CPM would be a good choice for the ISO8859 1 code page 28 07764 Rev C Page 99 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Double Byte and Multi Byte Code Page Description Files In ASCII mode the iTherm 280 Printer supports double byte code pages Currently there are 4 double bvte codepages available and one multi byte Double Byte
250. f 00 lt 0 gt Cover is closed On 04H lt 4 gt Cover is open 3 Off 00 lt 0 gt Journal is active and not full Cover Closed On 08H lt 8 gt Journal Full and has been disabled or Cover Open 4 Off 00 lt 0 gt Not used fixed Off 5 Off 00 lt 0 gt Slip is present On 04H lt 4 gt Slip is not present 6 ON 20H lt 64 gt Fixed On 7 Off 00 lt 0 gt Not used fixed Off Table 41 Paper Status 28 07764 Rev C Page 215 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Printing Paper Command Function Select Paper Type for Printing ASCII ESC c 0 lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 63H 30H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 99 gt lt 48 gt lt n gt Range n 1 1sns3 8snsii Description ESC c 0 n selects paper type s for printing User s have the option to select either Paper roll or validation paper Both bits O and 1 indicate paper roll and if either of them is available the paper roll is selected as the print sheet Validation and paper roll can be selected simultaneously but in this case be sure to use a pressure sensitive paper so that the printing result is on the paper roll At this time the setting values for validation are available for ESC 2 ESC 3 GS L and GS W This command is enabled only when processed at the beginning of a line When previously disabled validation paper is enabled the printer waits for the validation to be inserted When previously enabled validation paper is disabled the printer ejects the paper The default settin
251. f Speed Printing 123 Double Strike Mode On Off 200 Dynamic Response Enable 154 Emphasized Mode On Off 199 Emphasized Print Mode Beginning 110 Emphasized Print Mode Ending 111 End Italics 112 Enhanced Print Mode Ending 110 Enhanced print Beginning 110 Entering Configuration Mode 65 Entering Self Test Mode 58 EPOS Codes 181 command summary 187 28 07764 EPOS 90 Rotation Mode On Off 200 EPOS Absolute Print Position Setting 205 EPOS Back Space Setting 206 EPOS Bar Code Height Setting 221 EPOS Bar Code Printing 220 EPOS Character Size Setting 201 EPOS Control Character Printing 198 EPOS Emulation 74 EPOS Euro Character Insert 198 EPOS Execute Macro 230 EPOS HRI Characters Selecting Font 222 EPOS HRI Characters Printing Position Selecting 221 EPOS Italics Beginning 201 EPOS Italics Ending 201 EPOS Knife Cut Partial 223 EPOS Knife Cut Partial Performing 223 EPOS Macro Definition Start End 230 EPOS margin eft Setting 208 EPOS Margin left Setting 207 EPOS Margin Right Setting 208 EPOS Motion Units Setting 224 EPOS Nonvolatile Memory Erasing All Entries 233 EPOS Nonvolatile Memory Erasing Single Entry 233 EPOS Page Mode Commands 217 EPOS Paper Error Signal Control 236 EPOS Printing Area Width Setting 207 EPOS Query Nonvolatile Memory Pool Information 235 EPOS Relative Print Position Setting 205 EPOS Relative Vertical Print Position in page mode Setting 220 EPOS
252. ffect small changes do occur in the font generation and a value in the middle works best The X and Y Spot size effects how the characters are generated The spot size is equivalent to selecting a paint brush A small spot is a small paint brush and therefore requires a lot mot brush strokes to form the character As the dots printed by the printer are always the same size defining a small spot will cause more dots to be used to form the character Depending on how the font was defined it is advantageous to select a large brush size and affectively reduce the number of dots in the character There are no real guidelines for selecting Spot size You have to play with it until you get acceptable results with your font If you select a high quality print mode This value can be set to nominal Nominal is 100 Function Select Font All ASCII ESC 3 lt ID gt Hexadecimal 1BH 2BH 31H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 43 gt lt 51 gt Description The ESC 3 command selects the font for printing This command is used to select a previously loaded font based on its alias Note Selecting font 0 will select the linked font If the selected font does not exist the previous font will remain in effect Note Selecting font 100 will select bit map font 0 101 is bitmap font 1 and so on Up to 7 bitmap fonts may be present Function Define a Stacked or Linked Font All ASCII ESC S lt ID gt lt ID2 gt lt ID2 gt lt 0 gt Hexadecimal 1BH 2BH 53
253. figuration must match the secondary colors as specified by the PJColor program for the color graphics to match the PJColor preview ESC L lt c gt sets the left or primary color and ESC R lt c gt sets the right or secondary color You can set the Left cartridge to any color and you can set the right cartridge color to any color but black Secondary Color GREEN BLUE Note These commands change the configuration of the printer that is stored in nonvolatile memory The values take effect immediately and will remain until changed by these commands or manual configuration This command should only be used when needed Rev C Page 293 I Therm Extended Printer Control iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Function Print Current Configuration and Totals ASCII ESC y lt 9 gt or ESC lt 9 gt Hexadecimal 1BH 79H 09H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 121 gt lt 9 gt Description This command forces the printer to print the current configuration To function correctly it must be issued with the printer in the proper emulation mode It is intended to be printed in the default Ithaca configuration but will print in any configuration Note This command must be preceded with an ESC y lt 8 gt Function Print Current Totals ASCII ESC y lt 15 gt Hexadecimal 1BH 79H OFH Decimal lt 27 gt lt 121 gt lt 15 gt Description This command forces the printer to print the current totals log Note This command must be preceded
254. for the Status Function sm2 nn 213 Table 36 Printer Status lt n gt 71 i i si skiet enne 213 Table 37 Off line Status sno L 2 i iii i ke KN Si A tA ka 214 Table 38 Error Status lt A gt lie pe es aA E eea aiaa 214 Table 39 Paper Roll Sensor Status lt n gt A Lsee eee eeeeneceaaeeeeeeeeeneneaa 214 Table 40 Peripheral Status lt n gt 0 48 xkupa a Reeeons deny acai be tenhedbvs dace oe need enreale 215 Table41 Paper Status iii a enti a eta e teaver dscns Ba ekk dad E OE EEANN ETRA 215 Table 42 Bar Code System Based ON lt M gt L nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnznnnnznznzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzzi 221 Table 43 Printing Position of HRI Characters e nnnnnnnnznnnnnnnnanznnnnnnnnnnnzzi 222 Table 44 Font for Human Readable Interpretation HRI Characters 222 Table 45 Horizontal size of the bar code 222 able 46 Printer De ii men strains iet Wav aisd a EA E E E S EEEE ESA SS EESTE EES ERS 224 Table 47 Type ID lt n gt 2 or SO i u 224 Table 48 Peripheral Device Bit Definitions L nnnnnnnnnznnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnzzna 226 Table 49 Macro Control Bit Definitions nn 230 Table 50 User defined Bit image Resolutions nn 235 Tabiesi Gharacier Puch ia ti ii bekk roa data Sad G ad tu ae 279 Table 52 Parallel port Timing eicsecscccesssnaicevets tavteyonehueneis saeetphecquerndd aeeueaeraeedd eicieneere 305 Table 53 Paper Ordering Information eee eeeenesaaaeeeeeeeeeeeeeae 341 Table 54 Cables Ordering Informat
255. ft is interested in POS in the long term Microsoft s immediate goal is to enable POS USB devices a way that is compatible with existing service objects In order to support USB POS devices under the existing software architecture Microsoft is providing the POSUSB driver model to allow USB POS devices to interface as serial COM ports to service object DLLs The Transact USB Printer interface is based on this Microsoft POSUSB driver model It provides full bi directional interface to the printer and allows most existing applications to interface to the USB Ithaca iTherm 280 as if it were on a serial COM port In addition we have allowed the printer to register as a composite device This allows the printer to appear in the system as a USB print device as well as a COM port If you are using a windows printer driver ours or the Generic driver you can assign the printer to the USB port We hope that supporting the USB Ithaca iTherm 280 as a composite device provides the best of both worlds to our customer The USB Driver is available from customer support and by download from our web site Transact has written a POSPrinter OCX ActiveX that will allow you to easily interface to our printers It is used by all of our demonstration programs This OCX is available for use with customer applications It works with printers installed on Serial COM ports LPT ports TCP IP and USB A USB compatible version is available from customer support or fr
256. g Self Test and Configuration mode To enter self test and or configuration mode perform the following sequence of operations 1 Press and release the button to turn the printer OFF The power indicator light will be off Press and hold the Feed button While holding the Feed button press and release the button When the red error indicator light blinks release the Feed button Follow the directions printed on the receipt to cycle through and select the desired TEST option arwn The iTherm 280 has a total of seven Self Test and or configuration options Two are designed to be useful when performing on site print evaluations One option allows the printers electronic journal to be maintained one allows the printers configuration to be changed and two are designed for factory setup by TransAct Testing the printer Use the following two TEST options when verifying basic printer operation TEST Receipt The receipt test is the primary test option to use when determining if the printer is functioning correctly The receipt test is mostly used during the early stages of troubleshooting to eliminate the possibility that the problem is occurring with the printer If the printer experiences a failure and the error indicator light is activated call TransAct s Ithaca Facility s Technical Support Department TEST Head Test This test performs a test pattern that will print all the head print elements and verify that the driv
257. g booklet prepared by the Federal Communications Commission helpful How to Identify and Resolve adio TV Interference Problems This booklet is available from the US Government Printing Office Washington DC 20402 Ask for stock number 004 000 00345 4 Canadian Department of Communications Radio Interference Statement The iTherm 280 Printer does not exceed Class A limits for radio noise emissions from digital apparatus set out in the Radio Interference Regulations of the Canadian Department of Communications Regulatory Compliance FCC Class A ULc CE Mark UL 1950 TUV Page 2 Rev C 28 07764 Disclaimer NOTICE TO ALL PERSONS RECEIVING THIS DOCUMENT The information in this document is subject to change without notice No part of this document may be reproduced stored or transmitted in any form or by any means electronic or mechanical for any purpose without the express written permission of TransAct Technologies Inc TransAct This document is the property of and contains information that is both confidential and proprietary to TransAct Recipient shall not disclose any portion of this document to any third party TRANSACT DOES NOT ASSUME ANY LIABILITY FOR DAMAGES INCURRED DIRECTLY OR INDIRECTLY FROM ANY ERRORS OMISSIONS OR DISCREPANCIES IN THE INFORMATION CONTAINED IN THIS DOCUMENT TransAct cannot guarantee that changes in software and equipment made by other manufacturers and referred to in this publication do no
258. g by phone please ask for the Sales Department Black Monochrome One Ply 24 rolls per box 3 125 wide x 4 diameter 100 04410 Thermal Red Color Thermal One Ply 24 rolls per box Red Black 3 125 wide x 4 diameter 100 04400 Blue Color Thermal One Ply 24 rolls per box Blue Black 3 125 wide x 4 diameter 100 04401 Green Color Thermal One Ply 24 rolls per box Green Black 3 125 wide x 4 diameter 100 04402 NOTE Green Thermal paper may not be available Contact Transact Sales for availability Table 53 Paper Ordering Information Cables Stock Number 110V Power Cable USA 98 02174 220V Power Cable Australia 98 02178 230V Power Cable International 98 02175 230V Power Cable ND South Africa 98 02179 240V Power Cable UK 98 02176 Parallel Communication Cable 25 pin male to 25 pin male 36 pin Centronics to 25 pin male 253 9800007 253 9800002 Serial Communication Cable 9 pin Female to 9 pin Female 9 pin Female to 25 pin Female 10 2020 10 2021 Table 54 Cables Ordering Information Domestic and International power cables available Call for more information Drivers Available Windows 95 98 Me Print Driver and Documentation 98 9171 Windows 2000 NT 4 0 Print Driver and Documentation 98 9172 OPOS Print Driver Manual 100 9730 OPOS Print Driver Disk 1 Disk 2 100 9731 100 9732 Software Developer s Toolkit CD ROM 100 02440 28 07764 Rev
259. g is n 1 The paper type s are selected for printing by using n as follows Bit Off On Hex Decimal Function 0 Off 00 0 Electronic Journal disabled On 01 1 Electronic Journal enabled 1 Off 00 0 Paper roll disabled On 02 2 Paper roll enabled 2 Off 00 0 Slip Paper Disabled EPOS only On 04 4 Slip Paper enabled EPOS only 3 Off 00 0 Validation paper disabled On 08 8 Validation paper enabled 4 7 Undefined Note The TM88 and TM90 do not support the electronic journal The electronic journal mav be printed and reported in the same wav as the Ithaca PCOS emulation The full range of ESC GS journal control commands are available in EPOS mode See the section on initializing printing and reporting the electronic journal starting on page 151 In EPOS mode the electronic journal and the paper roll may be both selected As there is limited space in the electronic journal the amount of data sent the journal should be limited Note In EPOS emulation the iTherm 280 printer will recognize the Epson Slip Select command and enter Validation mode Page 216 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Function Select Paper Type for Command Settings ASCII ESC c 1 lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 63H 31H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 99 gt lt 49 gt lt n gt Range n 1 1 lt n lt 3 8 lt n lt 11 Description ESC c 1 n selects paper type s for setting Paper roll
260. ge Status requests Yes The status is returned during definition Printer initialize Yes Cancels page mode definition and returns the printer to standard command mode Set top of form No You must set the top of form outside of page mode The form position is maintained after the page is printed Vertical tab No The definition of a vertical tab is ambiguous in page mode and is ignored Macro definitions No You can not define or delete a macro while in page mode You can however invoke a macro or stored graphic You can not enter page mode while in a macro definition Note 3 Unless specified by a page mode set page size command the default page size is the full paper width for about 14 inches Printing starts at the current paper position The complete page definition is printed excluding any blank information at the bottom of the page Function Set Print Area in Page Mode Enhanced ASCII ESC SUB S 2XO1oeXOHpea NO pa OP Wi pa We HL gt lt HH gt Hexadecimal 1BH 1AH 53H lt XO gt lt XOn gt lt lt YOL gt lt YOu gt lt Wi gt lt Wa gt lt Hi gt lt Hy gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 26 gt lt 83 gt lt XO_ gt lt XOu gt lt lt YOL gt lt YOu gt lt W gt lt Wu gt lt Hi gt lt Hy gt IPCL None EPOS ESC W Description This command Sets the position and size of the initial area in page mode and sub pages Where lt XO gt lt XOx gt the x direction offset Min 0 lt YO gt lt YOu gt the y direction offset Min O lt W gt l
261. ge It is only valid in page mode If the value specified is beyond the page boundary the command is ignored X and Y refers to the current active orientation specified by the ESC t command and is not same as the page definition of X and Y The X and Y positions are in dots Y Y 256 Vi dots from the current Y X Xp 256 Xi dots from the current X You can also use the ESC J ESC M ESC d and ESC e commands to position the print on the page Rev C Page 121 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Function Set Page Mode Entry Position Legacy Support ASCII ESC 0 lt X_ gt lt XKy gt lt Y_ gt lt Yy gt lt F gt Hexadecimal 1BH 6FH lt X gt lt Xy gt lt Y gt lt Yy gt lt F gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 111 gt lt X_ gt lt Xy gt lt Y_ gt lt Yy gt lt F gt IPCL None EPOS ESC W Description This command sets the horizontal and vertical entry position to anywhere on the page It is only valid in page mode If the value specified is beyond the page boundary the command is ignored X and Y refers to the current active orientation specified by the ESC t command and is not same as the page definition of X and Y The X and Y positions are in dots Y Y 256 Vi dots from the top X Xw 256 X dots from the left The F parameter is a flag that specifies if this command is an absolute position command or relative to the current position If its value is lt 1 gt the command is processed as a relative po
262. ge Mode Function Cancel Print Data in Page Mode ASCII CAN Hexadecimal 18H Decimal lt 24 gt Description CAN In page mode deletes all the print data in the current printable area 28 07764 Rev C Page 217 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Function Select Page Mode ASCII ESC L Hexadecimal 1BH 4CH Decimal lt 27 gt lt 76 gt Description ESC L Switches from standard mode to page mode and starts the page mode definition Function Set Printing Area in Page Mode ASCII ESC W xL xH yL yH dxL dxH dyL dyH Hexadecimal 1BH 57H xL xH yL yH dxL dxH dyL dyH Decimal lt 27 gt lt 87 gt xL xH yL yH dxL dxH dyL dyH Range O lt xL xH x 256 lt 65535 0 lt xL lt 255 0 lt xH lt 255 0 lt yL yH x 256 lt 65535 0 lt yL lt 255 0 lt yH lt 255 1 lt dxL dxH x 256 lt 65535 0 lt dxL lt 255 0 lt dxH lt 255 1 lt dyL dyH x 256 lt 65535 0 lt dyL lt 255 0 lt dyH lt 255 Description ESC W sets the position and the size of the printing area Horizontal starting position xL XH x 256 x horizontal motion units e Vertical starting position yL yH x 256 x vertical motion units e Horizontal printing area width dxL dxH x 256 x horizontal motion units e Vertical printing area width dyL dyH x 256 x vertical motion units Function Select Standard Mode ASCII ESC S Hexadecimal 1BH 53H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 83 gt Descriptio
263. ght be necessary to supplement a font with special characters like OCR characters To provide this flexibility the Therm 280 has the ability to link up to 8 fonts together When this is done the first font in the link is searched first If the character is not defined the next font in the link is searched This process is continued until the character is found or the last font is searched There are two ways to define a linked font This first is to define a default linked font in the POR INI file If it link font is defined in the POR INI file it will be selected as the default power on font Selecting font 0 will select the linked font provided that a link font is defined It is also possible to dynamically define a linked font This requires that the fonts to be linked be aliased to a font id in the POR INI file Defining a linked font does not necessarily activate it If the linked font was not already active it must be selected by selecting font 0 Font Storage The ITherm 280 supports a Flash file system used to store fonts custom graphic and custom macros A file system interface is provided for this system where the host application may download files In addition TransAct Technologies provides a file loading tool that runs on Windows based systems To allow flexible and easy support for all kinds of fonts fonts are stored in the ITherm 280 printer as a standard font file These files are typically not visible to the user how
264. gned to bring new and unique features and functionality s to a point of sale receipt printer These features are not always compatible with Epson printers Note The Epson emulation does not support Unicode Double Byte or downloaded True Type fonts Differences between Epson TM T90 and iTherm 280 In a few minor ways the operation and programming iTherm 280 is not identical to a TM T90 The following is a summary of key differences Page Mode The page mode in the iTherm 280 operates in the same way as the TM T88 and the TM T90 however the page size can be larger if the ESC POS emulation is selected Undocumented Epson Commands There are a number of undocumented commands in Epson printers Where TransAct is aware of these commands they have been duplicated in the iTherm 280 Printer Real time Status The iTherm 280 Printer is available in serial and parallel versions Epson supports parallel operation through a parallel to serial interface Consequently the response times for the iTherm 280 Printer are generally faster The iTherm 280 Printer implements the IEEE 1284 nibble mode standard If an application requires real time status from the printer the IEEE 1284 bi directional protocol must be used The iTherm 280 Printer does not support byte mode If the iTherm 280 Printer is used in an IEEE 1284 28 07764 Rev C Page 181 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide compliant system byte mode should be an
265. gt lt n gt Set relative print position 205 ESC lt n gt Select international character set 101 102 270 271 272 276 277 278 279 283 284 285 286 287 288 ESC lt n gt Select print mode s 199 ESC lt 0 gt Begin 12 x 12 draft print 96 ESC lt n gt lt n gt Set absolute print position 205 ESC lt n gt lt n gt Set print position to beginning 205 ESC Cancel user defined characters 106 ESC lt n gt Select cancel user defined character set 193 ESC G Begin italics 112 ESC H End italics 112 ESC amp lt y gt lt c1 gt lt c2 gt Define user defined characters 194 ESC lt m gt lt 0 gt lt 0 gt Set horizontal graphics mode 128 ESC lt m gt lt n gt lt n gt Print graphics in mode lt m gt 124 ESC lt m gt lt nl gt lt nh gt lt dl gt lt dk gt Select bit image mode 209 ESC lt m gt lt n gt Reassign graphic mode 124 ESC lt n gt Cancel user defined characters 194 ESC Initialize the printer 163 224 ESC Double wide double high italics 109 ESC C lt n gt Insert Euro character 103 28 07764 ESC P lt n gt Set character pitch 94 279 ESC S Redefine character set 104 ESC T lt np gt lt nj gt Select character code page 101 ESC BEL lt n gt lt n gt lt n3 gt Audio alert control 164 ESC EM B lt n gt Set bar code height 147 ESC EM J lt n gt
266. he ESC H command ends italic print mode Function Turns smoothing on off ASCII GS b lt n gt Hexadecimal 1DH 62H lt n gt Decimal lt 29 gt lt 98 gt lt n gt Description The GS b lt n gt command turns smoothing mode on or off e When the LSB of nis 0 smoothing mode is turned off e When the LSB of nis 1 smoothing mode is turned on 28 07764 Rev C Page 201 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Panel Button Commands Function Enable Disable Paper Feed ASCII ESC c 5 lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 63H 35H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 99 gt lt 53 gt lt n gt Range 0 lt n lt 255 Description The ESC c 5 lt n gt command enables or disables the FEED Button When the least significant bit LSB of lt n gt one the FEED Button is disabled when it is zero the button is enabled To prevent problems caused by accidentally pressing the FEED Button use the command to disable it The FEED Button is temporarily enabled regardless of how the command is set during the wait time set by the GS z 0 command for paper insertion and during the recovery confirmation time Where lt n gt Bit0 1 the FEED Button is disabled Bit 0 0 the button is enabled Page 202 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Paper Sensor Commands Function ASCII Select Paper Sensor s to Stop Printing ESC c 4 lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 63H 34H lt n gt Decimal Range Descriptio
267. her information There is a command that will erase all the files in this partition The partition where files are placed is determined by the three character extension File System commands Function Open File command All ASCII ESC RS O lt Mode gt lt space gt lt Filename 2402 Hexadecimal 1BH 1EH 4FH Decimal lt 27 gt lt 30 gt lt 79 gt Mode Mode of operation r for read or w for write FileName File name from 1 to 30 characters including a three character extension Description The ESC IRSJO command will select and open a file for the selected operation If the file being opened for write exists the existing file will be overwritten Note that only one file may be open for external operations at any one time The Mode and FileName take the following format and must be null terminated r Filename ext lt 0 gt Valid Modes are p Read w Write w Write Append Future enhancement open a RAM file for write Note RAM files capability is an option and not available on all products File Extensions are any three characters The following are predefined and reserved for internal use Extension Partition Definition 0 System 28 07764 Rev C Page 283 ITherm 280 File System iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide 1 User udf 1 Undefined macro type mac 1 Command Macro img 1 Graphic image Internal format bgp
268. hes Note The maximum printable area in the y direction is 2999 203 or 14 78 inches Note Only the used portion of the page is printed That is the page length will only include what actually has print data See illustration below Note The maximum printable area in the x direction is 576 203 or 3 15 YOffset lt OL gt lt Op gt Width lt Wise Wa XOffset lt OL gt lt Op gt Figure 11 Page mode set printable area 28 07764 Rev C Page 117 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide dew Cut to print offset 0 7 in or 18mm Start of page definition Max width is 576 dots Cut point is after bottom most print data Bottom most print data End of page Unused page area definition is not printed Ba Figure 12 Default Page mode printed area Page 118 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Function Set Printed Area in Page Mode Enhanced ASCII ESC SUB W lt XO_ gt lt XOu gt lt lt YOL gt lt YOH gt lt WLi gt lt WH gt lt HL gt lt HH gt Hexadecimal 1BH 1AH 57H lt XO gt lt XOy gt lt lt YOi gt lt YOu gt lt WL gt lt Wa gt lt HL gt lt Hp gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 26 gt lt 87 gt lt XO _ gt lt XOy gt lt lt YOL gt lt YOu gt lt W gt lt Wy gt lt Hi gt lt Hy gt IPCL None EPOS ESC W Description This command is similar Set Print Area in Page Mode command above however it will force the complete page to be printer rather than only what is used It
269. hics Bar Codes Code 39 Code 93 Code 128 Interleaved 2 of 5 UPC A UPC E EAN 8 EAN 13 EAN 14 PDF417 stacked symbology and Codabar WGL4 0 Character set Metal receipt tear off 8 dots mm thermal print head resolution ON OFF button located on front of printer Cable routing strain relief Power Error Paper LEDs Paper feed button Cover open button Settable cash drawer configurations Ithaca Epson or Star Spill proof design vertical main PCB mounting 58 mm or 80 mm paper width factory settable 4 0 inch 101 mm Paper roll diameter Portrait landscape printing under Windows Page mode printing Cover Open sensor Electronic journal capability Internal counters for hours on cuts print lines and errors 100 km print head life 60 million print line printer MCBF excluding knife Strong break away paper cover 1 000 000 cuts cutter life partial cut Buzzer 2 color printing 4 inches per second print speed Character spacing is adjustable from 1 to 30 CPI Typical values will be between 8 and 20 CPI depending on the font selected Values of 13 3 14 86 or 17 3 are typical for each resident font 2 CPI s greater than 16 will not be supported in NLQ fonts Page 22 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Specifications and Requirements Optional Features The following options are available on some of the models Vertical Wall Mount Kit Adjustable paper low OCR TrueType font Chinese GB18030 Fo
270. i P 320BB Appleton RB100 2 3 Appleton GB100 2 3 Appleton BB100 2 3 Generic Black PreHeat Temp This sets the See the section on Head 25 temperature that the pint pre heat later in the head tries to maintain manual Power Supply The printer uses an 80W 60 to 120 Watts 80 internal supply If an external supply is used this adjustment will limit the printer to the power indicated Page Length This options sets the 0 60 lines 40 default form feed page 0 disables the form feed length Cash Drawer CMD The Microline option has ESC BEL two potential cash BEL drawer commands 28 07764 Rev C Page 67 Configuring Your I Therm 280 Printer iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide CD ESC BEL Parm The Microline Emulation Enabled Disabled has the option of using Disabled the ESC BEL command to operate the cash drawer Microline Mode There are three M50 M50 Plus OKI M50 Microline modes ML192 Cash Drawer Time The cash drawer fire 10 to 250 Ms 250 Ms time is adjustable in the Ithaca emulation Cash Drawer Sense The sense of the cash Normal Normal drawer open status can Inverted be reversed External User Store Flag for user store in use In use or configurable Not Settable or configurable If the user store is in use and has data in it it can not be reconfigured Electronic Journal This specifies the 1 to 31 64K blocks 2 amount of external flash available for the e
271. ian fonts are also fixed pitch however Latin character in the font are basically 1 2 the width of the typical Asian character Character Size The character generation engine used in the ITherm 280 internally uses a standard point based system to specify the character size One point is 1 72 of aninch Therefore a 72 point character would form a character suitable to generate one line per inch printing The typical application might refer to a 12 point character This is the character height and not the width The character width typically varies on character by character bases for example the lower case i is much narrower than the upper case W Font selection commands for selecting character sizes in legacy applications are also supported For printers such as the ITherm 280 two or three character sizes are generally predefined with a dot matrix size of 10x24 or 13x24 dots and this fixed size may then be double or tripled to provide larger characters when needed To supply legacy support the ITherm 280 will automatically select the appropriate character size to support the legacy font and character scaling commands In the ITherm 280 the horizontal and vertical point size may be set independently Typically this type of printer would print a tall narrow mono spaced character Tall narrow mono spaced character provides a very readable print with easy column alignment while using less paper than standard type fonts This type of font
272. ical support for assistance 28 07764 Configuring Your I Therm 280 Printer iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Remote Configuration Remote configuration is provided for all printers and is accessed through a series of extended diagnostic and configuration commands The TransAct universal configuration program will allow the configuration to be read edited and written back to the printer It will also allow the configuration of one printer to be recorded and replicated over a number of printers The program is available from TransAct Technical Support or by downloading it from the Internet consult the section On line Technical Support for further details Setting up for Color Paper The iTherm 280 may be configured to print two color thermal paper For good print quality the printer should be configured to print the paper being used If the paper you are using is included in the list of papers displayed during printer configuration that configuration should be used If not the printer should be set to Generic Color If this does not produce acceptable print quality you may select Custom Color Custom Color When using Custom Color start with a read setting of about 0 12 mJ sq mm and a black energy of 0 24 mJ sq mm First adjust the black level to produce acceptable black print DO NOT EXCEED 0 40 mJ sq mm or the paper may start to stick to the print head and cause paper jams Setting the Black energy too high will also sl
273. ill accept any of these values Where lt m gt 1 or 49 Selects Hex Dump mode You must press the Button to exit this mode 2 or 50 Selects Printer Configuration print out 3 or 51 Selects Rolling ASCII test pattern You must press Button to exit this mode Function Print counter ASCII GS c Hexadecimal 1DH 63H Decimal lt 29 gt lt 99 gt Description Sets the serial counter value in the print buffer and increments or decrements the counter value e After setting the current counter value in the print buffer as print data a character string the printer counts up or down based on the count mode set Function Initialize maintenance counter ASCII GS g 0 m nl nh Hexadecimal 1DH 67H 30H Decimal lt 29 gt lt 103 gt lt 48 gt Description Initializes the resettable maintenance counter to 0 e nl nh specifies the maintenance counter number as nl nh x 256 Counter number Counter Unit Decimal Number of line feeds Roll paper 15 21 Number of energizing head Roll paper 32 50 Number of autocutter operation 46 70 Print operation time e Frequent write command executions by this command may damage the NV memory Therefore it is recommended to write to the NV memory no more than 10 times a day e While processing this command the printer is BUSY while writing data to the NV counter memory and stops receiving data Therefore it is prohibited to transmit data including the real time commands dur
274. imal Function Response Where Page 178 lt 5 gt lt 22 gt The ENQ lt 22 gt command reports on the error status ACK lt 22 gt lt n gt lt r gt lt 22 gt is the echo of the command ID lt n gt isthe number of return bytes 40 28H to prevent confusion with XON XOFF lt r gt Bit status as follows bit 0 Cover is open bit 1 Receipt Paper is Low bit 2 Receipt paper is out bit 3 Ink is Low This is set if either cartridge is low bit 4 Either or Both Cartridges are removed bit 5 The Auto Cutter has faulted bit 6 1 always bit 7 An serious error has occurred Note 1 If bit 7 is set a serious error has occurred The printer is not able to recover from type of error without operator intervention If bit 7 is set without bit 5 Auto cutter fault then the print carriage has faulted which is probably caused by a paper jam or a component failure The host system may issue an ENQ lt 10 gt Reset Request command to attempt to recover The Reset Request will reset the printer to an initial power up state All data will be lost Note 2 When a serious error occurs bit 7 set the printer enters a static state Status responses will reflect the state of the printer when the error occurred Note 3 For this status request to function during a serious error the Buffer Full Only off line option should be selected Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming C
275. in the print buffer and feeds lt n gt lines The amount of paper fed per line is based on the value set using the line spacing command The maximum paper feed amount is 40 inches The default setting of the paper feed amount is 1 6 inch Print and Reverse Feed lt n gt Lines ESC e lt n gt 1BH 65H lt n gt lt 27 gt lt 101 gt lt n gt Osns255 The ESC e lt n gt command prints the data in the print buffer and feeds lt n gt lines in the reverse direction The amount of paper fed per line is based on the value set using the line spacing command The maximum reverse paper feed amount is 48 144 inch The default setting of the paper feed amount is 1 6 inch Rev C Page 191 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Page 192 Print and Feed Paper ESC J lt n gt 1BH 4AH lt n gt lt 27 gt lt 74 gt lt n gt Osns255 The ESC J lt n gt command prints the data in the print buffer and feeds the paper n x 1 144 inches which means that the printer can feed the paper in half dot units The command is used to temporarily feed a specific length without changing the line spacing set by other commands Print and Reverse Feed lt n gt Lines ESC K lt n gt 1BH 4BH lt n gt lt 27 gt lt 75 gt lt n gt Osnxs48 The E
276. ine control over character size two commands are available one of which specifies the size in points and the other of which specifies the size in 4 point increments If the font is a stroke font the boldness of the characters is controlled through variations in individual stroke width Internal Fonts The ITherm 280 is provided by default with a standard WGL4 outline based font and optionally with an additional GB18030 stroke based font Additional user defined outline or stroke fonts may be used as required The default font provided with the ITherm 280 is called Andale Mono Regular from Monotype This is a fixed pitch font that produces good results when compared to legacy bitmap fonts As another alternative the printer may be ordered with a variable pitch font which will allow variable pitch printing Character Cache The ITherm 280 supports a high speed character cache that can cache character bitmaps outlines tiles or bands of characters The caching technique is based on a least recently used LRU algorithm The Cache contains an entry for each size of character used The amount of space in the cache used by each character is dependant on the size of the character At power up the character cache is empty The first ticket will require that all characters to be printed be generated from the vector data This will typically make the first ticket slightly slower than subsequent tickets It is also possible to define a use
277. ine how the strobe busy and acknowledged signals operate In normal mode the printer follows the standard Centronics parallel port conventions With Options 1 and 3 the acknowledged and busy signals change simultaneously which is sometimes referred to as ack after busy Options 2 and 3 force busy high on the rising edge of the strobe which is sometimes referred to as busy while strobe timing In all cases the data is latched on the rising edge of the strobe In most cases the normal timing mode gives the best results Data x x x x a g STB t2 t4 BUSY ACK ACK while BUSY 15 ACK ACK in BUSY ACK ACK after BUSV Figure 25 Parallel Port ACK Timing Options Legend Time Interval Minimum Maximum ti DATA Setup to STB 0 5 uS t2 STB Width 0 5 uS 500 uS t3 DATA Hold after STB 0 5 uS t4 BUSY Delay after STB 0 0 5 uS t5 ACK Pulse Width 2 5 uS Table 52 Parallel port Timing Note Altered STB timing to take data on the falling edge of STB can be generated as a factory option Printer Buffer Size The iTherm 280 printer has a configurable buffer size It can be set from 40 to 8192 bytes The configurable buffer allows an application to control how far ahead the buffer gets from the printer The smaller the buffer the tighter the control will be It is up to the application developer to select the optimal buffer size
278. ing 124 Query marker 162 Read and return Totals 291 Real Time Status Transmitting 213 real time Request to Printer 227 Recovery form Mechanical Errors 320 Regulatory Compliance 2 Remote Power Control 169 316 Remote Reset 317 Removing Old Interface Cards 39 40 Rotated Font Beginning 97 Select Character Font Table 194 Select Color 107 Select Subscript 111 Select Superscript 111 Self Test Using 58 Serial Device Identification 314 Serial Interface Communication 31 Serial Interface Connector 42 28 07764 Serial port flow control 309 Serial Port Inquire 315 Signal Levels 30 Single Density Graphics Printing 123 Specifications and Requirements 21 Standard APA Graphics 123 Standard Emulation 74 Start up Macro Flagging 131 Status Commands 210 Status Inquire 171 Status Inquire Receipt Paper Low 172 Superscript and Subscript 111 Supplies Ink Cartridges 341 Ordering Cables 341 Ordering Paper 341 Tab Stops Resetting 84 88 Testing the Printer 58 TM T90 and EPOS Command Descriptions 191 TM 90 Command Summary 183 Top of Form Setting 89 Transmit Printer ID 224 Transmit Status 212 Transmits maintenance counter 229 Turns smoothing on off 201 Underline Mode On Off 199 Underline Beginning 108 110 Unidirectional Printing Beginning 125 Upside down Print Mode On Off 200 USB Interface Connector 43 User Defined Character Set Selecting 193 User Defined Character Saving 131
279. ing should be used This command differs from the ESC j command in that all characters are centered on the fixed cell size It the character is too big for the cell it may overlap the previous and next character The character size is not adjusted to fit the cell If d 0 variable spacing is selected NOTE If the current character size is too large for the selected spacing the characters will overlap Variable spacing is recommended Function Set Character spacing in points with adjustment All ASCII ESC J lt d gt Hexadecimal 1BH 2BH 4AH Decimal lt 27 gt lt 43 gt lt 74 gt Range d 0 4 72 The ESC J command will set the character spacing in points where one point is defined as 1 72 of an inch This command will force mono space printing It will override any character spacing set by the set character height and width commands defined above This spacing will be enforced until deactivated by setting the value to 0 or if the set character height and width commands use a 0 for the width indicating proportional spacing should be used This command differs from the ESC command in that if the character is too large for the cell the cell will be expanded in multiples of lt d gt until the character fits If d O variable spacing is selected However note that the cell adjustment flag will remain set and if legacy commands are used they will allow the cell to be expanded NOTE If the current character size is to
280. ing the execution of this command Page 228 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Function Transmit maintenance counter ASCII GS g 2 mnl nh Hexadecimal 1DH 67H 32H Decimal lt 29 gt lt 103 gt lt 50 gt Description Transmits the value of the specified maintenance counter e nl nh specifies the maintenance counter number as nl nh x 256 Counter number _ Counter Units Kind of counter Hex Decimal 14 20 Number of line feeds roll paper can be reset 14 20 Number of times energizing head roll paper 14 20 Number of autocutter operations 14 20 Printer operation time 14 20 Number of line feeds roll paper cumulative 14 20 Number of times energizing head roll paper 14 20 Number of autocutter operations 14 20 Printer operation time e The contents of the maintenance counter are as follows Hexadecima Decimal Amount of data Header 5FH 95 1 byte Data 30H 39H 48 57 1 10 bytes NUL 00H 0 1 byte e During the transmission of block data values in the maintenance counter the printer ignores the real time commands Also the printer does not transmit ASB even when the ASB is enabled Therefore the user cannot confirm changes in the printer status during these periods e The counter values may be different from the actual counts depending on time differences at power off or the occurrence of an error 28 07764 Rev C Pag
281. ings light down and right f002 fl ligature 2510 box drawings light down and left fb01 Fi ligature 2514 box drawings light up and right fb02 FI ligature 2518 box drawings light up and left 251c box drawings light vertical and right Note This information is based on the Microsoft s Tvpographv web page Page 330 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Appendix Appendix E GB18030 Character Addresses There are 28575 Characters in this set UNICODE CHARACTER 0070 LATIN SMALL LETTER P 0020 SPACE 0071 LATIN SMALL LETTER Q 0021 EXCLAMATION MARK 0072 LATIN SMALL LETTER R 0022 QUOTATION MARK 0073 LATIN SMALL LETTER S 0023 NUMBER SIGN 0074 LATIN SMALL LETTER T 0024 DOLLAR SIGN 0075 LATIN SMALL LETTER U 0025 PERCENT SIGN 0076 LATIN SMALL LETTER V 0026 AMPERSAND 0077 LATIN SMALL LETTER W 0027 APOSTROPHE 0078 LATIN SMALL LETTER X 0028 LEFT PARENTHESIS 0079 LATIN SMALL LETTER Y 0029 RIGHT PARENTHESIS 007A LATIN SMALL LETTER Z 002A ASTERISK 007B LEFT CURLY BRACKET 002B PLUS SIGN 007C VERTICAL LINE 002C COMMA 007D RIGHT CURLY BRACKET
282. inter The cable can introduce significant signal degeneration and skew The data must be valid before the strobe signal is asserted and remain so until the strobe is removed A 500 nanosecond setup and hold time is required by the printer The following chart illustrates parallel port timing INIT lt Rdly Pin 16 Data Data DATA Pins 2 9 Dstu K gt lt Dhd Sdly K Pin 10 Ahld K Rdly Approx 2 seconds Bhid Approx 5 uS Dstu 500 nS Min Ahld Approx 5 uS Dhid 500 nS Min Sdly 3 uS Min Tstb 1 uS Min Tcycle 200 280 uS Typ Figure 24 Parallel port Data Timing To implement flow control the busy signal is asserted by the printer outside the normal data transfer sequence The busy signal has several uses but it always indicates that the printer cannot accept information The busy signal may happen at any time and may not adhere to the above timing chart in all cases It is up to the host s parallel port driver to handle all possible busy states It is important that the host driver does not hang up if it takes some time for an acknowledged ACK response to a strobe signal Standard personal computer parallel port hardware implements an interrupt on the ACK signal to make flow control easier Page 304 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Communications Some systems may wish to change the details of how the strobe busy and acknowledged signals interact The parallel port option features def
283. interface is contact the cash drawer vendor for more information If you find that the cash drawer does not match the printer you may change the printer s cash drawer interface configuration If the cash drawer interface no longer matches the label on the printer please remove the label Install the new interface card 1 Slide the interface card into the printer Make sure the interface card sits flush with the printer The retaining screws should also line up with the mounting holes 2 Install the retaining screws 3 Connect the communications interface card and any cash drawer cables 4 Turn over the printer and reconnect the power Configuring the Cash Drawer Interface CD interface drawing not yet available Figure 3 Cash Drawer Selection The cash drawer connector may be connected to one of three internal connectors on the controller board To access the internal connector you must first remove the interface adapter Removing the interface card Unplug the printer Turn over the printer Take care not to allow the cover to open or the paper to fall Disconnect the current communications and cash drawer cables Remove the interface retaining screw2 Slide the interface card towards the back of the printer and remove it O1 ON Reconfigure the cash drawer 1 Slide the cash drawer socket out of the slot in the frame 2 Unplug the socket harness from the main circuit board 3 Plug the harness into the connector for the desired
284. ion nn 341 Page 10 Rev C 28 07764 Introducing your iTherm 280 Printer 28 07764 Rev C Page 11 This page intentionally left blank Page 12 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide About Your iTherm 280 Printer About your iTherm 280 Printer The Ithaca iTherm 280 printer represents the very latest technology for use for thermal receipt printing for point of sale and retail environments It builds upon the architecture of Ithaca s proven thermal printers together with a host of features specifically designed to improve the performance of your receipt printing applications including Crisp clear receipt printing in either one or two colors Fast 8 inches per second print speed Rugged spill resistant cover Large 4 inch paper roll capacity with drop in loading Protected internal power supply Ethernet and USB interfaces Wireless option for reduced cable clutter Application controllable buzzer Configurable cash drawer functionality The iTherm 280 also offers a wide range of programmable features including color and font control APA graphics support bar codes and support for over 60 language character sets These features let you quickly and easily integrate more layout and printing options than ever while giving you the reliability durability and uptime you have come to expect from Ithaca printers 28 07764 Rev C Page 13 About Your iTherm 280 Printer iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide
285. ion 28 07764 Set Horizontal Tab Positions ESC D lt ny gt lt n gt NUL 1BH 44H lt n gt lt Nk gt 00 lt 27 gt lt 68 gt lt N gt lt Nk gt lt 0 gt 1 lt n lt 255 0 lt k lt 32 The ESC D lt n gt lt n NUL command sets the horizontal tab positions lt n gt specifies the column number for setting a horizontal tab position The command deletes any previously set horizontal tab positions Up to 32 tab positions can be set The default tab positions are at intervals of eight characters for 7 x 9 font Set Left Margin GSL lt nN gt lt Np gt 1DH 4CH lt n gt lt Nnp gt lt 29 gt lt 76 gt lt N gt lt Np gt 0 lt ns 255 O lt n lt 255 The GS L lt n gt lt n gt command sets the left margin using n and nh The left margin is set to n n x 256 x horizontal motion unit from the beginning of the line In standard mode the command is enabled only when input at the beginning of a line In page mode an internal flag is activated and the command is enabled when the printer returns to standard mode Set Printing Area Width GS W lt n gt lt np gt 1DH 57H lt n gt lt n gt lt 29 gt lt 87 gt lt N gt lt Np gt 0 lt ns 255 O lt n lt 255 The printing area width is set to ni Nna x 256 x horizontal motion unit from the left margin In standard mode the command is enabled only when input at the beginning of a line In page mode an internal flag is activated
286. ion ASCII Select Justification ESC a lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 61H lt n gt Decimal Range Description Function ASCII lt 27 gt lt 97 gt lt n gt Osns2 48 lt n lt 50 The ESC a lt n gt command aligns all the data in one line to a specified position Left justification is selected when lt n gt 0 or 48 centering is selected when lt n gt 2 or 50 The default setting is left justification lt n gt 0 The command is enabled only when input at the beginning of a line Set Back Space BS Hexadecimal 08H Decimal Description Function ASCII lt 8 gt The BS command moves the print buffer one character width to the left The pointer position cannot be moved to the left of the left margin BS does not cause the buffer to be printed the following data is OR ed with the previous data Set Horizontal Tab HT Hexadecimal 9H Decimal Description Page 206 lt 10 gt The HT command moves the print position to the next horizontal tab position The command is used to align character columns The command is ignored unless another horizontal tab position has been set Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Descript
287. ion to send commands to the printer if desired similar to the legacy DOS approach once used to communicate with a POS printer Window s Operating System Port Port Driver Hardware POS Application POSPrinter ocx Parallel ActiveX Control OR Printer USB Driver OR Eternet Figure 9 POSPrinter OCX When to use the POSPrinter OCX When the application writer wants complete control of what is sent to the printer The application must take the responsibility of sending the correct codes to the printer as well as detecting error conditions and graceful recovery from error situations When not to use the POSPrinter OCX When you do not want to deal with the low level commands sent to the printer 28 07764 Rev C Page 51 Setup Procedures iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Where to get more information Additional information about Driver and support programs are available for your Transact Sales representative from Transact customer support or from the TransAct Technologies Web site Page 52 Rev C 28 07764 chapter 4 How to Operate the iTherm 280 Printer 28 07764 Rev C Page 53 This page intentionally left blank Page 54 Rev C 28 07764 How to Operate the ITherm 280 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide How to Operate the iTherm 280 Printer Your iTherm 280 printer contains two buttons and three LED indicator lights In addition to power control and feeding paper these two buttons can be used to
288. ion version of UPC The printer requires that the first digit is zero for number system zero If it is not zero the bar code is not printed The printer does the compression based on the compression rules for UPC E prints an UPC bar code based on the 11 digits sent to it and generates the check digit If fewer than 11 digits are sent the remaining digits will be zeros The printer prints an UPC that is about 130 the size of the UPC nominal standard which provides optimal readability EAN 13 EAN 13 is a fixed length numeric continuous code that employs four element widths The printer supports EAN 13 which is a superset of UPC that encodes 12 digits Typically the format starts with a number set digit which defines how the next six digits are encoded The next five digits have fixed encoding The last is a check digit The printer prints an EAN 13 bar code with the 12 digits sent to it and generates the check digit If fewer than 12 digits are sent the remaining digits will be zeros The printer prints an EAN 13 bar code that is about 130 the size of the nominal standard which provides optimal readability EAN 8 EAN 8 is a fixed length numeric continuous code that employs four element widths The printer supports EAN 8 which is a superset of UPC that encodes seven digits The printer prints an EAN 8 bar code with the seven digits sent to it and generates the check digit If fewer than seven digits are sent the remaining digits will be
289. is automatically returned to the host If the printer is configured for parallel IEEE 1284 operation the HOST must initiate a reverse channel request to return the status Serial and USB Mode Inquire All inquire ENQ commands require a response from the printer During serial operation all inquire commands are responded to by an acknowledged ACK or not acknowledged NAK the command ID and in some cases status Most status responses sequences contain a length field to help decode and separate responses In general the printer should be configured for Buffer Full Only off line operation if inquire commands are used This prevents the printer from using flow control for anything but buffer full The programmer must take on the responsibility for assuring that inquire commands are used to maintain status of the printer The printer always accepts serial data even when it is off line The printer has reserve buffer space that allows additional information to be received even if the printer is signaling buffer full or off line Because inquire commands are processed before they go into the buffer the printer responds even when it is busy printing In serial mode the response to an inquiry should be received by the host before another inquire command is issued to the printer When the printer receives an inquiry it generates a response If inquiries are sent to the printer too quickly the printer spends all of its time responding and do
290. is greater Please prepare the printer being returned for repair as follows Pack the printer to be returned in the original packing material Packing material may be purchased from TransAct s Ithaca Facility Do not return any accessories unless asked to do so by a support technician Write the RMA number clearly on the outside of the box Service Programs TransAct Technologies Incorporated has a full service organization to meet your printer service and repair requirements If your printer needs service please contact your service provider first If any problems still persist you can directly contact the Ithaca facility s Technical Support Department at 607 257 8901 or 877 7ithaca for a return authorization International customers should contact your distributor for services TransAct offers the following service programs to meet your needs Extended Warranty Depot Repair Maintenance Contract Internet Support Sales Support To order supplies receive information about other Ithaca products or obtain information about your warranty contact our Sales Department at the contact telephone or fax numbers listed below To receive information on International distribution visit our web site at www transact tech com Contact I nformation TransAct Technologies Incorporated Ithaca Facility 20 Bomax Drive Ithaca NY 14850 USA Telephone 877 7ithaca or 607 257 8901 Main fax 607 257 8922 Page 16 Rev C 28 07764 iThe
291. is sometimes referred to as a condensed font Selecting Character Size The ITherm 280 provides two ways to specify character size The legacy or classic font selection method is based on dot matrix size The second method is based on the standard type points system The advantage of the type point system is that the print produced by the printer will match what is displayed by the host system as both use the same system for describing the characters produced Legacy or Classic Method With the classic method the application selects a character size and then sets the character spacing by adding or removing dot spaces between the characters Using the scaled font the Therm 280 provides 3 basic predefined character sizes The smallest is a 10x24 dot like font and is typically printed in pitches from 16 to 20 characters per inch CPI The next larger font is 13 x 24 dot like and is typically printed in pitches from 14 to 16 CPI The largest font is 14 x 24 dot like font and is typically printed at pitches from 10 to 14 CPI The ITherm 280 always prints at 203 dots per inch dpi and always uses the scalable font to form characters The resulting characters are not necessarily exactly the dot size indicated but 6 Characters are dot like because they are not guaranteed to be exactly at an exact dot equivalent They are spaced in a fixed character cell that provides equivalent spacing and alignment as a fixed character size however the act
292. ithaca a product of TRANSACT iTherm 280 I nternational Version Programmer s Guide PN 28 07764 Rev C April 2009 This page intentionally left blank Change History Rev A Initial Release Rev B Sept 2007 Added Periodic status back Added user defined code page description Added double byte code page support Rev C April 2009 Revised Page mode section Added several internal code pages Added Multi bvte Code page support 28 07764 Rev C Page 1 Federal Communications Commission Radio Frequency Interference Statement The iTherm 280 Printer complies with the limits for a Class A con device in accordance with the specifications in Part 15 of FCC rules These regulations are designed to minimize radio frequency interference during installation however there is no guarantee that radio or television interference will not occur during any particular installation Interference can be determined by turning the equipment off and on while the radio or television is on If the printer causes interference to radio or television reception try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures 1 Reorient the radio or television receiving antenna 2 Relocate the printer with respect to the receiver 3 Plug the printer and receiver into different circuits If necessary the user should consult their dealer or an experienced radio television technician for additional suggestions The user may find the followin
293. ition Function Set Absolute Vertical Print Position in Page Mode ASCII GS Hexadecimal 1DH 24H Decimal lt 29 gt lt 36 gt Description GS sets the absolute vertical print starting position to nL nH x 256 X vertical or horizontal motion units in page mode Function Set Relative Vertical Print Position in page mode ASCII GS lt n gt lt np gt Hexadecimal 1BH 5CH lt n gt lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 92 gt lt N gt lt Np gt Range 0 lt n lt 255 0 lt Nh lt 255 Description The GS lt n gt lt n gt command sets the print starting position based on the current position and the distance from the current position to n nn x 256 x vertical or horizontal unit Bar Code Commands Function Print Bar Code ASCII GS k lt m gt lt d gt lt dk gt NUL Mode 1 lt m gt between 0 and 6 Hexadecimal 1DH 6BH lt m gt lt d gt lt d gt 00 Decimal lt 29 gt lt 107 gt lt m gt lt d gt lt d gt 0 ASCII GS k lt m gt lt n gt lt d gt lt d gt Mode 2 lt m gt between 65 and 73 lt n gt Length of lt d gt Hexadecimal 1DH 6BH lt m gt lt n gt lt d gt lt d gt Decimal lt 29 gt lt 107 gt lt m gt lt n gt lt d gt lt dn gt Range 10 lt m lt 6 k and d depend on the bar code system used 265 lt m lt 73 n and d depend on the bar code system used Description The GS k lt m gt lt d gt lt d gt NUL command selects a bar code system and
294. ive Drive ground signal 2 2 Drawer kick Output Sink Drawer Input Drawer kick Output out drive Drive open close out drive Sink Drive signal 1 signal signal 1 3 Drawer Input Signal ground 24V DC open close signal 4 24V DC 24V DC 24V DC 5 Drawer kick Output Sink Drawer kick Output Sink Drawer kick Output out drive Drive out drive Drive out drive signal 2 signal 1 signal 2 6 Signal Frame Ground Drawer Input Ground Open Close signal Table 6 Cash Drawer Pin Assignment Page 34 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Specifications and Requirements Vertical Wall Mount Kit Option A kit is available as an add on option that allows the iTherm 280 printer to be vertically mounted to a wall It is comprised of a metal mounting bracket that attaches to the base of the printer with two M6 thread cutting screws Additional hardware is required to mount the bracket to the wall The hardware should be installed into wall studs to ensure that the printer mounting meets the following conditions e The mounting to the wall must withstand 4 times the printer weight in downward and outward directions e The kit must include mounting instructions to explain how to meet the load test e The firewall or the outer housing of the printer is maintained between the controller PCB and the mounting wall 28 07764 Rev C Page 35 Setup Procedures 28 07764 Rev C Page 37 This page intentionally left blank Page 38 Rev C 28 07
295. l 1DH 31H lt Name gt OH Decimal lt 29 gt lt 49 gt lt Name gt lt 0 gt Range lt Name gt a 15 byte maximum alphanumeric name to identify the image Description GS 1 deletes a single entry bit image or character set from storage in the nonvolatile memory pool Function Erase all entries from nonvolatile memory EPOS ONLY ASCII GS 5 Hexadecimal 1DH 35H Decimal lt 29 gt lt 53 gt Description GS 5 erases the entire contents of the nonvolatile memory pool and frees up the memory for new entries Note 1 No protection for the GS 5 command exists All user store will be erased 28 07764 Rev C Page 233 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Page 234 Define Single User Defined Bit Ilmage GS xy d d x xy x8 1DH 2AH x y d d x xy x8 lt 29 gt lt 42 gt x y dj d x xy x8 1 lt x lt 255 1 lt y lt 48 0 lt d lt 255 The GS x y di d x xy x 8 command defines a single downloaded bit image using the number of dots specified by x and y in the RAM buffer area volatile memory The number of dots in the horizontal direction is x x 8 The number of dots in the vertical direction is y x 8 If x xy x 8 exceeds the size of the buffer the image is truncated d indicates bit image data and specifies a bit printed to one and not printed to zero After a downloaded bit image is defined it may be saved to the nonvolatile flash storage
296. l Port Plu and Play sisien 307 Setial Ortiz res Ai ae a a ceeded 309 Serial Port Protocol aeran An E N A DA basin ch ena ch NDA Aziz 309 Print Buffer FIOW si aces heceiveds ute hebrerelb a cate heeirawedbiateeieenaeedbetae hese 311 Printer Buffer Sizes je tee OA aie oi ED NA A eet NA A EJ NAT ee 313 Serial Mode Plug and Pavi ii i e i e as kdea e 313 Using DSF desi fri ki ii f sid 313 Serial Device Identification ss a nn nn rna rn nn a aaa tana 314 Serial Port NUI e ren e heath E soe ete aaah 315 Display Pass TALOJN is e ew tend tend pial coeds Patina paler beet ahaa ahead blu ad 316 Remote Power Gontrol lt 2 bii ee bi da A in Gees clan ceeedaacdees cota a iz 316 Remote PrinteriReseti si eed i eed eect E T ide ca EEE EENE NAARAAT ERER 317 Resetin Serial Mode sis ii ai i l tt eee ace eee oes a ac ge Ae eas 317 Reset in Parallel Mode cccccccccccceccceececeeeeeeeecesueueeeeeseeuueeeuaseeeuseeuaueeneeeeaeeenenss 317 Miscellaneous Communication Features ss ss eeennnnzznznnnnzzzznnrnzzzznnrnanzzznzrnenzznznnnna 318 Power cycle Be over viii ha seaieaide sec ina sala eelonteanan etal audlertv eearasanleneane 318 Data Pass through eat f sr Bd ee Oe ee A Mega al eect nee tu 318 Multi drop Gornti alratieiti ai ie iena ee cant aac ete a dot da mk e 318 Off like ACUIVG i ise e ra a a aa da 319 Recovery from Mechanical Errors a 3 ibid ocncdece acct cochcbece Did ba da e dd ae aes 320 Programmer s Notes si sess ib R
297. l Width Where If Font 0 Use Linkfont else 1 4 above If Font is 100 or greater use BMFont Font 100 BMFonts only used Width Horizontal and Vertical are in 8th points Width in Dots Epsonl 0 56 72 10 Epson2 0 64 72 14 PcOS1 0 56 72 10 PcOS2 0 64 72 14 PcOS3 0 80 80 18 PcOS4 0 80 80 20 PCOSOCR 4 80 80 20 omfont There may be up to 8 bitmap fonts Bitmap fonts are fixed sizes and have no options BMFontO chrl0x24 bft BMFontl chr13x24 bft BMFont2 chri5x24 bft BMFont3 chs15x24 bft BMFont4 ocri15x24 bft Fonti through Font99 may be defined and the font number is the alias used by the set font command e g Font23 is selected by doing a select font 23 command Font 0 is reserved for selecting the linked font The printer may contain one default linked font A linked font is a method of allowing the user to replace characters in a standard font with custom characters described in more detail in an earlier section The POR INI file is one way of defining a linked font In the above POR INI file link the link font consists of User TactWGL and the TactGB18030 fonts When a character is to be printed the user font will be searched followed by TactWGL and then the TactGB18030 font The first font containing the character will define the character Bitmap fonts are not recommended they should only be used if an exact bitmap is required Bitmap fonts are not
298. l device functions based on the UPOS specification in a vendor independent manner OPOS can be used on the Microsoft Windows platform It allows access to all the features of a retail device without having to deal with specific device commands It also allows information to be retrieved from the retail device When not to use an OPOS driver When the application is written using the Windows print API and device specific commands are sent directly through the application to the device Page 48 Rev C 28 07764 Setup Procedures iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide USB driver A USB driver is a low level device driver required for USB communication with the printers It is a Windows Plug and Play driver and needs to be installed for USB printers when the printer is initially plugged into the system Window s Operating System OPOS USB Interface USB B Driver Driver fe PRINTER USB Interface Windows Driver Windows USB Interface Print App Figure 7 USB Driver When to use the USB driver A USB driver is needed whenever data is to be sent to or received from the printer using the USB interface It is needed with both the Windows and the OPOS drivers when these drivers use the USB interface as the underlying communication path It is also needed if the application does not use either the OPOS or the Windows driver but needs to communicate directly with the printer using the USB interface When not to use the USB driver
299. le Receipt seen 242 Fig re 1 Sample Receipt Serien katt crete tence a tit 243 Figure 20 Receipt with Qrap NIES iii si e d bal cements 247 Figure 21 Typical POS System si ija bid bie kd a aa et but g a aed 299 Figure 22 Host to Printer LINK ilii ian ib ie e aaniearareh auctor 300 Figure 23 Printer Communications Buffer FIOW L nn nnn nn 301 Figure 24 Parallel port Data TIMINQ rna 304 Figure 25 Parallel Port ACK Timing Options 305 Figure 26 Serial Port Flow Control Using DTR 309 Figure 27 XON XOFF Serial Port Flow Control 310 Tables Table 1 Standard Power Input Requirements sent 26 Table 2 Power Input Requirements with the 24 volt DC Power s 26 Table 3 Paper Grades Monochrome nn 27 Table 4 Parallel Interface Pin outs eee eeeeeeeeaaeeeeeeeeeeeteaaaaaeeeeeeeeeneee 30 Table 5 Serial Interface Pin OUts 31 Table 6 Cash Drawer Pin ASSIQGNMON si 1253 ce iii Nee at wa d ens 34 Table 7 Serial interface pin OUR satis i hha eedetineae ee eee 42 Table 8 Parallel interface pin Out 42 Table 9 Error Blink COdGS ta bi ate facts on e tl ae ote ae ie aie hl hela 57 Table 10 Character PGi ie ia i e aa 94 Table 11 Inter characiet Spatinigi sies sakaf d sa 95 Table 12 Language Table IDS ii istint ta bera ae caereudyidee edi een see 101 Table 13 Euro Character Substitution Matrix s nn nnn 103 28 07764 Rev C Page 9 Table 14 Paper Sensor CommandsS 0 nn nn nn nn nnnnnnnrn mnn nn nn
300. lectronic journal or user data space External User Store This indicates the amount of external flash that is available for user 1 to 31 64K Blocks This is not settable It equals 32 the Electronic Journal storage Graphics and setting characters EJ Manual Print This sets whether or not Enabled Enabled the manual electronic Disabled journal options are available EJ Record Numbers This options sets Enabled Enabled weather or not the Disabled record number is printed with journal entries User Store This option sets a lock Unlocked Unlocked on user store that Locked prevents any changes to the data On Off Switch This option disables the Enabled Enabled On Off switch Disabled Audio Alert This option configures Off 50 ms to 1 Second 250 mS the operation of the in 50 mSec steps audio alert Cutter Option This activates or Active Active if the printer is deactivates the auto Inactive equipped with an auto cutter cutter Pre Cut Feed or Tear This option sets how 0 or none to 20 mm 0 Point Adjust much the cut point is adjusted before the auto cut or manual tear off Cutter Speed This option adjusts the 130 to 80 where 80 is 100 auto cutter speed to allow the use of thicker paper the slowest speed Page 68 Rev C Note There are other features that may be configurable It is intended that if you need to change them you will contact TransAct Techn
301. lic small letter io 03c7 Greek small letter chi 0452 Cyrillic small letter dje 03c8 Greek small letter psi 0453 Cyrillic small letter gje 03c9 Greek small letter omega 0454 Cyrillic small letter ukrainian ie 03ca Greek small letter iota with dialytika 0455 Cyrillic small letter dze 03cb Greek small letter upsilon with dialvtika 0456 Cyrillic small letter byelorussian ukrainian i 03cc Greek small letter omicron with tonos 0457 Cyrillic small letter yi 03cd Greek small letter upsilon with tonos 0458 Cyrillic small letter je 03ce Greek small letter omega with tonos 0459 Cyrillic small letter lje 0401 Cyrillic capital letter io 045a Cyrillic small letter nje 0402 Cyrillic capital letter dje 045b Cyrillic small letter tshe 0403 Cyrillic capital letter gje 045c Cyrillic small letter kje 0404 Cyrillic capital letter ukrainian ie 045e Cyrillic small letter short u 0405 Cyrillic capital letter dze 045f Cyrillic small letter dzhe 0406 Cyrillic capital letter bvelorussian ukrainian i 0490 Cyrillic capital letter ghe with upturn 0407 Cyrillic capital letter vi 0491 Cyrillic small letter ghe with upturn 0408 Cyrillic capital letter je 1e80 Latin capital letter w with grave 0409 Cyrillic capital letter lje 1e81 Latin small letter w with grave 040a Cyrillic capital letter nje 1e82 Latin capital letter w with acute 040b Cyrillic capital letter tshe 1e83 Latin small letter w with acute 040c Cyrillic capital letter kje 1e84 Latin capital letter w with diaeresis
302. lity 0x3400 Ox4DFF CJK Unified Ideograph Extension A Post Unicode 2 0 0x4E00 Ox9FA5 CJK Unified Ideographs Ox9FA6 OxABFF Unassigned zone 9FA6 ABFF 0xACOO 0xD7A3 Hangul Syllables OxD7A4 OxD7FF Unassigned zone D7A4 D7FF 0xD800 OxDB7F High Surrogates OxDB80 OxDBFF Private Use High Surrogates OxDCOO OxDFFF Low Surrogates 0xE000 OxF8FF Private Use Area OxF900 OxFAFF CJK Compatibility Ideographs OxFBOO OxFB4F Alphabetic Presentation Forms OxFB50 OxFDFF Arabic Presentation Forms A OxFE20 OxFE2F Combining Half Marks OxFE30 OxFE4F CJK Compatibility Forms OxFE50 OxFE6F Small Form Variants OxFE70 OxFEFF Arabic Presentation Forms B OxFEFF OxFEFF Special OxFFOO OxFFEF Half width and Full width Forms OxFFFO OxFFFF Specials OxFFFO OxFFFD Specials OxFFFE OxFFFF Not character codes Page 326 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Appendix Appendix D WGL4 0 Character Addresses There are 654 Characters in this set Unicode Character 0070 Latin small letter p 0020 space 0071 Latin small letter q 0021 exclamation mark 0072 Latin small letter r 0022 quotation mark 0073 Latin small letter s 0023 number sign 0074 Latin s
303. ll allow the printer to replace an Axiohm thermal print in most applications Note that the iTherm 280 does not support the printer configuration commands provided in the A793 Printer The iTherm 280 should be configured through the keypad or with the TransAct configuration program Ithaca Microline Emulation The iTherm 280 printer supports several Microline emulations These emulations allow the iTherm 280 Printer to replace some older Ithaca M50 printers with Microline commands This emulation is not documented here Refer to our Microline Emulation Programmer s Guide 12 03244 for more information Application Development To aid application development several chapters in this manual are designed to help the programmer understand the iTherm 280 Printer The next chapter provides a detailed description of each of the commands Subsequent chapters provide explanations of ESC POS is a registered trademark of the Seiko Epson Corporation Page 74 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes how the printer works including a description of the internal print buffer communications link and interaction between the host computer and printer Ithaca Control Codes and Commands Throughout this Programmer s Guide charts and tables list commands and features In most cases the charts cross reference the page that describes the command Code summary charts arranged by code and function are provided
304. lt 0 gt Not used fixed to Off 5 6 Undefined 7 Off 00H lt 0 gt Not used fixed to Off Page 212 Table 33 Paper Sensor Status lt n gt 1 49 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Bit Off On Hex Decimal Status 0 Off 00H lt 0 gt Drawer kick out connector pin 3 low On 01H lt 1 gt Drawer kick out connector pin 3 high 1 3 Undefined 4 Off 00H lt 0 gt Not used fixed to Off 5 6 Undefined 7 Off 00H lt 0 gt Not used fixed to Off Table 34 Drawer Kick out Connector Status lt n gt 2 50 Function Transmit Real Time Status ASCII DLE EOT lt n gt Hexadecimal 10H 04H lt n gt Decimal lt 16 gt lt 4 gt lt n gt Range 1 lt n lt 4 Description occurs No error occurred lt gt Function The DLE EOT lt n gt command transmits the specified status in real time The command is executed if the printer is off line the print buffer is full or an error If the printer goes off line due to a paper end condition bit 5 of the printer status waiting for on line recovery is on from the time the paper roll is inserted to the time the printer goes on line See the GS z 0 command for details of the on line recovery wait time The paper roll low sensor is an option If the printer does not have a paper low sensor bits 2 and 3 of the paper roll sensor status will always be Paper adequate Bit 3 of the second byt
305. lt 27 gt lt 87 gt lt n gt IPCL amp FD n 1 amp FS n 0 amp FHA n 3 Note Single wide double high mode is not available in IPCL mode EPOS ESC lt n gt Description The ESC W lt n gt command controls multi line double wide or double high mode where n specifies the mode n 0 is standard single wide and single high n 1 begins double wide n 2 begins double high and n 3 begins double wide double high Note The ESC W lt n gt command does not affect line spacing Note In EPOS mode ESC lt n gt performs a similar function however near letter quality NLQ is not available Where n Bits 76543210 Function l Underline l Double wide Double high x Font 0 draft 1 large draft Page 108 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes ESC Set print style double wide double high italic control ASCII ESC EOT NUL lt k gt NUL lt n gt lt m gt Hexadecimal 1BH 5BH 40H 04H 00H lt k gt 00H lt n gt lt m gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 91 gt lt 64 gt lt 04 gt lt 0 gt lt K gt lt 0 gt lt n gt lt m gt IPCL amp DH Double high double wide and double space amp SH Single high single wide and single space Also see ESC W above Description The ESC EOT NUL lt k gt NUL lt n gt lt m gt command sets double wide double high and italic print mode
306. lt dn gt Where the data length is nH 256 nL The length is limited to be from 1 to 2048 characters To control the formation of the barcode the x and y aspect ratios rows and columns and error correction levels can be altered Function PDF 417 bar code control ASCII ESC EM E lt f gt lt v gt Hexadecimal 1BH 19H 45H lt f gt lt v gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 25 gt lt 69 gt lt f gt lt v gt IPCL None EPOS None Description This command alters the way PDF 417 barcodes are generated and printed Where f Feature to control and v the value of the feature f C 43H 67 Set encoding columns v 1 30 0 sets to auto f R 52H 82 Set encoding rows v 3 90 0 sets to auto f X 58H 88 Set encoding X aspect v 2 6 3 is default f Y 59H 89 Set encoding Y aspect v 2 32 9 is default f E 45H 69 Set error correction level If v between 1 and 40 it is interpreted as a percentage of the data If v is between 48 and 56 it is set to a specific level of 0 to 8 If v 0 it will return it to the default setting of 10 Typically the row and columns should be set to 0 so that auto encoding will be used The X and Y aspect represent the number of dots horizontally and vertically to form the smallest image element Values of 2 for each produce very small elements and is probably too small unless good paper is used The defaults are 3 by 9 which produce easily readable barcodes Error correcting levels
307. m 280 Printer supports many code pages The following code pages are supported Refer to Appendix A for a list of supported code page 28 07764 Rev C Page 101 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Note The code page field is a 16 bit field that is a function of the code page numbers lt np gt and lt n gt e g lt n gt 256 lt n gt For example 1 256 181 437 For the IPCL command the page is specified in ASCII as a 4 byte field Note If the code page is not found in the internal translation the code page requested is translated into a code page file name and if a user defined file is found it will be used as the code page definition Function Select character code page by name All ASCII ESC C Codepage CPM lt 0 gt Hexadecimal 1BH 2BH 43H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 43 gt lt 67 gt CodePage File name from 5 to 30 characters Description The ESC C command will select and read a code page encoding file If the file does not exist the current code page will be selected If the code page definition is not complete only the character locations defined by the file will be effected Note Code page translations only occur in ASCII mode This command has no effect in Unicode mode ESC Print control character ASCII ESC lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 5EH lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 94 gt lt n gt IPCL amp CC lt m1 gt lt m2 gt lt m3 gt EPOS ESC lt n gt Descriptio
308. mall letter iota with tonos 0439 Cyrillic small letter short i 03b0 Greek small letter upsilon with dialytika and tonos 043a Cyrillic small letter ka 03b1 Greek small letter alpha 043b Cyrillic small letter el 03b2 Greek small letter beta 043c Cyrillic small letter em 03b3 Greek small letter gamma 043d Cyrillic small letter en 03b4 Greek small letter delta 043e Cyrillic small letter o 03b5 Greek small letter epsilon 043f Cyrillic small letter pe 03b6 Greek small letter zeta 0440 Cyrillic small letter er 03b7 Greek small letter eta 0441 Cyrillic small letter es 03b8 Greek small letter theta 0442 Cyrillic small letter te 03b9 Greek small letter iota 0443 Cyrillic small letter u 03ba Greek small letter kappa 0444 Cyrillic small letter ef 03bb Greek small letter lamda 0445 Cyrillic small letter ha 03bc Greek small letter mu 0446 Cyrillic small letter tse 03bd Greek small letter nu 0447 Cyrillic small letter che 03be Greek small letter xi 0448 Cyrillic small letter sha O3bf Greek small letter omicron 0449 Cyrillic small letter shcha 03c0 Greek small letter pi 044a Cyrillic small letter hard sign 03c1 Greek small letter rho 044b Cyrillic small letter veru 03c2 Greek small letter final sigma 044c Cyrillic small letter soft sign 03c3 Greek small letter sigma 044d Cyrillic small letter e 03c4 Greek small letter tau 044e Cyrillic small letter vu 03c5 Greek small letter upsilon 044f Cyrillic small letter ya 03c6 Greek small letter phi 0451 Cyril
309. mall letter t 0024 dollar sign 0075 Latin small letter u 0025 percent sign 0076 Latin small letter v 0026 ampersand 0077 Latin small letter w 0027 apostrophe 0078 Latin small letter x 0028 left parenthesis 0079 Latin small letter y 0029 right parenthesis 007a Latin small letter z 002a asterisk 007b eft curly bracket 002b plus sign 007c vertical line 002c comma 007d right curly bracket 002d hyphen minus 007e ilde 002e period 00a0 no break space 002f slash 00a1 inverted exclamation mark 0030 digit zero 00a2 cent sign 0031 digit one 00a3 pound sign 0032 digit two 00a4 currency sign 0033 digit three 00a5 yen sign 0034 digit four 00a6 broken bar 0035 digit five 00a7 section sign 0036 digit six 00a8 diaeresis 0037 digit seven 00a9 copyright sign 0038 digit eight 00aa feminine ordinal indicator 0039 digit nine 00ab left guillemet 003a colon 00ac not sign 003b semicolon 00ad soft hyphen 003c less than sign 00ae registered trade mark sign 003d equals sign OOaf macron overline 003e greater than sign 00b0 degree sign 003f question mark 00b1 plus minus sign 0040 commercial at 00b2 superscript two 0041 Latin capital letter a 00b3 superscript three 0042 Latin capital letter b 00b4 acute accent 0043 Latin capital letter c 00b5 micro sign 0044 Latin capital letter d 00b6 paragraph sign 0045 Latin capital letter e 00b7 middle dot kana conjoctive 0046 Latin capital letter f 00b8 cedilla 0047 Latin capital letter g 00b9 superscript one 0048 Latin capital l
310. mmand Name Page FF OCH Print and return to standard mode 89 CAN 18H Cancel print data in page mode 217 ESC FF 1BH OCH Print data in page mode 220 ESC L 1BH 4CH Select Page mode 218 ESC S 1BH 53H Switches from page mode to standard 218 mode ESC T 1BH 54H Select print direction in page mode 218 ESC W 1BH 57H Set printing area in page mode 218 GS 1DH 24H Set absolute vertical print position in page 220 mode GS 1DH 5CH Set relative vertical print position in page 220 mode Command Name Page Gs 1DH 2AH Define single user defined bit image 234 GS 1DH 2FH Print single user defined bit image 235 Table 16 Supported TM T90 Commands 28 07764 Rev C Page 185 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Undocumented TM T88 Commands Command Name ESC Auto Cut 223 ESC m Auto Cut 223 ESC u Transmit Peripheral Device Status 214 ESC v Transmit Paper status 215 Table 17 Undocumented TM T90 Commands Page 186 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Supported TM T90 Commands Command Name Page LF OAH Print and line feed 191 CR ODH Print and carriage return 191 ESC d 1BH 64H Print and feed lt n gt lines 191 ESC e 1BH 65H Print and reverse feed lt n gt lines 191 ESC J 1BH 4AH Print and feed paper lt n gt vertical units 192 ESC K 1BH 4BH Print and reverse fee
311. mmand interactions There are interactions between some of the following commands and some of the legacy font selection commands These interactions need to be considered when developing a application for this printer This printer uses a font rendering engine that relies on the font to provide character size and spacing information Unfortunately legacy applications assume all characters are the same and that the character size and spacing is fixed To force the characters rendered by the font rendering engine to conform to legacy modes of operation some post generation processing is performed to reposition the characters into a fixed size cell The set minimum character height and width ESC P and ESC p the set character spacing ESC I ESC i ESC J and ESC j the set minimum line spacing ESC V and ESC v and the legacy font select and spacing commands all interact The set minimum character height and width ESC P and ESC p commands set character size but in two different ways In most systems a character point size refers only to the line spacing and indirectly to the character height That is also true The vertical character height referenced in these commands refer to the character height including the white space between lines The horizontal character width is defined by the font Normally only the character height would be specified and the width would be defined by the font and that s how th
312. mmands Command Name Page ESC c4 1BH 63H 34H Select paper sensor s to stop printing 203 ESC c 3 1BH 63H 33H Select paper sensor s to output paper out 204 signals ESC c 1 1BH 63H Select paper types for command settings 217 31H ESC c0 1BH 63H Select paper types for printing 216 30H Command Name Page BS 08H Set back space 206 HT 09H Set horizontal tab positions 206 ESC 1BH 24H Set absolute print position 205 ESC lt 1BH 3CH Return home 208 ESC D 1BH 44H Set horizontal tab positions 207 ESC Q 1BH 51H Set right margin in characters 208 ESC U 1BH 55H Turn on off unidirectional printing mode 207 ESC 1BH 5CH Set relative print position 205 ESC a 1BH 61H Select justification 206 ESC 1BH 6CH Set left right margin in characters 208 GSL 1DH 4CH Set left margin 207 GST 1DH 54H Set print position to the beginning of the 205 line GS W 1DH 57H Set printing area width 207 Bit image Commands Command Name Page ESC 1BH 2AH Select bit image mode 209 GS v0 1DH 76H 30H Print raster bit image 209 Command Name Page DLE EOT 10H 04H Transmit real time status 213 DLE ENQ 10H 05H Real time status request to printer 227 ESC u 1BH 75H Transmit peripheral status 214 ESC v 1BH 76H Transmit paper status 215 GS a 1DH 61H Enable disable automatic status back 210 ASB GS r 1DH 72H Transmit status 212 Page 188 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s
313. mmediate commands and are not processed until found in the input buffer by the print processor Note 2 Cash Drawer 2 is factory configurable in one of two modes Either pin 2 or 3 is active depending on an internal jumper setting The factory default is pin 3 Cash Drawer 1 is always on pin 2 The cash drawer status is defined as an open circuit for drawer closed ESC v Perform Auto Cut ASCII ESC v Hexadecimal 1BH 76H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 118 gt IPCL amp FC amp PC EPOS ESC i or ESC m Description The ESC v command operated the auto cutter Note The auto cutter is optional If the auto cutter is not installed this command will be ignored ESC Initialize the printer ASCII ESC Hexadecimal 1BH 40H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 64 gt Description The ESC command initializes the printer All settings including character font and line spacing are canceled 28 07764 Rev C Page 163 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide BEL ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description ESC BEL ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Audio alert BEL 07H lt gt amp BL BEL When enabled the BEL command starts the audio alert sequence The default is a single sound lasting the period of time defined by the audio alert setting If the audio alert is off it does not function Configure audio alert ESC BEL lt ni gt lt n2 gt lt n3
314. mode 28 07764 Rev C Page 263 ITherm 280 Unicode and Fonts iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Unicode Encoding Example 3 Byte output Example Hex Character Code FA11 FA 11 Original Hex Code s 11111010 000100001 Converted to Binary 1111 1010 00 0100001 Underlined by section ending of output byte Section A Section B Section C 4 digits 6 digits 6 digits 1110 1111 10 101000 10 010001 3 8bit Binary numbers EF A8 91 3 Hex Bytes to Output lt 239 gt lt 168 gt lt 145 gt 3 decimals to output Page 264 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide ITherm 280 Unicode and Fonts Bitmap Fonts It is possible to use bitmap fonts with the ITherm 280 Printer Bitmap fonts are fixed pitch and are not scalable They will only function as legacy fonts The printer is optionally supplied with 4 legacy bitmap fonts They are in a 10x24 12x24 draft font format and a 16x24 near letter quality format They are defined as follows BMFonto0 chr10x24 bft10 x 24 draft font with typical spacing of 16 characters per inch BMFonti chr12x24 bft12 x 24 draft font with typical spacing of 14 characters per inch BMFont2 chr16x24 bft16 x 24 NLQ font with typical spacing of 12 characters per inch BMFont4 ocr16x24 bft16 x 24 OCR font with typical spacing of 12 characters per inch It is possible to define a custom bitmap font Transact supports a bitmap font compiler that will convert a bitmap font picture file into a compressed
315. n lt 27 gt lt 99 gt lt 52 gt lt n gt Osns255 ESC c 4 nselects whether to stop printing or not when the paper low is detected There are three sensors in the TM 88 or TM 90 that are simulated in the iTherm 280 the paper roll low paper roll end sensor and validation sensor The paper roll low sensor is enabled when either bit O or bit 1 is on The paper roll end sensor is enabled when either bit 2 or bit 3 is on The validation sensor is enabled when either bit 6 or bit 7 is on When a paper low or a paper out is detected printing stops after printing the current line The printer goes off line after printing stops Installing a new roll starts printing again The default setting is n 12 If the paper roll low sensor or paper roll end sensor is disabled and a paper out is detected printing does not stop The printer does not go off line and the Paper Out LED comes on When the validation sensor is enabled and a paper end is detected the printer ejects the paper after printing as much as possible and enters the paper waiting state When the validation sensor is disabled and a paper end is detected the printer does not stop printing and eject the paper It is possible to select multiple sensors to stop printing Then when any sensor detects a paper end printing stops When a paper sensor is enabled with this command printing stops only when the corresponding paper is selected for printing Print sheet can be selected by using ESC c 0
316. n driver status inquire procedure storage buffer and print control mechanism that is using the data The communication port is either the serial port hardware or the parallel port hardware and the associated communication software driver A means for the host to bypass the buffer for status information referred to here as an inquirer processor is also required because the buffer offsets the printer in time from the host The printer is generally behind the host The storage print buffer is a software implemented first in first out FIFO circular buffer It stores information in an asynchronous fashion where information can be placed in it at any rate and retrieved from it at any rate but the information order is not altered All buffers have a finite size and if information is put in faster than it is removed the buffer will overflow To avoid overflow a flow control mechanism is required The print control mechanism is the remainder of the printer hardware and control software It interprets control codes and operates the control panel print head and cash drawer interface Page 300 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Communications The following figure illustrates the four basic parts of printer flow control Printer Communications port ENQ processor Print buffer Print control Serial or parallel Data idi Data connection D ata ata ny Print head Status Status Getting f
317. n ESC S Switches from page mode to standard mode with out printing the page All page definition is lost Function Select Page Mode Entry Direction ASCII ESC T lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 54H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 84 gt Description ESC T Select print direction in page mode This command may also be issued during page definition When issued in page mode it resets the orientation and entry position but does not cause the currently defined image to be erased or printed Where x 0 for standard orientation Direction A x 1 for 270 Rotation Direction B x 2 for 180 Rotation Direction C x 3 for 90 Rotation Direction D Page 218 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Receipt or Inserted Form Initial entry a location A gt gt gt gt gt i U ji v fi v fi l v ji v j i v f i A A i A 1 A i A faa lt lt lt lt lt 6 Function Print and return to standard mode in page mode0 ASCII FF Hexadecimal 0CH Decimal lt 12 gt Description FF In page mode prints the data in the print buffer collectively and returns to standard mode 28 07764 Rev C Page 219 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Function Print data in page mode ASCII ESC FF Hexadecimal 1BH OCH Decimal lt 27 gt lt 12 gt Description ESC FF Prints the page as it is currently defined and reenters page mode without deleting the page defin
318. n The ESC lt n gt command allows characters from zero to 31 codes to be printed During normal operation characters from zero to 31 are control characters The command turns off control code translation for the following character lt n gt can be from zero to 255 ESC Print Unicode character ASCII ESC lt n_ gt lt ny gt Hexadecimal 1BH 22H lt n _ gt lt ny gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 34 gt lt NL gt lt Np gt IPCL amp PU lt m1 gt lt m2 gt lt m3 gt lt m4 gt lt m5 gt EPOS ESC lt n gt lt np gt Description The ESC lt n gt lt ny gt command allows any Unicode character to be directly addressed and inserted into the print data lt n gt lt ny gt can range in value from zero to 65535 ESC C Insert Euro character Page 102 Rev C 2838 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL Description ESC C lt n gt 1BH 5BH 43H lt n gt lt 27 gt lt 91 gt lt 67 gt lt n gt amp EU The ESC C lt n gt command allows an application to replace any character in the currently active character set with the Euro character The character to be replaced is defined by lt n gt For example if the currently active character set is CP 850 multi lingual and OD5H character is to be the Euro character 1BH 5BH 43H OD5H replaces the character at OD5H with the Euro symbol Euro Character Substitution Matrix
319. n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 112 gt lt 52 gt lt n gt Range 0 lt n lt 255 Description The ESC c 4 lt n gt command determines if the printer stops printing when paper low is detected Where lt n gt 0 Printer continues to print with paper low 1 Printer stops printing when paper low is detected Function Paper Error Signal Control ASCII ESC p 3 lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 70H 33H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 112 gt lt 51 gt lt n gt Range 0 lt n lt 255 Description The ESC c 3 lt n gt command controls how the paper error pin on the parallel interface operates Where lt n gt Bit O controls paper low operation If Bit O 1 Paper low will set the paper error pin If Bit 0 O Paper low will not effect the paper error pin Bit 2 controls how paper out effects the paper error pin If Bit 2 1 Paper out will set the paper error pin If Bit 2 0 Paper out will not effect the paper error pin Note The paper out sensor will always stop printing The default setting allows only paper out to control the paper error pin The Epson section has the following description of the enable disable paper feed command Page 236 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Description The ESC c 5 lt n gt command enables or disables the FEED Button When the least significant bit LSB of lt n gt one the FEED Button is disabled when it is zero the button is enabled 28 07764 Rev C Page 237
320. nd Requirements iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide e Use only specified thermal paper If other paper is used print quality head life and cutter life may deteriorate Paper Out A receipt paper out sensor is provided as a standard feature It senses when there is approximately 5 inches length of paper left on the paper roll Paper Low A receipt paper low sensor is provided as an optional feature An operator adjustable paper low assembly will be provided to allow the printer to sense when the paper roll diameter is between 94 to 1 29 inches approximate It is adjustable to compensate for various paper core dimensions Paper Low Adjustment Settings Approximate Paper Remaining Paper Roll Diameter in feet UPPER LIMIT 2 turns counter clockwise 29 1 29 1 turn counter clockwise 23 1 203 FACTORY SETTING 18 1 115 1 turn clockwise 13 1 028 LOW LIMIT 2 turns clockwise 8 5 940 Notes e These measurements are approximate Paper roll used for testing had paper roll core outside diameter of 750 inches and inside diameter is 625 inches Results will varv depending on core O D I D dimensions e Paper roll core should meet or exceed paper width e Results based on thermal paper 0025 inches thick e The receipt printable area is as shown in the following diagram RECEIPT PAPER ROLL PAPER CUT OFF CLLLLLLLLLL LLL LL CLLLLL LL LLL LLL LL l 0 15 Figure 1 Receipt Printing
321. nect the host and the printer Display Pass Through The display pass through feature allows a pole display to be interconnected with the printer The printer is connected to a host system with a special serial cable The host sends serial data to the printer and the printer sends serial data to the pole display The printer does not provide power to the display During normal printer operation no data is passed to the display In pass through mode all received data is passed on to the display USB Interface The USB interface is a Version 1 1 interface that is Version 2 0 compliant The standard USB interface card is implemented through a Standard Series B Receptacle as defined in the USB Specification The printer is self powered and does not draw power from the standard type B USB interface cable The Standard USB Type B connector has the following pin functions Pin Signal 28 07764 Rev C Page 31 Specifications and Requirements iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide 1 Vbus 5 V dc Not used in the iTherm 280 2 Minus data 3 Plus data 4 Ground Note The standard USB interface does not have enough power to run the printer Ethernet 10 Base T adapter An IP addressable 10 Base T Ethernet adapter is available for the iTherm 280 printer It provides for web page configuration and supports bi directional RAW and Telnet interfaces All protocols are implemented to the extent necessary to support printing from Windows platfo
322. nfiguration is during system setup or software update 28 07764 Rev C Page 321 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Appendix Appendix A Internal Code Pages Code Country Code Language Set Decimal nr Hex lt n gt lt n gt Page lt gt USA Slashed 0 0 64 0H 040H USA T 0 0 65 0H 041H 56 British 0 66 0H 042H 67 German 0 67 0H 043H 68 French 0 68 0H 044H 69 Swedish 0 69 0H 045H 70 Danish 0 70 0H 046H 71 Norwegian 0 71 0H 047H 72 Dutch 0 72 0H 048H 73 Italian 0 73 0H 049H 74 French Canadian 0 74 0H 04AH 75 Spanish 0 75 0H 04BH 76 Swedish II 0 76 0H 04CH 77 Swedish III 0 77 0H 04DH 78 Swedish IV 0 78 0H 04EH 79 Turkish 0 79 0H 04FH 80 Swiss 0 80 0H 050H 81 Swiss II 0 81 0H 051H 437 USA 1 181 1H 0B5H 737 Greek 2 225 2H 0E1H 850 Multilingual 3 82 3H 052H 852 East Europe Latin Il 852 3 84 3H 054H 855 Cyrillic 1 855 3 87 3H 057H 857 Turkey 857 3 89 3H 059H 858 Multilingual Euro 3 90 3H 05AH 866 Cyrillic Il 866 3 98 3H 062H 1004 IS08859 3 236 3H 0ECH 1250 Windows 1250 Central Europe 4 226 4H 0E2H 1251 Windows 1251 Cyrillic 4 227 4H 0E3H 1252 Windows 1252 Latin 1 4 228 4H 0E4H 1253 Windows 1253 Greek 4 229 4H 0E5H 1254 Windows 1254 Turkish 4 230 4H 0E6H 1257 Windows 1257 Baltic 4 233 4H 0E9H 28591 ISO8859 1 Latin 1 111 175 6FH AFH 28592 ISO8859 2 Latin 2 111 176 6FH BOH 28593 ISO8859 3 Latin 3 111 177 6FH B1H
323. ng and embedding API Application Programming Interface or the language used to develop applications for devices such as printers In the generic sense the term the API refers to the Windows Operating System API Types of APIs include Windows API Visual Basic API Delphi API and MFC API Page 44 Rev C 28 07764 Setup Procedures iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Getting Started Questions to Ask Most driver software for TransAct Technologies printers fall into one of three main categories e They support or emulate a specific type of communications port for example a USB port driver or a driver to emulate a serial port via an Ethernet interface e They support the industry standard OPOS OLE Point of Sale interface for point of sale printer applications e They support a direct printer interface such as the Windows printer API or low level printer commands The questions below can help clarify which types of drivers may be appropriate for your printer The following section then examines each of the most common types of driver software in detail Do you want to use USB and simulate a communication port The TransAct Virtual Serial TVS USB Driver allows your application to think that it is communicating with a serial port but is actually using the USB link to communicate with the printer This driver should be downloaded and installed when requested as part of the Windows Plug and Play process or may be prein
324. ng whatever means is available to you amp UBLogo amp Begin defining macro Logo amp UGLogo amp End the Definition of Logo amp UMLogo amp Save Macro Logo to nonvolatile memory e A graphic image named Logo should now be stored in the nonvolatile memory e To verify the image is present use the amp UQ amp IPCL command or the PJColor Color Image Converter to print the name and size of the stored images Recall and print stored named graphic image e Send the following text string to the printer using whatever means is available to you amp URLogo amp Run Macro Logo Print the macro Cautions Universal graphics information is stored in the same place as user defined characters and user defined macros If you are using an emulation such as ESC POS that supports macros and or user defined characters universal graphics will compete for space with these functions In addition the amp UFALL amp Erase universal graphics will also erase any user defined graphics and macros If you are using the Ithaca PcOS emulation these commands are identical with the User Store commands except for the terminator character You may change the NUL terminator to amp with amp UT amp if you find the amp easier 28 07764 Rev C Page 251 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide ITherm 280 Color Graphics Universal Color Command Descriptions amp UB lt Name gt amp Begin named universal graphic record IPCL amp UB
325. nk when the paper is low The low sensor is adjustable and the amount of paper remaining is dependent on the adjustment If the PAPER indicator is lit with the error indicator the printer is out of paper in this case the printer stops printing and waits for the paper to be changed Fault Indicators The ERROR indicator is the primary fault indicator and is either always on or blinking if a fault has occurred There are three types of faults Fully recoverable faults Paper out or cover open Semi recoverable faults Head jam Non recoverable faults Component failure Page 56 Rev C 28 07764 How to Operate the ITherm 280 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Fully recoverable and Status A fully recoverable error will restart printing exactly where it stopped when the error occurred Printing will resume after error has been properly addressed A status recoverable error is very similar to a fully recoverable error Additionally status is used to display when the printer consumables may need replacing Semi recoverable A semi recoverable error is determined by whether or not the printer has to be shut off and turned back on while attending to the problem The amount of information lost is dependent on the type of error and the state of the information being processed Non recoverable A non recoverable error produces information loss Error Blink Codes If during normal operation the ERROR indicator is lit and the POWER indicator is blinking
326. nn nt 165 Table 15 Paper Sensor CommandS is sies oo teed vtes tetova cee amare 166 Table 16 Supported TM T90 Commands e nennnnnnnnnnnn mnn nn nn nn nata 185 Table 17 Undocumented TM T90 CommandSs nn nnnnnnnn nn nn n nar nn nn 186 Table 18 Supported EPOS Commands ccccccccccccececeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeneees 187 Table 19 Select Character Font Table ss 194 Table 20 International Character Sets nn nn 195 Table 21 Character Code Pages enne 197 Table 22 Character Code TABIB si ids basi b eee 198 Table 23 Print Modes sissors a i B ip ta 199 Table 24 Rotation Mode S serie se sie B e saw Bad p aw ku 200 Table 25 Paper Sensor Commands nn 203 Table 26 Paper Sensor Commands ccccccccccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeness 204 Table 27 Print Density Selection issir ere destin coat ene eeediee nad entiendieeeeed 209 Table 28 Automatic Status Back ASB Values fOr sme nn 210 Table 29 Automatic Status Back ASB First Byte Printer Information 211 Table 30 Automatic Status Back ASB Second Byte Error Information 211 Table 31 Automatic Status Back ASB Third Byte Paper Sensor Information 212 Table 32 Automatic Status Back ASB Fourth Byte Paper Sensor Information 212 Table 33 Paper Sensor Status lt n gt 1 49 212 Table 34 Drawer Kick out Connector Status lt n gt 2 50 nn 213 Table 35 Values
327. nt Custom interfaces and emulations DC powered version through Hosiden type connector 28 07764 Rev C Page 23 Specifications and Requirements iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide General Specifications Printing Specifications Printing method Thermal Sensitive Line Dot System Vertical Horizontal dot pitch 0 125 mm Resolution 8 dots per mm 203 DPI Line feed pitch 3 2 mm 125 inches Print zone maximum 80 mm 3 15 inch Print speed monochrome 8 inches per second Print Speed two color 4 inches per second Number of print elements 640 dots in line Phvsical Characteristics Dimensions Page 24 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Specifications and Requirements Max Dimensions Saas Se eee Dimensions in 6 25 8 50 5 87 inches Weight Approximate weight 4 6 Ib Shipping weight 6 0 Ib 28 07764 Rev C Page 25 Specifications and Requirements iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Electrical Characteristics Internal AC Powered The iTherm 280 Printer is designed to be AC self powered in domestic and international markets The printer is equipped with a universal input power supply that is designed to operate worldwide without modification Supply Supply Frequency Rated Power Idle Current Printing Current Voltage Voltage Hz watts amps amps R
328. ntal color graphics should be sent to the printer compressed If the data is not compressed it is saved in the macro buffer If the buffer is saved into the user store nonvolatile flash there must be enough room in the user store for all of the data As user store space is used the macro buffer will be larger than the available space in user store Only the used space is saved but it is possible to define a macro that does not fit in the remaining user store space The actual buffer is smaller because of the overhead 8 IPCL commands are converted by the printer into an equivalent ESC code and then placed in the save buffer The equivalent ESC code should be used to calculate the size of the save buffer data 28 07764 Rev C Page 137 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide ESC g lt 0 gt Process user macro ASCII ESC g 202 Hexadecimal 1BH 67H 00H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 103 gt lt 0 gt IPCL amp GP EPOS ESC g lt 0 gt Description The ESC g lt 0 gt command prints the user store data buffer ESC g lt 1 gt Start macro record ASCII ESC g lt 1 gt Hexadecimal 1BH 67H 01H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 103 gt lt 1 gt IPCL amp GS EPOS ESC g lt 1 gt Description The ESC g lt 1 gt command clears the user store data buffer and begins recording data The next 2000 bytes including characters and commands are recorded ESC g lt 2 gt Stop macro record ASCII ESC g 22 Hexadecimal 1BH 67H
329. nter after a reset command some of that information may be processed before the reset is processed In parallel mode the printer goes busy after the reset is received but before the next byte is accepted The printer accepts an ENQ lt 10 gt in parallel mode It however is not acknowledged If both the serial and parallel ports are active the serial reset is not acknowledged either because the reset operation removes the parallel response In IEEE 1284 mode the response buffer is cleared by a reset command which prevents responses in IEEE 1284 mode as well Note If reset inhibit is set in the configuration menu this command is ignored ENQ lt 11 gt Inquire power cycle status ASCII ENQ lt 11 gt Hexadecimal 05H 0BH Decimal lt 5 gt lt 11 gt Function Has the printer been power cycled since the last request Response ACK lt 11 gt 06H OBH Printer has been power cycled since the last ENQ lt 11 gt NAK 452 15H OBH Printer has not power cycled since the last ENQ lt 11 gt Description The first time after a reset the command returns ACK lt 11 gt after that the command returns NAK lt 11 gt The command allows the application to determine if the printer has been power cycled and needs to be reinitialized The ENQ lt 10 gt command and the INIT signal on the parallel port both cause the printer to return power up status ENQ lt 14 gt Inquire Mechanical error status ASCII ENQ lt 14 gt He
330. nters software is reinitialized The power cycled flag is set The print head is homed and re calibrated The printer goes back on line Reset in Parallel Mode In parallel mode driving the INIT signal on the parallel port for 100 milliseconds generates a software reset It takes about two seconds for the printer to recover from a reset The ENQ lt 10 gt command has the same effect but it is not acknowledged 28 07764 Rev C Page 317 Communications iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Miscellaneous Communication Features Power cycle Recovery Sometimes the host needs to know if the printer was power cycled An example would be after the receipt tape was changed It is not necessary to turn off the printer to change the receipt However if the operator does any information sent to the printer before the power cycle will be lost The iTherm 280 Printer has a flag that is set after a reset The flag stays set until the host requests a reset The ENQ lt 11 gt command reads the flag If the command returns power cycled status the power has been reset or power cycled since the last request All unprinted information has been lost If the print operation is critical it is a good idea to check the power cycle flag before and after all transactions An alternate approach is to check the flag after every off line to on line transition Note If the printer mode was changed by the ESC y lt 2 gt or lt 8 gt command a power c
331. nworkable Several competing systems were developed however it was clear that a standard needed to be developed In 1991 Version 1 0 of the Unicode standard was developed to standardize how and where characters are to be addressed in an expanded addressing scheme In 2000 Version 3 0 of the Unicode standard was published and generally accepted The ITherm 280 follows this standard for character placement and encoding WARNING If you elect to load fonts into the printer you must have proper Note If a custom font is used that is not in Unicode order the order of the font will be used as if it were in Unicode order Any subsequent character mappings will assume to be in Unicode order and may not produce the desired effects Unicode Encoding The ITherm 280 Printer supports Unicode character addressing using Unicode Transform Format or UTF as defined in the Version 3 0 Unicode Specification There are several forms of UTF encoding UTF 16 is the most straightforward way to access characters above 255 UTF 16 essentially sends two 8 bit bytes that form a 16 bit address to access the desired character Basic UTF 16 does not define the byte order If you wish to use UTF 16 and allow the printer to determine the byte order you must send the byte order mark OxFEFF before you send any characters To prevent loss of byte order synchronization you should periodically send the byte order mark to resynchronize the printer with your application If
332. o large for the selected spacing the cell size will be expanded Function Set Character spacing in points with adjustment All ASCII ESC j lt d gt Hexadecimal 1BH 2BH 6AH 28 07764 Rev C Page 277 ITherm 280 Unicode and Fonts iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Decimal lt 27 gt lt 43 gt lt 106 gt Range d 0 16 255 The ESC j command will set the character spacing in points where 1 4 point is defined as 1 288 of an inch This command will force mono space printing It will override any character spacing set by the set character height and width commands defined above This spacing will be enforced until deactivated by setting the value to 0 or if the set character height and width commands use a 0 for the width indicating proportional spacing should be used This command differs from the ESC i command in that if the character is too large for the cell the cell will be expanded in multiples of lt d gt until the character fits If d 0 variable spacing is selected However note that the cell adjustment flag will remain set and if legacy commands are used they will allow the cell to be expanded NOTE If the current character size is too large for the selected spacing the characters will overlap Variable spacing is recommended Function Set minimum Line Spacing in Points All ASCII ESC V lt d gt Hexadecimal 1BH 2BH 56H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 43 gt lt 86 gt Range d 0 4 72 The ESC V command
333. ode UTF 8 Encoding MBCS All 28 07764 Rev C Page 271 ITherm 280 Unicode and Fonts iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide ASCII ESC M Hexadecimal 1BH 2BH 4DH Decimal lt 27 gt lt 43 gt lt 77 gt Description The ESC M command will put the printer into UTF 8 character encoding mode of operation If you wish to access characters above 255 You must select a Unicode encoding such as UTF 8 UTF 8 uses a Multiple Byte Character Sequence MBCS to identify the desired Unicode character This encoding method is less straightforward This method uses unique bit sequences at the MSBs of a byte to determine its location and meaning within the MBCS encoding See the table below for more information Note Once selected all information sent to the printer must then use this encoding even for non print commands Scalar Value 3rd Byte 000000000xxXXXXX 0XXXXXXX 00000yyyyyXXXXXX 110yyyyy 10XXXXXX ZZZZYYYYYYXXXXXX 1110zzzz 10yyyyyy 10xxxxxx Function Initiate Unicode UTF 8 Text only Encoding MBCS All ASCII ESC T Hexadecimal 1BH 2BH 54H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 43 gt lt 84 gt Description The ESC T command will put the printer into UTF 8 Text only character encoding mode of operation This mode is identical to the UTF 8 mode described above except commands and there parameters are not UTF encoded For example the following command would be used to select underline on ESC W 128 If true UTF 8 encoding
334. ode pages The printer and display use the same code page and the application displays and prints the same characters IBM and EPOS defined new commands to select code pages and left the old commands in effect The iTherm 280 Printer supports international character sets as well as code pages To allow the most flexibility for the application programmer both methods are extended in the iTherm 280 Printer The iTherm 280 Printer allows the IBM code page selection command to choose character sets as well as normal IBM code pages The EPOS character set select command has been extended to allow additional character sets over and above the 11 defined by EPOS The EPOS code page select command has not been extended because there is no EPOS definition beyond the first six ID s All characters in code pages as well as character sets are addressed as zero through 255 Characters below 32 must be addressed with the ESC lt n gt command Code pages may be changed at any time and are active for all features including rotated print 5 Epson provides limited code page support through ID to code page translation Only six translations are defined Page 100 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes To allow other code pages to be created by an application a redefine character set command is provided As discussed above there are two commands for language selection in IBM mode The first is ESC which s
335. odes ENQ lt 23 gt Inquire user store status ASCII ENQ lt 23 gt Hexadecimal 05H 17H Decimal lt 5 gt lt 23 gt Function The ENQ lt 23 gt command reports on the user store status Response ACK lt 23 gt lt Report gt lt 0 gt Where lt 23 gt is the echo of command ID The report is a null terminated string with the following format 12345 CR LF Free user store 12345 Type Name CR LF First entry etc 12345 Type Name CR LF Last entry lt 0 gt Type The type field describes the type of information M macro C character definition ENQ lt 24 gt Inquire Color status ASCII ENQ lt 24 gt Hexadecimal 05H 18H Decimal lt 5 gt lt 24 gt Function The ENQ lt 24 gt command reports Color Cartridge status Response ACK lt 24 gt lt Length 40 gt lt n gt lt N2 gt lt N3 gt Where lt 24 gt Is the echo of command lt N gt Secondary Paper Color 0 Not installed 1 Red 2 Green 4 Blue lt N2 gt Primary Paper Color 1 Red 2 Green 4 Blue 16 Black lt n3 gt Pen Status bit 0 Not defined bit 1 Not defined bit 2 Secondary Cartridge not installed bit 3 Primary Cartridge not installed bit 4 Secondary Cartridge low on ink bit 5 Primary Cartridge low on ink bit 6 1 always bit 7 0 always ESC EM P lt n gt Activate Periodic Status Back ASCII ESC EM P lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 19H 50H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 25 gt lt 80 gt lt n
336. olor and a highlight color there is no point in the printers mixing the highlight color with black If however the iTherm 280 printer is configured with two colors other than black the printer attempts to mix the colors to generate black Note that in text mode the colors are not mixed This requires that there be two basic modes of color graphic generation If the iTherm 280 printer is configured with two colors the printer will mix the two colors on the thermal paper using the primary and the secondary color Because there are three primary colors the printer is unable to print full color The printer follows the rules for mixing colors and it if the result is ambiguous because of the missing color the printer will print with the primary color This results in a image made up of primary color dots secondary color dots and mixed dots The mixed dots color may not be black but a mixture of whatever colors are installed In text mode the primary color is assigned as the default color and the secondary color is assigned as the alternate highlight color In most cases the darkest color should be initialized as the primary color The Ithaca Windows print driver provides the translation from Windows color to the three color planes When a graphic is created for the iTherm 280 Printer the colors used must take into account that colors other than the highlight color will print black The Ithaca Windows driver helps adjust the color cont
337. om our web site Page 302 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Communications TCP IP A 10 BaseT Ethernet adapter is available for the Ithaca iTherm 280 printer This Wired Ethernet Adapter provides a fast and easiest way to network and share printers in your system Ethernet provides a consistent common connection between printers and computers using standard protocols supported by Windows 95 98 Me NT 2000 XP as well as many other platforms Ethernet is probably the most common networking medium and thus allows printers to be easily added moved and removed with inexpensive common cabling and off the self components Print Server Features Standard Ethernet Connection 10 Mbps Speed 10 Base T RJ45 network connection Network Traffic LED indicator Configured through networked PC Web Browser Works with Virtually All Major Operating Systems Integrated into the Printer Large RAM Buffer for fast continuous printing 512K Flash Memory for Future Upgrades Supported Protocols Line Printer Daemon Protocol LPR Port 9100 RAW The TFTP Protocol Revision 2 Telnet COM Port Hypertext Transfer Protocol for configuration User I nterface Configuration e HTTP Web Interface e Login Page e Configuration Page o IP Address Subnet Mask Auto IP DHCP Static IP Printer Textual Name User Defined Printer Location String User Defined Protocols Enabled Disabled Port o LPR Port 9100 Telnet e Adapter Firmwa
338. ommand cancels enhanced print mode and returns to the currently selected font ESC E Begin emphasized print mode ASCII ESC E Hexadecimal 1BH 45H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 69 gt IPCL amp MM EPOS ESC E lt 1 gt Description The ESC E command begins emphasized print mode one pass with horizontal offset Emphasized print is bolder than normal print Page 110 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes ESC F End emphasized print mode ASCII ESC F Hexadecimal 1BH 46H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 70 gt IPCL amp CM EPOS ESC E lt 0 gt Description The ESC F command cancels emphasized print mode ESC S lt 0 gt Select superscript ASCII ESC S lt 0 gt Hexadecimal 1BH 53H 00H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 83 gt lt 0 gt IPCL amp SP EPOS none Description The ESC S lt 0 gt command selects superscript The following characters are printed half size on the upper side of the print line Note Superscript is not available in all print modes ESC S lt 1 gt Select subscript ASCII ESC S lt 1 gt Hexadecimal 1BH 53H 01H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 83 gt lt 1 gt IPCL amp SB EPOS none Description The ESC S lt 1 gt command selects subscript The following characters are printed half size on the bottom side of the print line Note Subscript is not available in all print modes ESC T End superscript or subscript ASCII ESC T Hexadecimal 1BH 54H Decimal lt 27
339. ommand sets tab stops at the character columns specified by lt n gt The end of the settings is specified by a lt 0 gt All previously set tabs will be cleared The restore default procedure other than to re specify the tabs Column sizes are in accordance with the current character pitch Setting tabs that are beyond the station width is possible A CR is inserted when the tab is used Printing begins at the home position The power up default is every eight spaces i e 9 17 25 and so on 28 07764 Rev C Page 83 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide ESC R Reset horizontal and vertical tab stops ASCII ESC R Hexadecimal 1BH 52H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 82 gt IPCL amp HV EPOS none Description The ESC R command resets horizontal and vertical tab stops to the power up configuration The power up horizontal default is every eight spaces i e 9 17 25 and so on The vertical default is every line ESC a Set Justification ASCII ESC a lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 61H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 97 gt lt n gt IPCL amp IL amp JC amp JR EPOS ESC a lt n gt Description The ESC a lt n gt command sets the horizontal justification Where lt n gt 0 Left justified amp JL 1 Center justified amp JC 2 Right justified amp JR 8 Left justified no line feed None 9 Center justified no line feed None 10 Right justified no line feed None The print format of the prin
340. on is 2999 203 or 14 78 inches Note The printed page length will only include what actually has print data Page 120 Rev C 2838 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Note Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Note 28 07764 Set Page Mode Entrv Position ESC SUB A lt X gt lt Xy gt lt YL gt lt Yu gt 1BH 1AH 41H lt X gt lt XyH gt lt Yi gt lt Yu gt lt 27 gt lt 26 gt lt 65 gt lt X gt lt Xy gt lt YL gt lt Y p gt amp Y PY lt XXXX gt lt YYYY gt ESC W This command sets the horizontal and vertical entry position to anywhere on the page It is only valid in page mode If the value specified is beyond the page boundary the command is ignored X and Y refers to the current active orientation specified by the ESC t command and is not same as the page definition of X and Y The X and Y positions are in dots Y Vw 256 Vi dots from the top X Xp 256 Xi dots from the left You can also use the ESC J ESC M ESC d and ESC e commands to position the print on the page Set Page Mode Entry Position Relative ESC SUB R lt X gt lt Xy gt lt YL gt lt Yu gt 1BH 1AH 52H lt X gt lt Xy gt lt Y_ gt lt Yu gt lt 27 gt lt 26 gt lt 82 gt lt X gt lt Xy gt KN PAN HD None ESC W This command sets the horizontal and vertical entrv position to anvwhere on the pa
341. on select command should be used to exit journal mode Note that any station select including another Journal select will close the journal entry If a Journal select is processed in Journal mode the current record will be closed and a new record opened 28 07764 Rev C Page 159 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Carbon Copy Journal Mode Carbon copy mode allows information sent to the receipt or validation station to be copied into the electronic journal An electronic journal entry is started with a Start Carbon Copy mode command and continues until a station select command is received or a Stop Carbon Copy command is received The carbon copy operation may be suspended and restarted by a Carbon Copy Suspend and Carbon Copy Resume command Note Carbon Copy Suspend and Carbon Copy Resume commands do not generate new electronic journal records Function Electronic Carbon Copy Begin ASCII ESC l 232 Hexadecimal 1BH 6CH lt 3 gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 108 gt lt 3 gt IPCL amp EB EPOS Description This command begins a carbon copy journal entry Function Electronic Carbon Copy Suspend ASCII ESC l 222 Hexadecimal 1BH 6CH lt 2 gt Decimal lt 2 7 gt lt 108 gt lt 2 gt IPCL amp ES EPOS Description This command temporarily suspends carbon copy journal entry Function Electronic Carbon Copy Resume ASCII ESC l lt 1 gt Hexadecimal 1BH 6CH lt 1 gt Decimal lt 2 7 g
342. ontain any alphanumeric characters Note The electronic journal can not be deleted without this password Function Erase the Electronic Journal ASCII ESC GS E lt Password gt lt 0 gt Hexadecimal 1BH 1DH 45H lt Password gt lt 0x00 gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 29 gt lt 50 gt lt Password gt lt 0 gt IPCL amp EC lt Password gt amp EPOS Description This command erases all of the electronic journal The password was set using the ESCJIGSJI command Note The electronic journal can not be deleted without this password 28 07764 Rev C Page 151 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Function Print the Electronic Journal ASCII ESC GS P lt Spa Sp gt lt Lie lt Lipp Hexadecimal 1BH 1DH 50H lt Sp lt Sp gt lt Li lt Lipp Decimal lt 27 gt lt 29 gt lt 80 gt lt Sipa Sp gt lt Lipa Lipp IPCL amp EP lt S gt lt L gt L and S are 4 digits ie 00100020 for 20 records starting at 10 EPOS Description This command prints all or part of the electronic journal lt S gt 256 lt S gt specifies the first record to be printed and lt L gt 256 lt L gt specifies the number of records to print If lt L gt 256 lt L gt are 0 records from the specified start to the last record are printed Setting both start and end to 0 will print the complete contents of the electronic journal Note The first record is identified as record 1 Function Report the Electronic Journal ASCII ESC
343. ote This follows standard C programming conventions Most standard C formatting print parameters may be used Note The record header many be totally disabled by a configuration option Print Report an Electronic Journal Log IESCJIGSIL Print the report IESCJIGSII Return the report 1BH 1DH 4CH or 6CH lt 27 gt 22924762 or lt 108 gt amp UL No IPCL for returning the report This command prints or returns a Summary of the electronic journal The format is as follows Electronic journal is inactive The electronic journal is off or not initialized Electronic journal has xxxx Records and is full Electronic journal has xxxx Records with yyyyyy bytes free Rev C Page 153 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Function Query the Electronic Journal ASCII ENQ lt 25 gt Hexadecimal 05H 19H Decimal lt 05 gt lt 25 gt IPCL None EPOS Description This is a real time status request that returns the current state of the electronic journal Return Format NAK lt 25 gt lt 42 gt lt ny gt lt n_ gt NAK EJ is not active It is either off not initialized or full If n4y 256 ni is not zero the EJ is available but not initialized and ny 256 mis the available space in K 1024 bytes or ACK lt 25 gt lt 42 gt lt ny gt lt n_ gt ACK the EJ is active an available and n4 256 nis the available space in K 1024 bytes Function Enable Dynamic Response ASCII ESC w lt n gt Hexa
344. ow the printer down All color papers tested by TransAct will operate with black levels less than 0 35 mJ sq mm When the Black energy is set adjust the Color value NEVER exceed the Black energy with the Color energy The color level can be very critical Do not attempt to make the color darker by increasing the energy to the point where black starts to appear the print quality will not be consistent 28 07764 Rev C Page 69 Programming Codes 28 07764 Rev C Page 71 This page intentionally left blank Page 72 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Control Codes Overview This Programmer s Guide is designed to help users of the iTherm 280 printer develop applications iTherm 280 Printers are specialized point of sale printers that have several features not normally found on general purpose printers Because of these special features iTherm 280 Printers have unique control codes This programmer s guide documents the control codes that are unique to the iTherm 280 Printer Nomenclature When describing control codes confusion often occurs as to whether the description is decimal hexadecimal or ASCII To minimize the problem this programmer s guide uses the following nomenclature when describing control code sequences Encloses a control character represents a single 8 bit value as defined in the standard ASCII tables The ASCII Code Table in Appendix B lists the control co
345. p mode is used to diagnose communication problems with the printer As information is received by the printer the information is converted to a Hex ASCII format and printed No translation is made which means no commands are interpreted All information is converted to Hex ASCII and printed on the receipt tape If a carriage return is sent to the printer it is translated to OD in the hexadecimal field and in the ASCII field Entering Hex dump Mode To enter hex dump mode perform the following sequence of operations 1 Press and release the button to turn the printer OFF The power indicator light will be off 2 Press and hold the Feed button 3 While holding the Feed button press and release the button 4 When the red error indicator light blinks continue to hold the Feed button until the blink pattern changes about 5 seconds After the pattern changes release the line feed button and the printer will enter Hex dump mode Hex dump format The format follows 54 68 69 73 20 69 73 20 This is 61 20 74 65 73 74 OD OA a testi Several indications of printer and host communication problems can be deduced from hex dump mode If the printer is printing all 3F symbols the parity or the number of bits is wrong If the printer is printing 3F symbols when it should be printing other characters the communications are probably incorrect such as the parity baud rate or bit length setting If the printer prints incorrect
346. pi Full speed 8 bit slices 10 104 x 96 dpi 1 horizontal 1 vertical pass 11 208 x 96 dpi 2 horizontal 1 vertical pass 12 104 x 192 dpi 1 horizontal 2 vertical passes 13 208 x 192 dpi 2 horizontal 2 vertical passes Note Modes 11 through 13 are designed to support horizontal graphics and not intended for APA graphics ESC U lt 1 gt Select unidirectional print ASCII ESC U lt 1 gt Hexadecimal 1BH 55H 01H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 85 gt lt 1 gt IPCL amp GU EPOS ESC U lt 1 gt Description The ESC U lt 1 gt command prints all data in unidirectional print mode to improve line to line registration for graphical data Note Unidirectional print should be canceled before normal text is printed Print time is slowed if it is not canceled 28 07764 Rev C Page 125 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide ESC U lt 0 gt Select bidirectional print ASCII ESC U lt 0 gt Hexadecimal 1BH 55H 00H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 85 gt lt 0 gt IPCL amp GB EPOS ESC U lt 0 gt Description The ESC U lt 0 gt command prints all data in bi directional logic seeking print mode Page 126 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Horizontal Graphics Color Graphics The iTherm 280 Printer supports graphics sent as horizontal scan lines Individual scan lines of graphic data are sent to the printer one line at a time Although the iTherm 280 Printer only supports
347. pital letter u with breve 0116 Latin capital letter e with dot above 016d Latin small letter u with breve 0117 Latin small letter e with dot above 016e Latin capital letter u with ring above 0118 Latin capital letter e with ogenek 016f Latin small letter u with ring above 0119 Latin small letter e with ogenek 0170 Latin capital letter u with double acute accent Oita Latin capital letter e with hacek 0171 Latin small letter u with double acute accent 011b Latin small letter e with hacek 0172 Latin capital letter u with ogonek O11c Latin capital letter g with circumflex 0173 Latin small letter u with ogonek 011d Latin small letter g with circumflex 0174 Latin capital letter w with circumflex Olle Latin capital letter g with breve 0175 Latin cmall letter w with circumflex O11f Latin small letter g with breve 0176 Latin capital letter v with circumflex 0120 Latin capital letter g with dot above 0177 Latin small letter v with circumflex 0121 Latin small letter g with dot above 0178 Latin capital letter v with diaeresis 0122 Latin capital letter g with cedilla 0179 Latin capital letter z with acute accent 0123 Latin small letter g with cedilla 017a Latin small letter z with acute accent 0124 Latin capital letter h with circumflex 017b Latin capital letter z with dot above 0125 Latin small letter h with circumflex 017c Latin small letter z with dot above 0126 Latin capital letter h with stroke 017d Latin capital letter z with hacek 0127 Latin small lette
348. ponse to all of them If the host did not wait for a response to each there would be unnecessary responses In IEEE 1284 mode inquire responses are placed in an IEEE 1284 transmit queue When the IEEE 1284 reverse channel is open the responses are returned to the host It is important that after each request the reverse channel be opened Inquire responses remain in the queue until read If the ENQ lt 9 gt command is sent to the printer the IEEE 1284 buffer will be cleared and only the response to the ENQ lt 9 gt will remain 28 07764 Rev C Page 315 Communications iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Display Pass Through The display pass through feature allows a pole display to be interconnected with the printer The printer is connected to a host system with a special serial cable The host sends serial data to the printer and the printer sends serial data to the pole display The printer does not provide power to the display During normal printer operation no data is passed to the display In pass through mode all received data is passed on to the display The restrictions and considerations for pass through are 1 Pass through only works on serial printers with DTR flow control 2 XON XOFF mode does not work correctly 3 All inquire ENQ commands are active when not in actual pass through mode If for example an ENQ command for cash drawer status is received by the printer the response is transmitted When pass th
349. port and protocol that is to be used to communicate to the printer Load the graphics Image you wish to print Adjust the image to produce the effect you would like The lower graphic window displays an approximation of the printed image When you are satisfied with the graphic press the Store in Printer button PJColor will attempt to interrogate the printer and will display the graphics currently in the printer if any Note If PJColor cannot communicate with the printer only the Save to File option will be allowed Make sure there is enough room in the printer for the graphic Insert a name in the Macro Name box Keep it simple this name will be used later to print the graphic 10 Record the graphic in the printer Print a stored graphic In the data stream to the printer enter amp URName amp and the graphic will print in place of the URName amp data The Name must be identical to the name entered earlier Generate a file to store graphics into a printer To generate a file that will store a graphic into a printer follow the same procedure to store a graphic in a printer up through step 8 Then Insert a name in the Macro Name box Keep it simple this name will be used later to print the graphic Press the Save to File button This will allow you to select a file where the stored universal graphic information is saved This file contains an erase any previous graphic with the same name command a sa
350. pport requests 24 hours a day and receive a return contact from a TransAct support technician during regular business hours Telephone Technical Support Live telephone support is available Monday through Friday from 8 AM to 5 PM Eastern US time excluding holidays We can provide general information about programming for your iTherm 280 printer technical support documentation or assistance in sending a printer for service To obtain telephone support call TransAct s Ithaca Facility at 607 257 8901 and ask for Technical Support To help us serve you faster please have the following information ready when you call The Model Number and Serial Number of the printer A list of any other peripheral devices attached to the same port as the printer What application software operating system and network if any you are using What happened and what you were doing when the problem occurred How you tried to solve the problem 28 07764 Rev C Page 15 About Your iTherm 280 Printer iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Return Materials Authorization and Return Policies If the technical support person determines that the printer should be serviced at our facility and you want to return the printer for repair we will issue you the Returned Materials Authorization RMA number that is required before returning the printer Repairs are warranted for 90 days from the date of repair or for the balance of the original warranty period whichever
351. print an A it would be addressed by sending a lt 65 gt decimal to the printer Sixty five predefined code pages or character maps assign characters to a particular address built into the printer Occasionally an application needs to redefine a character or group of characters in a code page The iTherm 280 Printer allows the map for any code page to be redefined or replaced The define character set command allows any character or group of characters to be replaced with any other printable character Unicode addressing is used The redefine character set command is used as follows ESC S lt 3 gt lt 0 gt lt 35 gt lt 90 gt lt 1 gt AANAN AN AANNAANN 346 Character in the Master Set 1 256 90 35 Character 3 bytes to follow 0 256 3 The new map remains until the printer is power cycled or the character set is redefined The code page and character set commands completely redefine the table 6 100 9785 Page 104 The internal character map is provided in the Master Character Set Definitions Guide PN Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes ESC ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range IPCL Description 28 07764 Define user defined characters ESC lt y gt lt C gt lt Ca gt lt x1 gt lt di gt d y X X1 KXk gt lt i gt d y X X 1BH 3DH lt y gt lt 27 gt lt 51 gt lt y gt y 2or3
352. print position after the data in the print buffer is deleted 1 49 Sets the print position after the data in the print buffer is printed When printing is specifies n 1 49 the printer prints the data in the print buffer and executes a line feed based on the line feed amount set When deleting is specified n 0 48 the printer cancels the print data in the print buffer and keeps other data or setting values except for the print data Function Set Absolute Print Position ASCII ESC lt n gt lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 24H lt n gt lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 36 gt lt N gt lt Np gt Range 0 lt n lt 255 0 lt np lt 255 Description The ESC lt n gt lt n gt command sets the print starting position from the beginning of the line Function Set Relative Print Position ASCII ESC lt n gt lt nh gt Hexadecimal 1BH 5CH lt n gt lt np gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 92 gt lt N gt lt Np gt Range 0 lt n lt 255 0 lt Np lt 255 Description The ESC lt n gt lt n gt command sets the print starting position based on the current position and the distance from the current position to n Nnn x 256 x horizontal unit When standard more is selected the horizontal motion unit set by GS P is used When page mode is selected the horizontal or vertical motion unot set by GS P is used for the print direction set by ESC T 28 07764 Rev C Page 205 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Funct
353. prints the bar code If lt m gt is between 65 and 73 the length must be specified If lt m gt is between 0 and 6 the data must be null terminated See the descriptions below Mode lt m gt Bar Code System Number of Characters Remarks 1 0 UPC A 11sks12 48 lt d lt 57 1 1 UPC E 11 lt k lt 12 48 lt d lt 5 7 1 2 JAN 13 EAN 13 12 lt k lt 13 48 lt d lt 57 1 3 JAN 8 EAN 8 7 lt k lt 8 48 lt d lt 5 7 1 4 Code 39 1 lt k 48 lt d lt 57 65 lt d lt 90 d 32 36 37 43 45 46 47 1 5 ITF 1 lt k even number 48 lt d lt 57 Page 220 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes 1 6 Codabar 1 lt k 48 lt d lt 57 65 lt d lt 68 d 32 36 37 43 45 46 47 58 2 65 UPC A 11 lt k lt 12 48 lt d lt 57 2 66 UPC E 11 lt k lt 12 48 lt d lt 57 2 67 JAN 13 EAN 13 12 lt k lt 13 48 lt d lt 57 2 68 JAN 8 EAN 8 7 lt k lt 8 48 lt d lt 57 2 69 Code 39 1 lt n lt 255 48 lt d lt 57 65 lt d lt 90 d 32 36 37 43 45 46 47 2 70 ITF 1 lt n lt 255 48 lt d lt 57 even number 2 71 Codabar 1 lt n lt 255 48 lt d lt 57 65 lt d lt 68 d 32 36 37 43 45 46 47 58 2 72 Code 93 1 lt n lt 255 0 lt d lt 127 2 73 Code 128 2 lt n lt 255 0 lt d lt 127 Table 42 Bar Code System Based on lt m gt Description for lt d gt indicates the character code to be printed A null 00 Hex character ends the bar code defini
354. r Control GOMES torrets cesta eet ee stay tha estlee Si santa a 75 Quick PcOS Reference Chart nara 76 Low Level Paper Motion Control 82 Horizontal Motion Control nn nnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnznznzznnnnnnnnnna 83 Nenmi al Motion Control kf In d 85 Feocd to Bla k B10 a i e b b ak e b i a may rey d y ney 91 Gharacter Ihe eneko de dad ad a Sad ke dara EAE sak g as a qab l 93 Charactet Font gcd agir e hd b b as bir dd sib bbdsa AEE 96 Character Sets and Code Pages nn 98 Double Bvte and Multi Bvte Code Page Description Files nn 100 Code paga SCIOCIONs setet fare ie e ed aa 100 Page MOQE sisa isa it f d f d d da at da ada ana 113 Graphic MOQLI 123 Graphics Compression cxccsteccciadesdegees e e p e l p 129 User Store Graphic Save ance ai kasi i en a sta da Gan Wack phd aida ds Gece 129 User MAG OSA iet ke d a EEEIEE EEIE 137 Bar Godes ki i b vcoes E E EEN 139 Electronic Joumal kai a a a e a aa a a a 149 Miscellaneous Contr liscsiccites ices va e 161 Remote Power Gomtrol sist aa A a A A E RRE 169 Documented Extended Control commands nn 170 PRISE SSCS Wire haat Seren chet seat ri d ei aaa A ceed ema tere thal aeaa creme ai 171 In uire Commands lite iuris L aa R ei aeiee iS 172 ESG POS Godes on aa ia al a N A A NEA 181 Differences between Epson TM T90 and iTherm 280 c ccsessseseserereseseseeees 181 Supported TM T88 Commands rna 183 Undocumented TM T88 Commands
355. r defined character set it is loaded into the current definition If it is a macro it is loaded into the macro buffer It is not processed or printed To help maintain the user store area the following commands can be used The terminating lt O gt may be replaced with an amp or redefined See ESC EM T lt n gt or amp UT lt n gt on page 136 Flag as a start up macro ESC US s lt Name gt lt 0 gt The ESC US s lt Name gt lt 0 gt command flags the referenced item to be processed at startup No more than one user character definition and user data item may be flagged The terminating lt 0 gt may be replaced with an amp or redefined See ESC EM T lt n gt or amp UT lt n gt on page 136 Remove item from user store ESC US e lt Name gt lt 0 gt The ESC US e lt Name gt lt 0 gt command removes an item from user store and frees up its space The terminating lt O gt may be replaced with an amp or redefined See ESC EM T lt n gt or amp UT lt n gt on page 136 Rev C Page 131 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Function ASCII or Description Function ASCII Description Flush information from user store ESC US f ALL lt 0 gt Base User Store ESC US f EXT lt 0 gt Extended User Store The ESC US f ALL lt 0 gt command clears all of the information to the user store and frees the data space The ESC US f EXT lt 0 gt command clea
356. r defined font with different metrics that will cause the cache to be flushed when any of the user characters are being accessed If this should occur the user defined font should be changed to match the other fonts in the printer Page 260 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide ITherm 280 Unicode and Fonts Custom Fonts The ITherm 280 supports TrueType fonts There are several companies that will provide custom character sets The ITherm 280 uses fonts provided by Monotype You can contract Monotype through their website www fonts com or by phone in U S amp Canada toll free 1 800 424 8973 directly at 1 781 970 6020 or the United Kingdom Free Phone 0800 371242 direct 44 0 1737 765959 Stacked or Linked fonts The ITherm 280 also uses a font stacking technology where fonts are linked together This means that as each character is looked up the first font in the stack containing the character is then printed For example if a customer would like to replace several standard characters with custom characters a user defined font can be provided that would if first in the link replace the characters n the standard font It may also be desirable to stack fonts to provide a precedent for how individual characters are looked up For example e An application may wish to alter the appearance of several characters for security e It might be necessary to define a group of special symbols for a specific application e t mi
357. r h with stroke 017e Latin small letter z with hacek 0128 Latin capital letter i with tilde 017f Latin small letter long s 0129 Latin small letter i with tilde 0192 Latin small letter script f florin sign 012a Latin capital letter i with macron Otfa Latin capital letter a with ring above and acute 012b Latin small letter i with macron 01fb Latin small letter a with ring above and acute 012c Latin capital letter i with breve Otfc Latin capital ligature ae with acute 012d Latin small letter i with breve O1fd Latin small ligature ae with acute 012e Latin capital letter i with ogonek oife Latin capital letter o with stroke and acute 012f Latin small letter i with ogonek Off Latin small letter o with stroke and acute 0130 Latin capital letter i with dot above 02c6 nonspacing circumflex accent 0131 Latin small letter i without dot above 02c7 modifier letter hacek 0132 Latin capital ligature ij 02c9 modifier letter macron 0133 Latin small ligature ij 02d8 breve 0134 Latin capital letter j with circumflex 02d9 dot above 0135 Latin small letter j with circumflex 02da ring above 0136 Latin capital letter k with cedilla 02db ogonek 0137 Latin small letter k with cedilla 02dc nonspacing tilde 0138 Latin small letter kra 02dd modifier letter double prime Page 328 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Appendix
358. r recovery the application should use the appropriate status request commands to query the printer periodically If an error response is such that the fault is recoverable the host application should interact with the operator and request that the fault be corrected IE Clear Paper Jam When the operator indicates that the problem has been corrected the host can issue a reset request If a serious error occurs the printer will halt and enter fault error mode If the fault is such that the printer can maintain communications with the host the print status request and response system will remain active The status of the system will however remain static i e the status responses will reflect the state of the system when the fault occurred There are errors that cannot be reported to the host system These errors are such that the integrity of the printer do not allow continued operation That is there is no way to report the error These errors occur for the most part during power up diagnostics They are as follows EEPROM READ ERROR Power up only The Internal EEPROM is not readable or the check sum is bad Pressing the Power Button will attempt to rewrite the configuration information This may leave the printer configured incorrectly EEPROM WRITE ERROR Power up down and Configuration only The Internal EEPROM is defective There is no recovery SOFTWARE ERROR VECTOR Can occur at any time These errors can occur during operation They
359. r s Guide love at FIRST BITE GLEN RORI 34 Rt I An toun Ct As i 4 3 2003 15 37 514 20 00 DPs 00067 1E 021 0035 KL EENE X FAN O04 QIY I 1 68 J aite 001 QTY 50 0 HIP 801 QTY 1 1 50 0 STORA GE BAG DO4 QTY 1 50 J SUB TOTAL 5 08 SALES TAX 1 50 TOTAL 10 18 CASH IEND 20 00 CHANGE DUE 9 82 THANK YOU FOR SHOPPING WITH US IL Breakfast ana pre M tus coupon tt receive a free breakfast entree when you purchase another ee eol We s qual valh upon Exp 12 31 0 AI Figure 20 Receipt with graphics As with all graphics the data path to the printer must be eight bits Seven bit protocols do not work iTherm 280 Universal Color Graphics Starting with Version 1 88 of the iTherm 280 Printer firmware supports the abilitv to print two color graphics in all emulations This support is an enhancement to the original TM U200 ESC POS Star and Citizen printer emulations The intent of Universal Color Graphic support is to allow the iTherm 280 color graphics capability to be used in existing applications that do not support color graphics There are several ways to add color graphics to an existing application The easiest for you will depend on how much control you have over your application Ata minimum you 28 07764 Rev C Page 247 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide ITherm 280 Color Graphics should be able to change the name printed on the top of a receipt With the PJColor program you can stor
360. r status disabled On 08H lt 8 gt Paper roll sensor status enabled Undefined Page 210 Table 28 Automatic Status Back ASB Values for lt n gt Note This command and the Automatic Status Back feature are licensed from Epson and is only available in the Full Epson Emulation of the firmware Problems with this command are frequently caused by not using the correct version of the firmware Contact Transact sales and or technical support for this added cost option Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Bit Off On Hex Decimal Status for Automatic Status Back ASB 0 Off 00H lt 0 gt Not used fixed to Off 1 Off 00H lt 0 gt Not used fixed to Off 2 Off 00H lt 0 gt Drawer kick out connector pin 3 low On 04H lt 4 gt Drawer kick out connector pin 3 high 3 Off OOH lt 0 gt On line On 08H lt 8 gt Off line 4 On 10H lt 16 gt Not used fixed to On 5 Undefined 6 Off 00H lt 0 gt Paper is not being fed by the FEED Button On 40H lt 64 gt Paper is being fed by the FEED Button 7 Off 00H lt 0 gt Not used fixed to Off Table 29 Automatic Status Back ASB First Byte Printer Information Off On Hex Decimal Status for Automatic Status Back ASB 0 lt 0 gt Undefined 1 lt 0 gt Undefined 2 Off OOH lt 0 gt No mechanical error On 04H lt 4 gt Mechanical error occurred 3 Off
361. re Serial Commands Data Out P Send XOFF RTS Not Used for Flow Control Software Data ENQ Proc ENQ Response Buffer Getting Full Buffer Getting Empty Select Key RTS Request to Send DTR Data Terminal Ready Page 310 Figure 27 XON XOFF Serial Port Flow Control Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Communications Print Buffer Flow Flow Chart 1 illustrates how the communications driver acquires data from the serial port and places it in the buffer using Ready Busy or XON XOFF flow control Wait for data from the host Place data in the print buffer Is the buffer full Yes No Update the buffer pointers Is the buffer past the high watermark Clear the DTR signal or transmit XOFF Flow Chart 1 Serial Buffer Operation At the top of this flow chart the driver is waiting for data When data is received from the host the printer checks to see if it is an inquire command If the data is an inquire it is responded to and placed in the buffer If not the data is placed in the buffer without response The buffer is then checked to see if it is full before the internal pointer is incremented If it is not full the pointer is incremented in preparation for the next data byte The buffer is checked by looking to see if it has passed a high watermark If the buffer has the communication driver is notified and it resets DTR to in
362. re Update O O2 26 Other e Push Button for Initial IP Address reset and adapter reset e Self Diagnostics e Firmware Upgrade via TFTP and HTTP For more information and a users guide refer to the Transact Ethernet Users Guide 100 05072 28 07764 Rev C Page 303 Communications iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Parallel Port Parallel Port Protocol The iTherm 280 parallel port behaves just as any printer connected to a personal computer The parallel interface accepts 8 bits of data from the host The strobe signal from the host is used to indicate that data is available When the printer sees the strobe signal and accepts the data it asserts a busy signal The busy signal indicates to the host that the printer has accepted the data and is working on it After the printer absorbs the data and is ready to accept another byte the printer asserts acknowledged ACK negates busy and then finally negates ACK The host computer should meet the following parallel port specifications and timing Ina standard personal computer the strobe signal is generated by software writes to the parallel port control port which is typically done in the bios or some parallel port driver As personal computers become faster it is up to the software to assure that the strobe signal does not get too narrow One microsecond is the minimum pulse width that should be sent down a cable Shorter pulse widths 500 nanoseconds will be accepted by the pr
363. rint each journal entry with an entry separator defined by the user or if not defined with a default The journal can be erased and reinitialized at any time It is up to the host application to assure the electronic journal is reported or printed before it is erased To provide some level of security on the erase process the erase function is password protected The password is set by the previous initialize command See the ESC GS and E commands for further details There are two ways to print the electronic journal one is under host control and the second is by entering journal print mode and using the keypad to control the printout Journal Entering and using Journal Print Mode Journal print mode can be used to initialize print then erase the electronic journal To provide a level of security for the journal if the electronic journal is initialized under software control and a password is provided the electronic journal can not be erased in journal print mode There is also a factory configured mode that completely disables this feature To enter Journal Print Mode 1 Press and release the Button to switch the printer into STANDBY OFF mode The POWER INDICATOR LIGHT will be not be illuminated Press and hold the FEED Button While holding the FEED Button press and release the Button When the red ERROR INDICATOR LIGHT blinks release the FEED Button Follow the directions printed on the receipt to cycle through the op
364. rizontal tab stops ESC D lt ni gt lt n2 gt 1BH 44H none 83 lt ni gt lt 0 gt Set horizontal position ESC n lt ni gt lt n2 gt 1BH 6EH amp HP lt m1 gt 84 lt m2 gt lt m3 gt Set justification ESC a lt n gt 1BH 61H ae T 84 kar ae has 070 n 2 Right n 8 Left No line feed n 9 Center No line feed n 10 Right No line feed Reset horizontal and vertical tab stops ESC R 1BH 52H amp HV 84 Set left right print margins ESC X lt n gt lt n2 gt 1BH 58H none 161 n Left margin n Right margin Select Minimum character Height and ESC P lt w gt lt h gt 1BH 50H none 278 Width in points Select Minimum character Height and ESC p lt w gt lt h gt 1BH 70H none 278 Width in points Vertical Motion Perform a fine line feed ESC J lt n gt 1BH 4AH amp FM lt m gt 85 lt MmM2 gt lt M3 gt Set 1 8 inch line spacing ESC 0 1BH 30H amp ST 86 Set 7 72 inch line spacing ESC 1 1BH 31H amp SG 86 Begin variable line spacing Enable ESC ESC 2 1BH 32H none 87 A lt n gt Set variable line spacing to n 216 inch ESC 3 lt n gt 1BH 33H amp SV lt m gt 85 lt MmM2 gt lt M3 gt Set variable line spacing to n 72 inch ESC A lt n gt 1BH 41H none 86 Feed lt n gt lines at current spacing ESC d lt n gt 1BH 64H amp FL lt m gt 87 lt m gt Set vertical tab stops ESC B lt ni gt lt n2 gt 1BH 42H none 88 lt N3 gt lt ni gt 0 Vertical tab VT
365. rm 280 Programmer s Guide About Your iTherm 280 Printer Sales fax 607 257 3868 Technical Support fax 607 257 3911 Web site www transact tech com 28 07764 Rev C Page 17 iTherm 280 Specifications and Requirements 28 07764 Rev C Page 19 This page intentionally left blank Page 20 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Specifications and Requirements iTherm 280 Specifications and Requirements iTherm 280 Thermal Printer Models iTherm 280 P parallel interface printer iTherm 280 S serial interface printer iTherm 280 USB USB interface printer Standard Features The following features are common to the entire family of thermal printers Print Speed for text is 8 inches per second 200 mm sec monochrome 8 0 inches per second paper feed speed 3 15 inch 80 mm print zone 44 57 characters per line Built in self ranging External Power supply Clam shell paper loading Single RJ11 cash drawer driver with status Single RJ12 Parallel 25 or 36 pin serial 9 or 25 pin RS232C and USB interface Configurable receiver buffer Self diagnostics Set up and configuration utility program 28 07764 Rev C Page 21 Specifications and Requirements iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide CPI selections from 8 to 30 CPI Paper Out sensor Multiple printer emulations Ithaca PCOS and Epson Extended Maximum 8K buffer adjustable 2 Megabytes Flash Memory 2 Megabytes RAM APA and Epson grap
366. rms specific protocols supported include the following Line Printer Daemon Protocol LPR RFC1179 Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP RFC1157 Printer MIB RFC1759 Port 9100 Raw data Service Location Protocol SLP RFC2165 The TFTP Protocol Revision 2 RFC1350 Telnet COM Port Control Option RFC2217 Hypertext Transfer Protocol HTTP 1 1 RFC2616 Refer to the 100 05072 Wired Ethernet Programmer s Guide for features and additional setup information Note The Ethernet adapter supports only the Ithaca Cash Drawer interface 802 11b Wireless I nterface An 802 11b wireless interface is available for the iTherm 280 printer allowing wireless operation of the printer within a specified distance of a base unit Contact TransAct technical support for more information on this interface Page 32 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Specifications and Requirements Cash Drawer Interface Description The iTherm 280 Printer supports a single cash drawer with status The driver in the printer is capable of supplying 24 V DC at up to 1 5 amps for up to 250 milliseconds The iTherm 280 Printer defines cash drawer closed as switch open If the drawer is disconnected it will be viewed by the printer as closed Since the printer does not act on the cash drawer status the application can interpret cash drawer status any way it wants Driver connector type standard Single RJ12 conne
367. rogrammer s Guide Status Commands Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Range Description Enable Disable Automatic Status Back ASB GS a lt n gt 1DH 61H lt n gt lt 29 gt lt 97 gt lt n gt Osns255 The GS a lt n gt command selects a status for ASB transmission ASB is enabled if any status item is selected The printer automatically transmits a 4 byte status message whenever the status changes Multiple status items can be enabled or disabled When lt n gt 0 ASB is disabled The default depends on the offline mode configuration If offline buffer full only is set the ASB is defaulted on When the printer is disabled by the ESC command and ASB is enabled the printer transmits a 4 byte status message every time the status changes The paper roll low sensor is an option If the printer is not equipped with the paper low sensor bits 0 and 1 of the third byte are always on with paper adequate status Bit 3 of the second byte is always No error The status items are selected using lt n gt as follows Decimal Status for Automatic Status Back ASB 0 Off 00H lt 0 gt Drawer kick out connector pin 3 status disabled On 01H lt 1 gt Drawer kick out connector pin 3 status enabled 1 Off OOH lt 0 gt On line off line disabled On 02H lt 2 gt On line off line enabled 2 Off 00H lt 0 gt Error status disabled On 04H lt 4 gt Error status enabled 3 Off 00H lt 0 gt Paper roll senso
368. rough is active all data except the ENQ is passed The printer does not look for or act on any commands other than inquires 4 If pass through data is sent to the printer in continuous mode i e as fast as possible each ENQ character in the sequence delays the transmit data by one byte The printer buffer size is limited If the buffer overruns data will be lost 5 Modem handshake signals from the printer are not controlled during past through Their state is set by printer status Opening the cover toggles the control lines When the printer cover is open it accepts data including all ENQ commands If an ENQ is received when off line pass through is entered 6 Previously buffered data is processed by the printer in pass through mode Printer performance is degraded by the processing of pass through data 7 In 8 bit no parity mode data is passed through unaltered In all other modes the parity is checked stripped and then regenerated by the printer 8 Pass through has no affect on a printer in parallel mode Remote Power Control The iTherm 280 Printer has a remote power control command that instructs it to enter OFF When the command is issued the printer performs print cartridge maintenance and enters OFF Unlike pushing the button remote power mode leaves the communications active All commands except the exit power down command are ignored ESC y Remote Power Control ASCII ESC y lt n gt Hexadecimal
369. rs which are based on a pixel by pixel definition of characters With a fixed size and fixed character spacing these bitmap fonts were limited to specific magnification factors from 2 8X and required scaling and smoothing at larger font sizes Moreover such scaling and smoothing operations were often unsuitable for complex fonts such as Asian characters where changes to pixel layout actually risk changing character meanings To take full advantage of scalable fonts the Therm 280 supports additional commands and features including Character size selection by points Character pitch selection by points Variable character spacing if desired Custom fonts Unicode support for international language support Enhanced code page support for ASCII based applications DIBON Character Generation The font technology in the ITherm 280 printer uses standard outline fonts sometimes referred to as TrueType fonts or stroke fonts Both technologies are scalable however each has unique advantages Outline characters Outline characters use points along the edge of the character to describe the character The character generator defines the edge and then fills in the enclosed space to define the character This type of character generation produces very well formed characters and produces the best looking characters However it requires more storage than stroke fonts and is best for non Asian fonts 2838 07764 Rev C Page 257 ITherm
370. rs all of the information in the extended the user store The terminating lt 0 gt may be replaced with an amp or redefined See ESC EM T lt n gt or amp UT lt n gt on page 136 Report on user store ESC US q lt 0 gt The ESC US q lt 0 gt prints or returns information about the contents of and available space in user store Note A configuration option is available that locks the user store data The configuration option prevents the occurrence of new user store data operation until the lock is manually reset and accidental deletion of the saved information The user defined character buffer and or user data buffer may be redefined and used but cannot be stored The terminating lt 0 gt may be replaced with an amp or redefined See ESC EM T lt n gt or amp UT lt n gt on page 136 User Store Commands Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description Page 132 Begin named macro record ESC US b lt Name gt lt 0 gt 1BH 1FH 62H lt 27 gt lt 31 gt lt 98 gt amp UB lt Name gt lt 0 gt none The ESC US b lt Name gt lt 0 gt command erases the current macro initializes the macro buffer structure and redirects the following data to the macro buffer It uses the lt Name gt field as a reference If the name already exists in the flash user store the command is ignored The command must be followed by the End name macro record command with the same name If th
371. rs from the home position Where n left margin and nz right margin the absolute position depends on the current print pitch If the left and right margins are set to the right of the current horizontal position the new margins become valid in the same line If the left margin is set to the left of the current horizontal position and the right margin set to the right of the current horizontal position the right margin setting becomes valid in the same line but the left margin setting becomes valid in the next line When the left and right margins are set to the left of the current horizontal position both left and right margin settings appear to become valid in the next line because an auto CR is performed by the subsequent data Rev C Page 161 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide CAN Clear print buffer ASCII CAN Hexadecimal 18H Decimal lt 24 gt IPCL amp RP EPOS CAN Description The CAN command clears the print buffer and any unprinted information in the printer received before it If the input buffer is not being processed because the printer is out of paper or a form is not inserted the CAN command will not be processed until after the error is cleared The CAN command does not restore default conditions it only clears the print buffer ESC q Query marker ASCII ESC q lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 71H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 113 gt lt n gt IPCL none EPOS none Description The E
372. rvice and you assume the risk of loss during shipment to Ithaca C O D packages are not accepted and warranty repairs are subject to the terms and conditions as stated on the Ithaca warranty policy Page 14 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide About Your iTherm 280 Printer Technical and Sales support Your Ithaca printer is backed by the resources of TransAct Technologies a global technology firm with dedicated technical support and sales assistance Here is how we can help you On line Technical Support Our web site at www transact tech com is your on line portal to obtaining technical assistance with your Ithaca printer Click on Ithaca link and then the Technical Support link to find documentation for your iTherm 280 printer including a current copy of this Programmer s Guide featuring Command codes and descriptions Character fonts Printer features Communication specifics oO 0 0 Other utilities available include a font utility a color converter and a terminal application for communicating with your printer as well as the following drivers and utilities Windows 95 98 Me Print Driver with Documentation Part No 100 9167 Windows NT 4 0 2K and XP Print Driver with Documentation Part No 100 9170 OPOS Drivers with Documentation Part No 100 9732 Master Character Set Definitions Part No 100 9785 Our on line support site also includes a convenient e mail assistance request form where you can submit su
373. s 5 Enables IPCL commands 6 Disables inquire processing All command preprocessing is disabled 7 Enables inquire processing 8 Enables extended diagnostics 9 Print Current Configuration 10 Not used 11 Overlavs the current character chart with Group 2 OCR MA Characters 12 Replaces the OCR characters with normal characters 13 Not used 14 Forces head maintenance 15 Print Current totals 16 Enable Test Font 17 Requests the printer to enter remote OFF 18 Requests the printer to exit remote OFF 20 Print alignment settings The ESC y lt n gt command enables and disables command set features It is possible that the IPCL commands will interfere with print data If this occurs the IPCL can be disabled with an ESC y lt 4 gt command Note 1 Once IPCL commands are disabled the Enable IPLC command will not be a valid IPCL code Note 2 ESC y lt 0 gt lt 1 gt lt 2 gt and lt 3 gt allow the printer to switch between emulation modes When the switch takes place the current print buffer is printed and the printer reinitializes These commands do not permanently change the configuration A power on reset restores the mode that was configured in menu mode A reset by command or from the INIT pin does not restore the mode Rev C Page 167 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide These commands are not processed as they are received but are buffered then processed The buffering process allows inquire
374. s Bar codes are printed at a 203 x 203 resolution Barcodes may be printed horizontally or vertically When printed vertically the length of the barcode can be greater i e more characters can be printed You can not print human readable interpretation HRI characters in vertical mode It is generally better to print vertical barcodes by printing horizontal barcodes in page mode rotated 90 or 270 You can then mix HRI and other text with the barcodes Function Print bar code ASCII ESC b lt n gt information ETX Hexadecimal 1BH 62H lt n gt 03H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 98 gt lt n gt lt 3 gt IPCL amp 25 CR Interleaved 2 of 5 amp 39 CR Code 39 amp 12 CR Code 128 amp 28 lt M1 gt lt Ms2 gt Code 128 allows a two character length preceding the information amp UP CR UPC A amp UE CR UPC E amp EA CR EAN 13 amp E8 CR EAN 8 amp 93 CR Code 93 amp CB CR Codabar EPOS ESC b lt n gt or GS k lt n gt Description The ESC b lt n gt information ETX command prints information as a bar code The bar code is centered on the print zone Wheren 0 Interleaved 2 of 5 Numeric 0 9 only must be even number of digits 1 Code 39 26 uppercase letters A Z 10 digits 0 9 See description for full 128 character set support 2 Code 128 Three sets of 106 different characters See description for character set selection 3 UPC A Numeric 0 9 only 1
375. s Guide ENQ lt 20 gt ASCII Inquire all printer status IENQI lt 20 gt Hexadecimal 05H 14H Decimal Function Response Where lt n gt lt I gt lt fo gt lt 3 gt lt gt lt 5 gt lt Ig gt lt I7 gt Page 176 lt 5 gt lt 20 gt The ENQ lt 20 gt command returns all status flags ACK lt 20 gt lt n gt lt I gt lt I gt lt 20 gt is the echo of command ID is the number of return bytes 40 28H to prevent confusion with XON XOFF bit 0 Cash Drawer 1 is open bit 1 Cash Drawer 2 is open bit 2 Receipt paper is out bit 3 0 bit 4 Receipt paper error occurred low or out bit5 0 bit 6 1 always bit 7 0 always bit 0 1 always bit 1 Cover is closed bit 2 Buffer is empty bit 3 Printer has been power cycled Reading this does not affect the state of the power cycled flag Use ENQ lt 11 gt to reset the power cycled bit bit 4 Printer is waiting in an error mode Use ENQ lt 22 gt to identify the specific error and ENQ lt 10 gt to recover bit5 0 bit 6 1 always bit 7 0 always bit 0 1 always Receipt Station bit 1 0 bit 2 0 bit 3 0 bit 4 Undefined bit 5 Printer is blocking print Cover is open or out of paper bit 6 1 always bit 7 0 always bit 0 Printer supports receipts bit 1 Printer supports inserted forms bit 2 Printer supports multiple colors bit 3 Printer supports c
376. s Microsoft Windows operating systems Note If you are using a USB printer you will also need to install the TransAct Technologies Virtual Serial TVS driver Note If you are using an Ethernet printer UPOS can be configured to interact directly with the printer In this case you do not need the VSerial Ethernet driver Do you want to print from a Windows application Microsoft supports a Windows Printing API for Windows applications This interface is intended to support typical Windows page printers and has features such as begin document end document and tray selection While this is not an ideal environment for a POS printer there are cases where such functionality is required To support this environment TransAct Technologies provides a Windows print driver with extensions for POS which may be downloaded and installed for most TransAct Technologies printers Please read the Ithaca Printer API documentation included with the driver A POS printer is not the same as a typical consumer printer and requires unique consideration when using a Windows printer API interface Page 46 Rev C 28 07764 Setup Procedures iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Windows Printer Driver A Windows printer driver is a specific type of driver defined by Microsoft that the OS uses to translate drawing commands by a Windows application to a specific printer s command set A standard Windows printer driver is a graphics page mode driver and is no
377. scription GS defines a bit image for storage in the nonvolatile memory pool The printer maintains an area of flash memory specifically designated for multiple bit image storage The area can contain as many bit images as its size permits A printout of the amount of nonvolatile memory remaining can be obtained by performing a printer self test Each image is uniquely identified by the name given to it by the lt Name gt parameter The name of the bit image can be from one to 15 bytes long and contain any alphanumeric characters as well as spaces The format of the bit image is identical to that defined by the GS command The GS _ command must be entered in standard mode only at the beginning of a print line Any image may be up to 2048 bytes long If the size of the image is larger than the space remaining in the nonvolatile buffer the image will not be saved When the last byte of bit image data is received and there is ample space in the nonvolatile buffer for the bit image the bit image will be saved The following basic example demonstrates how to define an 8 bit x 8 bit block with the name MY IMAGE A representation of the format of a downloaded bit image is depicted below 28 07764 Rev C Page 231 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Column one PRINT 1 CHR 29 CHR 45 REM Enter the GS command PRINT 1 MY IMAGE CHR 0 REM Define the image name PRINT 1 CHR 1 CHR 1 REM Image size 8 x 8 bits
378. se between your thumb and forefinger and squeeze the release This will pop the cover up 2 Open the cover and install a roll of paper with the paper coming off of the bottom of the roll 3 Lay the paper tail over the front of the printer and center it over the paper path 4 Close the cover When the cover is closed the printer will feed several inches of paper to make sure the paper is aligned in the printer If equipped with a cutter the printer will automatically cut the paper tail and the printer is now ready to print If the printer is not equipped with a cutter the operator should remove the paper tail 28 07764 Rev C Page 43 Setup Procedures iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Printer Drivers and Printer Controls Definitions for terms you will see in this guide OS The Operating System which is the operating software underlying a computer system Examples of OS s include Microsoft Windows 9x Me 2000 XP Linux Unix and OS2 Application A software program that a person uses to perform a function such as a point of sale POS application Also referred to as a program Driver Software that makes hardware do something something useful we hope A driver translates or converts a software command to a command that specific hardware can understand Types of drivers include printer drivers port drivers OPOS drivers and USB drivers OCX ActiveX a software component that utilizes Microsofts OLE Object linki
379. se the power must be removed from the printer and the printer returned for service If the boot loader is intact but the main firmware is corrupted the printer automatically enters boot loader mode where the firmware can then be reloaded into the printer Boot Loader Mode The boot loader cannot be entered during normal operation Boot loader mode can only be entered in one of two ways 1 when Level 0 Diagnostics finds that the firmware check also known as a cyclical redundancy check or CRC is bad or 2 manually To manually enter the boot loader hold the button while the power is applied The ERROR Indicator comes on and the POWER indicator blinks At this time the firmware boot program is operating and the boot load file may be sent to the printer When the printer receives the boot load file the printer will automatically restart if the firmware load was successful If the load fails the printer will remain in boot load mode If the load fails reset the printer by removing the power and restarting it 28 07764 Rev C Page 61 Configuring Your iTherm 280 Printer 28 07764 Rev C Page 63 This page intentionally left blank Page 64 Rev C 28 07764 Configuring Your I Therm 280 Printer iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Configuration Mode Overview There are two ways to configure the iTherm 280 printer the first is to use the manual configuration sequence by using the keypad controls and the second is to use TransA
380. sition command and if its value is lt 0 gt the command is interpreted as an absolute position command Note You can also use the ESCJJ ESC M ESC d and ESC e commands to position the print on the page Function Exit Page Mode ASCII FF or ESC SUB P Hexadecimal OCH or 1BH 1AH 50H Decimal lt 12 gt or lt 27 gt lt 26 gt lt 80 gt IPCL SAFF EPOS FF Description This command exits page mode definition and starts the print process If the printer is not in page mode this command is treated as a normal form feed command Note When page mode finishes printing the left and right margins are restored to the values before the select page mode command All other format changes are preserved Page 122 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Graphic Mode The iTherm 280 Printer conforms to the basic definition of IBM all points addressable APA graphic commands It is not designed to print large quantities of graphical data The printer only prints graphics that are 2 5 inches wide At this time there is not a graphics mode for Epson emulation The iTherm 280 Printer always prints in one of the native resolutions of 104 x 96 208 x 96 104 x 192 or 208 x 192 dpi To provide compatibility with the standard IBM APA resolutions the printer internally modifies the graphics to print as expected The printer converts the vertical resolution by altering the ESC J command which is typically use
381. sition is not reset to the left margin unless auto CR is active Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Horizontal Motion Control Several commands can be used to control the horizontal position of characters Many applications use space control to position fields However the iTherm 280 Printer has the ability to control character position with horizontal tab stops This is done using the horizontal tab HT to move to those tab stops HT Horizontal tab ASCII HT Hexadecimal 09H Decimal lt 9 gt IPCL amp YHT EPOS HT Description The HT command inserts spaces in the print buffer up to the next tab stop The default tab locations are every eight spaces BS Back space ASCII BS Hexadecimal 08H Decimal lt 8 gt IPCL amp BS EPOS BS Description The BS command moves the print buffer one character width to the left The pointer position cannot be moved to the left of the left margin BS does not cause the buffer to be printed rather the following data is OR ed with the previous data ESC D Set horizontal tab stops ASCII ESC D lt n gt lt n gt lt n3 gt lt ni gt 0 Hexadecimal 1BH 44H lt n gt lt n gt lt n3 gt lt ni gt OOH Decimal lt 27 gt lt 68 gt lt nNi gt lt N2 gt lt N3 gt lt N gt lt 0 gt IPCL none EPOS ESC D lt n gt lt n gt lt N3 gt lt N gt 0 Description The ESC D lt n gt lt n gt lt n gt lt ni gt 0 c
382. splay 28 07764 Rev C Page 29 Specifications and Requirements iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Communications Interface Parallel Interface Your printer features two parallel interfaces e An IEEE 1284 A 25 pin D shell connector with pin outs that interface to a standard IBM PC parallel printer interface with a one to one cable e An IEEE 1284 B which is a standard Centronics 36 pin connector Both interface cards provide a dual cash drawer interface The following table lists interface signals and corresponding pins 25 pin Connector 36 pin Connector Signal Direction Description Pin 1 Pin 1 STROBE Clock data to printer Host to Printer Pins 2 9 Pins 2 9 DO D7 Data Host to Printer Pin 10 Pin 10 ACK Printer accepted data Printer to Host Pin 11 Pin 11 BUSY Printer busy Printer to Host Pin 12 Pin 12 PE Paper Out Status Printer to Host Pin 13 Pin 13 SLCT Printer selected Printer to Host Pin 14 Pin 14 AUTOFD Autofeed paper Host to Printer Pin 15 Pin 32 FAULT Printer error Printer to Host Pin 16 Pin 31 INIT Initialize printer Host to Printer Pin 17 Pin 36 SLIN Select printer Host to Printer Pin 17 FG Frame ground Printer to Host Pin 18 5V Peripheral logic high Printer to Host Pins 18 25 Pins 16 19 30 GND Ground Table 4 Parallel Interface Pin outs Signal Levels Voltage levels 0 V and 5 V nominal Logic levels Logic one Driver 2 4 V to 5 V Receiver 2 0 V
383. stalled Some of TransAct Technologies printers support a composite USB interface This interface allows a Windows print driver to be installed to a windows USB printer port as well as supporting a virtual serial port In some cases the printer USB port is configurable and either the windows printer port or the virtual serial port may be disabled If you will be using OPOS you should disable the Windows printer interface If you are going to use only the Windows printer API you can but do not need to disable the virtual serial interface Do you want to use an Ethernet interface and simulate a communication port The TransAct Ethernet Virtual Serial VSerial Driver allows your application to think that it is communicating with a serial port but is actually using the Ethernet link to communicate with the printer This driver should be downloaded and installed when required There is currently no reliable Windows Plug and Play protocol for Ethernet devices 28 07764 Rev C Page 45 Setup Procedures iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Are you using OPOS UnifiedPOS UPOS If you are using an application that is written to interface with the OPOS OLE Point of Sale standard then the TransAct Technologies OPOS driver will allow you to communicate with most TransAct Technologies printers The OPOS driver provides the mechanisms to print in all of the print modes supported by the printer Note The TransAct Technologies OPOS driver only support
384. t Hexadecimal 1BH 56H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 86 gt lt n gt Range lt n gt 0 1 2 48 49 50 Description The ESC V lt n gt command turns on off 90 clockwise rotation mode The command is only enabled in standard mode In page mode an internal flag is activated and the command is enabled when the printer returns to standard mode lt n gt Function 0 48 Turns off all rotation modes 1 49 Turns on 90 clockwise rotation mode 2 50 Turns on 90 counterclockwise rotation mode Page 200 Table 24 Rotation Modes Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Function Set Character Size ASCII GS lt n gt Hexadecimal 1DH 21H lt n gt Decimal lt 29 gt lt 33 gt lt n gt Description The GS lt n gt command sets the horizontal and vertical scaling The upper nibble is the horizontal scale and the lower nibble is the vertical scale The minimum size is x1 and the maximum size is x2 Where lt n gt xxxx0000 Vertical scale 1 xxxx0001 Vertical scale 2 0000xxxx Horizontal scale 1 0001xxxx Horizontal scale 2 Function Begin Italics ASCII ESC 4 Hexadecimal 1BH 34H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 52 gt Description The ESC 4 command begins italics print mode Note Italics are not available in all print modes Function End Italics ASCII ESC 5 Hexadecimal 1BH 35H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 53 gt Description The ESC 5 command ends italics print mode Description T
385. t lt 108 gt lt 1 gt IPCL amp ER EPOS Description This command resumes a temporarily suspended carbon copy journal entry Function Electronic Carbon Copy End ASCII ESC l 202 Hexadecimal 1BH 6CH lt 0 gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 108 gt lt 0 gt IPCL amp EE EPOS Description This command ends a carbon copy journal entry Page 160 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Miscellaneous Control ESC 8 ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description ESC 9 ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description ESC X ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal IPCL EPOS Description 28 07764 Disable paper out sensor ESC 8 1BH 38H lt 27 gt lt 56 gt amp PF none The ESC 8 command temporally disables the paper out sensor The printer does not stop printing or go off line when it senses it is out of paper The inquire commands still return paper out status Enable paper out sensor ESC 9 1BH 39H lt 27 gt lt 57 gt amp PO none The ESC 9 command enables paper sensing and is intended to reverse the effect of the disable paper out sensor command If the printer is out of paper when the command is issued it goes off line Set left right print margins ESC X lt ni gt lt n2 gt 1BH 58H lt n gt lt no gt lt 27 gt lt 88 gt lt ni gt lt N2 gt none ESC I ESC Q The ESC X lt ni gt lt n gt command sets left and right print margins in characte
386. t W gt the width in dots Max 576 lt H_ gt lt H gt the height in dots Max 3000 This command should always be sent before or immediately after page mode is entered to define the initial page size Once in page mode after the ESC t command the command can be sent multiple times so that several different print areas aligned in different print directions can be developed in the printers page buffer before being printed using the Print Page Mode commands FF or ESC FF The starting position of the print area is the upper left of the area to be printed The Yoffset is in the y direction and is YO dots and the Xoffset is in the x direction and is XO dots in The length of the area to be printed in the y direction is set to H dots The length of the area to be printed in the x direction is set to W dots The set print area command may be invoked multiple times while in page mode The first invocation specifies the initial master page size Following invocations will define Page 116 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes smaller windows within the initially defined page If the Set page size command is not used the page size will default to the maximum size The orientation of the set print area command is always based on 0 degrees regardless of the current orientation setting This includes if the command is sent before the start page mode command after the start page mode command or as a sub page inc
387. t a POS point of sale driver Have you ever had to open a cash drawer that was connected to your printer at home AO Ll ureliazama Window s Operating System Windows Print Printer Port Application GDI Driver RI Hardware Graphics i Serial Device Interface OR Parallel Parallel Part of the Windows OR OR API Printer USB USB bus Driver fa sa a Other Figure 5 Windows Print Driver When to use a windows printer driver Use a printer driver when writing a program that uses the Windows API to send print information to the printer When not to use a windows printer driver When a program wants to send printer command codes to the printer or when a program wants to get information back from a printer 28 07764 Rev C Page 47 Setup Procedures iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide OPOS driver An OPOS driver is an implementation of the UnifiedPOS UPOS specification It provides an application interface for retail devices such as a POS printer scanner cash drawer pole display MICR scale or others PO Liavrda aKa Window s Operating System POS Application l l Port OPOS POSPrinter Driver RE Hardware Service OPOS Printer i Serial Control Activex OR Parallel Parallel OR OR USB USB bus OPOS Cash OPOS Cash Drawer Driver Drawer Control ActiveX Service OR OR Other Other Figure 6 OPOS or UPOS When to use an OPOS driver When an application is written that invokes the retai
388. t affect the applicability of information in this publication Copyright 2007 2009 TransAct Technologies Inc All rights reserved Revision Level C April 2009 Printed in USA Trademarks Some of the product names mentioned herein are used for identification purposes only and may be trademarks and or registered trademarks of their respective companies BANKjet 50Plus Insta Load Ithaca Made to Order Built to Last Magnetec PcOS POSjet PowerPocket iTherm and TransAct are registered trademarks and Epic 950 Flex Zone imPort ithaColor KITCHENjet Momentum QDT and TicketBurst are trademarks of TransAct Technologies Inc 28 07764 Rev C Page 3 Table of Contents Ghange AISLE Yeo va ei ta ta 1 Federal Communications Commission Radio Frequency Interference Statement 2 Canadian Department of Communications Radio Interference Statement 2 Regulatory Compliance ssikkat ib setet li Ft a e Ereet 2 Disclaimer saaa e a oneal E A E RES 3 Copyright eei e AD O A N E 3 Trademark e a te rr a po ai a E A l a Es 3 Table of ontenis iii a E E A A E a REE Aei 4 ale EAEE E EAEE E A EE E E EE T E AE E 9 TRANS ES a ts E ac pa ete E A a g E si 9 Introducing your iTherm 280 Printer 11 About your iTherm 280 Prinbb i iii i ai seta wonisiwaravrmtetennas 13 Who Should Read This Giide 2 sis siwi fee ie sr dae tieeeteratd 14 What Is Included in This Guide a 14 Waray Options dia aa tel e eaea a ea eis a eaa
389. t bit LSB of lt n gt 1 emphasized mode is turned on when it is 0 emphasized mode is turned off The default setting is lt n gt 0 Emphasized and double strike printing appear the same 28 07764 Rev C Page 199 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Function Turn ON OFF Double Strike Mode ASCII ESC G lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 47H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 71 gt lt n gt Range 0 lt n lt 255 Description The ESC G lt n gt command turns on or off double strike mode When the least significant bit LSB of lt n gt 1 double strike mode is turned on when it is 0 double strike mode is turned off The default setting is lt n gt 0 Double strike and emphasized printing appear the same Function Turn ON OFF Upside Down Print Mode ASCII ESC lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 7BH lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 123 gt lt n gt Range Osns255 Description The ESC lt n gt turns on or off upside down printing mode When the least significant bit of lt n gt 1 upside down printing mode is turned on when it is 0 upside down printing mode is turned off The default setting is lt n gt 0 When upside down mode is turned on the printer prints 180 rotated characters from right to left The line printing order is not reversed so the order of the data transmitted is important The command is enabled only when input at the beginning of a line Function Turn ON OFF 90 Rotation Mode ASCII ESC V lt n g
390. tended user store ESC US t lt 0 gt 1BH 1FH 74H lt 27 gt lt 31 gt lt 116 gt amp UX lt 0 gt None This command transfers the information in the base 16K user store to the extended user store The base user store is erased if the transfer was successful The terminating lt 0 gt may be replaced with an amp or redefined See ESC EM T lt n gt or amp UT gt n gt on page 136 Flush information from user store or extended user store ESC US f ALL lt 0 gt User Store ESC US f EXT lt 0 gt Extended User Store 1BH 1FH 66H 00H lt 27 gt lt 31 gt lt 102 gt lt 0 gt amp UF GS 5 The ESC US f ALL lt 0 gt command clears all entries in user store and frees the data space It must have the name ALL in uppercase attached If EXT is substituted for ALL extended user store If any is cleared The terminating lt 0 gt may be replaced with an amp or redefined See ESC EM T lt n gt or amp UT gt n gt on page 136 Rev C Page 135 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Function Report on user store ASCII ESC US q lt 0 gt Print a user store report Or ESC US lt 0 gt Return a formatted user store report Hexadecimal 1BH 1FH 71H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 31 gt lt 113 gt IPCL amp UQ lt Name gt lt 0 gt EPOS GS 3 Description The ESC US q lt Name gt lt 0 gt command prints a status report The file name is ignored and may
391. ter can be right center or left justified The value of lt n gt specifies the justification The power on default is left justified Note The justify commands do not affect graphics ESC n Set horizontal position ASCII ESC n lt n gt lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 6EH lt n gt lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 110 gt lt ni gt lt N2 gt IPCL amp YHP lt m gt lt M2 gt lt M3 gt EPOS ESC lt n gt lt n gt Description The ESC lt n gt lt n gt lt n2 gt command sets the print position to lt n gt lt Nn2 gt 256 in 1 196 inches Page 84 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Vertical Motion Control ESC j Perform a fine line feed ASCII ESC J lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 4AH lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 74 gt lt n gt IPCL amp FM lt m gt lt M2 gt lt M3 gt EPOS ESC J lt n gt Description The ESC J lt n gt command prints the contents of the buffer and performs a line feed of n 216 inch The default line spacing value is not changed The next character print position is reset to the left margin if the Auto CR mode is set D Notes e INEPOS mode the command performs feeds in n 144 inch increments e Immediately after APA graphics the command is adjusted for the difference between 72 dpi graphics and 96 dpi print ESC 3 Set variable line spacing to n 216 inch ASCII ESC 3 lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 33H lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt
392. the first character lt Length gt is from 1 to 31 the printer will automatically select Code A B or C depending on the data present If the data is all numeric the data can be printed as pairs This effectively doubles the amount of data that can be printed The check digit is generated and printed by the printer Note If the first character is greater than lt 31 gt and not lt 135 gt through lt 137 gt the printer will discard the first character and print the data as defined in Code A Space is defined as a lt 0 gt which makes programming difficult and causes control character conflicts for the printer To solve the problem the iTherm 280 Printer subtracts 32 from all characters that are to be included in the bar code In the Code 128 definition an A is lt 33 gt however the printer converts an ASCII A lt 65 gt to a lt 33 gt internally This sets Code 128C and the start codes off by 32 Barcode 128 consists of 107 unique symbols 101 of the symbols take on different meanings based on the start code or an embedded shift code sequence Code stick A consists of alphanumeric characters and ASCII control codes see the table below Code stick B consists of Alpha numeric with lower case alpha Code stick C consists of numeric pairs In automatic mode any ASCII data from 0 to 127 could be entered Values less than 32 will be encoded as Code stick A NUL US values from 96 through 127 will be encoded from Code stick
393. the same location result in a white dot while red green and blue pixels set to zero form a black dot For black print one represents a black dot and zero represents a white dot Note 2 More than one color may be set at a time for example setting the color to six would set green and blue simultaneously lt length gt byte specifying the length of the data including the format byte ranging from 0 to 254 255 is reserved for future use 28 07764 Rev C Page 127 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide lt format gt byte specifying the format of the graphics data 0 for raw data 1 for bit wise RLE compression 8 for byte wise RLE compression 254 for difference compression 255 for same as previous scan line data lt data gt the data bytes that define the graphics to be printed ESC Set horizontal graphic mode ASCII ESC lt m gt lt 0 gt lt 0 gt Hexadecimal 1BH 2AH lt m gt lt 0 gt lt 0 gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 42 gt lt m gt lt 0 gt lt 0 gt IPCL none Description The ESC lt m gt lt 0 gt lt 0 gt command selects one of the three graphic modes specified by lt m gt The two bytes after the mode must be zero Where lt m gt 0 2 3 4 5 6 7 Standard Graphic Modes See ESC command documentation in previous section 8 9 Not supported 10 104 x 96 dpi 1 horizontal 1 vertical pass 11 208 x 96 dpi 2 horizontal 1 vertical pass 12 104 x 192 dpi 1 horizontal 2 vertical passes 13
394. tion Decimal Status for Automatic Status Back ASB 0 3 Undefined 4 Off 00H lt 0 gt Not used fixed to Off 5 6 Undefined 7 Off 00H lt 0 gt Not used fixed to Off Table 32 Automatic Status Back ASB Fourth Byte Paper Sensor Information Function Transmit Status ASCII GS r lt n gt Hexadecimal 1DH 72H lt n gt Decimal lt 29 gt lt 114 gt lt n gt Range 1 lt n lt 2 49 lt n lt 50 Description The GS r lt n gt command transmits the status specified by lt n gt as follows paper sensor status as one byte of data when lt n gt 1 or 49 and drawer kick out connector status when lt n gt 2 or 50 The paper present status of bits 2 and 3 for the paper sensor status is not transmitted because the printer goes off line when a paper out is detected by the paper out sensor The paper roll low sensor is an option If the sensor is not installed bits O and 1 for the paper sensor status are always in the Paper adequate status Decimal 0 Off 00H lt 0 gt Journal Memory adequate On 01H lt 1 gt Journal Memory low Less than 8k 1 Off 00H lt 0 gt Paper low sensor paper adequate On 02H lt 2 gt Paper low sensor paper low 2 Off 00H lt 0 gt Journal Memory adequate On 04H lt 4 gt Journal Memory exhausted 3 Off 00H lt 0 gt Paper out sensor paper present On 08H lt 8 gt Paper out sensor paper not present 4 Off 00H
395. tion Description for lt n gt indicates the number of bytes of bar code data to be processed immediately following lt n gt Additionally lt d gt indicates the character code to be printed The following apply to both GS k lt m gt lt dl gt lt dk gt NUL GS k lt m gt lt n gt lt dl gt lt dn gt If the horizontal width exceeds the printing area the printer only feeds the paper These commands feed as much paper as necessary to print the bar code according to the GS h command These commands are enabled only when no data exists in the print buffer When data does exist in the print buffer the printer processes the data following lt m gt as normal data After printing a bar code the print position is set at the beginning of the line These commands are not effected by print modes emphasized underline character size etc flag If the is used the length specified must be at least as long as the Note Barcode 39 allows the character to be used as a start and stop desired barcode Function Set Bar Code Height ASCII GS h lt n gt Hexadecimal 1DH 68H lt n gt Decimal lt 29 gt lt 104 gt lt n gt Range 1 lt n lt 255 Default 0 90 inch high Description The GS h lt n gt command sets the height of the bar code The bar code height is set to n 180 inch Function Select Printing Position of HRI Characters ASCII GS H lt n gt Hexadecimal 1DH 48H lt n gt 28 07764 Rev C
396. tion Configuration options are as follows Cut Command Logo Cut Logo Perform Feed to cut then cut and then print the Logo Coupon Cut Print the Coupon Feed to Cut and Cut Logo Cut Print the Logo Feed to Cut and Cut Cut Coupon Perform Feed to cut then cut and then print the Coupon Coupon Cut Logo Print the Coupon Feed to cut Cut ad then print the Logo Logo Cut Coupon Print the Logo Feed to cut Cut ad then print the Coupon Cut Logo Coupon Perform the Feed to cut Print the Logo and then the Coupon Cut Coupon Logo Perform the Feed to cut Print the Coupon and then the Logo Logo Coupon Cut Print the Logo then the Coupon feed to cut and Cut Coupon Logo Cut Print the Coupon then the Logo feed to cut and Cut Disabled Perform the Normal cut Cut Command Logo Feed 0 to 80 mm Page 254 Rev C 28 07764 chapter 8 Unicode and Fonts 28 07764 Rev C Page 255 This page intentionally left blank Page 256 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide ITherm 280 Unicode and Fonts Unicode and Fonts Fonts Your TransAct ITherm 280 printer uses outline and or stroke based scalable fonts These fonts provide you with additional font options as well as improved character appearance while functioning transparently within legacy applications Such fonts represent a substantial improvement to the so called bitmap fonts that are traditionally used for thermal printe
397. tions until Electronic Journal is selected Press and hold the FEED button until Electronic journal mode is entered Then select the desired option arwn The available options are Initialize Journal If the electronic journal is not initialized Print Complete Journal Erase Complete Journal If the electronic journal is not password protected Print Last 20 Records Print First Record Skip 10 Records Back 10 Records Print remaining journal Print last record OCOONOARWNM When journal print is entered the printer will print a short list of instructions the available options and a summery of the total number of records in the journal and the amount of space left 28 07764 Rev C Page 155 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Journal Print Mode Options Initialize Journal If this option is offered the journal has never been initialized Selecting this option will initialize the journal with no password Once initialized the journal configuration can not be changed unless the journal is erased by command Print Complete Journal This option will print the complete journal log from record 1 to the end The printer will use the default configuration and emulation to print the log That is if the printer is configured for Ithaca PCOS emulation and set to 6 Ipi large draft 16 cpi the printer will print the log with these defaults If a journal entry has been saved with print mode settings they will tak
398. to help quickly find commands PcOS Printer Control Codes The following section defines the iTherm 280 Ithaca PcOS emulation The native Ithaca PcOS emulation provides the most flexibility and control over the printer It is consistent with most previous Ithaca PcOS products and should be used when the printer is placed in a new application One new feature in the iTherm 280 Printer is the ability to print color graphics and the control codes for color graphics are all new Due to the complexity of color graphics TransAct provides several drivers to integrate into your application TransAct does not recommend that you generate drivers In addition TransAct has created several tools that can be used to generate and maintain graphic images and files for print on the iTherm 280 Information about drivers and tools are available on the TransAct web site and on a TransAct Software Developers Toolkit For more information about either of these options contact Technical Support 28 07764 Rev C Page 75 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Quick PcOS Reference Chart Description ASCII Hex IPCL equivalent Page code Low Level paper Motion Line feed LF OAH amp LF 82 Carriage return CR ODH amp CR 82 Horizontal Motion Back space BS 08H amp BS 83 Horizontal tab HT 09H amp HT 83 Set ho
399. ton will make the printer feed paper continuously until the button is released 3 The printer draws about four watts of power in Standby 28 07764 Rev C Page 55 How to Operate the ITherm 280 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Indicator Lights LED The three iTherm 280 indicator lights are e Power LED Indicates printer activity and non recoverable errors e Error LED Indicates problems and probability of recovery e Paper LED Indicates paper status paper low Power Indicator LED The power indicator lets the user know that the printer is ON If the POWER indicator blinks in conjunction with the ERROR indicator the printer is experiencing a non recoverable error see the fault indicators discussed below If the POWER indicator blinks and there is no error indicator blinking the printer is being held in reset by the host Error Indicator LED The ERROR indicator lets the user know that the printer is experiencing a problem If the POWER indicator is lit not blinking the error is generally recoverable without data loss If the POWER indicator is blinking a non recoverable error has occurred see the fault indicators below If the error is not operator recoverable a power cycle may correct the problem If a power cycle does not correct the fault the printer must be serviced Paper Indicator LED The PAPER indicator signals the paper status If the printer is equipped with a paper low option the PAPER indicator will bli
400. ts Default 576 lt HipeHip the height in dots Default 3000 This command should always be sent before or immediately after page mode is entered to define the initial page size Once in page mode after the ESC t command the command can be sent multiple times so that several different print areas aligned in different print directions can be developed in the printers page buffer before being printed using the Print Page Mode commands FF or ESC FF The starting position of the print area is the upper left of the area to be printed The offset is in the x direction and is O dots The length of the area to be printed in the y direction is set to H dots The length of the area to be printed in the x direction is set to W dots Note that the Y offset is always 0 The set print area command may be invoked multiple times while in page mode The first invocation specifies the final page height Following invocations will define smaller windows within the initially defined page If the Set page size command is not used the page size will default to the maximum size The orientation of the set print area command is always based on 0 degrees regardless of the current orientation setting This includes if the command is sent before the start page mode command after the start page mode command or as a sub page O Note The maximum printable area in the x direction is 576 203 or 3 15 inches Note The maximum printable area in the y directi
401. two colors the horizontal graphic command interface gives full color support for printer graphics Full color support is provided to establish a full color standard for future printers Color data is sent in one of three color planes Typically a red plane or scan line is sent then green and blue The sequence of lines defines one row of dots that is printed on the paper The horizontal graphic commands do not include resolution information Therefore only once before sending graphics data set the graphics resolution by sending the ESC command with a zero length no data The graphic resolution sets the internal graphic mode of the printer The printer stays in graphic mode until it is changed by another command Note that the bar code generation and other graphic commands change graphics mode The format of the horizontal graphic command follows For additional information on color graphics see Chapter 7 Color Graphics ESC h Process horizontal graphics data ASCII ESC h lt color gt lt length gt lt format gt lt data gt Hexadecimal 1BH 68H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 104 gt IPCL None EPOS None Description The ESC h lt color gt lt length gt lt format gt lt data gt command processes horizontal graphic data where lt color gt is a byte that specifies the color of the data being sent lt color gt 0 Use Previously Selected Color 1 Red 2 Green 4 Blue Note 1 Red green and blue pixels set to one at
402. ty graphics 123 ESC 1 Electronic Journal Carbon Copy 160 ESC M lt n gt Select character font table 194 ESC m Perform a partial knife cut 223 ESC p lt m gt lt t gt tip Generate pulse 225 ESC P lt n gt Begin rotated font 97 ESC p 3 lt n gt Select paper sensor s to output paper end signals 165 ESC p 4 lt n gt Select paper sensor s to stop printing 165 ESC p 5 lt n gt Enable disable paper feed 164 ESC q lt n gt Query marker 162 ESC Q lt n gt Set right margin 208 ESC R lt n gt Select an international character set 195 ESC r lt n gt Turn color mode on off 198 Page 344 ESC R Reset horizontal and vertical tab stops 84 88 ESC S lt 0 gt Select superscript 111 ESC S lt 1 gt Select subscript 111 ESC SP lt n gt Set right side character spacing 193 ESC t lt n gt Select character code table 198 ESC T End superscript or subscript 111 ESC U lt 0 gt Begin bi directional print 126 ESC U lt 1 gt Begin unidirectional print 125 ESC U lt n gt Turn on off unidirectional printing mode 207 ESC V lt n gt Set intercharacter spacing 95 ESC V lt n gt Turn on off 90 rotation mode 200 ESC W lt n gt Double wide double high mode 108 ESC w lt n gt Enable dynamic response 154 ESC x lt n gt Open cash drawer 163 ESC X lt n gt lt n gt Set left right print margin 161 ESC y lt n gt Set feature control 167 E
403. ual character size is defined by the font designer 28 07764 Rev C Page 259 ITherm 280 Unicode and Fonts iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide are always spaced in a fixed dot cell provided that the legacy commands are used Adding or subtracting space between characters achieves different character pitches with a fixed character cell size As each dot has a fixed size and position only specific pitches are possible Character spacing may also be selected by requesting a print pitch based on characters pre inch Once again the results are not exact If the requested spacing is zero the character spacing will be defined by the character definition and will result in variable spacing Line spacing The legacy commands select line spacing as lines per inch With scalable characters the lines per inch is a minimum spacing If a character is larger then the spacing between lines the line spacing will be increased to allow enough room for the characters on that line Selecting character size by points In addition to the legacy or classic method of character size selection the Therm 280 allows selection by point size Point sizes from 4 to 72 points may be selected for both the horizontal and vertical axes If a horizontal point size of zero 0 is selected for the horizontal spacing the characters are printed using variable spacing based on the character definition using the vertical point size for the horizontal point size To provide f
404. uffer The smaller the buffer the tighter the control will be It is up to the developer to select the optimal buffer size for an application Serial Mode Plug and Play Microsoft has defined a Plug and Play PnP protocol to identify devices on serial links The enumeration process is designed to find and automatically configure a device driver for the printer It is done by toggling the control lines in a specific sequence that is recognized by the printer The peripheral then responds such that Windows can identify the device To allow the printer to look for and respond to the sequence EISA PnP must be enabled When enabled in serial mode the flow control is forced to Request to Send RTS with Data Terminal Ready DTR static Using DSR Windows uses the host s Data Set Ready DSR line the printers DTR line on the serial port to determine whether a device is attached to the port When Windows is booted or does PnP the system sets the host s DTR and RTS to zero and waits approximately 200 milliseconds It then sets the DTR to one and waits another 200 milliseconds After 200 milliseconds the system checks to see whether the DSR line is high This indicates that a serial device is attached to the serial port The system responds by setting RTS high and waits to receive the device identification string In some devices such as the serial mouse the DSR line can be held high by tying it directly to the DTR line When the mouse is
405. ull getting empty Figure 23 Printer Communications Buffer Flow The communication port is either serial or parallel and is controlled by a software communication driver The driver receives data and returns requested status As information is received from the host data is taken from the communication port hardware by the driver preprocessed to look for status inquire commands and placed in the buffer When the buffer input function finds that the buffer is getting full it notifies the communication driver to implement flow control Flow control attempts to stop further information from being sent from the host The print control software takes information from the buffer as it needs it and can use it When the buffer output function finds that the buffer is getting low it notifies the communication driver that the information flow can be resumed if it was stopped and allows more information to be placed in the buffer The iTherm 280 printer has a configurable input buffer The printer can be configured to allow from 40 to 8196 bytes of input buffer Consequently up to 8196 characters or control codes can be sent to the printer before they are interpreted and printed In effect the host computer can get 8196 characters ahead of the printer In all cases the buffer resumes communications when it is half empty For example if the buffer is configured to be 2048 the printer will signal stop when 2048 bytes are in the buffer resume
406. up to the end user of the iTherm 280 to implement and use the level of security that is required CAUTION If you have initialized the electronic journal and don t know the password there is no way to erase the electronic journal without returning the printer for service The warranty does not cover this All iTherm 280 s are shipped with the electronic journal partitioned and erased but not initialized Page 150 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Initializing the Electronic Journal Once the electronic journal is partitioned it can be initialized Initializing the electronic journal sets the password and formats the flash to accept journal entries Each entry may be any length up to 8K Entries greater than 8K are truncated Entries will be added to the electronic journal until it is full If the electronic journal is full entries will be lost The ENQ lt 25 gt command can be used to query the state of the electronic journal Electronic Journal Configuration and Reporting Commands Function Initialize and Set Password ASCII ESC GS l lt Password gt lt 0 gt Hexadecimal 1BH 1DH 49H lt Password gt lt 0x00 gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 29 gt lt 73 gt lt Password gt lt 0 gt IPCL amp El lt Password gt amp EPOS Description This command initializes the electronic journal and sets the password that allows the electronic journal to be erased The password may be up to 14 characters and may c
407. ure to set the paper width in the printer s configuration to agree with the paper being used 58 or 80 mm width 2 For DC powered printers the cash drawer is supplied directly from the DC input supply The cash drawer requirements may affect the allowable range of voltages Page 26 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Specifications and Requirements e Once narrow paper has been used some part of the print head always contacts the platen If 80 mm paper is used after setting up and running 58 mm paper the head or the cutter blade may be worn out Never change the paper width from narrow to wide 58 to 80 mm once you set the paper width to narrow 58 mm Media Specifications Receipt Paper Paper feed method Paper feed pitch Paper width Roll diameter Paper thickness Roll paper core Roll footage Friction feed Default 1 8 inch 80 mm 79 5 0 5 mm 3 13 0 02 inches 58 mm 57 5 0 5 2 26 0 02 inches 101 6 mm 4 0 inches Max 0 06 to 0 09 mm 00225 to 0035 inches Inside diameter 445 to 635 inches Outside diameter 730 to 860 inches 400 feet min Thermal Paper Grades Monochrome Effective 87 5 C Optimum 100 5 C Effective 83 5 C Optimum 88 5 C Paper Kanzaki P 300 Kanzaki P 310 Appleton Alpha 400 2 3 Manufacturer Basis Weight 14 1 Ibs 14 2 Ibs 14 5 Ibs Caliper 00225 mils 00226 mils 00235 inches Image
408. utter bit 4 Printer supports partial cuts bit5 0 bit 6 1 always bit 7 0 always Percentage of ink remaining on Head 1 0 100 40 28H Percentage of ink remaining on Head 2 0 100 40 28H Current multi head alignment 0 16 8 0 offset Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes ENQ lt 21 gt Inquire printer ID ASCII ENQ lt 21 gt Hexadecimal 05H 15H Decimal lt 5 gt lt 21 gt Function The ENQ lt 21 gt command returns the printer IEEE 1284 ID string Response ACK lt 21 gt lt n gt ID string Where lt 21 gt is the echo of the command ID and lt n gt is the number of return bytes in the ID string ID string is the IEEE ID return string which follows MFG Ithaca Periph CMD PJ1000CL IPCL CLS PRINTER MDL 1000 PcOS DES Ithaca Peripherals iTherm 280 REV PE1200 01 16 OPTS 20xy Where x is a bit field defined as follows bit O 1 Red paper support bit 1 1 Green paper support bit 2 1 Blue paper support bit 3 Always 0 bit 4 Always 1 bit 5 Always 1 bit 6 Always 0 bit 7 Always 0 The y is a bit field defined as follows bit 0 0 bit 1 Knife is installed bit 2 0 bit 3 Always 0 bit 4 Always 1 bit 5 Always 1 bit 6 Always 0 bit 7 Always 0 28 07764 Rev C Page 177 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide ENQ lt 22 gt ASCII Inquire Error status ENQ lt 22 gt Hexadecimal 05H 17H Dec
409. vailable Set DTR or transmit XON Page 312 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Communications When the printer is on the print controller looks for data If there is data it processes it Flow control is done when the data is taken from the buffer and the amount of data in the buffer is less than a prescribed amount The low watermark is set based on the expected environment The iTherm 280 Printer sets the low watermark at half the buffer size or 1024 characters whichever is smaller The low watermark gives the host application time to get more data to the printer before the printer uses up what it has When XON XOFF protocol is implemented it is possible for the host to miss an XON or an XOFF To prevent this from causing a communication lockup the printer sends an XOFF for every character received after the high watermark is reached If the printer detects that the serial data link is inactive it sends out an XON about every two seconds When the printer cover is opened an XOFF is sent An XOFF is sent even when the internal data buffer is past the high watermark and is done to allow the host to know that the printer is not ready Printer Buffer Size The size of the iTherm 280 buffer is configurable which allows an application to control how far ahead of the printer it can get before being asked to wait The buffer size can be set from 256 to 6144 bytes not including the 64 character high speed b
410. ve new graphic with this name command and the graphics information This file can then be sent to the printer and the graphic will be saved in the printer Note If the target printer does not have enough room for the graphic information to be stored the graphic will not be stored 28 07764 Rev C Page 249 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide ITherm 280 Color Graphics How universal graphics is done The printer extends all the emulations to support two additional escape sequences and adds limited IPCL support IPCL Ithaca Printer Control Language is an ASCII method of sending printer commands to the printer In Ithaca PCOS emulation IPCL command support is extensive In other emulations IPCL support is limited to the following commands amp CR Insert a CR amp LF Insert a LF amp YUAXXX Feed xxx paper steps and cycle auto cutter amp CLX Select Color where x 0 for the Primary or 1 2 3 for secondary amp UBName amp Begin defining universal graphic Name amp UGName amp End the definition of Name amp URName amp Run print universal graphic Name amp UDName amp Remove universal graphic Name from nonvolatile memory amp USName amp Flag universal graphic Name to be run when the printer is turned on amp UFALL amp Erase all stored universal graphics Erases all User Store amp UQ amp Prints a directory of the universal graphics currently stored in the printer amp UTX Changes the Name termination
411. will define sub pages however is intended to set the initial page size Where lt XO_ gt lt XOx gt the x direction offset Min 0 lt YO gt lt YOu gt the y direction offset Min 0 lt W_ gt lt W 4 gt the width in dots Max 576 lt H_ gt lt H gt the height in dots Max 3000 This command should alwavs be sent before or immediatelv after select page mode command and will define the initial page size This command differs from the Set Print Area in Page Mode command in that it does not allow the page to be shortened The complete page is printed even if it is not used Cut to print offset 0 7 inor 18mm Start of page definition Max width is 576 dots End of page definition Bottom most print data Cut point after is not printed definition Figure 13 Defined Page mode printed area 28 07764 Rev C Page 119 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Function Set Print Area in Page Mode Legacy Support Command ASCII ESC u lt OL gt lt Op gt lt W gt lt Wp gt lt HipeHp Hexadecimal 1BH 75H lt O gt lt Oy gt lt W gt lt Wy gt lt HL gt lt Hp gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 117 gt lt O gt lt Oy gt lt W i gt lt Wy gt lt HL gt lt Hp gt IPCL amp PS lt 0000 gt lt WWWWs lt HHHH gt EPOS ESC W Description This command Sets the position and size of the printing initial area in page mode and sub pages Where lt O gt lt Oy gt the y direction offset Default 0 lt W_ gt lt W gt the width in do
412. will set the line spacing in points where one point is defined as 1 72 of an inch If d 0 variable spacing is selected NOTE This is the minimum spacing If the character height setting requires a larger spacing the character height will override this setting Function Set minimum Line Spacing in 1 Points All ASCII ESC v lt d gt Hexadecimal 1BH 2BH 76H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 43 gt lt 118 gt Range d 0 16 255 The ESC v command will set the line spacing in 1 4 points where 1 4 point is defined as 1 288 of an inch ASCII ESC v lt d gt Hexadecimal 1BH 2BH 76H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 43 gt lt 118 gt Range d 0 16 255 If d 0 variable spacing is selected Page 278 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide ITherm 280 Unicode and Fonts NOTE This is the minimum spacing If the character height setting requires a larger spacing the character height will override this setting Function Set stroke font brush size All ASCII ESC B lt w gt Hexadecimal 1BH 2BH 42H Decimal lt 27 gt lt 43 gt lt 66 gt Range w 0 6 200 Description The ESC B command will set brush stroke percentage for stroke fonts If the brush size is set to zero the font design stroke width will be used Values from 6 to 200 represent 0 4 to 12 of the em width of the font The default for most fonts is about 3 The ITherm 280 using the GB18030 font supplied by TransAct Technologies produces the
413. x 12 draft n 10 Enter Text right to left and Rotate 270 Single pass 12 x 12 draft n 11 Enter Text right to left and Rotate 90 Two pass 12 x 12 draft or 12 x 14 large draft n 12 Enter Text right to left and Rotate 270 Two pass 12 x 12 draft or 12 x 14 large draft In Modes 1 and 2 12 x 12 draft font is rotated 90 or 270 and printed ina single pass Double wide and double high fonts are available However because the font is rotated double wide makes the characters taller and double high makes the characters wider Modes 1 and 2 distort the font but they produce the fastest rotated print Modes 5 and 6 rotate the 12 x 12 draft or 12 x 14 large draft and maintain the aspect ratio of the fonts Modes 5 and 6 require two passes by the print cartridge which slows the print time considerably The font that is rotated by Mode 5 or 6 is selected by the ESC lt n gt command lt n gt may be zero or one NLQ fonts cannot be rotated 90 or 270 The current pitch sets the spacing between lines If eight characters per inch cpi is set the printer produces the equivalent of eight lines per inch lpi rotated print Modes 8 12 allow right to left text entry Note right to left text entry is not supported in formatted rotated print mode See the ESC r command for formatted rotated print Rev C Page 97 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Character Sets and Code Pages The iTherm 280 Printer is prim
414. x2018 LEFT SINGLE QUOTATION MARK 0xD3 0x00D3 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH ACUTE 0x92 0x2019 RIGHT SINGLE QUOTATION MARK 0xD4 0x00D4 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH 0x93 0x201C LEFT DOUBLE QUOTATION MARK CIRCUMFLEX 0x94 0x201D RIGHT DOUBLE QUOTATION MARK 0xD5 0x00D5 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH TILDE 0x95 0x2022 BULLET 0xD6 0x00D6 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH 0x96 0x2013 EN DASH DIAERESIS 0x97 0x2014 EM DASH 0xD7 0x00D7 MULTIPLICATION SIGN 0x98 0x02DC SMALL TILDE 0xD8 0x00D8 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER O WITH STROKE 0x99 0x2122 TRADE MARK SIGN 0xD9 0x00D9 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH GRAVE 0x9A 0x0161 LATIN SMALL LETTER S WITH CARON OxDA 0x00DA LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH ACUTE 0x9B 0x203A SINGLE RIGHT POINTING ANGLE 0xDB 0x00DB LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH QUOTATION MARK CIRCUMFLEX 0x9C 0x0153 LATIN SMALL LIGATURE OE OxDC 0x00DC LATIN CAPITAL LETTER U WITH 0x9D 0x0000 DIAERESIS Ox9E 0x017E LATIN SMALL LETTER Z WITH CARON OxDD 0x00DD LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Y WITH ACUTE Ox9F 0x0178 LATIN CAPITAL LETTER Y WITH OxDE Ox00DE LATIN CAPITAL LETTER THORN DIAERESIS OxDF Ox00DF LATIN SMALL LETTER SHARP S OxA0 0x00A0 NO BREAK SPACE 0xE0 0x00E0 LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH GRAVE OxA1 Ox00A1 INVERTED EXCLAMATION MARK OxE1 Ox00E1 LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH ACUTE OxA2 Ox00A2 CENT SIGN OxE2 Ox00E2 LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH OxA3 0x00A3 POUND SIGN CIRCUMFLEX 0xA4 0x00A4 CURRENCY SIGN 0xE3 0x00E3 LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH TILDE OxA5 0x00A5 VEN SIGN OxE4 Ox00E4 LATIN SMALL LETTER A WITH D
415. xadecimal 05H 0EH Decimal lt 5 gt lt 14 gt Function Error status Response ACK lt 14 gt 06H OEH No mechanical errors NAK lt 14 gt 15H OEH Mechanical error has occurred Use ENQ lt 22 gt to identify the error Note For this status request to function the Buffer Full Only off line option should be selected Page 174 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes ENQ lt 15 gt ASCII Inquire printer state ENQ lt 15 gt Hexadecimal 05H 11H Decimal Function Note Response Where lt n gt lt I gt lt fo gt 28 07764 lt 5 gt lt 15 gt The ENQ lt 15 gt command returns the current printer state ENQ lt 17 gt also returns the current printer state but it should not be used as it conflicts with XON XOFF flow control ACK lt 15 gt lt n gt lt gt lt I gt lt 15 gt is the echo of the command ID is the number of return bytes 40 28H to prevent confusion with XON XOFF bit 0 1 always bit 1 Cover is closed bit 2 Receipt paper is out bit3 0 bit 4 Printer is waiting in an error mode Use ENQ lt 22 gt to identify the specific error and ENQ lt 10 gt to recover bit5 0 bit 6 1 always bit 7 0 always bit 0 5 0 always bit 6 1 always bit 7 0 always Note For this status request to function the Buffer Full Only off line option should be selected Rev C Page 175 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer
416. y be between 1 and 8 The default is 3 Note A value of 1 may result in barcodes that are unreadable with some readers Rev C Page 147 Programming Codes iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Function Set bar code justification human readable interpretation HRI character print mode and print direction ASCII ESC EM J lt n gt Hexadecimal 1BH 19H 4AH lt n gt Decimal lt 27 gt lt 25 gt lt 74 gt lt n gt IPCL amp BJ lt m gt AM EPOS none The power on default is center justified with HRI characters not printed Description The ESC EM J lt n gt command selects the operation of the bar code justification HRI characters and print direction Where n bits n IPCL 76543210 XX Justified 0 00 00 Left 1 01 01 Center 2 02 10 Right ix HRI characters 0 00 00 Not printed 16 16 0l Printed above the bar code 32 32 10 Printed below the bar code 48 48 11 Printed above and below the bar code x Vertical print mode Page mode may work better 0 00 0 Bar code printed in horizontal direction default 64 64 100 Bar code printed in vertical direction Note 1 The ESC EM J lt n gt command only affects bar code printing Note 2 HRI is not available in vertical print mode You may print normal barcodes in page mode which will provide for HRI and significantly longer barcodes Page 148 Rev C 28 07764
417. ycle reset will return to the initial configuration Data Pass through The iTherm 280 Printer supports data pass through sometimes referred to as display pass through Data pass through is activated by the print suppress command with the pass through bit set In pass through mode the printer can be requested to transmit any data that it receives When this is the case the printers inquire commands are active but of little use Typically the printer s transmit data is connected to the next device in line Inquire commands have no data path back to the host If pass through is to be used it is a good idea to deactivate the inquire commands Use ESC y lt 6 gt Before pass through data can be used it must be activated in the configuration menu which is the third selection in the print suppress pass option All data after but not including the print suppress command is pass through When deactivated the print suppress command is again not pass through During pass through the multi drop commands are active if configured The printer will act upon a multi drop control command found in the pass through data If the printer is deselected during pass through it stops passing on the data When the printer is re addressed data pass through is active Multi drop Configuration The iTherm 280 Printer supports a multi drop configuration where up to three printers can be connected in parallel Each printer has a different address A
418. ze of the bar code Page 222 Rev C 28 07764 iTherm 280 Programmer s Guide Programming Codes Mechanism Control Commands Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description Function ASCII Hexadecimal Decimal Description 28 07764 Select cut mode and cut paper GS V lt m gt lt n gt 1DH 56H lt m gt lt n gt lt 29 gt lt 86 gt lt m gt lt n gt When lt m gt 1 or 49 lt n gt is not used and a partial cut is performed When lt m gt 66 GS V lt m gt lt n gt executes a partial cut one point left uncut after paper is fed cutting position lt n gt x approximately 1 144 inch When using the command there is a gap between the auto cutter position and the print position The GS V lt m gt lt n gt command is only effective when input at the beginning of a line The GS V lt m gt lt n gt command executes paper feeding to the manual cutting position Partial knife cut ESC i 1BH 69H lt 27 gt lt 105 gt The ESC i command performs a partial knife cut Perform a partial knife cut ESC m 1BH 6DH lt 27 gt lt 109 gt The ESC m command performs a partial knife cut Sound buzzer BEL 07H lt 07 gt The BEL command sounds the internal buzzer if equipped Sound buzzer ESC BEL 1B

TransAct Technologies ITHERM 280 User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents